JP7426574B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

Regarding gaming machines.

In a reel-type gaming machine (slot machine), a game starts when a game start instruction device (start lever) is operated after a predetermined number of game medals are inserted, and multiple symbols are arranged on the outer periphery. The reels in multiple rows rotate, and as a result of stopping the reels using the reel stop device (stop button) to stop the rotation, a predetermined symbol appears on the active line. When the combinations (for example, winning combinations such as "777") are lined up, a special gaming state (a gaming state in which the lottery probability of small winning combinations, etc. is higher than in the normal state) has a higher profit state for the player than the normal gaming state. The most common type is a transition to . Here, in the reel-type gaming machine, in addition to such basic games, various performances are performed to improve the overall interest.
In addition, when the game medals are paid out, a payout sound is output, the number of acquired medals is displayed, and a back lamp effect is performed so that it can be recognized that the game medals have been properly paid out.

JP 2019-217068 Publication

It is desired to improve the performance of this type of gaming machine.

Enables main processing and timer interrupt processing,
The main process has an interrupt prohibition period from the instruction to disable interrupts to the instruction to enable interrupts.
The main process has multiple interrupt prohibition periods as interrupt prohibition periods,
Among multiple interrupt prohibition periods, when the designed processing time of the interrupt prohibition period, which is the longest in design, is S, and the period of timer interrupt processing is T, Satisfy T>S,
It is characterized by satisfying T÷2>U, where U is the designed processing time of timer interrupt processing from the start of timer interrupt processing to the end of timer interrupt processing, and T is the cycle time of timer interrupt processing. Game machine.

According to the present invention, the performance of a gaming machine can be improved.

It is a diagram showing a perspective view of the outside of the housing of the slot machine PS1. It is a figure showing the back side of front panel PS2. It is a figure showing the inner surface of cabinet PS3. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing functional blocks. 3 is a flowchart showing program start processing. It is a flowchart which shows power-off processing. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating power-off recovery processing. It is a flowchart showing the main game progress. It is a flowchart which shows setting change processing. It is a flow chart which shows advantageous section clear counter management processing. It is a figure explaining the reel arrangement in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the pattern combination in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the pattern combination in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the pattern combination in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the pattern combination in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the pattern combination in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the pattern combination in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the condition device in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the internal lottery number in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the internal lottery number in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the internal lottery number in this embodiment. This is an example of a push button effect. It is an example of the display mode of the display device when a push button effect is executed. This is an example of a step-up notice in a normal performance state. This is an example of a dialogue preview in a normal production state. This is an example of a dialogue preview during a continuous performance. This is an example of a production switch image in a situation where the front panel PS2 is open. This is an example of a production switch image on the demo screen. This is an example of a production switch image on the demo screen. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a case where no input operation is performed using the MAX bet switch after the end of the payout process. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a case where a placing operation is performed using the MAX bet switch after the end of the payout process. It is a figure explaining the case where the payment operation by the payment switch is performed after the end of the payout process. It is a diagram illustrating a case where game medals are not inserted after the settlement process is completed. It is a diagram illustrating a case where game medals are inserted after the settlement process is completed. It is a figure explaining the case where payout is performed normally. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a case where dispensing is not performed normally (when a hopper empty error occurs). It is a figure explaining the case where dispensing is not performed normally (when a hopper retention error occurs). It is a figure showing an example of a display screen when payout is performed normally. It is a figure showing an example of a display screen when payout is not performed normally (when a hopper empty error occurs). It is a figure showing an example of a display screen when dispensing is not performed normally (when a hopper retention error occurs). FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of a program showing interrupt prohibition and interrupt permission. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a time chart of an 8-bit counter and timer interrupt processing. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the execution timing of timer interrupt processing. It is a figure which shows an example of a stage change performance. It is a diagram showing an example of a first continuous performance. It is a figure which shows an example of the 2nd continuous performance. It is a figure which shows an example of the case where a telop is displayed in continuous production. It is a figure which shows an example of the flow until a NEXT image is displayed in continuous production. It is a figure which shows an example of the aspect of a push order navigation image. It is a figure which shows an example when the push order navigation image is displayed on a liquid crystal. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of a case where a predetermined error occurs while displaying a push order navigation image. This is a time chart when no input operation is performed using the MAX bet switch after the end of the payout process based on winning combinations. It is a time chart when a placing operation is performed using the MAX bet switch after the end of the payout process based on the winning combination of the push order. This is a time chart when no input operation is performed using the MAX bet switch after the end of the payout process based on the winning of the cherry winning combination. It is a time chart when the input operation using the MAX bet switch is performed after the end of the payout process based on the winning of the cherry combination. This is a time chart when game medals are not inserted after the automatic insertion process based on a winning replay combination is completed. It is a time chart when game medals are inserted after the automatic insertion process based on a winning replay combination is completed. It is a time chart when a settlement operation is performed using the settlement switch after the end of the payout process based on the winning combination of the push order. It is a time chart when the settlement operation using the settlement switch is performed after the automatic insertion process based on the winning of the replay combination is completed. This is a time chart when the payout is not performed normally after winning the cherry winning combination (when a hopper empty error occurs). It is a time chart when the payout is not performed normally after winning the cherry winning combination (when a hopper retention error occurs). It is a diagram showing a reel arrangement used when explaining a correct answer operation challenge effect. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a list of condition devices used when explaining a correct answer operation challenge performance. It is a diagram showing a list of symbol combinations used when explaining the correct operation challenge effect. It is a diagram showing a list of symbol combinations used when explaining the correct operation challenge effect. It is a diagram showing the correspondence between condition devices and symbol combinations used when explaining the correct answer operation challenge performance. It is a diagram showing the correspondence between condition devices and symbol combinations used when explaining the correct answer operation challenge effect. It is a diagram showing the correspondence between condition devices and symbol combinations used when explaining the correct answer operation challenge performance. It is a figure showing an example of a game screen when set to normal mode and when set to distribution mode. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing each area stored in the main control ROM. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an interrupt initial setting area and automatic allocation according to priorities of the interrupt initial setting area. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing the relationship between interrupt vector addresses for power-on processing and timer interrupt processing. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing the relationship between interrupt vector addresses of power-on processing and timer interrupt processing and other programs.

<Explanation of terms>
“Medals (number of medals),” “gaming media (number of gaming media),” and “gaming value” are synonymous. "Bet", "BET", and "insertion" regarding game media are synonymous, and each is an act of betting on game media. When representing a hexadecimal value, it is written as "0x〇〇" or "〇〇h", and if there is no special description before or after the number, it is represented in decimal. A "reel" is sometimes referred to as a "reel", and both terms have the same meaning. The "storage means" may be referred to as "RWM,""RAM," or "storage area," and these terms have the same meaning. "Award" used in "award of game media" or "award of points," etc., is sometimes referred to as "payout," and both terms have the same meaning. The "setting/reset switch" is sometimes referred to as a "setting change switch" or "reset switch" depending on its function, but in both cases they refer to the same switch. Note that the "setting change switch" and the "reset switch" may be provided as different switches. If a small role with many payouts or a small role with few payouts is stopped depending on the operation mode, the small role with many payouts is called Takame (also the same meaning as Takame Bell and Takame small role), and the small role with few payouts is called ``Takame''. It is sometimes called ``me'' (also synonymous with ``anme bell'' and ``anme koyaku''). Incidentally, if the symbol combination without payout is stopped at this time, it may be referred to as a missed bet (same meaning as a missed bet).

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention (hereinafter referred to as the present embodiments) will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

<Description of slot machine PS1>
The components of the slot machine PS1 according to the present embodiment will be explained based on FIGS. 1 to 3.

The slot machine PS1 can be roughly divided into the front panel PS2 side and the cabinet PS3 side with necessary parts and boards attached respectively. The front panel PS2 of the slot machine PS1 and the side sides of the cabinet PS3 are connected by a hinge device and a locking device, and when a lock key is inserted into the locking device provided on the front panel PS2 and rotated in a specific direction, The locking device side can be left open. In other words, the front panel PS2 functions as a door for the cabinet PS3.

<Front panel PS2>
The front panel PS2 (also referred to as front door PS2, front door PS2, or front door PS2) is a plate-shaped member with a design, and on the front side (player side) there is a middle panel (display window 4). , operation instruction lamp 24, etc.), operation panel 11 (including bet number display lamp 25, credit number display 26, acquired number display 27, etc.), lower panel 5 (also referred to as lower panel 5), upper part or both sides A display lamp, etc. is provided, and the back side includes a medal selector 34 (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as a "selector"), a display device 32, a sub-control board 1000, various boards, etc., and a setting display LED (hereinafter, a setting value display). (sometimes referred to as an LED, a setting indicator, a setting value indicator, a setting display device, a setting value display device) is provided.

<Display window 4>
The display window 4 is an area provided on the front panel PS2, and the symbols drawn on the reels are visible when the front panel PS2 is closed. The symbols printed on the outer peripheral surface of each reel tape fixed to the reel rim portions of the left reel 8a, middle reel 8b, and right reel 8c are configured to be visible through the display window 4 from the front side (player side). has been done. When the reels are stopped, three consecutive symbols out of the 21 symbols (20, 16, etc. may be freely designed depending on the specifications) are visible. That is, from the display window 4, a total of 9 symbols (3 [symbols] x 3 [reels]) are visible. Here, among the stop positions where the left reel 8a, middle reel 8b, and right reel 8c each stop three symbols, the uppermost stop position is the upper stage, the center stop position is the middle stage, and the lowermost stop position is the lower stage. shall be.

<Valid line>
The active line is a symbol combination line that is subject to winning determination processing (described later) when the left reel 8a, middle reel 8b, and right reel 8c stop. The active line in this embodiment is visible from the display window 4 and is constituted by a symbol combination line (middle horizontal line) passing through the middle of each reel. When it is determined by the winning determination process that the symbol combination that has stopped on the active line corresponds to any of the winning combinations, processing is performed in accordance with the symbol combination that has stopped. For example, when it is determined that a symbol combination corresponding to a small winning combination such as a bell has stopped, the payout process of game medals (hereinafter sometimes referred to as medals, game media, or game value) and the credit addition process are executed. The automatic bet process is executed, and when it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to the replay has stopped, the automatic bet process is executed.

In addition, depending on the slot machine PS1, the effective lines may be set to 5 lines: an upper horizontal line, a middle horizontal line, a lower horizontal line, an upward line to the right, and a downward line to the right. Upper row, right reel 8c lower row), approximately valley-shaped (left reel 8a upper row, middle reel 8b lower row, right reel 8c upper row), approximately L-shaped (left reel 8a upper row, middle reel 8b lower row, right reel 8c lower row). It can be freely designed according to the specifications of the slot machine PS1, such as setting six lines or more, or setting the effective line to change depending on the number of bets. Furthermore, a straight line other than the valid line may be referred to as an invalid line.

<Operation instruction lamp 24>
The operation instruction lamp 24 is provided around the display window 4, and instructs the player to operate the stop switch 13 (described later) when the left reel 8a, middle reel 8b, and right reel 8c are rotating. It indicates the order. That is, when the left operation instruction lamp 24a is lit (the middle operation instruction lamp 24b and the right operation instruction lamp 24c are off), it indicates that the left stop switch 13a should be operated, and the middle operation instruction lamp 24b is lit. (The left operation instruction lamp 24a and the right operation instruction lamp 24c are off) indicates that the middle stop switch 13b should be operated, and the right operation instruction lamp 24c is lit (the left operation instruction lamp 24a and the middle operation instruction lamp 24c are turned off). 24b) indicates that the right stop switch 13c should be operated.

<Number of bets display lamp 25>
The bet number display lamp 25 (also referred to as the bet number display lamp 25, the bet number display lamp 25, the bet number display lamp 25, and the bet number display lamp 25) is provided on the operation panel 11, and is provided on the operation panel 11. It has a function to display the number of sheets. It also includes a 1-bed lamp 25a (not shown), a 2-bed lamp 25b (not shown), and a 3-bed lamp 25c (not shown). When one medal is bet, the 1 bet lamp 25a lights up, when a total of 2 medals are bet, the 1 bet lamp 25a and 2 bet lamp 25b are lit, and when a total of 3 medals are bet, the 1 bet lamp 25a lights up. Then, the 2-bet lamp 25b and the 3-bet lamp 25c are turned on. Although not shown, after the symbol combination related to the replay is displayed, when the automatic bet process is executed, the bet number display lamp 25 corresponding to the number of bets used in the game in which the replay was won is lit. At the same time, the replay lamp is turned on. Note that the lighting timing of the bet number display lamp 25 and the lighting timing of the replay lamp may be at the same time, or it may be configured such that either one is lit first.

<Number of credits display 26>
The credit number display 26 is provided on the operation panel 11, and includes a segment display 26a (not shown), which mainly displays the upper digits of the credit number, and is composed of 7 segments and dot points (DP). It mainly consists of a segment display 26b (not shown) that mainly displays the lower digits of the number of credits, which is composed of segments and dot points (DP). Note that the number of credits refers to the number of medals credited (electrically stored) in the slot machine PS1, and up to 50 medals can be stored. Furthermore, when an error is detected and the normal game cannot proceed, a display regarding the error may be displayed.

<Obtained number of coins display 27>
The acquisition number display 27 is provided on the operation panel 11, and includes a segment display 27a (not shown) that mainly displays the upper digits of the acquisition number, which is composed of 7 segments and dot points (DP); It mainly consists of a segment display 27b (not shown) which mainly displays the lower digits of the number of acquired coins, which is composed of 7 segments and dot points (DP). Note that the number of medals acquired means the number of medals (including those stored in the credit number display 26) that are paid out to the player according to the result of the game in the slot machine PS1. Further, when an error is detected and the normal game cannot proceed, a display regarding the error may be displayed.

The number of credits display 26 and the number of earned coins display 27 display information on the segment displays 26a, 26b, 27a, and 27b, as well as information on the number of credits and the number of earned coins depending on whether the DP is lit or not. It is also possible to display different information. For example, information indicating that the vehicle is staying in an advantageous section (described later) or information indicating that a predetermined external signal is being output can be notified by lighting the DP of one of the segment indicators. Can be mentioned. Further, it may have the ability to notify the pressing order using the upper digit display section and the lower digit display section of the acquired number display 27. When the obtained number display 27 is used to notify the pressing order, the obtained number display 27 may be referred to as an instruction monitor.

<Operation panel 11>
The operation panel 11 is provided approximately at the center of the front panel PS2. The operation panel 11 is provided in a stepped manner with a substantially horizontal horizontal part and a vertical part extending substantially vertically downward from the tip of the horizontal part, and the vertical part is provided with a start switch 12 and a stop switch 13, which will be described later. The horizontal part includes a medal slot 17 (described later), a plurality of bet switches (MAX bet switch 18, 1 bet switch 19), a sub switch 20, a sub cross key switch 21, an eject switch 22, and a settlement switch (see figure). (not shown) and a production switch (not shown).

<Start switch 12>
A start switch (also referred to as a start lever) 12 is provided on a vertical portion of the operation panel 11. It consists of a lever-shaped operation part, and the start switch sensor is ON when not operated, and when the start switch sensor is OFF when operated, it is determined that the start switch has been operated. The operation of the start switch 12 becomes valid when the number of bets reaches a specified number, and when the operation of the start switch 12 is accepted, an internal lottery process, a process related to an instruction function, a reel rotation process, etc. are executed. In addition, in this embodiment, the input signal is made low active, so if the start switch sensor is ON when not operated, the start switch input signal is OFF, and when the start switch sensor is operated, it changes from ON to OFF. When this happens, the start switch input signal is turned ON. The present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that the start switch input signal is turned on when the start switch sensor is turned on. In other words, the specified number refers to the number of bets required to start the game.

Hereinafter, when we simply say "the start switch is ON" or "the start switch is operated", it means that the start switch sensor has changed from ON to OFF, and the start switch input signal has changed from OFF to ON. represents what has become.

<Stop switch 13>
The stop switch 13 is provided on the operation panel 11. In this embodiment, the left reel 8a corresponds to the left stop switch 13a, the middle reel 8b corresponds to the middle stop switch 13b, and the right reel 8c corresponds to the right stop switch 13c. Furthermore, when the stop switch 13 can be operated, it is suggested that the stop switch 13 is effective by changing the color of the lamp provided on the main body of the stop switch 13 or the lamps around it. For example, when the stop switch 13 can be operated, it lights up in blue, and when it cannot be operated, it lights up in red. Further, for example, the light may be turned on when the stop switch 13 can be operated, and turned off when the stop switch 13 cannot be operated.

<Medal slot 17>
The medal slot 17 is provided on the operation panel 11. It has an opening for inserting medals into the medal slot, and restricts the insertion of medals larger than the standard size. Although a plurality of types of medal slots 17 are manufactured according to the standard sizes of multiple types of medals, the mounting standards for the various medal slots 17 are determined so that the various medal slots 17 can be commonly attached to the operation panel 11. are the same.

Regarding the input of game media, the game media is not limited to the above-mentioned medals, but includes, for example, game balls used in pachinko gaming machines (so-called parrots), or game media information stored in electrical storage media such as magnetic cards and flash memory. may be input into a gaming machine, and the number of bets may be set or added when a prize is won based on the input gaming media information.

<Bet switch (MAX bet switch 18, 1 bet switch 19)>
The bet switch is provided on the operation panel 11. When the bet switch is operated when there are stored medals in the credits, a bet process is executed and a process for setting the number of bets, which is equivalent to the act of inserting medals into the medal slot 17, is performed. However, even if the bet switch is operated when no medals are stored in the credits, the bet process will be invalidated (the bet switch operation will not be accepted). The MAX bet switch 18 is composed of a pressed part operated by the player, a detection part that detects the operation of the pressed part, and a light emitting part (also referred to as a MAX bet lamp) that lights up the pressed part. The switch 19 includes a push part operated by the player and a detection part that detects the operation of the push part (the 1-bet switch 19 does not have a light emitting part).

The MAX bet lamp notifies the player that a bet process can be executed when the MAX bet switch is operated, and the MAX bet lamp is lit in a predetermined color or the MAX bet lamp is turned on in a predetermined color. Various modes are possible, such as flashing at regular intervals. On the other hand, when the bet process cannot be executed even if the MAX bet switch is operated, it is conceivable to turn on the MAX bet lamp in a specific color or not to turn on the MAX bet lamp.

Additionally, a MAX bet switch 18 that allows you to bet the maximum number of coins (three in this embodiment) set for each slot machine PS1, and a 1 bet switch 19 that allows you to bet one coin are provided. When the operation of the bet switch 18 is accepted, the MAX bet process is executed, and when the operation of the 1 bet switch 19 is accepted, the 1 bet process is executed. The MAX bet process can be executed when the sum of the number of credits and the number of currently bets is 3 or more, and the number of currently bets is less than 3. In a situation where the sum of the number of bets currently being bet is less than 3 (in other words, a situation where the number of bets is still less than 3 even if the MAX bet switch 18 is operated), or in a situation where 3 bets have already been made, It is now impossible to do so. The 1-bet process can be executed in a situation where the number of credits is 1 or more and the number of bets currently placed is less than 3, and cannot be executed in a situation where 3 bets have already been placed.

In addition, the 1-bet switch 19 executes 1-bet processing each time it is operated, and if the 1-bet switch 19 is operated 3 times from a situation where no bet has been placed, it becomes a 3-bet, and the 1-bet switch 19 is operated 3 times. This corresponds to one operation of the MAX bet switch 18.

In addition, although the embodiment has been described in which the 1-bet switch 19 is invalid in a situation where 3 bets have been placed, if the 1-bet switch 19 is operated once in a situation where 3 bets have been placed, the state becomes 1 bet and the credit is It may be configured so that two tickets are returned.

Further, although the embodiment has been described in which the MAX bet process executed by operating the MAX bet switch 18 is not executed in a situation where the number of bets is less than 3, it is also possible to consider a process in which the maximum number of bets that can be made at present is bet. In other words, if the MAX bet switch 18 is operated in a situation where no bet has been placed and the number of credits is 2, a process may be considered in which 2 bets are made.

The maximum number of coins that can be bet may be configured to differ depending on the gaming state, and the maximum number of coins that can be bet is 3 during non-bonus, and 2 during bonus. Good too.

<Sub switch 20>
The sub-switch 20 is provided on the operation panel 11 and includes a push part made of a translucent member for direct operation by a player, and a detection part that detects when the push part is operated. and a sub-switch lamp for illuminating the depressed portion of the sub-switch. This sub-switch 20 is a switch mainly for displaying a menu screen on a display device 32, which will be described later. In addition to the sub-switches 20, sub-cross key switches 21 (upper switch, lower switch, left switch, right switch) and performance switches (operated using instructions during the game) are used as input means managed by the sub-control board 1000. switch) is provided. Further, the sub-switch 20 can also function as a trigger for activating an interlocking system with a mobile terminal (hereinafter also referred to as a mobile interlocking system), which will be described later. Although the sub-switch 20 is used for the menu display function and the production switch is used for operation during the game, they may be used as a common switch.

The menu screen displays winning configuration items, reel arrangement items, volume adjustment items, light intensity adjustment items, and mobile interlock system related items, and by operating the upper switch or lower switch of the sub-cross key switch 21, the items The selected cursor is controlled to move up and down. Further, when the sub-switch 20 is operated while the cursor is placed on any of the items, details of that item are displayed. For example, if the sub switch 20 is operated while the cursor is on the volume adjustment item, the volume adjustment screen is displayed and the volume can be adjusted using the left or right switch of the sub cross key switch 21. There is.

Furthermore, the menu screen can be displayed by operating the sub-switch 20 in a situation where no bet has been placed after the end of the game. The performance status at this time is normal performance, continuous performance, AT performance, or demo screen (a screen that is displayed 60 seconds after the end of the game and displays the manufacturer's name and performance introduction in a moving image). Regardless of the situation, the menu screen is displayed by operating the sub-switch 20. However, the embodiment is not limited to this embodiment, and the menu screen may not be displayed even if the sub-switch 20 is operated during continuous presentation or AT presentation.

<Switch for production>
The performance switch is provided on the operation panel 11, and includes a push part made of a translucent member for direct operation by the player, and a detection part that detects when the push part is operated. and a production switch lamp for illuminating the depressed part of the production switch. When the effect switch is operated in a situation where the operation of the effect switch is valid, the effect based on the operation is executed. For example, when a continuous performance is being executed on the display device (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "liquid crystal") 32, a "success" message indicating that a bonus will be awarded in the final game of the continuous performance is displayed (hereinafter referred to as "success performance"). When displaying either a "failure" display (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a "failure display"), which means that the benefit will not be awarded, the display switch is operated. A possible mode is to display "success" or "failure".

Furthermore, in a situation where the operation of the effect switch is valid, the effect switch lamp lights up to notify the player that the operation of the effect switch is valid. As a lighting mode of the production switch, a mode can be considered in which the lighting is not lit in a situation where the production switch operation is invalid, and the lighting is turned on in a situation where the production switch operation is valid. In addition to the lighting mode in a situation where the operation of the production switch is effective, it may be a mode in which the lights are turned on and off at regular intervals.

In addition, in a situation where the operation of the effect switch is valid, a display imitating the effect switch is displayed on the liquid crystal display to notify that the effect of the effect switch is valid. When a display imitating a production switch is to be displayed on the liquid crystal display, the display is performed based on a command received from the main control means 100. For example, it is conceivable that a display simulating a performance switch may be displayed based on a start switch acceptance command, or a display simulating a performance switch based on a full rotation stop command.

<Payment switch>
The payment switch is provided on the operation panel 11. When operated after the game ends, a process (settlement process) is executed to pay out the number of game media bet on and the number of game media stored in credits to the player. In addition. In this embodiment, when the settlement switch is operated in a situation where a bet has been placed and game media are stored in credits, the betted game media are paid out first and then stored in credits. Although the system is configured to pay out game media stored in credits, the present invention is not limited to this, and processing for paying out game media stored in credits may be executed only when the number of game media bet is 0. In other words, if the settlement switch is operated while a bet is being made, only the betted game media will be paid out, and if the settlement switch is operated again after that, the gaming media stored in the credits will be paid out. It's okay.

<Lower panel 5>
The lower panel 5 is provided below the front panel PS2. It is composed of two sheets of transparent resin put together, a design sheet is sandwiched between the combined resins, and the design sheet is printed to represent the special colors of each slot machine PS1.

<Medal payout port 45>
The medal payout port 45 is provided below the lower panel 5. This is an outlet for discharging medals paid out from a hopper 44 (also referred to as a hopper), which will be described later, to the outside of the slot machine PS1 (receiving tray 28). It also serves as a return port for releasing medals removed from the medal selector 34, which will be described later, out of the slot machine PS1.

<Saucer 28>
The tray 28 is provided below the lower panel 5. It has a generally concave structure to receive and store medals released from the medal payout port 45, and is provided to protrude toward the player so that the player can check the stored medals.

In addition, the tray 28 has other functions of accommodating a cigarette ashtray 29 and a resin sheet on which an association license seal, a patent certificate seal, and a type seal are affixed, and has an opening for displaying the stickers on the player's side. A section 30 is also provided.

<Speaker S>
The speakers S are provided at the top and bottom of the front panel PS2. It is connected to the sub-control board 1000 by a harness (not shown), and the speaker S outputs sound effects matching the performance as well as error sounds and warning sounds to notify that an error has occurred.

<Display device 32>
The display device 32 is provided above the front panel PS2. It is a device that can display images, and various devices such as a liquid crystal display, a plasma display, an organic EL display, and a projector can be used. It is electrically connected to the sub-control board 1000, and in addition to various production images, a game instruction image that instructs the press order and press position of the stop switch 13 during the game (if only the press order is displayed, a press order navigation image) (Also referred to as a press order image, operation order image, or operation order image), if only the press position is displayed, a press navigation image (also referred to as a press position image or operation position image), or a press order and press position is displayed. (Sometimes referred to as an operation mode navigation image (also referred to as an operation mode image) as a general concept of the press order, press position, etc.), an error image when an error occurs, etc. are displayed. Further, depending on the model, there are slot machines PS1 that are not equipped with the display device 32.

<Other performance devices such as dot displays and movable accessories>
Other performance devices such as a dot display and movable accessories are provided at arbitrary positions on the front panel PS2, such as around the display window 4, the middle panel, or the lower panel 5. Other performance devices are electrically connected to the sub-control board 1000, and in addition to various performance images and performance operations, game instruction images and operations that instruct the pressing order and position of the stop switch 13 during the game, and error occurrence. Displays error images and performs operations. Other performance devices are optionally installed depending on the model of the slot machine PS1. Furthermore, various devices such as a liquid crystal display, a plasma display, an organic EL display, a projector, etc. can also be used as other presentation devices. Particularly in a gaming machine that is additionally equipped with a liquid crystal display device, the display device 32 may be referred to as a main display device, and the liquid crystal display device may be referred to as a sub display device. In this case, the main display device has a larger display area than the sub display device.

<Medal selector 34>
The medal selector 34 is located inside the gaming machine on the back side of the front panel PS2, and is provided in a downstream passage below the medal slot 17. The medal selector 34 has a medal counting function that counts the number of medals inserted by the player using a sensor provided on the flow path, a medal removal function that guides the inserted non-standard medals to the receiving tray 28, and a function that controls the number of medals inserted by the player. An eject function that removes medals stuck in the medal selector 34 by operating an eject switch provided at It has a blocker function to exclude water from the downstream passage. Furthermore, if the medals inserted at the time of medal acceptance are genuine medals, the medal selector 34 discharges the medals to the hopper 44 located downstream.

Various sensors in the medal selector include a passage sensor, an input sensor 1, an input sensor 2, and a chute sensor. The passage sensor is a sensor that first detects medals inserted from the medal slot, and is provided to count the number of inserted medals and ejected medals. The input sensor 1 and the input sensor 2 are located downstream of the passage sensor and the blocker, and are used to judge the passage time of the medal passing through the input sensor 1 and the input sensor 2 to determine whether the medal passes normally or abnormally. It is provided. Note that the input sensor 2 is located downstream of the input sensor 1. The chute sensor is located downstream of the input sensor 2, and is provided to count the number of input medals and discharged medals. Since the passage sensor and the chute sensor have overlapping functions, only one of them may be provided.

When the blocker in the medal selector is turned on, the passage of game medals is permitted; when it is turned off, passage of game medals is not permitted. Allowing the passage of game medals means that the game medals inserted from the medal slot are guided to the hopper 44, and disallowing the passage of game medals means that the game medals inserted from the medal slot are guided to the hopper 44. Don't be guided by 44.

The components on the cabinet PS3 side of the slot machine PS1 will be explained below.

<Cabinet PS3>
The cabinet PS3 has a rectangular box shape with an opening on one side, and inside includes a reel unit 6, a hopper 44, an auxiliary tank 46, a setting key switch 37, and a reset/setting switch 38 (hereinafter simply referred to as a "reset switch"). ” or “setting switch”), a power supply device 39, a main control board 100, an external output terminal board 47, and the like.

<Main control board 100>
The main control board 100 is housed in an internal space created when the main control board case body and the main control board case cover are combined, and the main control board case body and main control board case cover cannot be easily opened and closed due to caulking. It is like this (sealed). The main control board 100 is fixed to a main control board case bracket within the cabinet PS3.

<Reel unit 6>
The reel unit 6 mainly includes a reel frame, a left reel 8a, a middle reel 8b, and a right reel 8c. The reel unit 6 is attached to the reel base 7 inside the center of the cabinet PS3 and fixed with a locking member (screw or rivet).

The reels (left reel 8a, middle reel 8b, right reel 8c) consist of a reel base, a reel tape with multiple types of designs attached to the outer periphery of the reel base, and a stepping tape that is pivotally supported on the reel base. It consists of a motor, a reel unit that fixes the stepping motor, and a motor fixing base that is neglected. A different pattern arrangement is drawn on the reel tape for each reel.

When the start switch 12 is operated by the player, the reels are accelerated, and after reaching a constant speed (approximately 80 rotations/minute), timer interrupt processing (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as interrupt processing) is performed once. After maintaining a constant speed rotation state in which the stepping motor moves one step each time it is executed (constant speed rotation), the corresponding reel is stopped in response to the operation of the stop switch 13 by the player, which is determined for each operation reception position. The reel is rotated at a constant speed to the stop position, and after the reel is moved to the stop position, the brake is applied (a four-phase excitation signal is output) to stop the rotation of the reel and end the excitation output.

In addition, an index is provided on the spokes provided at the reel base of each reel, and an index sensor provided on the motor fixed base of each reel detects the index, making it a reference point during each rotation. The position of the symbol (also referred to as the initial symbol) is determined. Note that the number of steps of the stepping motor, which is the driving source of the reel in this embodiment, is 336 steps, and during constant speed rotation, one revolution is performed by 336 timer interrupt processes. Furthermore, every time the timer interrupt process is executed twice during constant speed rotation, the rotation defect detection counter is incremented, and when the counter value of the rotation defect detection counter reaches 180, it is determined that rotation is defective. In other words, if the reel does not rotate once even after executing the timer interrupt process 360 times, it is determined that the rotation is defective. The defective rotation detection counter is set to 0 when the index is detected, so that if the constant speed rotation process is normal, the defective rotation detection counter becomes 0 before reaching 180.

In this embodiment, it is determined whether an index is detected during constant speed processing, and it is not determined whether an index is detected during acceleration processing, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be determined whether or not the index is detected during the acceleration process. According to such a configuration, it is possible to quickly bring the player into a state where the suspension can be accepted.

In addition, a back lamp unit is installed on the motor fixed base of each reel, and it can be turned on after the reel has stopped to emphasize the stopped symbols, or turned on to improve the visibility of the symbols while the reels are rotating. I let them do it.

<Hopper 44>
The hopper 44 is a device that mainly stores medals inserted by players. The hopper 44 is placed in engagement with a rail provided on the bottom plate of the cabinet PS3, and can slide back and forth along the rail. The hopper 44 includes a storage tank section that receives and stores medals guided into the gaming machine from the medal selector 34, a hopper motor that is driven by receiving a drive signal from the hopper drive means, and a storage tank that is pivotally supported by the hopper motor. A rotary disk for arranging the medals in the club, a medal dispensing section equipped with a discharging mechanism for discharging the medals one by one into the receiving tray 28 by rotating the rotary disk, and a medal discharging port for discharging the medals by the medal dispensing section. , and a payout sensor that detects the medals discharged from the medal discharge port.

<Auxiliary tank 46>
The auxiliary tank 46 is configured to be able to store medals, and the medals stored in excess of the capacity of the storage tank section of the hopper 44 are passed through a downwardly sloping rail section provided in the storage tank section. and stored in the auxiliary tank 46. The auxiliary tank 46 has a rectangular box-shaped structure, and when installed in the cabinet PS3, two fullness detection electrodes attached to the cabinet PS3 are connected to the auxiliary tank through a through hole provided on at least one side. When a certain amount of medals inserted from the medal slot are stored, the two fullness detection electrodes become energized via the medals, and the hopper 44 and the auxiliary tank 46 become full. It is determined that Note that the number of full detection electrodes is not limited to two, and the number of full detection electrodes may be changed, such as providing three. Further, the method of fullness detection is not limited to the method using a fullness detection electrode, but may be configured to enable fullness detection by a sensor provided at a predetermined position detecting a medal.

<Setting key switch 37>
The setting key switch 37 is provided in a setting key switch unit provided inside the slot machine PS1 and provided with an opening/closing door on the front side. After opening the front panel PS2, access is possible by opening the opening/closing door of the setting key switch unit. To turn on the setting key switch 37, insert the setting key and rotate it 90 degrees to the right. If the setting key switch 37 is turned on in a state where medals can be accepted, the current setting value can be checked, and if it is determined that the setting key switch 37 is on in the power-off recovery process (also referred to as power-on process) when the power is turned on. Executes setting change processing (described later).

<Power supply device 39>
The power supply device 39 is provided at the lower left of the cabinet PS3 when viewed from the front. The power supply device 39 has a rectangular box-like structure, and is provided with a power switch 40 on the outside and a power supply board that generates a voltage inside. The power supply device 39 is individually connected to a rotating drum device board and a sub-control board 1000 via a harness (not shown), and is further connected from the rotating drum device board to the main control board 100 via a harness. Power is supplied to the control board 100.

When the power switch 40 is turned on, the power supply device 39 receives power from outside the slot machine PS1, generates respective predetermined voltages, and supplies predetermined voltages to the main control board 100 and the sub-control board 1000, respectively. The slot machine PS1 is configured to take in voltage, and is configured not to take in power from outside the slot machine PS1 when the power switch 40 is turned off.

<External output terminal board 47>
The external output terminal board 47 (also referred to as the external centralized terminal board 47) is generally installed inside the cabinet PS3 of the slot machine PS1, and is used to output signals related to game results output from the main control board 100 in a predetermined format. The signal is converted into a signal and transmitted to the outside of the slot machine PS1. The contents of the game results include the number of coins inserted, the number of coins paid out, the number of bonuses (the number of big bonuses, the number of regular bonuses), the door open signal, etc. Other conditions for transmitting a signal to the outside are when the main control board 100 controls, such as when the AT state is entered, when a specific symbol combination is displayed, when the value of a counter related to the game reaches a predetermined value, etc. settings can be made based on predetermined information.

<Functional block diagram>
A functional block diagram of the slot machine PS1 according to the present embodiment will be described based on FIG. 4.

<Main control board 100>
The slot machine PS1 of this embodiment includes a main control board 100 (also referred to as main control means 100, main control board 100, or main control means 100) that controls the general flow of games, and a sub-control board 1000 (sub-control means 1000). , sub-control board 1000, sub-control means 1000), door relay board (also called central display board), drum device board, reset/setting switch 38, setting key switch, etc. , making data communication possible. However, bidirectional communication between the main control board 100 and the sub control board 1000 is disabled, and data communication is enabled by unidirectional communication from the main control board 100 to the sub control board 1000.

A main control chip is mounted on the main control board 100. The main control chip includes a main control CPU, main control ROM, main control RAM, etc., which can communicate data with each other via a bus. Further, the main control chip has a main control built-in register, and the main control built-in register and the main control CPU can communicate data with each other via a bus. Furthermore, the main control chip includes general-purpose registers (for example, A register, B register, C register, D register, E register, H register, L register) that the main control CPU can use for calculations, and call instructions ( For example, a PC register that stores the program (return address) after a return instruction (for example, RET instruction) after executing a program by a CALL instruction), an interrupt register (for example, IFF1 register, IFF2 register).

Under the control of the main control chip, appropriate data communication is carried out to various boards, such as role lottery (also referred to as internal lottery), reel drive control (also referred to as reel control), and payout control. In addition, for the sub control board 1000, as a result of the internal lottery, a selection combination (also referred to as an AT combination, an AT target combination, a push sequence combination, a target combination, and an operation procedure combination including both the sequence combination and the sequence combination) ), and when the main control means 100 notifies information regarding the display of the selection combinations (pressing order, operation timing), the selection information (selection combination group information, selection combination information) can also be notified on the sub-control means side. By transmitting the information regarding the display of combinations, the sub-control means can also notify the information regarding the display of combinations. In addition, it may be referred to as processing related to (relating to) the instruction function, including all processing related to AT, such as transition to AT, extension of the number of AT games, notification of push order, etc. Note that the push order combination is a conditional device in which the symbol combinations to be stopped and the game medals given to the player are different depending on the order of the reels to be stopped (press order). This is a conditional device in which the symbol combinations that are stopped and the game medals that are awarded to the player are different depending on the timing at which the game is accepted.

The storage capacity of the main control ROM mounted on the main control board 100 is ``16 KB or less'', with a used area of ``7.5 KB or less'' (also referred to as the first program area) and other unused areas ( (also referred to as a second program area). The used area includes a control area of "4.5 KB or less" (also referred to as the first control area) in which the program executed by the main control board 100 is stored, and only information other than the program (for example, internal lottery table information). has a data area (also referred to as a first data area) of "3.0 KB or less" in which is or will be stored. Outside the usage area, there is a control area (also referred to as a second control area) and a data area (also referred to as a second data area) similar to the usage area. Programs related to game progress are stored in the used area, and programs related to fraud prevention and programs used for testing gaming machines are stored outside the used area.

The storage capacity of the main control RAM mounted on the main control board 100 is ``1024B or less'', and there is a used area of ``512B or less'' (also referred to as the first work area) and other areas outside the use area (second work area). (also referred to as a work area). The first work area is a storage area that can be rewritten as the game progresses, and the second work area is a storage area that can be rewritten when executing a program for fraud prevention or gaming machine testing.

The storage area of the main control RAM built in the main control chip includes a storage area for switch status flags indicating the on/off status of the termination changeover switch and the on/off status of the automatic payment switch, which are set to 1 to 6. A storage area for setting value information indicating one of the values, a storage area for RT status information indicating which RT status is among a plurality of RT statuses, and a specific condition device indicating the winning status of a specific condition device such as a bonus. , a storage area for game information where information necessary to proceed with the game is stored, an unused storage area that is not used, a storage area of the stack area where data saved from registers is stored, There is a temporary stack area storage area that is set when the power is turned on.

The main control RAM is initialized at the time of setting change processing by the setting change means, at the time of power-off recovery processing, and at the start of each game, and the storage area of the main control RAM is initialized depending on each case. The range is different.

During the setting change process, if recovery from power failure cannot be performed normally or if recovery is not possible, data 0 is set (initialized) in the RAM area except for the storage area of the switch status flag. In other words, the only thing that takes over the state before the setting change is the switch state flag; for example, the RT state, condition device flag, etc. are cleared and are not taken over.

In addition, during setting change processing, either when the power-off recovery can be performed normally or when the state is not in a state where recovery is impossible, that is, when the setting change processing is performed normally, the storage area for the switch status flag is , data 0 is set in the RAM area except for the storage area for setting value information, the storage area for RT status information, and the storage area for specific condition devices. That is, while maintaining the gaming state before the setting change, the RT state, setting value data, and condition device flag are inherited so that the game can be played with the setting value after the setting change. Since the setting value data inherits the information before the setting change and new setting values are set in the subsequent setting change processing, it is used in the sub control board 1000 to determine whether the setting has been changed.

Furthermore, during power-off recovery processing, data is stored in the unused storage area of the RAM area at the start of each game, and in the stack area storage area excluding the maximum used area when initializing the RAM at power-off recovery. Set to 0.

The main control built-in register built into the main control chip is used to control the operation settings and functions of each peripheral circuit (for example, a timer circuit, etc.) built into the main control chip.

For example, by writing data to a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in register (also called set or storage) using a program stored in the main control ROM, maskable Settings related to interrupt processing (for example, timer interrupt processing) (timer circuit settings) can be performed.

<Sub control board 1000>
The sub-control board 1000 is equipped with a sub-control chip. The sub-control chip includes a sub-control CPU, a sub-control ROM, a sub-control RAM, etc., which enable data communication with each other via a bus. The sub-control board 1000 is capable of two-way communication with the effect control board, and transmits data specifying the effect to be output to the speaker S, LED lamp, sub-switch 20, effect switch, etc. Information to the display device 32 transmits data to the image control board. Furthermore, power is directly supplied to the sub-control board 1000 from the power supply board.

<Turn drum device board>
The reel device board is a relay board that performs data communication between the reel motor, reel sensor, door switch, payout sensor, external output terminal board 47 (also referred to as external centralized terminal board 47), etc. and the main control board 100. . The reel motor controls the drive of the reel. The reel sensor is a sensor that determines whether the reel is operating normally, and transmits data to the reel device board when a protruding piece (also referred to as an index) passes the sensor. The door switch is a sensor that determines whether the front door PS2 is opened. The payout sensor is a sensor that determines whether the medals are passing through the hopper 44 appropriately when being paid out. The external centralized terminal board is a relay board for transmitting data to the hall computer outside the gaming machine. Further, power is directly supplied to the drum device board from the power supply board.

<Door relay board>
The door relay board inputs various sensor information in the selector (loading sensor 1, loading sensor 2, passage sensor, chute sensor), bet switch information, stop switch information, payment switch information, and outputs information. The information includes blocker information, credit number information, bet number information, replay symbol combination display information, and payout number information. The door relay board includes a selector, bet switch, stop switch, settlement switch, credit number display 26, payout number display, replay lamp, 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, 3 bet lamp, start lamp, medal insertion lamp, It is electrically connected to the advantageous section lamp.

<Production control board>
The production control board (also referred to as production control means) includes a sub-switch 20, a sub-cross key switch 21, a production switch, a movable accessory, a speaker S, a back lamp, an LED lamp provided on the front panel PS2, and a display device 32. It is electrically connected to an image control board that controls the display contents.

The effect control means is configured to be capable of two-way communication with the sub-control means 1000, and controls the output of the effect to the effect device based on the effect command received from the sub-control means 1000.

The performance control means selects the content of the performance based on the lottery result of the winning combination by the internal lottery means. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of performance contents are provided in advance, and the performance control means, at the start of the game, etc., after the internal lottery means has drawn the winning combination, the performance control means performs the production by drawing a lottery using software random numbers. Select content.

In addition, a plurality of types of production contents are provided depending on not only the result of the role lottery but also the result of the freeze lottery, the game state (RT state, freeze state), etc. Specifically, a plurality of types of performance contents are provided corresponding to bonus winnings, minor winnings, replay winnings, non-winnings, etc.

As the game progresses, the production contents include at what timing (when the start switch 12 is operated, when each stop switch 13 is operated, etc.) and what kind of production is output (how the lamps are lit, etc.). This determines whether the light should be blinked or turned off, what kind of sound should be output from the speaker S, what kind of image should be displayed on the display device 32, etc.

Further, it is also possible to generate the performance output by the performance control means in response to an operation by the player. For example, the main control board 100 receives operation signals from the start switch 12, stop switch 13, medal slot 17, bet switch (MAX bet switch 18, 1 bet switch 19), settlement switch, etc. It is also conceivable that the effect is generated by the effect control means of the sub-control board 1000 based on the sub-control commands transmitted from the control board 100, and the sub-switch 20 and the sub-cross key to which operation signals are input to the sub-control board 1000. It is also conceivable to generate effects directly from the sub-control board 1000 in response to sub-input switch operating means such as the switch 21 and effect switches. Further, although the sub-control board 1000 and the effect control board are each made into separate boards, they may be configured with one board. In that case, the sub-control board 1000 is equipped with the functions and processing that the production control board has, and the sub-control board 1000 includes a sub-switch 20, a sub-cross key switch 21, a production switch, a movable accessory, a speaker S, a back lamp, and a front panel. An LED lamp provided in the PS 2 and an image control board that controls the display contents of the display device 32 may be electrically connected.

<Image control board>
The image control board (also referred to as image control means) is provided with an image control ROM, a sound ROM, a cooling fan, etc. for specifically displaying the content of the effect on the display device 32.

<Supplementary information on board configuration>
In addition, the sub-control board and the effect control board may be configured by one (one) board, or the sub-control board, the effect control board, and the image control board may be configured by one board.

<Power supply board>
In the slot machine PS1 of this embodiment, power is supplied from the power supply board to the drum device board and the sub-control board based on the operation of the power switch 40. The power supplied to the rotating drum device board is supplied to the main control board 100 and the door relay board. The supplied power is then supplied to each component to electrically connect it. The power supplied to the sub-control board 1000 supplies power to the production control board and then to the image control board. The supplied power is supplied to each component, thereby electrically connecting it.

Next, the control of the main control board 100 that controls the games of the gaming machine will be explained.

<Error type>
Errors are broadly classified into recoverable errors and non-recoverable errors.

<Recoverable error>
Recoverable errors include selector-related errors (medal retention error, medal backflow error, medal passing time error), hopper 44-related errors (hopper retention error, hopper empty error, abnormality detection error), door opening error, harness disconnection error, etc. When a recoverable error is set, if the reset switch is operated after removing various causes of the recoverable error, the player can return to the game without having to turn on the power again. During a recoverable error, information regarding the error occurring is displayed on the display device 32, payout number display, and various lamps in order to inform the player what error has occurred.

If a recoverable error is detected during a game, the progress of the game may be stopped at the time it is detected, or the progress of the game may be stopped after the game in which the recoverable error is detected ends. By stopping the progress of the game during a recoverable error, damage to the game hall manager can be suppressed even if a recoverable error occurs due to fraud. The conditions for recovering from a recoverable error state may be such that recovery occurs automatically by removing the cause of the error, and errors that can be recovered without turning the power back on are referred to as recoverable errors. ing.

<Unrecoverable error>
In the slot machine PS1 of this embodiment, when an unrecoverable error occurs, interrupts are prohibited, the progress of the game is restricted by clearing the output of the output port, and the number of credits display 26 displays a message according to the type of error. Inform the user that the state is in a state where recovery is not possible.

In addition, when a recoverable error is set, the recoverable error is canceled when the reset switch (not shown) is operated, but once an unrecoverable error is set, the reset switch operation is not accepted, An unrecoverable error will not be cleared just by turning the power back on. In this case, the configuration is such that the unrecoverable error is canceled by performing the setting change process. When the power is turned on again at the time of an unrecoverable error, a part of the power-off recovery process is executed, and then an unrecoverable error display is repeatedly executed to prevent subsequent game processing from being executed.

Unrecoverable errors include: when the number of bets is outside the specified number during the winning lottery, when the value is not within the normal range during the set value error check, when it is determined that the power off process was not performed normally when the power was restored. In this case, if it is determined that the random number is abnormal, such as when an abnormality in the frequency of the crystal oscillator is indicated, or if the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped on the active line in the winning determination process.

Further, when an unrecoverable error occurs, the progress of the game is stopped regardless of whether the game is in progress or on standby (from the end of the game until the start of the next game).

<Game method, flow of game>
In order to play a game on the slot machine PS1, first insert medals into the medal slot 17, or place a bet (MAX bet switch 18, 1 bet switch 19) on the stored medals. Set the number of medals to bet (also referred to as the specified number). Note that in this embodiment, three sheets are set as the prescribed number. By setting the number of medals to bet, the active line is set to be valid and the game becomes possible.

If medals are inserted from a new medal slot in a situation where the number of medals bet is set at the upper limit, the number of game medals stored in the credits increases. The maximum number of cards stored in the credit is set at 50. If a medal that exceeds the maximum number of bets (3 medals) and the maximum number of stored medals (50 medals) is inserted from the medal slot (54th medal), the blocker of the medal selector is turned off (the medals are not inserted into the gaming machine). (in a state that prevents this from occurring) and is returned to the receptacle. That is, when the number of bets is at the upper limit and the number of stored credits is at the upper limit, the blocker is turned off (the passage to the hopper 44 in the selector is no longer formed).

The situation in which the number of bets is added when medals are inserted is when the number of bets is less than three (less than the maximum number of bets in the gaming state when medals are inserted). In addition, the situations in which medals can be stored in credits when medals are inserted are when the number of bets is 3 (the maximum number of bets in the gaming state when medals are inserted) and the number of credits is less than 50 (the number of medals can be stored in credits). (less than the maximum number that can be stored). In other words, when the sum of the number of bets and the number of accumulated credits is less than 53, the medals will be inserted into the gaming machine when the medals are inserted from the medal slot. Note that one of the conditions for entering the medals into the gaming machine when the medals are inserted is that the game is on standby (the period from the end of the game to the start of the next game). For example, the symbol combination related to the replay is displayed and the medal insertion requirement is met even while waiting for a game after automatic bet processing has been executed. In this case, since three coins have been bet automatically, if the number of stored credits is less than 50, the requirements for medal insertion are satisfied.

Next, when the operation of the start switch 12 is accepted, an internal lottery process is executed, and after determining the result of the internal lottery process (also referred to as the winning combination lottery result or condition device number), the minimum playing time (wait time (period), (also referred to as 4.1 second timer) has elapsed, and if the wait time has elapsed, each reel starts rotating, and if the wait time has not elapsed, the wait time elapses. Wait until each reel spins.

Next, when the operation (stop operation) of any of the stop switches 13 (left stop switch 13a, middle stop switch 13b, right stop switch 13c) is received, the result of the lottery and the timing at which the stop operation is received are determined. The reel corresponding to the stop switch 13 that is operated stops. When all the reels have stopped (also referred to as all stops), it is determined whether each stopped symbol determined at the time of receiving the stoppage of each reel is normal or not, and if it is not abnormal, it is determined which symbol combination the stopped symbol combination is. Search, and depending on the symbol combination that corresponds to the search result, pay out medals (including addition to credits), set replay (automatic bet processing), set bonus state, end bonus state, set RT state, Processing such as ending the RT state is performed, and one game ends.

<Freeze processing>
Freeze processing (also referred to as freeze effect) that delays the progress of the game by temporarily stopping it for a predetermined period includes, for example, functions related to the progress of the game, such as accepting game media, and changing the number of bets on game media that have been credited in advance. Examples include temporarily suspending functions related to accepting an operation of a bet switch to determine a bet, accepting an operation of the start switch 12 to start a game, or accepting an operation to stop the reels. Note that the freeze process (freeze effect) is a process controlled by the main control board 100.

As the freeze effect, all the functions related to the progress of the game described above may be temporarily stopped, or only some functions may be temporarily stopped.

The manner in which the progress of the game is temporarily stopped includes control processing based on the player's operation (processing to form a passage through which medals are guided to the hopper 44 by blocker control, processing for setting the number of bets based on the operation of the bet switch, For example, the reel rotation process or internal lottery process based on the operation of the start switch 12, and the reel stop process based on the operation of the stop switch 13) are not performed.

If an input signal is issued based on a player's operation while the game is temporarily stopped due to a freeze effect, control processing based on the input signal will not be performed, the input signal will not be accepted, or the input signal will not be processed. By performing processing such as delaying the transmission until a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the game end timing for one game will be delayed compared to the case where no freeze effect is performed.

Regarding the freeze effect that is performed based on the operation of the start switch 12, there are cases in which the reels do not rotate for a predetermined period when the start switch 12 is operated and the reels rotate after a predetermined period, and When the internal lottery and reels are not rotated for a predetermined period when is operated, but the internal lottery and reels are rotated after a predetermined period, or when the start switch 12 is operated, the internal lottery is not performed for a predetermined period. In some cases, the reels are rotated after a predetermined period of time without rotating the reels, or the predetermined period is set after the start switch 12 is operated and an internal lottery is performed, and the reels are rotated or stopped during the predetermined period. In other cases, a predetermined period is set after the start switch 12 is operated to perform an internal lottery and the reels are rotated, and the stop reception of the stop switch 13 is disabled for the predetermined period.

Regarding the freeze effect performed based on the operation of the stop switch 13, the freeze effect is performed based on the reception of the operation of the stop switch 13, and as a result of the operation of the stop switch 13, a specific symbol is stopped and displayed on the reels. In the freeze effect performed based on this, the control processing of the freeze effect is different.

As a control process of the freeze effect performed based on acceptance of the operation of the stop switch 13, for example, if the left stop switch 13a is operated and frozen while all the reels are rotating, the left reel corresponding to the left stop switch 13a has stopped. Later, the stop reception of the middle stop switch 13b and the right stop switch 13c may be disabled. As a result, during the predetermined period, the player cannot stop the rotating middle reel and right reel, but after the predetermined period has elapsed, the stop reception of the middle stop switch 13b and right stop switch 13c is enabled. , the timing until the game ends in one game can be delayed.

As a result of accepting the operation of the stop switch 13, the operation of the stop switch 13 other than the stop switch 13 that is stopped last is accepted as a control process of the freeze effect that is performed based on the fact that a specific symbol is stopped and displayed on the reels. When a specific symbol is stopped and displayed on each reel, the stop reception of the stop switch 13 that is stopped last may be invalidated, or the operation of the stop switch 13 that is stopped last may be accepted. Based on a specific symbol being stopped and displayed on each reel, bet number setting processing based on the operation of the bet switch to start the next game, processing to detect the insertion of gaming media using a passing sensor, or replay are enabled. An example of this is not performing control processing based on the automatic bet processing performed when the player stops on the line.

During the predetermined period during which the freeze effect is performed, the game progress control based on the player's operations is temporarily stopped, but gaming machine operations that are not related to the progress of the game can be executed. For example, even if the stop control process based on the operation of the stop switch 13 is not performed, the rotation mode of the reels can be set arbitrarily, such as rotating in the normal rotation mode, rotating at a slower speed or higher speed than usual. can do.

The rotation mode of the reels during a predetermined period includes rotating the reels in the opposite direction to the normal rotation (so-called reverse rotation), rotating the reels a predetermined number of symbols and stopping a specific symbol combination, and rotating the reels in the direction opposite to the normal rotation (so-called reverse rotation). Examples include stopping a reel and making other reels rotate, changing the rotation speed of a reel, or changing the operation of a reel due to a player's operation.

The predetermined period for performing the freeze effect can be changed depending on predetermined conditions. Here, the predetermined conditions include the detection of a signal based on the operation acceptance status of various switches by the player (operation status of the start switch 12, bet switch, stop switch 13, or settlement switch, etc.), and the lottery result of the freeze lottery. can be mentioned. In addition, changing includes shortening or lengthening the predetermined period for performing a freeze effect in which the progress of the game is temporarily stopped, and switching the rotation mode of the reels.

Examples of control processing for shortening the temporary suspension period include forcibly ending the temporary suspension period, or rewriting the temporary suspension period to a period shorter than the temporary suspension period. Control processing for lengthening the temporary suspension period includes adding another period after the temporary suspension period, or rewriting the temporary suspension period to a longer period. Further, the temporary stop period based on the freeze effect does not need to have an upper limit time, and may continue until a certain result is achieved based on the result of operation reception.

The pause period for performing the freeze effect may be set after the wait period has elapsed, or may be set to include the wait period. If a wait period is included, compare the wait period with the freeze effect period, and if the freeze effect ends during the wait period, execute the freeze effect during the wait period and end the freeze effect during the wait period. If not, the freeze effect period may be set after the wait period, or the remaining wait period may be restarted after the freeze effect ends. In addition, if there is only a freeze effect period that is longer than the wait period in advance, the process of comparing the wait period and the freeze effect period is omitted, and the freeze effect is started after operating the start switch 12 (after the internal lottery process). It is also possible to do so.

As a freeze effect, it is also possible to perform a freeze effect (also referred to as a pseudo game) as if a normal game were being played during the acceleration process. In the pseudo game, the start switch 12 is operated and a pseudo game period is determined during the acceleration process of the reels after an internal lottery is performed, and during the pseudo game period, the reel rotation is controlled like a normal game (pseudo Reel rotation control is performed based on the operation of the start switch based on the game start), and reel stop control is performed based on the operation of the stop switch 13. Further, the reels may be configured to rotate again by operating the start switch 12 during the pseudo game period. However, the internal lottery process based on the operation of the start switch 12 and the winning determination process or payout control process based on the operation of the stop switch 13 are not performed.

Further, in the pseudo game, when the reels are stopped due to the operation of the stop switch 13 or when the reels are automatically stopped as a reel performance, the stopped reels are swung up and down (so-called swing fluctuation). Thereby, when the player operates the stop switch 13, it is possible to determine whether it is a normal game or a pseudo game.

<Design combination that does not require technical intervention>
A symbol combination that does not require technical intervention is a symbol combination that can always stop and display the symbol combination of a winning combination on the active line no matter when the stop switch 13 is operated while the reels are rotating. means. For example, when bell symbols are arranged at intervals of 3 symbols on all reels, the bell-bell-bell pattern always stops (the attraction rate is 100%), so it can be said that this is a symbol combination that does not require technical intervention. Hereinafter, a winning combination with a pull-in rate of 100% will be referred to as PB=1, and a winning combination with an all-reel pull-in rate of 100% may be referred to as a PB=1 win.

On the contrary, PB≠1 means that the symbol combination of the winning combination does not stop depending on the stop timing of the stop switch 13 while the reels are rotating. For example, if there is a spot where there are no symbols related to the winning combination within the pull-in range (such as 5 symbols apart), PB≠1, and the winning combination may be referred to as PB≠1.

<Small role priority control, bonus priority control>
Small role priority control means that when a small role and a bonus are won at the same time, or when a small role within a bonus is won, if both the symbol related to the small role and the symbol related to the bonus can be drawn, the symbol related to the small role is drawn. .

Bonus priority control means that when a small winning combination and a bonus are won at the same time, or when a small winning combination within a bonus is won, if both the small winning symbol and the bonus symbol can be drawn, the bonus symbol is drawn in.

In addition, since replay has the highest priority and cannot be missed, when the condition device flags for replay and small winning combination or replay and bonus are turned on at the same time, symbols related to replay are always drawn in.

<Normal section>
The normal section is a section in which processing related to the instruction function cannot be performed. When a winning combination is won in the normal section, processing is executed to transmit information (performance group number) masking which pressing order was won to the sub-control means 1000. Further, when a push order combination is won in the normal section, notification of the push order (both the correct push order and the incorrect push order) is not displayed on the instruction monitor. As a result, in the normal section, both the main control means 100 and the sub-control means 1000 do not notify the pressing order even if the pushing order is won in the normal section, so even if the pushing order is won in the normal section, it is always possible to determine whether the answer is correct or incorrect. is now unknown.

<Advantageous section>
The advantageous section is a section in which processing related to the instruction function can be executed, and the advantageous section is provided in order to suppress excessive medal acquisition by AT. If you win the advantageous section shift lottery held in the normal section, you can move to the advantageous section. In advantageous sections, a lottery to transfer to AT can be held, but in order to suppress the excessive medal acquisition mentioned above, the advantageous sections are designed to end based on certain conditions and transfer to the normal section. ing.
in particular,
1) When you play 1500 games from the next game that moved to the 1st advantageous section 2) When you earned more than 2400 medals from the next game that moved to the 1st advantageous section 3) When you meet any conditions can be mentioned. With these, it is possible to suppress excessive medal acquisition. Note that the arbitrary condition 3) includes, for example, when one AT ends, when a specific symbol combination is displayed, etc.

If it is an advantageous section, information indicating that it is an advantageous section (also referred to as advantageous section type) is stored in a predetermined RAM area. If the value stored in the RAM area is 0 (if the advantageous section type is 0), it indicates that it is a normal section; if the value stored in the RAM area is 1 (if the advantageous section type is 0), it indicates that it is a normal section. 1) indicates an advantageous section.

<Advantageous section ramp>
An advantageous section lamp is provided as information that indicates on the main side that the vehicle is staying in an advantageous section. As a result, the player can easily determine whether or not he or she is staying in the advantageous section by checking whether the advantageous section lamp is lit or not. Specifically, when the DP of the credit number display 26 is lit, it indicates that the vehicle is staying in an advantageous section, and when the DP of the credit number display 26 is not lit, it indicates that the vehicle is not staying in an advantageous section. It is shown that. The lighting timing of the advantageous section lamp is after all reels have stopped, after receiving the bet switch operation, when the first medal inserted in the care is detected, when the second medal inserted in the care is detected, and when the third medal inserted in the care is detected. Examples include when the first medal is detected, after receiving the start switch, or after winning a winning combination in an internal lottery. In addition, the conditions for making sure to turn it on are that you are staying in an advantageous area, and that you are informed of the operation procedure information for the winning combination, and that the ball payout rate (maximum ball payout rate) of the notification game exceeds 1 ( ).

In addition, the system is configured to light up the advantageous section lamp even when the push order small combination is not installed due to the specifications, and the ball roll rate does not exceed 1, but the RT transition push order to RT with a high replay probability is notified. ing. This is to inform the player that the situation is advantageous to the player using the advantageous section lamp, and is intended to prevent the player from suffering losses due to not knowing the specifications of the gaming machine.

Note that if the above-mentioned conditions for always turning on the advantageous section lamp are not satisfied, the timing for turning on the advantageous section lamp after shifting to a new advantageous section may be arbitrary.

In addition, once the advantageous section lamp is turned on, it will continue to be lit until the advantageous section ends, and before the operation of the start switch for the next game after the advantageous section has ended (after all reels have stopped, After receiving the bet switch operation, the advantageous section lamp will turn off when the first medal inserted during maintenance is detected, the second medal inserted during maintenance is detected, or the third medal inserted during maintenance is detected) Make it.

With this configuration, even if the advantageous section lamp is not lit, it may still be an advantageous section, and even if the advantageous section lamp is not lit, the player is given a sense of expectation that the process related to the instruction function will be executed. can be given to As a result, in the past, if the game was in the normal section, the game was simply waiting for the transition to the advantageous section, but with the gaming machine of this embodiment, the AT transition can be made even if the advantageous section lamp is not lit. Since there is a possibility that a lottery or the like is being held, it is possible to maintain motivation for playing the game.

Further, when the advantageous section type is 1, it is not necessarily an advantageous section. This is a normal section (advantageous section type is 0), and in a game where the advantageous section type becomes 1 after winning the advantageous section transition lottery, the advantageous section type is 1 but it has not yet shifted to the advantageous section. This is because the gaming state is in the normal section. When executing the process to send a test signal to determine whether it is an advantageous section or a normal section, if you refer to the advantageous section type, you will end up sending a signal for an advantageous section even though it is a normal section. will send different signals.

In order to prevent this situation, when transmitting either an advantageous section or a normal section as a test signal, the value of the advantageous section clear counter is referred to. When the value of the advantageous section clear counter is 0, a process is executed to output a test signal indicating that it is a normal section. ), a process is executed to output a test signal indicating that it is an advantageous section. With this configuration, the processing for outputting the test signal can accurately identify the state by simply determining whether the value of the advantageous section clear counter is 0 or not, which eliminates pressure on the program capacity. , and the program execution speed can be improved. In addition, as mentioned above, when ending an advantageous section with an arbitrary ending condition, 1 is added to the value of the advantageous section clear counter, so in the process for outputting the test signal, even in a game where the advantageous section ends, the advantageous section is can be output accurately.
<AT>
AT is an abbreviation for assist time, and is also referred to as a notification period, and is a period for making it easier for a player to win a winning combination (hereinafter referred to as notification). In general, means for reporting during AT include the operation timing of a stop switch, the order of operation of a stop switch, the operation timing of a stop switch, and the order of operation of a stop switch, which are also referred to as an operation procedure or an operation mode.

<Grouping of choice roles>
The main control means 100 transmits the presentation group number indicating that the selection has been won during non-AT, to the sub-control means 1000, and transmits the presentation group number and operation procedure information when the selection is won during AT. is transmitted to the sub-control means 1000. In other words, since the operating procedure information is not transmitted to the sub-control means 1000 during non-AT, the sub-control means 1000 cannot notify the operating procedure. As a result, on the sub-control means 1000 side, during non-AT, it is unclear which operating procedure will display a symbol combination advantageous to the player, and during AT, a symbol combination advantageous to the player is displayed. Since information on possible operating procedures is transmitted, the operating procedures can be notified using the liquid crystal display device or operation instruction lamp on the sub-control means 1000 side. Thereby, the player can easily recognize the operating procedure, and furthermore, it is possible to prevent the operating procedure information from being illegally acquired during non-AT.

<Processing related to instruction function>
Processing related to the instruction function includes not only AT-related drawings such as AT migration drawing, AT addition drawing, and updating of AT end conditions (addition/subtraction of number of AT games, addition/subtraction of number of AT execution notifications), but also management of AT status. This is a concept that includes processing related to. Processing related to this instruction function can be executed with a predetermined number of bets for each gaming state, and if multiple bet numbers are set as the specified number in a certain gaming state, only one bet number can be executed. configured to perform processing. For example, if a 2-card bet and a 3-card bet are possible in the bonus internal state, the processing related to the instruction function can only be executed in a game with a 3-card bet, and the processing related to the instruction function can be executed in a game with a 2-card bet. is rendered unfeasible. That is, in a game with two bets, even if the AT lottery target combination is won, the AT lottery is not performed, or the number of AT games is not updated according to the progress of the game. In addition, if the SB (single bonus) or CB that ends in one game is exclusive to a 2-piece bet game, and the game after the SB or CB ends is a 2-piece bet or a 3-piece bet, the SB or CB If the replay is won and the number of coins automatically bet is 2, the process related to the instruction function will become impossible to execute in the game after the SB or CB ends (the process related to the instruction function with a bet of 3 coins will not be executed) Therefore, the number of bets that are automatically inserted when a replay is won in SB or CB is set to 3. By doing so, the processing related to the instruction function can be executed even in a game after a replay is won in SB or CB, so it is possible to eliminate games that are disadvantageous to the player. Note that, as described above, the process related to the advantageous section is configured to be executed regardless of the number of bets.

<Instruction monitor>
During AT, when reporting information regarding the operating procedure of the pressed combination, the obtained number of coins display may be used to report the operating procedure information. Specifically, in the case of the push order combination A (correct answer in the left middle right), "1" is displayed on the instruction monitor, and in the case of the push order combination B (correct answer in the left and right middle), "2" is displayed on the instruction monitor, In the case of push order combination C (correct middle left/right), "3" is displayed on the instruction monitor, and in the case of push order combination D (correct answer middle right left), "4" is displayed on the instruction monitor, and the push order combination E (right left In the case of a pressing combination F (right middle left correct), "5" is displayed on the instruction monitor, and in the case of a pressing combination F (right middle left correct), a "6" is displayed on the instruction monitor.

With this configuration, the player can know the correct pressing order by checking the instruction monitor. Furthermore, since the instruction monitor is controlled by the main control board, even if the sub-control board is tampered with, it is possible to accurately notify the pressing order.

Further, when the instruction monitor is also used as an acquired number display, the above-mentioned numbers (1 to 6) may be displayed in the lower digits, and "=" may be displayed as an identifier in the upper digits. In this case, the identifier can be used to determine whether the number of acquired coins display is displaying the number of acquired coins or the order of pressing, so that recognition by the player is not hindered.

Further, when the instruction monitor is configured as a dedicated display, a 3-digit, 7-segment display may be used. The reason for using 3 digits is that it corresponds to the number of reels. Then, in the case of the push order A (correct answer in the left middle right), "123" is displayed on the instruction monitor, and in the case of the push order B (correct answer in the left, right middle), "132" is displayed on the instruction monitor, In the case of C (center left/right correct answer), "213" is displayed on the instruction monitor, and in the case of push order combination D (center right/left correct answer), "312" is displayed on the instruction monitor, and in the case of push order combination E (center right/left correct answer), "312" is displayed on the instruction monitor. In the case of ``231'' is displayed on the instruction monitor, and in the case of the pressing combination F (correct answer of right middle left), ``321'' is displayed on the instruction monitor. With such a configuration, it becomes easy to intuitively understand the order in which the instructions are pressed on the instruction monitor, and the player can easily understand the correspondence between the order in which the instructions are pressed and the display on the instruction monitor.

The timing for displaying the push order on the instruction monitor is during an advantageous period, and after the push order is won by an internal lottery executed based on the operation of the start switch, until the stop switch becomes operable. It is preferable to set the timing to . With this configuration, the player can be informed of the pressing order before operating the stop switch, so it is possible to prevent the player from performing a stop operation in an incorrect pressing order.

<Status display monitor (role ratio monitor)>
The winning ratio monitor is the cumulative advantageous section ratio or the cumulative designated winning ratio (selectable according to the specifications of the gaming machine. Also referred to as the designated winning ratio), the continuous winning ratio for the latest 6000 games, the latest This is a display device that switches and displays the ratio of accessories among 6,000 games, the cumulative ratio of consecutive characters, the cumulative ratio of characters, and the ratio of the cumulative characters, etc., every 4,800ms, and uses a 7-segment LED (with DP). By using four, it is possible to display a four-digit number. Of the four digit numbers displayed by the four 7-segment LEDs, the upper two digits are called the identification segment, and the lower two digits are called the ratio segment.

The "yakubutsu" in the yakuza ratio refers to the 1st class special yakuza (so-called RB), the 2nd class special yakuza (so-called CB), and the ordinary yakuza (so-called SB). " is a ratio calculated by the payout during operation of the accessory divided by the total payout x 100. Note that payouts during the operation of the 1st type special accessory continuous operating device (so-called BB) and the 2nd type special accessory continuous operating device (so-called MB) are also included in "payout during accessory object operation", but Payouts in general games and general games during MB are not included in ``payouts during accessory play''. Note that "payout" is a term that does not subtract the number of sheets inserted, and in the case of the number of sheets paid out - the number of sheets inserted, it is called the difference number.

The "continuous accessory" in the continuous accessory ratio refers to the first-class special accessory (so-called RB), and the "continuous accessory ratio" is the payout during the operation of the first-class special accessory ÷ total payout This is a ratio calculated by x100. Note that payouts during the operation of the first-class special accessory continuous operation device (so-called BB) are also included in "payouts during the operation of the accessory", but payouts during general games during the BB are "payouts during the operation of the accessory". Not included in

The "instruction-inclusive accessory ratio" in the instruction-inclusive accessory ratio includes the payout in the game where the instruction function is activated (so-called AT) in the above-mentioned "accessory item", and the "instruction-inclusive accessory ratio" , is a ratio calculated by (payout during operation of instruction function or payout during operation of accessory) ÷ total payout x 100. Here, (payout while the instruction function is activated or payout while the accessory is activated) does not refer to the payout of a game where the instruction function is activated and the accessory is activated, but rather the payout of a game where the instruction function is activated. Refers to the sum of the number and the payout of games in which the accessory is activated. If the game in which the instruction function was activated was a game in which an accessory was activated, instead of adding up the two payout numbers, the number of payouts for that game (the payout while the instruction function was activated, or the (dispensing while the item is in operation). Note that if the player makes a mistake in the operation mode of the stop switch in a game where the AT is activated, the maximum payout may not be obtained, but in this case, the maximum payout is calculated based on the actual payout.

Among the information displayed on the role ratio monitor, the information displayed in the identification segment is the cumulative advantageous section ratio, the cumulative instruction-inclusive accessory ratio, the continuous accessory ratio for the latest 6,000 games, and the accessory for the latest 6,000 games. This is information for identifying which ratio is displayed among the ratio, the cumulative continuous accessory ratio, the cumulative accessory ratio, and the cumulative accessory condition ratio, and is "7U." and "7P." respectively. ”, “6Y.”, “7Y.”, “6A.”, “7A.”, and “5H.”. For example, if the identification segment displays "7U.", it indicates that it is the cumulative advantageous section ratio, and if the identification segment displays "6Y.", it indicates that the latest 6000 games are consecutive. This shows that it is a role model ratio. Note that the "." displayed on the hand ratio monitor means decimal points.

Among the information displayed on the role ratio monitor, the information displayed on the ratio segment is information for visually recognizing the calculation results of various ratios, and is displayed in two-digit numbers using two 7-segment LEDs. For example, if the calculation result is 70, "70" is displayed in the ratio segment. Note that the calculated results are rounded down to the decimal point and displayed. Further, when the calculation result is 100, "99" is displayed. Further, if the total number of games is less than 400 games, the ratio segment is displayed as "00".

The identification segment is displayed in a blinking manner when the cumulative number of games is less than the reference number of games. The standard number of games is determined according to various ratios, and in the case of the cumulative advantageous section ratio, it is 175,000 games, in the case of the cumulative instruction-inclusive accessory ratio, it is 175,000 games, and the continuous accessory among the latest 6,000 games. In the case of the ratio, it is 6000 games, in the case of the yakuza ratio between the latest 6000 games, it is 6000 games, in the case of the cumulative continuous yakuza ratio, it is 17500 games, and in the case of the cumulative yakuza ratio, it is 17500 games. In the case of the cumulative state ratio of accessories, etc., it is 175,000 games.

The ratio segment displays the ratio segment in a blinking manner when the displayed numerical value is equal to or greater than the threshold value. The threshold value is determined according to various ratios, and it is 70 for the cumulative advantageous section ratio, 70 for the cumulative instructional accessory ratio, and the continuous accessory ratio for the latest 6000 games. 60, the latest 6000 games' accessory ratio is 70, the cumulative continuous accessory ratio is 60, the cumulative accessory ratio is 70, and the cumulative accessory ratio is 70. In the case of state ratio, it is 50. Note that if the total number of games is less than 400 games and the calculation result is equal to or greater than the threshold value, but the ratio segment is displayed as "00", the ratio segment is displayed in a lighting manner.

In order to confirm whether the role ratio monitor can operate normally, a test pattern is displayed on the identification segment and the ratio segment for 4800 ms after the power is turned on and the timer interrupt process is started. As a test pattern, all segments (including DP) of the four 7-segment LEDs constituting the role ratio monitor are displayed in a blinking manner. For example, "8.8.8.8." may be displayed in a blinking manner. In addition to displaying the test pattern after the power is turned on, the test pattern may be displayed at any timing such as during setting change, setting confirmation, or RWM (RAM) abnormal error.

If the total number of games is less than the standard number of games in the identification segment, if the displayed numerical value is greater than the threshold in the ratio segment, or when displaying a test pattern in the identification segment and ratio segment, the segment will be displayed in a blinking manner. However, specifically, the blinking mode is displayed by switching between lighting and turning off every 300 ms, such as 300 ms on → 300 ms off → 300 ms on → 300 ms → . Furthermore, when changing the various ratio information, it starts with lighting, thereby preventing the display period of the various ratio information from becoming longer or shorter depending on the timing of lighting and blinking.

As mentioned above, the cumulative advantageous section ratio or the cumulative instruction-inclusive accessory ratio, the continuous accessory ratio for the latest 6,000 games, the accessory ratio for the latest 6,000 games, and the cumulative continuous ratio are displayed on the winning ratio monitor. The display contents of the accessory ratio, the cumulative accessory ratio, and the cumulative accessory state ratio are configured to change the display contents every 4800 ms, but this 4800 ms is set to a multiple of 600 ms, which is one set of lighting and blinking. By doing so, it is possible to configure such that at the switching timing of various ratios displayed on the role ratio monitor, one of the 7-segment LEDs is always lit even when displaying in a blinking mode. becomes.

With this configuration, even when the various ratio information is switched, the display starts with lighting, so it is possible to continuously display a display that does not give an unnatural feeling due to no shift in the blinking cycle.

In addition, since the display period of the test pattern after the power is turned on is 4800ms, the 7-segment LED turns off when the test pattern has been displayed for 4800ms, and the cumulative advantageous section ratio or the cumulative It becomes possible to display information regarding the instruction-inclusive accessory ratio from lighting.

Next, a control method regarding the blinking display on the role ratio monitor will be explained.

It has a storage area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time for switching on and off in order to blink the display mode of the role ratio monitor. The storage area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time for switching between lighting and extinguishing is a 2-byte storage area, and is incremented by 1 for each timer interrupt process. The storage area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time for switching on and off is initialized (0 is stored) when the power is turned on, and thereafter cycles through the values 0 to 299 each time a timer interrupt process is executed. In other words, the next value after 299 is 0.

Example 1) If the update process is performed when the storage area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch on and off is "0", the storage area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch on and off will be "0". 1”. At this time, the carry flag becomes 1 (as a result of calculating "0-299", a downgrade occurs, so the carry flag becomes 1).

Example 2) If the update process is performed when the storage area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch on and off is "298", the storage area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch on and off will be "298". 299". At this time, the carry flag is set to 1 (as a result of calculating "298-299", a carry flag is set to 1 because a downgrade occurs).

Example 3) If the update process is performed when the storage area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time for switching on and off is "299", the storage area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time for switching on and off will be "299". 0". At this time, the carry flag becomes 0 (as a result of calculating "299-299", the carry flag becomes 0 because no undercarriage occurs).

As mentioned above, if the storage area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch between turning on and off is any value from 0 to 298, the carry flag will be 1, and the time to switch between turning on and off will be When the storage area for management (_TM_CHG_FLS) is 299, the carry flag=0. In other words, the carry flag becomes 0 every 300 ms.

When the carry flag becomes 0, the blinking switching flag (_FL_CHG_FLS) is updated. The blinking switching flag (_FL_CHG_FLS) is initialized (0 is stored) when the power is turned on, and when 0 is stored in the blinking switching flag (_FL_CHG_FLS), the role ratio monitor is turned on and the blinking switching flag ( When 1 is stored in _FL_CHG_FLS), the role ratio monitor is turned off. In other words, the carry flag becomes 0 every 300 ms, so by repeatedly storing 0 and 1 in the blinking switching flag (_FL_CHG_FLS) every 300 ms, the display mode of the role ratio monitor changes between the lighting mode and the light-off mode every 300 ms. It is possible to repeatedly display (blinking display).

When displaying the role ratio monitor in a flashing manner, if the cumulative number of games in the identification segment is less than the standard number of games, or if the displayed value in the ratio segment is greater than or equal to the threshold, a test pattern will be displayed in the identification segment and the ratio segment. Since this is one of the cases in which the light is displayed, in cases other than these cases, the light is displayed in a lighting mode without referring to the blinking switching flag (_FL_CHG_FLS). However, regardless of whether or not the blinking switching flag (_FL_CHG_FLS) is referenced, the storage area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch between on and off is updated every time the timer interrupt process is processed, so the blinking switching flag (_FL_CHG_FLS) ) is also updated from time to time, and even when switching from a state where the flashing switching flag (_FL_CHG_FLS) is not referenced to a state where it is referenced, the timing of turning on and off and the timing of switching various ratio displays are displayed without any deviation. becomes possible.

<Program start processing flow>
The program start process executed by the main control board 100 according to this embodiment will be described using the flowchart of FIG. 5.

When the power is turned on, the main control board 100 performs initial settings regarding the operation of the gaming machine. Specifically, it performs RAM check processing to set the interrupt mode, set the functions of the main CPU, and create power-off recovery data. The RAM check process determines whether the checksums of all RAMs are normal or not. If the conditions are met, the power-off recovery data is determined to be normal; if the conditions are not met, the power-off recovery data is determined to be abnormal.

Next, the states of the setting key switch signal and the door open detection switch signal are checked to determine whether the setting key switch 37 and the door open detection switch are on.

If the setting key switch 37 and the door open detection switch are on, it is determined whether the power-off recovery data is normal or in a recoverable state. If the power-off recovery data is normal or in a recoverable state, a first initialization range to be initialized in the initialization process in the setting change process is set, and the process moves to the setting change process in FIG. If the power-off recovery data is normal or not in a recoverable state, a second initialization range is set to be initialized in the initialization process in the setting change process, and the process moves to the setting change process in FIG. After the setting change process, the process moves to the main game progress shown in FIG.

If the setting key switch 37 and the door open detection switch are not on, it is determined whether the power-off recovery data created in the RAM check process is normal. If the power-off recovery data is abnormal or in a non-recoverable state, a non-recoverable error is notified and the process moves to a non-recoverable error process in which the progress of the game in the slot machine PS1 is stopped. On the other hand, if the power-off recovery data is not abnormal or in a non-recoverable state, the process moves to the power-off recovery process shown in FIG. After the power-off recovery process, the process shifts to the main game progress shown in FIG. Note that after the power-off recovery process, the process is not necessarily executed from the beginning of the main game progress because the state that was saved when the power-off was detected is restored.

Note that in unrecoverable error processing, interrupts are prohibited and outputs from output ports (output of sub-control commands, output of excitation signals to stepping motors, etc.) are cleared. Then, the error display (notification) is repeated on the acquired number display 27.

<Power-off processing>
The power-off process executed by the main control board 100 according to this embodiment will be described using the flowchart of FIG. 6.

In this embodiment, when the power switch 40 is turned off or an event such as a power outage occurs that cuts off the power supply (also referred to as an occurrence of a power outage), the operating voltage for operating the slot machine PS1 drops, and the corresponding When the operating voltage falls below the threshold, the voltage monitoring circuit detects a power outage, generates a power outage detection signal, and inputs the power outage detection signal to the input port of the main control chip. Then, in the determination process of determining whether or not the power-off detection signal for the timer interrupt process is input, the power-off process is executed when it is determined that the power-off detection signal is input. Note that when determining whether or not a power-off detection signal is input during timer interrupt processing, the determination may be made by one timer interrupt processing, or by two or more timer interrupt processing. Good too. In other words, when determining whether or not a power-off detection signal has been input through multiple timer interrupt processing, even if it is determined that a power-off detection signal has been input the first time, it is determined that the power-off detection signal has not been input the second time. If it is determined, power-off processing will not be executed. This is to prevent the power-off process from being executed when noise or instantaneous power outage (a state in which the voltage momentarily falls below the threshold value but immediately exceeds the threshold value) occurs.

In the power-off process, the output port is cleared, interrupts that are executed periodically are prohibited from occurring, and the interrupt disable/enable state at the time of power-off is saved. Next, the used registers are saved and the stack pointer is saved. When saved, the power-off processing completion flag indicating that the power-off processing has been performed is saved on, and the checksum data of all RAM areas is calculated and saved. Then, writing to the RAM is prohibited and the system waits for reset. Note that the address range of the stack pointer to be saved, the presence or absence of the power-off processing completion flag, and whether or not the checksum of all RAM areas are normal are determined during the power-off recovery process.

<Timer interrupt processing>
The timer interrupt process executed by the main control board 100 according to this embodiment will be described using the flowchart of FIG. 7.

In this embodiment, timer interrupt processing is configured to occur periodically every 2.235 ms (milliseconds).

When timer interrupt processing starts, it compares the necessary data stored in the registers, executes power-off processing when a power-off detection signal is received, and reads input ports to determine the input of various sensors and operation switches. and measures various timers (freeze period measurement timer, wait period measurement timer, etc.), and performs reel drive control to determine whether each reel is accelerating, rotating at constant speed, starting deceleration, decelerating, or stopping. Control and update of the driving state are performed depending on which driving state. Next, port output processing is performed to create and output data (excitation signal to the stepping motor, drive signal for the hopper 44, etc.) to be output for each output port, and it is checked whether various abnormalities have occurred. Various abnormalities include whether the current set value is a normal value or not, and whether the operation pattern of the input/dispensing sensor is normal or not. Next, an external signal is output to set (on/off control) external signals such as a bonus signal, ART signal, and security signal, a medal insertion signal, and a medal payout signal to be output to an external system such as a hall computer.

Next, in the control command transmission process, if there is a set sub-control command, the sub-control command is output to the sub-control board 1000, controls lighting of various LEDs, and sub-controls such as stop switch operation sound and medal insertion sound. The timer interrupt process is ended by outputting notification data to be sent to the board, outputting a signal related to the performance test, restoring the register, and keeping the interrupt permission flag on.

The types of sub-control commands include a start command when the start switch is operated, a winning information command that indicates the result of an internal lottery, a command to start rotating the reel when the reels start accelerating, and a command to start rotating the reel while it is spinning. There are various commands such as a left rotation drum stop command, a middle rotation drum stop command, a right rotation drum stop command, and an all rotation drum stop command when each stop switch for stopping is operated.

Furthermore, timer measurement processing may be performed within the timer interrupt processing.
In timer measurement, control processing is performed to update information regarding the timer (time) stored in RWM (RAM). For example, the process of updating the value stored in the storage area (hereinafter also referred to as timer area A) of the RWM that monitors (manages) the minimum playing time (4.1 seconds) for one game (for example, the process of subtracting 1) )I do. In addition to the storage area of the RWM that monitors the minimum playing time, the storage area of the RWM that monitors (manages) the insertion of game medals using the insertion button (hereinafter also referred to as timer area B) and the output time of external signals are monitored. (Management) RWM storage area (hereinafter also referred to as timer area C) or the like may have an RWM storage area related to a plurality of timers.
In this case, the timer measurement includes a process of subtracting 1 from the value stored in timer area A, a process of subtracting 1 from the value stored in timer area B, a process of subtracting 1 from the value stored in timer area C, etc. A process of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the RWM storage area (hereinafter also referred to as timer area) that stores information regarding the timer is executed. Furthermore, if a timer measurement is performed when the value stored in a certain timer area is "0", the value stored in a certain timer area is configured to be "0". .

Note that as a control process for updating the information regarding the timer stored in the RWM, the process of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the timer area was given as an example, but the process of adding 1 to the value stored in the timer area was given as an example. It can also be used as processing.

Here, monitoring (management) of the insertion of game medals using the insertion button will be explained.
Monitoring (management) of the insertion of game medals using the insertion button is a timer that measures time after the bet process based on the operation of the 1 bet switch 19 is executed, and the value of the timer becomes "0". This is a timer for not executing the process of determining whether or not the next 1-bet switch 19 has been operated.

For example, under a predetermined situation where the number of credits is greater than or equal to a predetermined value (for example, under a situation where the number of bets is 0, the number of credits is 3, and a bet can be made by operating the 1 bet switch 19), the 1 bet switch 19 ``20'' is stored in timer area B after the bet process based on the operation is executed. Thereafter, the value stored in timer area B is subtracted by "1" by timer measurement of timer interrupt processing. Then, when the timer interrupt process is executed 20 times, the value stored in timer area B becomes "0". In addition, if the value stored in timer area B is not "0" (if the value stored in timer area B is any one of "1" to "20"), 1 in the game progress main process. It is not judged whether the bet switch 19 is operated or not. In other words, even if the 1-bet switch 19 is operated when the value stored in the timer area B is not "0", the bet process is not executed. Thereafter, after the value stored in the timer area B becomes "0", the bet process becomes executable when the 1-bet switch 19 is operated.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent bet processing from being executed multiple times due to malfunction even though the 1-bet switch 19 has been operated once. Furthermore, by repeatedly hitting the 1-bet switch 19 by a malicious player, the bet process based on the operation of the 1-bet switch 19 is executed multiple times, and the command based on the execution of the bet process is continuously sent to the sub-control means 1000. can be prevented from being sent to

<Power-off recovery process>
The power-off recovery process executed by the main control board 100 according to this embodiment will be described using the flowchart of FIG. 8.

In this embodiment, when the power is turned on by turning on the power switch 40, the main control board 100 executes a power-off recovery process for restoring various data to the state before the power-off.

In the power-off recovery process, the stack pointer is restored, and the output data related to the sub-control command to be sent to the sub-control board 1000 is restored. Thereafter, it is determined whether the set value data is within a normal range. If the result of the judgment is abnormal (the value is outside the defined range), the process moves to irreversible error processing. On the other hand, if the value is normal (within a predetermined range), the unused RAM area is initialized, a periodically executed interrupt is activated, and the input port is read. Thereafter, the power-off processing completed flag is cleared, the used registers are restored, the interrupt prohibition/enabled state at the time of power-off is restored, and the power-off recovery processing is completed. It should be noted that when the power-off recovery process is completed, the state returns to the state before the power-off occurred, and if it does not return (at the time of setting change), the game progress main control process is performed from the beginning.

In this embodiment, the interrupt is activated at a predetermined timing during the power-off recovery process, but the interrupt may be activated after the power-off recovery process in the program start process.

<Main explanation of game progress>
The main game progress control process executed by the main control board 100 according to the present embodiment will be explained using the flowchart of FIG. 9.

The main control board 100 refers to the value of the freeze effect number saved before the last game, and if the saved freeze effect number corresponds to the number to which the freeze effect should be executed, executes the freeze effect and executes the freeze effect. If the current freeze effect number does not correspond to the number at which the freeze effect should be executed, the freeze effect is not executed and the process proceeds to the next step. It may be configured so that the freeze effect number is not saved when the freeze effect is not executed. In that case, it is determined whether or not the freeze effect number is saved, and if it is not saved, the process proceeds to the next step. may be configured.

Next, when game medals are inserted from the medal insertion slot 17, the number of bets or the number of credits is updated (gaming value insertion process). Next, it is determined whether the number of bets for which the game can be executed has been bet, and if it is determined that a bet has been placed, it is determined whether or not the start switch 12 has been operated, and it is determined that no bet has been placed. In this case, the player waits for the insertion of game medals or, if the medals are stored in credits, for the operation of the bet switch (if the medals are stored in credits). If the number of bets that will enable the game to be played has been placed and the start switch 12 has been operated (the start switch signal is determined to be on), an internal lottery process is performed, and if the start switch 12 has not been operated ( If the start switch signal is not determined to be on, the process waits for reception of the start switch 12 operation.

In the internal lottery process, a predetermined calculation process is executed using the internal lottery random numbers obtained by generating internal lottery random numbers, and a winning combination (conditional device number) is determined. After determining the winning combination, a stop control table corresponding to the stop timing of each stop switch is created in advance, and the stop control is executed even if the stop switch operation is accepted immediately after the reel rotation is allowed. Prepare as much as possible.

The types of winning combinations provided in the slot machine PS1 can be broadly classified into bonuses, small winnings, and replays.

A bonus means a bonus that is activated in a predetermined case. Generally, it is activated when a symbol combination of "7.7.7" or "7.7.bar" is stopped and displayed on the active line of the display window 4. Due to the activation of bonus-related accessories, the number of symbol combinations associated with winnings for each specified number changes, or the condition device activation probability of symbol combinations associated with winnings for each specified number changes. Bonuses are divided into RB, BB, CB, MB, and SB.

RB is an abbreviation for regular bonus, and is also called a first-class special bonus. RB is generally set with the termination condition of winning 8 small prizes or obtaining 12 game results, and during RB, the winning probability of small prizes is set higher than that of the regular lottery table. A lottery is conducted using a lottery table.

BB is an abbreviation for Big Bonus, and is also called a continuous operating device related to the first type special bonus. In BB, the payout of game medals exceeding a predetermined number (for example, 269 medals) related to winning a small prize is set as an end condition, and during BB, the probability of winning a small prize (described later) is set higher than in the regular prize lottery table. A winning lottery is conducted using the BB middle winning lottery table. Note that during BB, it is not necessary to provide a BB mid-win lottery table. For example, a table in which an RB mid-win lottery table, which will be described later, is continuously operated until a BB termination condition is met may be referred to as a BB mid-win lottery table.

CB is an abbreviation for challenge bonus, and is also called a second type special bonus. The CB can be set in such a state that at least all the small winning combinations are won regardless of the result of the winning lottery. Further, during CB, stop control different from normal stop control is performed on predetermined reels. For example, it is conceivable to control the left reel 8a to stop within 190 milliseconds to 75 milliseconds.

As described above, the CB may be configured such that the symbol combinations that can be displayed according to the operating procedure cannot be displayed (also referred to as missed) because at least all the small winning combinations are in a winning state. For example, during CB, by controlling the left reel 8a to stop within 190 ms to 75 ms, if the left reel 8a stops within 190 ms, move a specific symbol on the active line at any operation timing. However, if the display stops within 75 milliseconds, there may be a case where a specific symbol cannot be displayed at a specific operation timing.

MB is an abbreviation for middle bonus, and is also referred to as a continuous operating device related to the second type special bonus. The MB is set, for example, as a termination condition of paying out more than 153 medals related to winning a small prize, winning an RB, or winning an SB to be described later.

SB is an abbreviation for single bonus, and is also called a regular bonus. In the SB, it is set as an end condition that a result of one game is obtained. During the SB, a prize lottery is performed using an SB medium prize lottery table in which the probability of winning a minor prize is set higher than that of the regular prize lottery table.

Although the BB in this embodiment uses the BB middle prize lottery table to perform the winning lottery, the winning probability is not limited to this, and during the BB, the probability of winning the regular prize lottery table and the small prize winning probability is set to be the same probability. At the same time, the game may be played using a BB general prize lottery table in which the winning probability of RB is increased, and an RB medium prize lottery table in which the winning probability of minor prizes is set higher than the regular prize lottery table. Even in this case, the BB still sets a payout that exceeds a predetermined number of medals related to small winning combinations as an end condition. Also, the components that control these bonuses are collectively referred to as special game control means.

A small role is a role in which a symbol combination based on the winning minor role is stopped and displayed on the active line, and when it is determined to be a winning prize by the winning determination process (described later), medals are paid out based on the stopped and displayed symbol combination. be.

Replay (also referred to as replay) is a symbol combination based on the winning replay that is stopped and displayed on the active line, and when it is determined to have been won by the winning determination process, replay (automatically without inserting new medals) This is a hand that gives you a game that allows you to play the next game by betting. Since the replay will not be missed in the winning game, the next game in which the replay is won will always be a replay.

In the lottery result of the prize lottery, if any of the bonus, minor prize, and replay prizes is not won, it is a loss, and the winning process described later is not performed. When a loss occurs, a symbol combination that does not relate to any role is stopped and displayed on the active line.

Among the roles drawn in the lottery, if the symbol combination is not stopped and displayed on the active line in the winning game for BB, RB, and MB, the winning flag cannot be carried over to the next game or later. Yes (special role carryover method). While the winning flag is carried over, the winning flag may be drawn using the winning flag drawing table that was used before the winning flag was carried over, or the winning flag may be drawn using the carrying-over winning flag lottery table (also referred to as the internal middle winning lottery table or the internal middle winning winning lottery table). ) may be used to draw the winning combination. If a symbol combination based on the winning BB, RB, or MB is stopped and displayed on the active line when using the carry-over middle winning combination lottery table, it is determined that the transfer conditions of the winning combination lottery table are met, and the carryover middle winning combination is determined to be satisfied. A transition is made from the lottery table to the winning combination lottery table corresponding to the winning flag.

In the role lottery table, winning probabilities for multiple types of roles are determined, and multiple types of role lottery tables are provided depending on the gaming state. For example, this applies to a BB mid-win lottery table used during BB, an MB mid-win lottery table used during MB, and the like.

The role lottery table includes single winning combinations in which one type of symbol combination can be stopped and displayed on an active line, and multiple winning combinations in which multiple symbol combinations can be stopped and displayed on one or more active lines. Set according to the results.

For multiple symbol combinations that are set as duplicate winning combinations, all symbol combinations may be set so that one winning combination can be stopped and displayed depending on the operation mode, or some symbol combinations cannot be stopped and displayed. It may be set to Among these winning combinations, some combinations of symbols that cannot be stopped and displayed are sometimes referred to as control combinations.

The role of the control role is that even if the same symbol combination can be stopped and displayed on the active line as a result of multiple lottery results, it will be stopped and displayed according to the type of control role that is set as a duplicate winning combination. It plays a role in being able to control the effective lines to differ.

The winning flag control means turns on a flag corresponding to the winning combination when any winning combination is won as a result of the lottery. Then, all the stop switches 13 are operated by the player to turn off the flag corresponding to the winning combination when finishing the winning process related to the winning combination.

Regarding the above-mentioned BB, RB, and MB, the flag is turned on in the winning game, but when all the stop switches 13 are operated, the winning BB, RB, or MB symbol combination is on the active line. If the symbol combination of BB, RB, or MB that was won is not displayed in a stopped state, the flag is carried over to the next game with it turned on, and the above-mentioned carryover winning combination lottery table is set, and the winning BB, RB, or MB symbol combination is stopped and displayed. Upon completion of the winning process related to the combination, the flag corresponding to BB, RB, or MB is turned off.

Moreover, the RT role lottery table is provided in the role lottery table. RT is a gaming state in which the replay winning probability in the winning combination lottery is different from that of the normal winning lottery table, and is an abbreviation for replay time.

As a specific example of the use of RT, the winning probability of the replay may be increased by replacing the losing area of the normal winning lottery table with a replay, or the replaying area of the normal winning lottery table may be replaced with a losing area and the winning probability of the replay is increased. The probability of winning may be decreased.
Further, although the regular winning lottery table and the replay area are the same, the types of replays that win within the replay area may be different.
The slot machine PS1 is provided with a plurality of RT combination lottery tables, and is configured to shift to another RT state when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied.

The transition conditions for the RT combination lottery table can include the following. Transition condition 1 is when a specific symbol combination (bonus-related symbol combination, RT transfer symbol combination) is stopped and displayed, transition condition 2 is when the bonus is won, and transition condition 3 is when the bonus is BB, RB, Or when the MB ends, transition condition 4 is when a specific symbol combination (RT transition symbol combination) is stopped and displayed and then the prescribed number of games are played, transition condition 5 is when BB, RB, or This is when a prescribed number of games have been played after the MB ends. The transition conditions for these RT combination lottery tables can be set as appropriate depending on the gameplay.

The number of entries is the number of winnings for each lottery result determined in the internal lottery table by the internal lottery means. For example, if the total number of entries is 65,536, dividing each number by 65,536 gives the probability of winning. Become. For example, the probability of winning a predetermined lottery result with a number of 4 is 1/16384.

Further, when any of the transition conditions 1 to 5 of the RT combination lottery table described above is satisfied, the number placed regarding replay can be changed. For example, the replay probability of RT1 is 1/7.3, and when transitioning from RT1 to RT2, the replay probability of RT2 may be changed to 1/1.5. Thereby, by shifting to a state where the replay probability is high, it is possible to suppress the decrease in medals and add interest to the gameplay.

Next, it is checked whether the minimum playing time (equivalent to 4.1 seconds) set in the previous game has elapsed. If it is determined that the minimum gaming time has elapsed (if it is determined that the value of the minimum gaming time timer is 0), a new minimum gaming time is set, and if it is not determined that the minimum gaming time has elapsed ( If the value of the minimum playing time timer is not determined to be 0), the value of the minimum playing time timer is decremented and then it is checked whether the minimum playing time has elapsed. This minimum playing time checking process is executed until it is determined that the minimum playing time has elapsed, and other processes are executed as the main game progress process between the minimum playing time determining process and the process of setting a new minimum playing time. It is configured not to. As a result, the minimum playing time is not extended by other processing, so it is possible to play the game quickly. That is, it is possible to prevent the game from being postponed without making the player wait.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and another process may be executed as the game progress main process between the process of determining the minimum playing time and the process of newly setting the minimum playing time. Other processing in this case may be processing to clear the RWM address, processing to store other data in RWM, or other instructions that require a short processing time. Since the processing time for these processes is extremely short, the user cannot experience the extension of the minimum playing time. After newly setting the minimum playing time, a reel rotation start preparation process is executed.

In the reel rotation start preparation process, the data related to the rotation stop saved in the previous game is initialized, the stop table used in the current game is set, the output of the rotation start of all reels is requested, and the reel rotation start is executed. Set the sub-control command (reel rotation start command) shown.

The stop table is provided corresponding to the symbol control number determined by the result of the lottery by the internal lottery means, and predetermines the stop position of the reel corresponding to the operation timing of the stop switch 13.

After the reel rotation start preparation process is completed, processing related to freeze effect (for example, reel effect before reel rotation) is executed. In the freeze effect, the reels are moved a little or the reels are rotated in the opposite direction, mainly to indicate the level of expectation for the winning combination.

When the freeze effect is not executed, or after the freeze effect is executed and the execution of the freeze effect is finished, the process of rotating the reels (also referred to as reel rotation process, reel rotation start process, or reel rotation start process) is performed. Execute. There are four states of rotation of the reel: an accelerated state, a constant speed rotation state, a stop preparation state, and a stopped state, and when the reel is rotated, the accelerated state is set. In the acceleration state, the stepping motor is gradually rotated by timer interrupt processing.

The acceleration process executed in the accelerated state is the process executed from the state where the reel rotation is stopped until the constant speed rotation process is performed. In constant speed rotation processing, the stepping motor is moved one step for each timer interrupt processing, but if you suddenly execute constant speed rotation processing while the reel is stopped, there may be insufficient torque and step out. becomes more sexual. Therefore, acceleration processing is required to gradually rotate the reels. In addition, in the acceleration processing in this embodiment, the stepping motor is first moved one step after processing 50 timer interrupts, then the stepping motor is moved one step after processing 30 timer interrupts, and then the stepping motor is moved one step after processing timer interrupts 10 times. Move the stepping motor one step after processing, then move the stepping motor one step after processing five timer interrupts, then move the stepping motor one step after processing two timer interrupts, then move the stepping motor one step after processing the timer interrupt once. After interrupt processing, the stepping motor is moved one step. Thereafter, a constant speed rotation process is performed in which the stepping motor is moved one step for each timer interrupt process.

When the constant speed rotation process is being executed, the value of the rotation failure detection counter described above is incremented every time the timer interrupt process is performed to detect rotation failure. Note that since the initial value of the rotation failure detection counter is set to 0, it is incremented every time the timer interrupt process is performed. However, if the initial value of the rotation failure detection counter is set to 180, the value of the rotation failure detection counter is incremented for each timer interrupt process. It may be determined that a rotation failure has been detected when the value is decremented and becomes 0.

Also, in the constant speed rotation state, the stop switch is allowed to accept a stop and waits for the stop switch to be operated. When acceptance of the stop switch is permitted, the lamp of the stop switch is lit in blue to inform the player that the stop switch is valid (when the stop switch is not accepted, the lamp is lit in red). The lighting control of the stop switch lamp may be performed by the main control means 100 or by the sub-control means 1000. In addition, when performing push order navigation to control the lighting of stop switch lamps, the stop switch lamp may be configured to blink to make it easier for the player to recognize the stop switch to be operated. good.

Further, a command indicating that the reels have started rotating is sent to the sub-control means 1000, and when the sub-control means 1000 receives the command, it sets a reel rotation time measurement timer that measures the rotation time of the reels and starts counting. Start. When the value of the reel rotation time measurement timer reaches a predetermined value (equivalent to 3 minutes), a message "Please stop the reels" (reel stop warning image) is displayed on the LCD, and the player is prompted to stop the reels. Encourage rotation. The reel rotation time measurement timer is initialized when the stop switch is operated (when the stop switch operation is accepted), and if there is a reel that is still rotating, it performs counting again. In this way, the reel rotation time measurement timer continues to be updated until all the reels stop.

In addition, if the reel stop warning image is displayed at the same time as the push order navigation, it will be displayed in front of the push order navigation, so if the display areas of the reel stop warning image and the push order navigation overlap, Also, the visibility of the reel stop warning image is ensured, and the player can be clearly prompted to operate the stop switch. In addition, at this time, the push order navigation becomes difficult to see and there is a risk that you will not know which reel to stop, so by operating the sub switch or production switch, etc., the reel stop warning image is erased (or the reel stop warning image is The warning image may be made smaller or moved) so that the push order navigation can be recognized.

After enabling stop switch operation acceptance in the game progress main process, the stop switch operation acceptance determination process (reel stop acceptance check process) is repeated until the stop switch is operated. When it is determined that any stop switch has been operated, stop control (also referred to as slip control) of the reel corresponding to the operated stop switch is executed. At this time, the reel corresponding to the operated stop switch shifts from a constant speed rotation state to a stop preparation state. In the stop preparation state, the reel is rotated at a constant speed to the desired stop position. When the target stop position is reached, the motor shifts to a stop state, and all four-phase excitation is turned on to apply the brakes. Note that the slip control is performed within 190 milliseconds from the operation of the stop switch 13. In this embodiment, when the operation of the stop switch 13 is accepted, it is possible to draw in up to four symbols ahead.

Here, the target stop position is determined by whether or not the symbol number currently passing and the symbol number saved as the stop position match, and if it is determined that they match, the target stop position is determined. Turn on all four-phase excitation as the position. In addition, the symbol number that is currently being passed is the initial symbol number that is set at the moment when the index sensor described above detects the index (when the index signal rises), and is initialized when the symbol number is moved by one symbol by the timer interrupt processing. This is determined by setting the symbol number next to the symbol number.

After executing the reel stop reception check process, it is checked whether all reels are stopped. If all the reels are stopped, execute the winning determination process and then execute the winning process, and if all the reels are not stopped, execute the waiting process to accept the stop operation of the stop switch corresponding to the spinning reel. . Then, after all the reels have stopped, the display contents of the status display monitor are updated, and the process moves to advantageous section clear counter management processing. Then, a game end check process is performed to update the RT status, etc., and the main flow of the game progress is ended. Note that the software random number update process may be performed during the period from the start of rotation of the reels to the reception of the stop operation.

The winning determination process is a process of determining whether or not the symbol combinations constituting a winning combination have been stopped and displayed on the active line. In order to determine whether or not the stopped symbols determined when the operation of the stop switch is received are abnormal, the determination is not made based on the symbol combinations that actually stopped on the active line. After the winning determination processing determines that the symbol combinations forming a winning combination have stopped being displayed on the active line, the winning processing is performed, and the winning determination processing does not determine that the symbol combination forming a winning combination has stopped on the active line. If so, take action based on the loss.

The winning process is a process in which a bonus is given to the player based on the symbol combination that is stopped on the active line. The winning process when stopping a symbol combination based on a small role is the payout of medals based on the stopped symbol combination, the process of changing the gaming state based on the stopped symbol combination, and the symbol combination based on replay. The winning process when the symbol combination based on the bonus is stopped is the process of giving the right to replay and the process of changing the gaming state based on the stopped symbol combination.The winning process when the symbol combination based on the bonus is stopped is a process of shifting the gaming state based on the stopped symbol combination. In addition, in the case of a loss, winning processing will not be performed.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the result of the winning determination process is a loss, a winning process may be performed based on the loss, and a process may be performed in which a bonus is not given to the player as a result of the winning process. Further, as a winning process based on a loss, the gaming state may be changed depending on the operation mode when the loss occurs. For example, if all the stop switches 13 are operated in a predetermined order of operation when the game loses, the game may move to a game state with a different freeze winning probability. Furthermore, even in the case of an apparent loss due to missing a small winning combination, winning processing such as controlling the transition of the gaming state such as the transition to the RT state can be performed without performing a payout. Furthermore, as a winning process based on the bonus, it may be possible to add medal payout or replay rights based on the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed.

The process of transitioning the gaming state includes setting a winning combination table according to the gaming state to be transitioned to, setting reel control according to the gaming state to be transitioned to, and setting a freeze winning probability according to the gaming state to be transitioned to. or a combination of these.

In the winning determination process, when a winning symbol combination is determined, the winning symbol combination information (stopped roll information) that is stopped and displayed on the active line and winning combination lottery result information are transmitted to the sub control board 1000. On the other hand, when the sub-control board 1000 receives this information, it can output an effect according to the winning symbol combination information and the winning combination lottery result information using the display device 32, the lamp, or the speaker S.

In the winning determination process, winning is determined on all active lines, and as a result of the determination, if multiple symbol combinations based on duplicate winning combinations are stopped and displayed on multiple active lines, the multiple symbol combinations that were stopped and displayed are Prize-winning processing is performed for each.

For example, when a small winning combination with a payout number of 2 pieces and a small winning combination with a payout number of 10 pieces displayed stopped on multiple active lines, the winning process is as follows: By adding up the number of coins to be paid out based on 10 coins and the number of coins to be paid out based on the set small winning combination, 12 coins are paid out.

Then, an upper limit is set for the number of pieces to be paid out at one time, and when the symbol combination based on multiple small roles is stopped and displayed on the active line and the upper limit of the number of pieces to be paid out exceeds the upper limit value, the number of pieces of the upper limit value is paid out. .

For example, when the upper limit of the number of coins to be paid out is set to 15, and a minor combination with a payout number of 12 coins and a minor combination with a payout count of 10 coins are stopped and displayed on multiple active lines. As for the winning process, when the sum of the small winning combination set as 12 pieces and the small winning combination set as 10 pieces exceeds the upper limit value, the upper limit value of 15 pieces is paid out.

In this embodiment, medals are set to be paid out only for small winnings, but medals for the number of bets may be paid out as winning processing based on replays, or may be set in advance as winning processing based on bonuses. You may pay out the same number of medals.

<Advantageous section clear counter management process>
Among the processes executed by the game progress main according to the present embodiment, advantageous section clear counter management processing related to advantageous section management will be explained based on FIG. 11.

Set the advantageous section clear counter RWM address.

Subsequently, 2-byte subtraction processing is executed.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the advantageous section clear counter before subtraction is 0 or not, and if the value of the advantageous section clear counter before subtraction is 0, the process of determining whether the advantageous section type is 0 or not is performed. If the value of the advantageous section clear counter before the subtraction is not 0, it is determined whether the value of the advantageous section clear counter after the subtraction is 0 or not. Note that advantageous section type = 0 means that the section is not an advantageous section and is a normal section, and advantageous section type = 1 means that it is an advantageous section.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the advantageous section clear counter after the subtraction is 0 or not, and if the value of the advantageous section clear counter after the subtraction is 0, the process moves to RWM initialization processing, and after the subtraction, the value of the advantageous section clear counter is 0. If the value of the advantageous section clear counter is not 0, the process moves to acquiring the value of the MY counter.

Subsequently, in the process of acquiring the value of the MY counter, the current value of the MY counter is acquired.

Subsequently, after executing the process to obtain the value of the MY counter, it is determined whether the re-gaming activation symbol has been stopped and displayed, and if it is determined that the re-gaming activation symbol has been stopped and displayed, the value of the MY counter is The process moves to a process of determining whether or not the number exceeds the upper limit value (2400), and if it is determined that the replay activation symbol is not stopped and displayed, the process moves to a process of acquiring data in the payout number buffer. The data in the payout number buffer is data indicating the number of payouts related to winnings, and no payout (the number of payouts is 0) in the event of a loss or a missed win.

Subsequently, in the process of acquiring data in the payout number buffer, the number of payouts for the game is acquired.

Subsequently, a process is executed to add the acquired data of the payout number buffer (the number of OUT coins) to the MY counter.

Subsequently, processing for acquiring game medal number data is executed. The game medal number data is data corresponding to the number of inserted medals.

Subsequently, a process of subtracting the number of IN sheets (number of sheets inserted) from the MY counter is executed.

Subsequently, as a result of subtracting the number of IN sheets from the MY counter, if it is determined that the value of the MY counter is less than 0, an initial value is set in the MY counter and stored in the MY counter. Further, as a result of subtracting the number of IN sheets from the MY counter, if it is determined that the value of the MY counter is not less than 0, the value obtained by subtracting the number of IN sheets from the MY counter is stored in the MY counter. Note that the initial value of the MY counter is 0, and when the value of the MY counter becomes less than 0, it is corrected to 0. Further, whether the value of the MY counter is less than 0 is determined by whether the carry flag is 0 or not. The carry flag is a flag that becomes 1 when the result of the subtraction process is a negative value, and becomes 0 when the result of the subtraction process is not a negative value.

Subsequently, after saving the value of the MY counter, a process of determining whether the value of the MY counter exceeds the upper limit (2400) is executed. If the value of the MY counter exceeds the upper limit (2400), RWM initialization processing is executed and the process moves to the process of determining the advantageous section type. The section clear counter management process is ended, and if the advantageous section type is not 0, the advantageous section clear counter is set to an initial value (1500) and the advantageous section clear counter management process is ended. Furthermore, if the value of the MY counter does not exceed the upper limit (2400) in the process of determining whether or not the value of the MY counter exceeds the upper limit (2400), the advantageous section clear counter management process is ended.

Determine whether the value of the advantageous section clear counter before subtraction is 0 or not, and if the value of the advantageous section clear counter before subtraction is 0 and the advantageous section type is not 0, the process to be passed at the start of the advantageous section. This process is not executed except at the start of the advantageous section. The number 1500 stored in the advantageous section clear counter corresponds to the maximum number of games in which the advantageous section can be executed, and if the advantageous section is executed at most 1500 games, the normal section is set from the next game. This is to prevent people from becoming addicted to the game, to prevent medals from accumulating all day long, and to avoid excessively arousing the desire for gambling.

Note that the timing for setting the advantageous section type to 1 is executed in the advantageous section transition lottery process that occurs between the start switch reception and the start of reel rotation. The advantageous section transfer lottery process is a process that goes through when a conditional device number to be drawn is selected.If the advantageous section transfer lottery is won, the advantageous section type is set to 1, and even if the advantageous section transfer lottery is not won. If so, set the advantageous section type to 0 (normal section).

In the RWM initialization process executed after the value of the MY counter exceeds the upper limit value, all parameters that affect the performance of the instruction function are updated to zero. Parameters that affect the performance related to the instruction function include the number of AT games and the gaming state related to AT. Then, by updating the advantageous section type to 0, the section becomes a normal section, which is not an advantageous section, and when the value of the MY counter is 2400 or less, the process ends while maintaining the advantageous section. Note that if a replay is won in an advantageous section, the MY counter update process is not executed, but the determination process as to whether the MY counter exceeds 2400 is passed. In the case of replay, the same number of coins as the number of coins inserted is automatically bet, so OUT-IN is always 0. However, since the value of the MY counter may be updated at a timing different from the original processing due to noise or fraudulent activity, it is determined whether the upper limit value of the MY counter has been reached even during replay.

Furthermore, the advantageous section can be ended at any timing for each gaming machine other than when 1500 games have passed or when MY2400 has been exceeded. For example, this applies when winning a final lottery when a predetermined combination is won, or when playing an arbitrary number of games (less than 1500 games). In this way, when ending an advantageous section with an arbitrary end trigger, the value of the advantageous section clear counter is set to 1 before executing the advantageous section clear counter management process (it is preferable to perform AT-related processing after all reels have stopped). By setting , when the advantageous section clear counter management process is executed, the value before the subtraction of the advantageous section clear counter is 1, the subtraction result of the advantageous section clear counter becomes 0, and the advantageous section clear counter is set to 1 in the advantageous section clear counter management process. can be terminated. That is, by setting the value of the advantageous section clear counter to 1 and then subtracting 1 from the counter value, the value of the advantageous section clear counter becomes 0 and the advantageous section can be ended. Thereby, when an arbitrary end condition is achieved, processing can be performed within the same module without using a separate advantageous section end module.

In addition, the advantageous section clear counter subtraction process in the advantageous section clear counter management process is configured to be executed for any number of bets (if multiple prescribed numbers are set for the gaming machine) and in any gaming state. There is.

<Settings change process>
The setting change process executed by the main control board 100 according to this embodiment will be described using the flowchart of FIG. 10.

When the setting change mode starts (setting change processing is executed), it is determined whether the current setting value is within the normal range or not, and if it is within the normal range, the current setting value is acquired and If it is outside, "1" is saved as the set value and the set value "1" is acquired.

After obtaining the setting values, save the setting value display data. After the setting value display data is saved, lighting control is performed by referring to the setting value display data every five interrupts by dynamic lighting control which is a timer interrupt process.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the start switch 12 has been turned on from off. When it is determined that the start switch 12 has not been turned on from off, it is determined whether the setting switch has been turned on from off.

Here, when it is determined that the setting switch has not been turned from OFF to ON, it is determined again whether the start switch 12 has been turned from OFF to ON, and when it is determined that the setting switch has been turned from OFF to ON, It is determined whether the set value is greater than or equal to the maximum set value (setting 6).

If the setting value is not greater than or equal to the maximum value, it will be incremented to the current setting value, and if the setting value is greater than or equal to the maximum value, the initial value (0) will be saved as the current setting value and the process will be incremented. conduct. After incrementing the set value, the updated set value is displayed and the process returns to the process of determining whether the start switch 12 has been turned on from off.

After that, when the start switch sensor is detected and it is determined that the start switch 12 has changed from off to on, the setting value is confirmed, and the setting key switch waits until it is determined that the setting key switch has changed from on to off. When it is determined that the switch has changed from on to off, the determined setting value is stored in the main control RAM, the setting display LED is turned off, and the blocker provided in the medal selector 34 is turned on (the medals flow down to the hopper 44). (forming a passage for

Here, the setting change mode is means for determining any one of setting values 1 to 6 (on display, setting values 1 to 6). After determining one of the set values, the internal lottery table (also referred to as a winning lottery table) corresponding to the determined set value continues to be set until the next time the setting value is changed by the setting change means. In addition, a winning combination lottery table is provided in which the probability of determining the lottery result (winning probability of the winning combination) of the internal lottery differs for each set value.

The setting changing means rotates a setting key used for changing the settings by an administrator of the gaming hall while the power of the slot machine PS1 is not turned on, and holds the setting key at a rotational position where a setting key switch signal is turned on. When the power of the slot machine PS1 is turned on in the state in which the slot machine PS1 is turned on, the setting key switch signal is turned on using the power-on of the slot machine PS1 as an opportunity. In this embodiment, turning on the setting key switch signal means turning on at the rising edge (turning from off to on).If the setting key was turned on before the power was turned off, the setting key switch signal is turned on after the power is turned on. The configuration is such that the turning on of the setting key switch signal is not detected, so it does not shift to setting change mode, but even if the turning on of the setting key switch signal is treated as a level on, and it was turned on before the power was cut off. It may be configured to shift to the setting change mode if the setting key is on when the power is turned on again.

When the setting change means determines that the setting key switch signal is on, the door open signal is on, and the setting changeable flag is on, the setting change means changes the setting value of the slot machine PS1 so that the setting value can be changed. Activate mode.

The setting changeable flag is switched on and off depending on the game state. For example, it is conceivable that the setting changeable flag is turned off during the period from when the start switch 12 is operated until the end of the game, and the setting changeable flag is turned on during the other period. However, this is not the only option; it is also possible to turn off the setting changeable flag only when a specific bonus game starts or when a specific bonus is in progress, or by not providing a setting changeable flag. The configuration may be such that the settings can be changed in any state.

When the setting change mode is started, a blocker provided in the medal selector 34 is turned off, so that it is impossible to start a game by inserting medals. The setting value data that can be changed in the setting change mode has six levels: "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6". As the setting value increases, the ball output rate increases. Set up a lottery table with a high winning combination.

After starting the setting change mode, the setting display LED provided on the back of the front panel PS2 is turned on to notify that the setting change mode is activated. Then, set value display data for displaying the set value data is set and displayed on the credit number display 26 placed on the front of the front panel PS2 of the slot machine PS1 and on the back side of the front panel PS2 of the slot machine PS1. The set value is displayed by lighting up a setting display LED (not shown). When the set value data is "1", the set value display will display "1", when the set value data is "2", the set value display will display "2", and when the set value data is "3", the set value display will display "2". If the setting value data is “4”, the setting value display will display “4”; if the setting value data is “5”, the setting value display will be “5”. ” is displayed, and when the setting value data is “6”, the setting value display is “6”.

In addition, when storing the setting value data stored in the setting value data storage area in 6 levels from "0" to "5", the setting value display will be "1" when the setting value data is "0". If the setting value data is "1", the setting value display will display "2", if the setting value data is "2", the setting value display will display "3", and if the setting value data is " When the setting value data is "3", the setting value display will display "4", when the setting value data is "4", the setting value display will display "5", and when the setting value data is "5", the setting value display will be displayed. displays "6".

After starting the setting change mode, it continues to determine whether or not the sensor signal of the start switch 12 is on, and when it is determined that the start switch 12 is operated and the sensor signal of the start switch 12 is turned on, Determine the setting value and display the current setting value on the setting display LED. In other words, if it is determined that the sensor signal of the start switch 12 is turned on during the setting change mode, the set value will not be changed even if the setting switch is operated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting switch signal is turned on without determining that the sensor signal of the start switch 12 is on, the setting switch rising data is cleared and the current setting value is changed to the maximum setting value. (Setting value data "6") or more, and if it is determined that the current setting value is greater than or equal to the maximum setting value (Setting value data "6"), clear the setting value data (Setting value data "6") or more. When it is determined that the current setting value is less than the maximum setting value (setting value "1" to "5"), the setting value is incremented to the current setting value. When the setting value data is set to 6 levels from 0 to 5, the process of setting change mode is to determine whether the current setting value is greater than or equal to the maximum setting value (setting value data "5"), When it is determined that the current setting value is greater than or equal to the maximum setting value (setting value data "5"), the setting value data is cleared (setting value data is set to "0") and the current setting value becomes the maximum setting. If it is determined that the value is less than the value (setting value "0" to "4"), it may be incremented to the current setting value.

Note that when it is determined that the sensor signal of the start switch 12 is on after starting the setting change mode, the setting display LED will display a "setting value" to indicate that the setting value cannot be changed. Setting values may be displayed in a manner different from the way the setting values are displayed when settings can be changed, such as displaying "0" or displaying "_X" ("X" is the set value after confirmation) on the setting display LED. May be displayed.

<Playability using advantageous sections applicable to this embodiment>
In this embodiment, the prescribed number for starting the game is only three. In other words, the game cannot be started with anything other than 3 coins, and even when the bonus is activated, the game can only be started with 3 coins.

In the present embodiment, the effective lines consist of one line: the lower row of the left reel, the middle row of the middle reel, and the lower row of the right reel. Hereinafter, the symbol combination stopping on the active line will simply be referred to as the symbol combination stopping.

In this embodiment, there are 10 types of symbols. They are called Red Seven, Blue Seven, Bar, Gold Bar, Blank, Cherry, Watermelon, Bell A, Bell B, and Replay, respectively. Note that the symbol names and symbol types are just examples, and there is no problem in changing them.

The reel arrangement of this embodiment will be explained using FIG. 12. As shown in FIG. 12, the number of symbols on one reel is 20, and includes a first reel (left reel), a second reel (middle reel), and a third reel (right reel).

The symbol combinations in this embodiment are shown in FIGS. 13 to 18. The item "winning symbol/operating symbol/pattern symbol name" in the figure indicates the name of the condition device corresponding to the symbol combination. Further, "Regulated number and gaming state" indicates a benefit to be given when the symbol combinations for each specified number are stopped. If "1st type BB" is written in the "Regulated number and gaming status" item, it means that the 1st type BB will be awarded when the symbol combination stops, and if it is written as "replay" indicates that a replay will be awarded if the symbol combination stops; if a number is written, it indicates the number of coins to be paid out if the symbol combination stops; if "-" is written, it is applicable. This indicates that the symbol combination does not stop in the game state where the symbol combination is set.

In this embodiment, the bonus includes a type 1 BB, and the termination condition is the payout of more than 11 game medals. In addition, this type 1 BB is a type in which the RB operates continuously, and the RB ends when either two wins or two games are met, and when the RB termination conditions are met, the type 1 BB termination conditions. The RB is designed to operate automatically until (payout of more than 11 game medals) is met.

As shown in Figure 13, there are 8 types of type 1 BB symbol combinations, and the attraction rate of the symbols related to the type 1 BB symbol combinations on each reel (probability that the symbols related to the symbol combinations will stop) is not 100%. In order to display a type 1 BB symbol combination, each reel must be stamped.

In this embodiment, the RT transition starts from non-RT (also referred to as 1st type BB non-internal), and if 1st type BB is won during non-RT and the 1st type BB symbol combination does not stop, the next game ( (It may be at the end of the game) to RT1 (also referred to as 1st type BB inside), and when the 1st type BB symbol combination stops during RT1, RT1 ends and 1st type BB is activated from the next game (1st type BB (also referred to as "medium"), and when the operation of the 1st type BB is completed, the next game shifts to non-RT. Furthermore, since setting change starts from non-RT, if the setting change device operates while RT1 or type 1 BB is in operation, non-RT is set when the setting change device finishes operating. Note that the RT state and the Type 1 BB operating state are not cleared in a power outage in which the setting change device does not operate (sometimes referred to as a normal power outage), so when the power is restored, the state starts from the state before the power outage. Specifically, if a power outage occurs during type 1 BB and then the power is restored, the operating state of the type 1 BB is in type 1 BB, and if a power outage occurs in a situation where RT1 is present, then the power is restored. In this case, the RT state is configured to be RT1.

The conditioner in this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. In the item "winning replay" in FIG. 19, a number corresponding to the winning number is listed. In addition, the condition device that operates is described in the item “condition device”. Further, in the "common name" item, a simple name of the operating conditional device is described. For example, the common name corresponding to the replay-H condition device is "Right push: Strong-battle number", and it is shown that the first stop of the right reel stops the strong battle number, and the winning-A1 condition device The corresponding common name is "push order bell group A 123", and the operation modes of the left reel first stop, middle reel second stop, and right reel third stop are the correct operation modes (in this case, winning 52 (winning 01 to 02) , 09, 29 to 31), the symbol combinations (in which the number of coins paid out is larger than those of 29 to 31) are stopped. Further, the symbol combination corresponding to the conditional device is shown in the "Component" item. For example, if the replay-A condition device is activated (wins), it is shown that replay 01 or replay 02 can be displayed. Note that in the item "Win Replay", the part where "0" is written corresponds to a loss.

The internal lottery results that can be determined by the internal lottery means in the 1st type BB non-internal lottery in this embodiment will be explained using FIGS. 20 to 22. The internal lottery results that can be determined by the internal lottery means in 1st type BB non-internal are 1st type BB, replay-A, replay-B, replay-C (+1st type BB), replay-D (+1st type). BB), Replay-E (+1st type BB), Replay-F (+1st type BB), Replay-G (+1st type BB), Replay-H (+1st type BB), Replay-I (+1st type BB) BB), Replay-J (+1 type BB), Winning-A1, Winning-A2, Winning-A3, Winning-A4, Winning-A5, Winning-A6, Winning-B1, Winning-B2, Winning-B3, Winning -B4, Prize-winning-B5, Prize-winning-B6, Prize-winning-C1, Prize-winning-C2, Prize-winning-C3, Prize-winning-C4, Prize-winning-C5, Prize-winning-C6, Prize-winning-D (+1 type BB), Prize-winning-E (+1 type BB), Prize-F (+1st type BB), Prize-G (+1st type BB), Prize-H (+1st type BB), Prize-I (+1st type BB), Prize-J (+1st type BB), Prize- K (+1 type BB), and there are no outliers.

In addition, the above-mentioned description "Re-gaming-C (+1st type BB)" indicates that re-gaming-C and 1st type BB are won at the same time, and in FIGS. 20, 21, and 22, "Bonus conditions This corresponds to the fact that the name is listed in both "device" and "winning replay." In addition, the "Internal Lottery" item in Figures 20, 21, and 22 indicates whether or not it is an internal lottery target for each gaming state, with "○" indicating an internal lottery target and "x" indicating an internal lottery target. It shows that it is not the target. In addition, the "advantageous section transition" item in FIGS. 20, 21, and 22 indicates whether or not the advantageous section transition lottery is executed for each gaming state, and "○" indicates whether the advantageous zone transition lottery is executed. , "x" indicates that the advantageous section transition lottery is not executed. In addition, in this embodiment, when the advantageous section transfer lottery is executed, the lottery is configured such that the lottery is won 100% and the lottery is transferred to the advantageous section. In addition, the items "R1" to "R6" in FIGS. 20, 21, and 22 indicate the winning numbers of the internal lottery corresponding to the set values, and 65,536 winning numbers are allocated to each gaming state. .

In the present embodiment, the internal lottery results that can be determined by the internal lottery means in the 1st type BB are replay-A, replay-B, replay-C, replay-D, replay-E, and replay. -F, Replay-G, Replay-H, Replay-I, Replay-J, Winning-A1, Winning-A2, Winning-A3, Winning-A4, Winning-A5, Winning-A6, Winning-B1 , Prize-B2, Prize-B3, Prize-B4, Prize-B5, Prize-B6, Prize-C1, Prize-C2, Prize-C3, Prize-C4, Prize-C5, Prize-C6, Prize-D, Prize-win -E, winning-F, winning-G, winning-H, winning-I, winning-J, winning-K, and there is no loss.

In this embodiment, the internal lottery result that can be determined by the internal lottery means in the 1st type BB is one of winning -K, winning -L, and losing.

In this embodiment, the conditions for transitioning from the normal section to the advantageous section are replay-C, replay-D, replay-E, replay-F, replay-G, replay-H, and replay-I. , Replay-J, Winning-A1, Winning-A2, Winning-A3, Winning-A4, Winning-A5, Winning-A6, Winning-B1, Winning-B2, Winning-B3, Winning-B4, Winning-B5, Prize-B6, Prize-C1, Prize-C2, Prize-C3, Prize-C4, Prize-C5, Prize-C6, Prize-D, Prize-E, Prize-F, Prize-G, Prize-H, Prize- This means that either I, Winning-J, or Winning-K is won, and winning of Re-gaming-A or Re-gaming-B does not result in a transition to the advantageous section. That is, in the normal section, replay-C, replay-D, replay-E, replay-F, replay-G, replay-H, replay-I, replay-J, winning-A1, Prize-A2, Prize-A3, Prize-A4, Prize-A5, Prize-A6, Prize-B1, Prize-B2, Prize-B3, Prize-B4, Prize-B5, Prize-B6, Prize-C1, Prize- C2, Prize-C3, Prize-C4, Prize-C5, Prize-C6, Prize-D, Prize-E, Prize-F, Prize-G, Prize-H, Prize-I, Prize-J, Prize-K. If any of them wins, the next game will be an advantageous period.

In this embodiment, during the normal section, replay-C, replay-D, replay-E, replay-F, replay-G, replay-H, replay-I, replay-J, and winning. -A1, Award-winning -A2, Award-winning -A3, Award-winning -A4, Award-winning -A5, Award-winning -A6, Award-winning -B1, Award-winning -B2, Award-winning -B3, Award-winning -B4, Award-winning -B5, Award-winning -B6, Award-winning -C1 , Prize-C2, Prize-C3, Prize-C4, Prize-C5, Prize-C6, Prize-D, Prize-E, Prize-F, Prize-G, Prize-H, Prize-I, Prize-J, Prize-winner. - If any of the K's hits, the game will always move to the advantageous section. That is, in the normal section, replay-C, replay-D, replay-E, replay-F, replay-G, replay-H, replay-I, replay-J, winning-A1, Prize-A2, Prize-A3, Prize-A4, Prize-A5, Prize-A6, Prize-B1, Prize-B2, Prize-B3, Prize-B4, Prize-B5, Prize-B6, Prize-C1, Prize- C2, Prize-C3, Prize-C4, Prize-C5, Prize-C6, Prize-D, Prize-E, Prize-F, Prize-G, Prize-H, Prize-I, Prize-J, Prize-K. If any of them wins, the next game will be an advantageous period.

In this embodiment, in RT1 (inside type 1 BB), there is no loss (either the re-playing role or the winning combination will definitely be won), so once you move to RT1, the push order bell C group (winning - C1 ~C6) It is possible to stop the BB symbol combination in some operation modes when winning. The part when the push order bell C group is won is, for example, the middle reel or part of the first stop of the right reel when the winning prize-C1 is won. In addition, when winning - C1 is won in the advantageous section, the correct press order (in this case, "1, 2, 3" is displayed on the LCD) will be announced, so the winning 38 will stop and the BB symbol combination will not stop. With this configuration, the user can maintain RT1 by notifying the operation mode in which the BB symbol combination does not stop.Also, the number of misses during RT1 is set to 4 (the minimum probability of winning in the design is 1). /17500 or more), and by configuring the BB symbol combination so that it does not stop for other re-gaming combinations or winning combinations, the BB symbol combination may be configured to stop only when it is a loss.

In this embodiment, the gaming states managed by the main control means in the advantageous section include the advantageous section general state, chance zone (also referred to as CZ), and AT. , transition from AT to advantageous section general state or CZ, respectively. Further, the gaming state managed by the main control means in the normal section is only the normal section general state, and the gaming state does not change until it moves to the advantageous section. In addition, in the advantageous section general state and the normal section general state, the flags related to the gaming state to be managed by the main control means may be in the same state or may be in different states.

The normal state is a state in which the advantageous winning press order is not announced when any one of winnings A1 to C6 is won as a result of the internal lottery.

CZ is a state that enters when you win any of WIN-D to WIN-H as an internal lottery result in the normal state, and during CZ, AT depends on the internal lottery result during CZ or the lottery at the start of CZ A lottery will be held to transfer to.

AT is a state that is entered when winning the AT lottery in CZ, and is a state that notifies you of an advantageous operation mode (winning press order) when winning any of Win-A1 to Win-C6.

In this embodiment, the conditions for always transitioning from the advantageous section to the normal section are set when the number of games played in the advantageous section reaches a predetermined number (for example, 1500), when MY in the advantageous section exceeds 2400. When the initialization process based on the change is performed, the RAM clear switch becomes valid, and the end condition of AT and the end condition of advantageous section do not match. However, part of the end conditions for AT (such as when the ending is reached or when the number of acquired coins exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 2300 coins)) may be used as the end condition for the advantageous section. Furthermore, when the CZ is hit in the advantageous section, the shift may be made to the normal section. In this case, it is determined whether or not to end the advantageous section depending on the situation of the advantageous section when the player hits CZ in the advantageous section.

The CZ is decided by lottery when you win any of the prizes from Prize-D to Prize-H (hereinafter also referred to as rare prizes), and basically the harder it is to win the internal lottery result, the more likely you are to win the CZ. It's getting easier. In this embodiment, the order in which it is easy to win CZ is WIN-G>WIN-E>WIN-H>WIN-F>WIN-D.

In this embodiment, the CZ does not occur immediately after winning, but after hitting the CZ, the CZ starts when the player shifts from the advantageous section to the normal section and then back to the advantageous section (at the time of transition to the advantageous section in RT1, Be sure to start CZ). Thereby, it is possible to solve the problem that when a player wins from CZ to AT, the ball cannot be put out because the remaining number of games in the advantageous section is small. In particular, specifications with a smaller net increase in number of coins (expected number of coins to be acquired per game, also referred to as slope value) are more effective. For example, in the case of a net increase of 2 coins, the maximum number of coins acquired in the advantageous section is approximately 2400 coins, so 1200 games are required to acquire 2400 coins. However, it is not always the case that AT is performed during the advantageous section, and the game transitions between various gaming states such as the normal state and CZ mentioned above, so the number of remaining games in the advantageous section may be small (for example, 500) when AT starts. There are many. In this case, even if the game is played 500 times, the net increase in the number of coins is 2, so the player ends up acquiring about 1000 coins, making it difficult to meet the user's expectations for acquisition. Therefore, by ending the advantageous section once with CZ winning and starting CZ when moving to a new advantageous section, even if CZ is played 100 times, the advantageous section can still be played 1400 times. , it is possible to create a sense of expectation among users to acquire 2400 coins.

Further, the probability of winning the CZ from the second time onward within the same advantageous section may be changed depending on the value of the number of coins obtained since the start of the advantageous section (cumulative number of paid-out coins - cumulative number of inputs). For example, if you start CZ at the time of transition to an advantageous area and hit AT, the probability of winning CZ in the remaining advantageous area after the end of AT will be changed depending on whether you get 50 pieces or 1000 pieces in that AT. There are several possible ways. In this case, the probability of winning CZ after acquiring 50 coins may be made higher or lower than the probability of winning CZ after acquiring 1000 coins.

If you make the probability of winning CZ after acquiring 50 coins higher than the probability of winning CZ after acquiring 1000 coins, it will be easier to give the next CZ to users who did not acquire much through AT, which will reduce expectations. It is possible to play while maintaining the same.

If you want to make the CZ winning probability after acquiring 50 coins lower than the CZ winning probability after acquiring 1000 coins, there are few remaining advantageous periods after acquiring 1000 coins (1500 times, which is the end condition for the advantageous period). Since the number of games played is close to 2,400 coins), even if the probability of CZ is made high, the gambling spirit will not increase significantly due to the ball payout design, and it is possible to create a new sense of expectation for the user.

When a CZ is won, a congratulatory performance is performed in which characters such as ``success'' or ``win'' are displayed during the game in which the CZ was won or after a predetermined number of games (which can be arbitrarily set according to the specifications of the game machine). This allows the user to understand that some kind of benefit has been given, and therefore allows the user to intuitively understand the progress of the game. Then, from the next game onward, a display to the effect that "CZ is in preparation" is displayed by lighting the liquid crystal or a lamp, thereby creating a sense of anticipation for the CZ in the user. When the CZ winning game is in an advantageous section, being in CZ preparation corresponds to a state from the end of the advantageous section to the transition to the advantageous section again in the subsequent normal section. Since "CZ Preparing" is internally a normal section, it is a disadvantageous situation for users who do not perform AT lottery or AT add-on at all, but the ball payout rate during CZ Preparation is considered to be AT state. By comparing and lowering the number, you can allocate the balls to AT and create a wave of balls. In addition, during CZ preparation, expectations for CZ are created, so even if the ball payout rate is lowered, it is difficult for the user to feel that they are losing out.

Further, although the advantageous period ends with the next game in which the CZ is won, a predetermined number of games may be executed from the game in which the CZ is won until the advantageous period ends. In this case, it is conceivable that in the game in which the player has won the CZ, an announcement that the player has won the CZ is not made, and the game is played a predetermined number of times based on an effect indicating whether or not the player has won the CZ (so-called precursor effect or continuous effect). Then, a blessing effect is executed at the timing when a predetermined number of games have been executed, and CZ preparation is in progress from the next game. This is because the advantageous section lamp is lit during the advantageous section, and when the advantageous section ends, the advantageous section lamp turns off. This is to prevent you from knowing whether or not you hit CZ based on the lighting mode. In addition, it may be possible to shift from the advantageous section to the normal section during CZ preparation, and in this case, since it is already notified that CZ preparation is in progress, the result will depend on the lighting mode of the advantageous section lamp during CZ preparation. There is no such thing as knowing in advance.

Further, the CZ preparation period does not necessarily have to be a normal section, but may be set to an advantageous section. Even in this case, the percentage of executing CZ Preparing in normal sections is relatively higher than the percentage of executing CZ Preparing in advantageous sections, and as a condition for executing CZ Preparing in advantageous sections, The condition is that the remaining number of games remaining is a predetermined number (for example, 1000 times) or more. With this configuration, CZ preparation is executed when there is enough remaining number of games in the advantageous section, so even if CZ is executed after CZ preparation, and as a result AT is executed, it is sufficient. It is possible to create a feeling of hitting the ball. In addition, since the normal section is not used during CZ preparation, it is possible to create a surprise such as starting AT immediately after CZ preparation. If a section is used, AT cannot be started because CZ will be executed at the start of the advantageous section).

In addition, when performing CZ preparation in the above-mentioned advantageous section, it may be determined whether or not to award AT by lottery when winning any of Win-D to Win-H during CZ preparation. . In this case, the order of the rare hands that are easy to win AT in the AT lottery may be the same as the order that is easy to win CZ, or Winning-E> Winning-G> Winning-F> Winning-H> Winning-D The order may be partially different, such as the order of . With this configuration, the user can expect to win a rare combination even while preparing for CZ.

Further, in order to prevent a user who has won a rare combination but not an AT from losing his or her desire to play, a benefit different from the AT may be given. Such benefits may include, for example, displaying a two-dimensional code that can be read by a user terminal, or displaying a setting suggestion effect that allows setting values to be determined. The benefit may be granted more easily as the number of games played in the advantageous section is closer to the predetermined number (for example, 1500), or it may be granted when the number of CZs is a specific number (for example, a multiple of 5). You can make it easier.

Processing related to setting changes in this embodiment will be explained.

When the setting change device is started, the RAM initialization process described above is performed at the timing when the setting change device is started or when the setting values are confirmed. If the gaming state immediately before this RAM initialization processing is performed is RT1, when the RAM initialization processing is performed, the information of RT1 is initialized, and the gaming state after the RAM initialization processing becomes non-RT. Also, if the gaming state immediately before the RAM initialization process is in type 1 BB, when the RAM initialization process is performed, the information in type 1 BB will be initialized, and the gaming status after the RAM initialization process will be non-type. It becomes RT.

Further, if the gaming state immediately before the RAM initialization processing is performed is an advantageous section, when the RAM initialization processing is performed, the information of the advantageous section is initialized, and the gaming state after the RAM initialization processing becomes the normal section. In other words, the gaming state during the advantageous section is the normal state, CZ, or AT, but when the RAM initialization process is performed in any state, the game shifts to the normal section.

When the RAM initialization process is performed, the game will start from the non-RT and normal section, but in this embodiment, the CZ is started when transitioning from the normal section to the advantageous section. After changing the settings, the player is in an advantageous state (a state in which the CZ can be started by shifting to the advantageous section without playing a game to make the CZ hit).

By configuring in this way, the customers will be in an advantageous state after the setting is changed, so customers can be motivated to come to the store in the morning, and the effect of attracting customers can be increased.

Furthermore, if a too advantageous state (a state in which the player shifts to CZ after playing the game a few times) is set after changing the settings, there is a risk that gambling will be greatly stimulated (so-called morning game). Therefore, it is conceivable to change the contents of CZ depending on the situation when moving to an advantageous section.

In this case, if the RT state of the next game that has been decided to move to an advantageous section is RT1, CZ is started because it is a basic game flow, and the RT state of the next game that has been decided to move to an advantageous section is not. If it is RT, it is assumed that the settings have been changed and CZ is not started. The games that have been decided to move to the advantageous section include the above-mentioned replay-C, replay-D, replay-E, replay-F, replay-G, replay-H, replay-I, and replay. Game-J, Prize-A1, Prize-A2, Prize-A3, Prize-A4, Prize-A5, Prize-A6, Prize-B1, Prize-B2, Prize-B3, Prize-B4, Prize-B5, Prize- B6, Prize-C1, Prize-C2, Prize-C3, Prize-C4, Prize-C5, Prize-C6, Prize-D, Prize-E, Prize-F, Prize-G, Prize-H, Prize-I, This means that either Prize-J or Prize-K won.

Also, replay-C, replay-D, replay-E, replay-F, replay-G, replay-H, replay-I, replay-J, winning-D, winning-E, Winning-F, Winning-G, Winning-H, Winning-I, Winning-J, and Winning-K are won twice with Type 1 BB, so the RT status of the next game after winning becomes RT1 and CZ starts. , Prize-A1, Prize-A2, Prize-A3, Prize-A4, Prize-A5, Prize-A6, Prize-B1, Prize-B2, Prize-B3, Prize-B4, Prize-B5, Prize-B6, Prize-winner. -C1, Winning Prize-C2, Winning Prize-C3, Winning Prize-C4, Winning Prize-C5, and Winning Prize-C6 do not overlap with Type 1 BB, so the next game in which the prize is won is a non-RT, and CZ is not started.

With such a configuration, since there is a case where the game shifts to an advantageous section in non-RT, it is possible to suppress specifications related to mornings such as shifting to CZ after playing the game several times after changing the settings, and it is possible to suppress the gambling nature.

It is also conceivable to reduce the gambling quality by using a specification that changes the gaming state managed by the main control means in the advantageous section by referring to the RT state of the next game that has been decided to move to the advantageous section. In this case, the advantageous section that has transitioned to non-RT (not inside type 1 BB) will not perform AT, and the advantageous zone that has transitioned to RT1 (inside type 1 BB) will have the possibility of performing AT. Good too. With such a configuration, if the game moves to an advantageous zone in non-RT after changing the settings, it is not possible to obtain balls because AT is not performed, so the gambling effect is suppressed. The end condition for the advantageous section at this time may be until the player hits the CZ mentioned above, or may be the completion of a predetermined number of games (for example, 1500 times).

In addition, the CZ transition is controlled by referring to the RT status of the next game that won the advantageous section transition lottery, but is not limited to this, and the operating conditional device of the game that won the advantageous zone transition lottery is controlled. The CZ transition may be controlled by reference. In this case, if the prize-A1 is won inside the 1st type BB in the normal section, the CZ will start at the start of the advantageous section based on the condition device of the 1st type BB and prize-A1 being activated. Control. Furthermore, when a winning prize-A1 is won during the first type BB non-interior in the normal section, control is performed so as not to start the CZ at the start of the advantageous section based on the fact that the winning prize-A1 condition device is operating.

In this embodiment, only type 1 BB is selected as a lottery target, but instead, RB or MB may be selected as a lottery target, or two or all of type 1 BB, RB, and MB may be selected as lottery targets. .

<Control corresponding to power cutoff while various switches are pressed according to the present embodiment>
The front panel PS2 is closed, the game has ended, 3 bets have not been made (including situations where automatic bets have not been made), and the number of credits stored is greater than the number that can be 3 bets ( For example, in a situation where the number of credits in a situation where no bet is placed is 3 or more, or in a situation where a bet is made and the number of credits is 2 or more (hereinafter referred to as the MAX bet possible state), the MAX bet switch 18 is operated (pressed ), the MAX bet process is executed and 3 is stored as the number of bets, and the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are lit (before the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed, the 1 bet lamp, 2 bed lamp and 3 bed lamp are off).

Note that not only under the situation where the front panel PS2 is closed, but also under the situation where the front panel PS2 is open, the game is over and 3 bets have not been placed (in situations where no automatic bet has been placed). ), and the number of credits that is greater than the number that allows for 3 bets is stored (for example, the number of credits in a situation where no bet is placed is 3 or more, or the number of credits in a situation where 1 bet is made is 2 or more). Under the circumstances, when the MAX bet switch 18 is operated (pressed), the MAX bet process is executed, 3 is stored as the number of bets, and the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are lit ( The 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are off before the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed. In the following description, unless otherwise specified, when the power is turned on, the front panel PS2 is closed, but it may be configured to behave in the same way even when the front panel PS2 is open. .

In addition, the MAX bet possible state includes a situation where no bet is placed, a situation where 1 bet is placed, and a situation where 2 bets are placed, but when the MAX bet switch 18 is operated, 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, 3 bet The lamp lights up anew when the MAX bet is possible, which is a situation where no bet has been placed, and when the MAX bet is possible when a 1 bet has been placed, a new lamp lights up when the 1 bet lamp is already lit. The 2-bet lamp and 3-bet lamp will light up, and in the MAX bet state where 2 bets have been placed, the 3-bet lamp will light up even if the 1-bet lamp and 2-bet lamp are already lit. It has become.

Furthermore, in the MAX bet enabled state, the MAX bet lamp is lit, notifying the player that the operation of the MAX bet switch 18 is valid. Then, when the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed while the MAX bet lamp is lit in the MAX bet enabled state (when the sensor that detects the MAX bet switch 18 changes from OFF to ON), the MAX bet lamp is turned off. In other words, even if the MAX bet switch 18 is being pressed (the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed and not released, and the sensor of the MAX bet switch 18 remains ON), the MAX bet lamp will not turn on. Lights out.

Also, in a situation where the MAX bet is possible and the gaming machine is unable to operate due to a power outage and the operating voltage falls below the threshold, the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed, and the power is turned on while the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed. If this occurs (if the power-off recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp lights up and the MAX bet process is not executed. Further, since the MAX bet switch 18 is currently being pressed, MAX bet processing by pressing the MAX bet switch 18 anew cannot be performed. In other words, since the MAX bet switch 18 is being pressed (the sensor signal of the MAX bet switch is on), the MAX bet switch 18 cannot be pressed and the MAX bet process cannot be performed.

As a result, even if, for example, the MAX bet switch 18 is unintentionally operated when the power is turned on after a power outage (such as a situation where the hand is placed on the MAX bet switch 18), the bet will not be placed. Even in such a case, it is possible to accurately notify that the operation of the MAX bet switch 18 is effective by the lighting mode of the MAX bet lamp. For this reason, the player who recognizes that the operation of the MAX bet switch 18 is valid, once releases the MAX bet switch 18 that he was pressing (after the sensor of the MAX bet switch 18 changes from ON to OFF), By pressing the MAX bet switch 18 again (by turning the sensor of the MAX bet switch 18 from OFF to ON), a MAX bet can be made (MAX bet processing is performed).

Further, for example, if a problem occurs in the return spring or sensor of the MAX bet switch 18 before or after the power is cut off, and the pressed state of the MAX bet switch 18 is not released, the MAX bet lamp can be turned on. Even if bet processing is not possible, it is possible to inform the administrator that there is no problem with the software.

In addition, in a situation where the MAX bet is possible and the gaming machine is unable to operate due to a power outage and the operating voltage falls below the threshold, the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed, and the power is turned on while the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed. (when the power-off recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp lights up and the MAX bet process is not executed, but if the 1 bet switch 19 is newly operated (pressed). (by the sensor detecting the 1-bet switch 19 being turned from OFF to ON), the 1-bet process can be executed.

As a result, even if there is a situation where the MAX bet switch 18 is unintentionally operated (such as a situation where the hand is placed on the MAX bet switch 18) when the power is turned on after a power outage, the MAX bet lamp It is possible to notify that bet processing is possible by the lighting mode of , and to indicate that the 1-bet switch 19 can be operated. Furthermore, even in such a case, the operation of the 1-bet switch 19 is effective, so that the game can proceed.

In addition, in a situation where the MAX bet is possible and the gaming machine is unable to operate due to a power outage and the operating voltage falls below the threshold, the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed, and the power is turned on while the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed. MAX bet processing may be executed when the power failure recovery processing is executed (when the power-off recovery processing is executed). In this case, the MAX bet lamp may be on or off after the power is turned on. If the MAX bet lamp is lit after the power is turned on, it indicates that the 1 bet switch 19 can be operated, and when the 1 bet switch 19 is operated, the 3 bet state changes to the 1 bet state and the credit is The difference "2" is returned (if the number of credits is 50 in a 3-bet state, the difference cannot be returned to credits, so even if the 1-bet switch 19 is operated, the 1-bet state does not change to 3) In order to maintain the bet state, the MAX bet lamp does not light up (is off) after the power is turned on. If the MAX bet lamp is off after the power is turned on, it is possible to indicate that the MAX bet process has been executed. Also, whether the MAX bet lamp is on or off after the power is turned on, a 3 bet sound (1 bet sound 3 times) is output when the power is turned on to notify that the MAX bet process has been executed. It becomes possible to do so.

Subsequently, when the 1-bet switch 19 is operated (pressed) in the MAX bet possible state (no bet has been placed), 1 is stored as the number of bets, and the 1-bet lamp is lit. Furthermore, since the operation of the MAX bet switch 18 is still valid, the MAX bet lamp is also lit.

In addition, in a state in which a MAX bet is possible (a state in which no bets are placed), when a power outage occurs and the operating voltage falls below the threshold, and the gaming machine becomes unable to operate, the 1 bet switch 19 is pressed and the 1 bet switch 19 If the power is turned on while the button is pressed (if the power-off recovery process is executed while the sensor of the 1-bet switch 19 remains ON), the MAX bet lamp lights up and the 1-bet process ends. It is no longer executed. Further, since the 1-bet switch 19 is being pressed down, the 1-bet process cannot be performed by pressing the 1-bet switch 19 anew.

As a result, even if, for example, the 1-bet switch 19 is unintentionally operated when the power is turned on after a power outage (for example, the hand is placed on the 1-bet switch 19), the bet will not be placed. It is possible to prevent the bet from being put away, and even in such a case, it is possible to notify that bet processing is possible by the lighting mode of the MAX bet lamp and to indicate that the 1 bet switch 19 can be operated. ing. For this reason, a player who recognizes that the operation of the MAX bet switch 18 or 1 bet switch 19 is valid, once releases the 1 bet switch 19 that had been pressed down (the sensor of the 1 bet switch 19 changes from ON to OFF). 1 bet switch 18), press the 1 bet switch 19 again, or without releasing the 1 bet switch 19 that was pressed (the sensor of the 1 bet switch 19 remains ON), the MAX bet switch 18 By pressing (by turning the sensor of the MAX bet switch 18 from OFF to ON), 1 bet processing or MAX bet processing can be performed.

In addition, in a state in which a MAX bet is possible (a state in which no bets are placed), when a power outage occurs and the operating voltage falls below the threshold, and the gaming machine becomes unable to operate, the 1 bet switch 19 is pressed and the 1 bet switch 19 If the power is turned on while the button is pressed (when the power-off recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp lights up and the 1 bet process is not executed, but the MAX bet switch 18 is newly turned on. When operated (pressed), MAX bet processing can be executed.

As a result, even if the 1 bet switch 19 is unintentionally operated (such as a hand placed on the 1 bet switch 19) when the power is turned on after a power outage, the MAX bet lamp It is possible to inform that bet processing is possible by the lighting mode of , and to indicate that the MAX bet switch 18 can be operated. Furthermore, even in such a case, the game can proceed because the operation of the MAX bet switch 18 is effective.

In addition, in a situation where the MAX bet is possible and the power is cut off and the operating voltage drops below the threshold and the gaming machine becomes unable to operate, the 1 bet switch 19 is pressed and the power is turned on while the 1 bet switch 19 is pressed. 1 bet processing may be executed in the case where the 1-bet processing is executed (when the power-off recovery processing is executed). In this case, the MAX bet lamp is lit after the power is turned on, indicating that the MAX bet switch 18 can be operated, and when the MAX bet switch 18 is operated, the 1 bet state changes to the 3 bet state. Further, by outputting a 1-bet sound when the power is turned on, it is possible to notify that the 1-bet process has been executed.

In addition, in a state in which a MAX bet is possible (a situation in which no bet is placed), a power outage occurs and the operating voltage falls below the threshold, making the gaming machine unable to operate, and the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed (the front panel PS2 is Even if it is not open or has already been opened), if the power is turned on while the MAX bet switch 18 is being pressed while the front panel PS2 is open (the power is turned off) If the return process is executed), the MAX bet lamp lights up and the MAX bet process is not executed, but if the MAX bet switch 18 is continued to be pressed, a new 1 bet switch is activated. When 19 is operated (pressed), a 1 bet process can be executed. In addition, in a state in which a MAX bet is possible (a situation in which no bet is placed), a power outage occurs and the operating voltage falls below the threshold, making the gaming machine unable to operate, and the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed (the front panel PS2 is Even if it is not open or has already been opened), if the power is turned on while the MAX bet switch 18 is being pressed while the front panel PS2 is open (the power is turned off) If the return process is executed), the MAX bet lamp lights up and the MAX bet process is not executed, but the MAX bet switch 18 is released and the MAX bet switch 18 is newly operated (pressed). This makes it possible to execute MAX bet processing. In this case, even if the 1 bet switch 19 or the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed anew and the 1 bet process or the MAX bet process is executed, the system is configured so that the 1 bet sound or the 3 bet sound is not output. Alternatively, the 1 bet switch 19 or MAX bet switch 18 may be pressed anew to execute 1 bet processing or MAX bet processing, resulting in a 3 bet and the front panel PS2 is open. Below, when the start switch 12 is operated (pressed down), the reel rotation process is executed and each reel rotates, but the configuration may be such that the start sound is not output.

As a result, even if, for example, the MAX bet switch 18 is unintentionally operated when the power is turned on after a power outage (such as a situation where the hand is placed on the MAX bet switch 18), the bet will not be placed. Even in such a case, it is possible to accurately notify that the operation of the MAX bet switch 18 is effective by the lighting mode of the MAX bet lamp.

Also, for example, if a problem occurs in the return spring or sensor of the MAX bet switch 18 before or after the power is cut off, and the pressed state of the MAX bet switch 18 is not released, by lighting the MAX bet lamp, the MAX bet switch 18 can be activated. Even if bet processing is not possible, it is possible to inform the administrator that it is not a software malfunction.

In addition, by enabling 1 bet processing by the 1 bet switch 19 even if the front panel PS2 is open, it is possible to perform tasks that the administrator performs when the front panel PS2 is open (for example, checking settings or settings, etc.), it is possible to check the operation to see if 1 bet processing is possible normally. Furthermore, when playing at a game parlor, playing with the front panel PS2 open is not normal, so by purposely not outputting the 1 bet sound, it is possible to make the player aware that this is not normal. Become.

In addition, in a state in which a MAX bet is possible (a situation in which no bet is placed), a power outage occurs and the operating voltage falls below the threshold, making the gaming machine unable to operate, and the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed (the front panel PS2 is Even if it is not open or has already been opened), if the power is turned on while the MAX bet switch 18 is being pressed while the front panel PS2 is open (the power is turned off) If the return process is executed), the MAX bet lamp will not light up, the MAX bet process will not be executed, and even if the 1 bet switch 19 is newly operated (pressed), the 1 bet process will not be executed, and after that, If the front panel PS2 is closed (closing is detected) while the MAX bet switch 18 continues to be operated (pressed), the MAX bet lamp lights up, and when the 1 bet switch 19 is newly operated (pressed). An embodiment may also be adopted in which 1 bet processing is possible.

As a result, even if, for example, the MAX bet switch 18 is unintentionally operated when the power is turned on after a power outage (such as a situation where the hand is placed on the MAX bet switch 18), the bet will not be placed. This makes it possible to prevent the player from putting the player away, and by not lighting up the MAX bet lamp, it becomes possible to make the player aware that he or she cannot proceed with the game. Furthermore, when the front panel PS2 is closed, even if the MAX bet switch 18 continues to be operated (pressed), the bet operation with the 1 bet switch 19 is enabled, so that the progress of the game is not hindered as much as possible. It becomes possible to

In addition, in a situation where the MAX bet switch 18 and 1 bet switch 19 are pressed down in a situation where the gaming machine cannot operate due to a power outage and the operating voltage falls below the threshold value while the MAX bet switch 18 and 1 bet switch 19 are in a MAX bet enabled state, the MAX bet switch 18 and When the power is turned on while the bet switch 19 is pressed (when the power-off recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp lights up and the MAX bet process and 1 bet process are not executed. Furthermore, in this case, if the MAX bet switch 18 is released while the 1 bet switch 19 continues to be pressed and the MAX bet switch 18 is newly operated (depressed), the MAX bet process can be executed. Similarly, when the MAX bet switch 18 and the 1 bet switch 19 are pressed in a state where the MAX bet switch 18 and the 1 bet switch 19 are pressed, in a situation where a power outage occurs and the operating voltage falls below the threshold value and the gaming machine becomes unable to operate. If the power is turned on while the 1-bet switch 19 is pressed (when the power-off recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp lights up and the MAX bet process and 1 bet process are not executed. If the 1 bet switch 19 is released while the MAX bet switch 18 is being pressed and the 1 bet switch 19 is newly operated (depressed), the 1 bet process can be executed.

As a result, for example, a situation where the MAX bet switch 18 and 1 bet switch 19 are unintentionally operated when the power is turned on after a power outage occurs (a situation where the hands are placed on the MAX bet switch 18 and 1 bet switch 19) etc.), it is possible to prevent the bet from being placed, and even in such a case, it is accurately notified by the lighting mode of the MAX bet lamp that the operation of the MAX bet switch 18 is valid. I can do it. Further, even in such a case, the operation of the MAX bet switch 18 and the 1 bet switch 19 is effective, so that the game can proceed.

The front panel PS2 is closed, the game has ended, no bets have been placed (replay is not activated), and normal effects are being displayed (effects other than continuous effects or AT effects) or during a demonstration. In a situation where the screen is being displayed (hereinafter referred to as a menu screen displayable state), when the sub-switch 20 is operated (pressed) (when the sensor that detects the sub-switch 20 changes from OFF to ON), the menu screen display process is performed. is executed, and a menu screen is displayed on the display device 32.

Furthermore, in a situation where the menu screen can be displayed, the sub-switch 20 is pressed, and the power is turned on while the sub-switch 20 is being pressed, in a situation where the power is cut off and the operating voltage drops below the threshold, making the game machine unable to operate. (when the power-off recovery process is executed while the sensor of the sub-switch 20 remains ON), the sub-switch lamp lights up and the menu screen is not displayed.

As a result, even if, for example, the sub switch 20 is unintentionally operated (such as a hand placed on the sub switch 20) when the power is turned on after a power outage, an unintended menu screen will be displayed. Instead of displaying the sub-switch 20, it is possible to notify that the menu screen display processing is possible by the lighting mode of the sub-switch lamp, thereby indicating that the sub-switch 20 can be operated. Therefore, the player who recognizes that the operation of the sub-switch 20 is valid, once releases the sub-switch 20 that was being pressed (after the sensor of the sub-switch 20 changes from ON to OFF), and then switches the sub-switch again. By pressing 20 (by turning the sensor of the sub-switch 20 from OFF to ON), a menu screen display process can be performed.

Furthermore, in a situation where the menu screen can be displayed, the sub-switch 20 is pressed, and the power is turned on while the sub-switch 20 is being pressed, in a situation where the power is cut off and the operating voltage drops below the threshold, making the game machine unable to operate. In this case (when the power-off recovery process is executed), the sub-switch lamp may be turned on and the menu screen may be displayed. In this case, the menu screen can be displayed immediately after the power is turned on, reflecting the intention to press the sub-switch 20, and furthermore, by lighting the sub-switch lamp, the decision operation for each item on the menu screen is valid. can be suggested.

In addition, in a situation where the gaming machine is in a state where the MAX bet is possible and the menu screen can be displayed, and the power is cut off and the operating voltage falls below the threshold and the gaming machine cannot operate, the MAX bet switch 18 and the sub switch 20 are activated. If the MAX bet switch 18 and sub switch 20 are pressed and the power is turned on (when the power-off recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp lights up, the MAX bet process is not executed, and the sub switch 18 and sub switch 20 are pressed. The switch lamp is lit and the menu screen is not displayed. Further, since the MAX bet switch 18 is being pressed down, MAX bet processing by pressing the MAX bet switch 18 anew cannot be performed. In other words, since the MAX bet switch 18 is being pressed (the sensor signal of the MAX bet switch is on), the MAX bet switch 18 cannot be pressed and the MAX bet process cannot be performed.

As a result, for example, a situation where the MAX bet switch 18 and the sub-switch 20 are unintentionally operated when the power is turned on after a power outage occurs (a situation where a hand is placed on the MAX bet switch 18 and the sub-switch 20, etc.) Even in such cases, it is possible to prevent unintentional bets from being placed and display of the menu screen, and even in such cases, the MAX bet lamp lights up to indicate that the operation of the MAX bet switch 18 is valid. In addition, it is possible to notify accurately by the lighting mode of the sub-switch lamp, and to indicate that the menu screen display processing is possible, indicating that the sub-switch 20 can be operated.

Also, for example, if a problem occurs in the return spring or sensor of the MAX bet switch 18 before or after the power is cut off, and the pressed state of the MAX bet switch 18 is not released, by lighting the MAX bet lamp, the MAX bet switch 18 can be activated. Even if bet processing is not possible, it is possible to inform the administrator that it is not a software malfunction.

In addition, in a situation where the gaming machine is in a state where the MAX bet is possible and the menu screen can be displayed, and the power is cut off and the operating voltage falls below the threshold and the gaming machine cannot operate, the MAX bet switch 18 and the sub switch 20 are activated. If the MAX bet switch 18 and sub switch 20 are pressed and the power is turned on (when the power-off recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp lights up, the MAX bet process is not executed, and the sub switch 18 and sub switch 20 are pressed. The switch lamp may be lit and a menu screen may be displayed. In this case, the menu screen can be displayed immediately after the power is turned on, reflecting the intention to press the sub-switch 20, and furthermore, by lighting the sub-switch lamp, the decision operation for each item on the menu screen is valid. can be suggested. In this case, the MAX bet lamp continues to be lit even after the menu screen is displayed to notify that the MAX bet process is executable.

In a situation where the front panel PS2 is closed, the game has ended, no bets have been placed (replay is not activated), and the number of credits is 1 or more (hereinafter referred to as the “settlement possible state”) In this case, when the settlement switch is operated (pressed), the settlement process is executed and the medals stored in the credits are paid out to the tray 28.

In addition, in a situation where payment is possible and the gaming machine is unable to operate due to a power outage and the operating voltage falls below the threshold, the payment switch is pressed (the sensor that detects the payment switch changes from OFF to ON), and payment is made. If the power is turned on while the switch is pressed (if the power-off recovery process is executed while the sensor of the settlement switch is ON), the MAX bet lamp is lit and the settlement process is not executed. Further, while the settlement switch is being pressed, the MAX bet process is not executed even if the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed.

As a result, even if, for example, the payment switch is unintentionally operated when the power is turned on after a power outage (e.g., a person's hand is placed on the payment switch), unintended payment processing will not be executed. Furthermore, since it is possible to notify that there are medals remaining in the credits by the lighting mode of the MAX bet lamp, it is possible to prevent the player from leaving the game with the credits remaining.

Additionally, if the payment switch is pressed and the power is turned on while the payment switch is pressed in a situation where the machine is unable to operate due to a power outage and the operating voltage falls below the threshold while payment is possible (power If the MAX bet lamp is turned on and the settlement process is not executed, but if the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed while the settlement switch is pressed, the MAX bet process is executed. good.

As a result, even if, for example, the payment switch is unintentionally operated when the power is turned on after a power outage (e.g., a person's hand is placed on the payment switch), unintended payment processing will not be executed. Furthermore, since the operation of the MAX bet switch is effective, the progress of the game is not hindered as much as possible, so that the interest in the game is not reduced.

Additionally, if the payment switch is pressed and the power is turned on while the payment switch is pressed in a situation where the machine is unable to operate due to a power outage and the operating voltage falls below the threshold while payment is possible (power MAX bet lamp may be turned on and the settlement process may be executed.

As a result, for example, when turning on the power before opening a game arcade, if the power is turned on while the payment switch is being operated (e.g., the user's hand is placed on the payment switch), the power will be turned on. Since the payment process can be executed immediately after opening the store, it is possible to simplify the work of turning on the power before opening the store and the work of paying out the medals remaining on the credit card.

Additionally, if the payment switch is pressed and the power is turned on while the payment switch is pressed in a situation where the machine is unable to operate due to a power outage and the operating voltage falls below the threshold while payment is possible (power If the disconnection recovery process is executed), the lamp of the sub-switch 20 is lit and the operation of the sub-switch 20 is valid, regardless of whether the payment process is executed or not. (The menu screen can be displayed by accepting the operation of the sub switch 20).

As a result, even if, for example, the payment switch is unintentionally operated when the power is turned on after a power outage, the menu screen can be displayed by operating the sub switch 20, and the menu screen can be used to check the gaming history and volume. You can view and change information useful for the game, such as adjustments. Furthermore, by enabling all operations related to the progress of the game at this time, all games other than payment can be executed. The settlement process is only used at the end of the game, and the player is not disadvantaged by adjusting the number of medals inserted without executing the settlement process, so the progress of the game is hindered as much as possible. It is possible to run it without any trouble.

In addition, in a situation where the MAX bet is possible and the settlement is possible, when a power outage occurs and the operating voltage falls below the threshold, and the gaming machine becomes unable to operate, the MAX bet switch 18 and the settlement switch are pressed. If the power is turned on while the MAX bet switch 18 and the settlement switch are pressed (when the power-off recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp lights up and the MAX bet process and settlement process are not executed. There is. In addition, in this case, if you release the MAX bet switch 18 while continuing to press the settlement switch and newly operate (press) the MAX bet switch 18, the MAX bet process can be executed, and the MAX bet switch If the settlement switch is released while the MAX bet switch 18 continues to be pressed, and the settlement switch is newly operated (depressed) while the MAX bet switch 18 continues to be pressed, the settlement process can be executed.

As a result, for example, there may be a situation where the MAX bet switch 18 and the settlement switch are unintentionally operated when the power is turned on after a power outage (such as a situation where the hand is placed on the MAX bet switch 18 and the settlement switch). Even if the player makes a bet, it is possible to prevent bets from being placed and payment processing. Furthermore, it is possible to accurately notify that there are medals remaining in the credit and that the operation of the MAX bet switch 18 is valid, depending on the lighting mode of the MAX bet lamp.

In a situation where the front panel PS2 is closed, the game has ended, and 3 bets have been placed (including when replay is activated) (hereinafter referred to as the reel rotation possible state), the start switch 12 is turned off. When operated (pressed), reel rotation processing is executed and each reel rotates. Note that the reel rotation process is executed after the minimum gaming time has elapsed.

In addition, if the start switch 12 is pressed and the power is turned on while the start switch 12 is being pressed in a situation where the power is cut off while the reels are ready to rotate and the operating voltage drops below the threshold, making the gaming machine unable to operate. (When the power-off recovery process is executed), the start lamp lights up, but none of the reels rotate.

As a result, even if the start switch 12 is unintentionally operated (such as by placing your hand on the start switch 12) when turning on the power after a power outage, unintended rotation of the reels can be avoided. This makes it possible to prevent players from unintentionally using the betted game media due to the player not being executed, and even in such a case, the start lamp indicates that the operation of the start switch 12 is valid. Accurate notification can be provided by the lighting mode.

In addition, if the start switch 12 is pressed and the power is turned on while the start switch 12 is being pressed in a situation where the power is cut off while the reels are ready to rotate and the operating voltage drops below the threshold, making the gaming machine unable to operate. (When the power-off recovery process is executed), the start lamp may not light up and any reel may not rotate. In such a case, it is preferable that the start lamp be turned on when the operation of the start switch 12 is completed (when the sensor signal of the start switch 12 is turned off).

As a result, even if the start switch 12 is unintentionally operated (such as by placing your hand on the start switch 12) when turning on the power after a power outage, unintended reel rotation will occur. It is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally using the game media that has been bet on due to the player not being executed, and by not lighting the start lamp in such a case, once the start switch 12 is turned on. It is possible to make the player aware that the reels will not rotate until after the operation is completed, and the start lamp lights up when the operation of the start switch 12 is completed, so that the operation of the start switch 12 is valid. can be reported accurately.

In addition, if the start switch 12 is pressed and the power is turned on while the start switch 12 is being pressed in a situation where the power is cut off while the reels are ready to rotate and the operating voltage drops below the threshold, making the gaming machine unable to operate. (When the power-off recovery process is executed), all reels may rotate.

As a result, the start switch 12 is operated during the period between when the power is cut off while the reel is rotatable and the operating voltage momentarily drops below the threshold, and then when the operating voltage exceeds the threshold and the power is automatically turned on. If the power is automatically turned on while the start switch 12 is being operated (when the power-off recovery process is executed), all reels will rotate after the power is turned on, so the player will not be able to Even if the start switch 12 is operated at a suitable timing, it is possible to proceed with the game (all reels are rotated), and it is possible to reduce the effort of the player and improve the game tempo.

In a situation where the front panel PS2 is in the closed state, all the reels are rotating, and the acceptance of operation of the stop switch 13 is enabled (hereinafter referred to as the reel stoppable state), the stop switch 13 is not operated. (Pressed) (when any of the sensors detecting the left stop switch 13a, middle stop switch 13b, and right stop switch 13c turns from OFF to ON), the reel corresponding to the operated stop switch 13 A stop control process is executed, and the reel corresponding to the operated stop switch 13 is stopped. Note that the reel stoppable state is not limited to a situation in which all the reels are rotating, and even a situation in which any one reel is rotating can be referred to as a reel stoppable state.

In the reel stoppable state, the LED constituting the stop switch 13 lights up to indicate that it is enabled. In the reel stoppable state, in which the reel cannot be stopped even if the stop switch 13 is operated, the stop switch 13 is turned off. The lighting mode indicates that the constituent LEDs are disabled.

Here, the state in which it is impossible to stop the reel is a state in which the stop switch 13 does not accept operation even though the reel is rotating (such as when a rotation failure is being detected or when another switch managed by the main control means 100 is operated). It may be a state in which the reels are not rotating (such as when all reels are stopped or when the left reel is stopped and the left stop switch 13a is operated).

Further, the lighting mode indicating that the LED constituting the stop switch 13 is valid is a mode in which it is lit in white or a mode in which it is lit in a color such as red, and that the LED constituting the stop switch 13 is disabled. The lighting mode indicating this is a mode in which the device is not lit (lights out) or a mode in which the device is lit in a lighting color (for example, blue, etc.) that is different from the lighting color indicating that it is enabled.

In addition, in a situation where the reels can be stopped and the power is cut off and the operating voltage drops below the threshold and the gaming machine cannot operate, the left stop switch 13a is pressed, and the power is turned on while the left stop switch 13a is pressed. In this case (when the power-off recovery process is executed while the sensor of the left stop switch 13a remains ON), the stop control process is not executed for the left reel. Further, when the power is turned on while the left stop switch 13a is being pressed, the LED constituting the stop switch 13 is lit to indicate that it is disabled.

As a result, for example, the left stop switch 13a is a stop switch corresponding to the final stop operation, and after a power outage occurs when the left reel can be stopped, the left stop switch 13a is unintentionally operated when the power is turned on. Even so, the rotation of the left reel is not stopped by operating the left stop switch 13a, so it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged, such as missing a small winning combination that requires a hit. Further, it is possible to prevent the stop switch 13 from accepting operations in a different pressing order from the correct pressing order when an internal lottery result in which symbol combinations advantageous to the player are stopped depending on the pressing order (so-called pressing order combination) is won. is also possible.

In addition, in a situation where the reels can be stopped and the power is cut off and the operating voltage drops below the threshold and the gaming machine cannot operate, the left stop switch 13a is pressed, and the power is turned on while the left stop switch 13a is pressed. If this occurs (if the power-off recovery process is executed), the stop control process may be executed for the left reel. Even in this case, if the power is turned on while the left stop switch 13a is being pressed, the LED constituting the stop switch 13 is illuminated to indicate that it is disabled.

As a result, the left stop switch 13a is pressed, for example, during a game when a power outage occurs and the operating voltage momentarily falls below the threshold, and then the operating voltage exceeds the threshold and the power is automatically turned on. If the power is automatically turned on while the left stop switch 13a is pressed down (when the power-off recovery process is executed), the left reel will stop after the power is turned on, so the player will not know what to do. Even if the stop switch 13 is pressed at a suitable timing, it is possible to proceed with the game (stop the corresponding reel), and it is possible to reduce the effort of the player and improve the game tempo. Furthermore, when stopping the reel corresponding to the stop switch 13 that is pressed after the power is turned on, by configuring the reel to stop even if the reel is accelerating, the timing can be brought closer to the timing that the player originally wanted to stop. becomes possible. However, if there are a plurality of stop switches 13 pressed down after the power is turned on, the reel is configured not to stop any of the reels.

<Control corresponding to power outage during slip control according to the present embodiment>
When the start switch 12 is operated and the reel is rotating and the stop switch 13 is operated, the reel is rotated from the acceptance position of the stop switch 13 to the stop position (so-called slip control) and when the reel rotates to the stop position. The reels are now stopped. If the power-off process is executed during this slip control, the reel cannot be stopped at the stop position because the slip control cannot be executed.

In addition, the stop position is determined when the stop switch 13 is received, and the winning determination process is executed based on the determined stop position, so it is based on the stop position regardless of whether the reels are actually stopped or not. When it is determined that a small winning combination has been won, medals are paid out based on the small winning combination.

Therefore, in a game where a small winning combination has been won through internal lottery processing, the power-off process is executed during slip control when the operation of the stop switch 13 is received at a timing when the symbols corresponding to the small winning combination can be stopped, and the power is turned off. Even if the symbol corresponding to the minor prize does not stop on the active line after returning, the symbol combination corresponding to the minor prize is determined to have been stopped by the winning determination process after all reels have stopped, and the symbol combination that was stopped is Medals are paid out accordingly.

This is due to the following reasons. In other words, while this has the effect of preventing a situation in which the player cannot receive the medals even though he or she performs a stop operation at the timing when the medals are to be paid out, it is also possible to determine which symbol combinations the medals are paid out based on. There was also the problem of not being recognized. In order to solve this problem, in a game where a small winning combination has been won through internal lottery processing, during slip control (slip from stop acceptance to (until the control ends), the power-off process is executed, and after the power-off returns, the reel is rotated to detect the index, and the reel is rotated to the stop position based on the detected index information, and then stopped at the stop position. and then pay out the medals.

With this configuration, even if a power-off process is executed during sliding control, the player can check which symbol combination was stopped by rotating it to the stop position where it was scheduled to stop again after the power is restored. Since it becomes possible to visually recognize the player, it is possible to improve the player's interest.

In addition, even if the power-off process is executed during sliding control and the same symbol exists during the re-rotation process after the power is restored and the index is detected, the same pattern will not be displayed during the movement to the planned stop position. Move to the stop position where it was. If the game stops at the same symbol before the planned stop position, there is a possibility that the game will display a stop display that prohibits stopping during the game, so it is necessary to determine whether or not stopping is prohibited. , to reduce the processing load during the re-rotation process, by moving it to the planned position.

Further, a power-off process is executed during the slip control, and in the re-rotation process after the power is restored, an acceleration process and a constant speed process are executed in the same way as the normal drum rotation start process. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and acceleration processing and constant speed processing that are different from normal ones may be executed. For example, the acceleration time may be shorter, the acceleration time may be longer, the speed of constant speed rotation may be slower, or the speed of constant speed rotation may be faster. By changing the acceleration mode or constant speed mode from normal in this way, it is possible to make the player recognize that the rotation is different from normal.

In addition, if the rotation reaches the same position as the stop reception position while rotating at a constant speed during re-rotation, the stop operation will be accepted in the same way as normal rotation processing and slip control will occur, and the planned stop position will be When the reel rotates up to this point, an all-phase excitation signal is output to the stepping motor driving the reel (in the case of a four-phase stepping motor, a four-phase excitation signal is output), and the reel that is rotating again is stopped.

In addition, when a power-off process is executed during slip control and during the re-rotation process after the power is restored, "Re-rotating" is displayed on the LCD to make the player aware that the re-rotating process is in progress. Possible modes include outputting a voice saying "Re-rotating" or displaying an error on an error display. This aspect allows the player to recognize that the rotation is different from normal.

Additionally, when power-off processing is executed during slip control, a flag indicating that slip control has not been completed is stored in a predetermined storage area, and when the power is turned on, the predetermined storage area is checked to see if the flag is set. If so, perform re-rotation processing. This flag is initialized when the rotation process is stopped as a result of executing the re-rotation process, so that the re-rotation process is not executed when the power is turned on normally. Note that the flag related to the fact that the slip control has not been completed may be an error flag or a gaming state flag.

In addition, when the power-off process is executed during slip control, the re-rotation process may be executed automatically after the power is restored, or the re-rotation process may be performed after an error occurs after the power is restored and the reset switch is released. may be executed. Any aspect is applicable to the re-rotation processing of the subsequent embodiments.

Moreover, the power-off process is executed during slip control, and during the re-rotation process after the power is restored, the rotation failure detection counter may be updated during acceleration and constant speed, or during constant speed. Then, when the rotation failure detection counter reaches a predetermined value (for example, 180 described above), the acceleration process is executed again. Possible causes of rotation failure in this case include the reel being held down by hand, loss of synchronization due to malfunction of the motor, or deterioration of components over time.

In this case, the rotation failure detection counter is initialized in the initialization process when the power is turned on, and updating (counting) of the rotation failure detection counter is started at the same time as the re-rotation process is executed. After the index is detected for the first time after the power is turned on, the value of the rotation failure detection counter is updated to 0 and updating of the rotation failure detection counter is started again, and the reel control means rotates the reel to a stop position and stops it. By clearing the rotation failure detection counter after first detecting the index in this way, it is possible to ensure that the position of the reel that stopped due to power-off processing is the position immediately after passing the index, and the stopped position is the position immediately before passing the index. It is also possible to stop the motor to the stop position without detecting rotational failure. In other words, the reel rotates about two revolutions after the power is turned on until it stops, but it is not determined that the rotation is defective.

Note that although the timing for initializing the rotation failure detection counter is when the power is turned on, the timing is not limited to this, but the timing for initializing the rotation failure detection counter when the stop switch 13 is received, or when the state of the reel is constant speed. The rotation failure detection counter may be initialized when the rotation error occurs.

In this way, power-off processing is executed during slip control, and rotation failure is detected during re-rotation processing after the power is restored. This prevents the stop position from shifting due to step-out etc. even during re-rotation, and This makes it possible to stop the vehicle at the stop position where the vehicle is located. Further, since rotation failure is not detected during normal slip control, re-acceleration processing is not executed if step-out or the like occurs during normal slip control.

Subsequently, a power-off process is executed during the slip control, and if an error (recoverable error) is detected during the re-rotation process after the power is restored, an error notification is performed after the re-rotation process is completed. Errors detected at this time include medal retention error, medal backflow error, medal passing time error, hopper retention error, hopper empty error, abnormality detection error, door opening error, harness disconnection error, etc. There is. In addition to the error code displayed on the acquired number display 27, error notification can also be performed using a liquid crystal display, a speaker, or a display lamp on the top or both sides, or a display switch lamp in a predetermined color (for example, , a highly visible and conspicuous color such as red or blue). Note that the error notification may be performed by only one of the error notifications, or may be performed by combining a plurality of error notifications.

In this way, by giving an error notification after the re-rotation process is completed, it is possible to make it easier for players and game hall personnel to recognize whether the notification is during re-rotation or an error. In addition, when the re-rotation notification is given during the re-rotation, the re-rotation notification is ended after the re-rotation is completed, and the re-rotation notification is switched to the error notification. Note that during re-rotation, error notification is not performed, and notification regarding re-rotation that is not error notification is not performed.

The error mode during the re-rotation process described above is not limited to this, and the detected error may be a part of the error (for example, a hopper retention error is detected, but a medal retention error is not detected), and the error notification mode is After an error is detected, the number of acquired pieces display 27 is used to notify the error, and when the re-spinning process is completed and the reels stop, the error is notified on the LCD or speaker. Alternatively, the error may be notified through a speaker.

Subsequently, a power-off process is executed during slip control, and during the re-rotation process after the power is restored, the lighting mode of the lamp of the stop switch 13 is disabled, and even if the stop switch 13 is operated, it will not respond. The reels are designed not to stop.

As a situation in which the reel rotates when the power is turned on, there is also a power return after a power cut during normal reel rotation, in addition to a power return after a power cut during slip control. When the power is restored after the power is cut off during normal reel rotation, the reels can be stopped, and the lighting mode of the lamp of the stop switch 13 is an effective mode. Therefore, when the reels rotate when the power is turned on, it is possible to determine whether the reels are being re-rotated or are being rotated normally by checking the lighting state of the lamp of the stop switch 13.

In addition, as another situation in which the reels rotate when the power is turned on, the power may be restored after the power is turned off during a freeze period in which the reels rotate. Types of freezes in which the reels rotate include a pseudo game in which temporary stop control is performed by operating the stop switch 13, and a reel performance in which the reels do not stop rotating even if the stop switch 13 is operated.

During the simulated game, the lighting mode of the lamp of the stop switch 13 is the valid mode, and when the power is restored after the power is cut off during the simulated game, the lighting mode of the lamp of the stop switch 13 is the valid mode, so when the power is turned on, When the reels are rotating, it is also possible to determine whether the reels are being re-rotated or are being rotated normally by checking the lighting state of the lamp of the stop switch 13.

During the reel production, the lighting mode of the lamp of the stop switch 13 is disabled, and when the power is restored after the power is cut off during the reel production, the lighting mode of the lamp of the stop switch 13 becomes disabled, so when the power is turned on, When the reels rotate, it is not possible to determine whether the reels are being produced or re-rotating based on the lighting state of the stop switch 13 lamp, but in this case, it is possible to determine by checking the display device such as the LCD or error display. It has become. In addition, even if the lighting mode of the lamp of the stop switch is in the disabled mode during reel production, if you want to enable the operation of other main switches (switches managed by the main control means 100), the other main switches Since the lighting mode of the lamp is in the active mode, by checking the lighting mode of the lamps of the other main system switches, it is possible to determine whether the reel is being produced or the re-rotation process is in progress.

In addition, the reels may not be rotated when the power is restored after the power is cut off during a pseudo game or during reel production. In this case, the reels do not rotate when the power is restored, so whether or not the re-rotation process is in progress is determined. can be easily determined by the rotation pattern of the reel.

Subsequently, if a power-off process is executed during slip control and the power-off process is executed again during the re-rotation process after the power is restored, the rotation will be performed until the index is detected after the power is restored, and the schedule will be restarted. Move to the stop position and stop. In addition, if the power-off process is executed immediately before detecting the index and the index is not detected during acceleration after the power is restored, the index cannot be detected and the engine is rotated again until the index detection timing. I can say that.

In this way, the re-rotation process can be executed even if the power is restored after the power is cut off during the re-rotation process, so even in unstable situations where the power may be cut off multiple times, the player can be informed of the stopped symbols. It becomes possible to display.

Here, the power-off processing is executed during slip control, and the timing at which the power-off processing is executed again during the re-rotation process after the power is restored is before the index is detected during the re-rotation process, and during the re-rotation process. Possibly after detecting the index.

<Pattern 1>
If the power-off process is executed during slip control and the power-off process is executed again during the re-rotation process after the power is restored, if it is before the index is detected during the re-rotation process, the A possible mode is to rotate until the index is detected in the second re-rotation process, and then rotate to a planned stop position and then stop.

In this case, the index is not detected in the first re-rotation process and the reference symbol position is not stored, so the second re-rotation process determines that the reference symbol position is not stored and tries again. Rotation is executed to detect the index so that it can be stopped at the planned stopping position.

<Pattern 2-1>
In addition, the power-off process is executed during slip control, and the timing at which the power-off process is executed again during the re-rotation process after the power is restored is after the index is detected during the re-rotation process (when the sensor detects the index). (This includes the timing at the moment when the sensor detects the index.The same applies hereafter.), after the power is restored, it will move to the planned stop position based on the reference symbol position according to the index detected before the power was cut off. A mode in which it is rotated and then stopped is conceivable.

In this case, since the index is detected in the first re-rotation process, it can be stopped at the planned stop position based on the memorized reference symbol position, so the game can be stopped for the time until the index is detected. This makes it possible to shorten the time until restart.

In pattern 2-1 described above, the power supply is turned on after detecting the index during the first re-rotation process until it rotates to the planned stop position and applies the brake (until outputting 4-phase excitation). If the power-off process is executed, even if the rotation has not reached the stop acceptance position at the time the power-off process is executed, even if the rotation has reached the stop acceptance position, after the power is restored, Re-rotation processing or stop control is executed based on the stored reference symbol position without detecting the index again.

In this way, regardless of the stop reception position accepted immediately before the first power-off process, the same re-rotation process or stop control can be executed after the second power restoration, so the process does not become complicated and the program can be executed at high speed. can be realized.

<Pattern 2-2>
In addition, if the power-off process is executed during slip control, and the timing to execute the power-off process again during the re-rotation process after the power is restored is after the index is detected during the re-rotation process, the power will be restored. It is conceivable that the index is detected again later, and then the rotation is made to the planned stop position and then stopped.

In this case, taking into consideration the possibility that the reel has moved between the time the power is turned off for the second time and the time the power is restored, the reel will be rotated again until the index is detected again, so it will more accurately reach the planned stop position. It is possible to rotate it.

In pattern 2-2 described above, the power supply is turned on after the index is detected during the first re-rotation process until it rotates to the planned stop position and applies the brake (until outputting 4-phase excitation). If the power-off process is executed, even if the rotation has not reached the stop acceptance position at the time the power-off process is executed, even if the rotation has reached the stop acceptance position, after the power is restored, A re-rotation process is executed to detect the index again, and the symbol is moved to the planned stopping position and stopped.

In this way, regardless of the stop reception position accepted immediately before the first power-off process, the same re-rotation process or stop control can be executed after the second power restoration, so the process does not become complicated and the program can be executed at high speed. can be realized.

<Pattern 2-3>
In addition, the power-off process is executed during slip control, and the timing at which the power-off process is executed again during the re-rotation process after the power is restored is after the index is detected during the re-rotation process and the rotation reaches the stop acceptance position. If not, after the power is restored, the index is not detected again and the re-rotation process or stop control is executed based on the memorized reference symbol position, and the power-off process is executed during the sliding control, and the power is When the power-off process is executed again during the re-rotation process after recovery, if the index has been detected during the re-rotation process and it has rotated to the stop reception position, the index will be detected again after the power is restored. A possible mode is to execute a re-rotation process to move the symbol to a planned stopping position and then stop it.

In this way, the stop acceptance position received immediately before the first power-off process can be finely controlled after the reference power is restored, so that appropriate processing can be executed according to the situation in which the power-off process is executed.

<Control of presentation mode using the presentation switch according to the present embodiment>
A presentation using a presentation switch (sometimes referred to as a push button presentation) will be explained using FIG. 23. In FIG. 23, an effect is performed in which the effect switch is operated through the operation of the start switch 12, the operation of the left stop switch 13a, the operation of the middle stop switch 13b, and the operation of the right stop switch 13c. It shows the process of performing the performance. In addition, the part labeled "PUSH" in FIG. 23 represents a production switch (however, the "PUSH" display at the top of the middle and lower part of FIG. 23 is displayed on the liquid crystal).

In the upper left diagram of FIG. 23, the start switch 12 for starting the game is operated (more specifically, the start switch reception command is received from the main control means 100, or the rotation drum rotation start command is received). ``Win at rock, paper, scissors!'' is displayed on the LCD screen. At this time, since the operation of the effect switch is still invalid, the effect switch is turned off.

Next, in the upper middle diagram of FIG. 23, based on the operation of the left stop switch 13a for stopping the left reel (more specifically, the reception of the left stop switch acceptance command from the main control means 100), The executed ``Ja~n!'' performance is displayed on the LCD. At this time, since the operation of the effect switch is still invalid, the effect switch is turned off.

Next, in the upper right diagram of FIG. 23, execution is performed based on the operation of the middle stop switch 13b for stopping the middle reel (more specifically, reception of the middle stop switch acceptance command from the main control means 100). ``Ke~n!'' is displayed on the LCD screen. At this time, since the operation of the effect switch is still invalid, the effect switch is turned off.

Next, in the lower left diagram of FIG. 23, execution is performed based on the operation of the right stop switch 13c for stopping the right reel (more specifically, reception of a right stop switch acceptance command from the main control means 100). "Pon!" is displayed on the LCD screen. At this time, since the operation of the effect switch is still invalid, the effect switch is turned off.

Next, in the middle and lower diagrams of FIG. 23, a production switch that is executed based on the fact that all the reels are stopped (more specifically, the command to stop all reels from the main control means 100 is received) is modeled. An image of the switch (hereinafter sometimes referred to as an effect switch image, an operation promotion image, or an operation promotion effect) is displayed on the liquid crystal. Further, the effect "Pop!" that was displayed when the right stop switch 13c, which is the third stop, was operated is dimly displayed (lower brightness). At this time, since the operation of the effect switch is valid, the effect switch is lit. Note that when displaying an image dimly, in addition to lowering the brightness, the brightness may be lowered, or a gray translucent display may be superimposed on the image. In any case, it is also possible to express that when an image is displayed dimly, visibility decreases.

Next, in the lower right diagram of FIG. 23, the image "Victory!" is executed based on the operation of the production switch (more specifically, the input signal related to the production switch is input to the input port). (Hereinafter, this may be referred to as an operation response image or an operation response effect.) is displayed on the liquid crystal. At this time, since the operation of the effect switch is invalid, the effect switch is turned off.

As shown in the middle and lower diagrams in Figure 23, when displaying a performance switch image on a liquid crystal display as a performance to encourage the operation of a performance switch, the performance switch image becomes larger than the actual size of the performance switch. Do it like this. By displaying in this manner, the effect switch can be effectively displayed on the liquid crystal display that the player is watching, and it is possible to intuitively prompt the player to operate the effect switch.

In addition, in the effect switch image, an image representing the lighting mode of the effect switch (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a lighting mode image) is also provided. When the effect switch is enabled, the effect switch lamp is lit (does not blink), and the lighting mode image is expressed as a blinking mode that repeats lighting and extinguishing at a predetermined period. According to such a configuration, since the effect switch image repeatedly becomes brighter and darker, it becomes possible to make the effect switch image stand out and to effectively prompt the user to operate the effect switch.

In addition, when the production switch is enabled, the production switch lamp is lit in a blinking manner that repeats turning on and off at a specific period, and the lighting mode image is expressed in a blinking manner that repeats turning on and off at a predetermined period. It may also be an aspect in which the In this case, by making the predetermined cycle of the lighting mode image shorter than the specific cycle of the production switch lamp, it is possible to make the lighting mode image stand out. In this case, even when the production switch lamp is off, the operation (pressing) of the production switch is valid, and based on the fact that the production switch was operated at this timing, , the state changes from a state where "Pon!" is displayed dimly (the state shown in the lower middle diagram of FIG. 23) to a state where "Victory!" is displayed (the state shown in the lower right diagram of FIG. 23). The production is now being switched.

In addition, when set to eco mode (when set to eco mode, the brightness of the upper or both side direction lamps may be lowered or turned off, and the brightness of the lower panel may be lowered than when set to eco mode). Even if the display switch is equipped with a push-button display (lower brightness of the LCD display, or lowers the brightness of the LCD display), the display switch may be turned on when executing the push-button display during eco mode. The brightness of the effect switch is made to be equal to the brightness of the effect switch when the effect switch is turned on when executing the push button effect when not in the eco mode. This makes it possible to effectively prompt the player to operate (press) the performance switch.

In addition, even when error notification is performed by lighting or blinking the top or side display lamps or display switch lamps in a predetermined color (colors that are highly visible and stand out, such as red or blue), it will be It is preferable that the brightness of the upper or both side effect lamps and effect switch lamps be the same when not in the mode.

In addition, when displaying an image indicating that the lights are turned off as a lighting mode image, the brightness of the production switch image is lowered and displayed, but the brightness is not lowered until it becomes black, and it is expressed as if the light is slightly turned on. do. On the other hand, when the production switch lamp goes out, it is not lit. In this way, by differentiating the expressions of the lighting mode images from the lighting mode image and the production switch lamp, it is possible to make the lighting mode image stand out. In addition, since the area around the production switch image is brighter than the area around the production switch, by not lowering the brightness of the lighting mode image of the production switch image until it becomes black, the difference in brightness with the surrounding area is reduced. I'm keeping it small. With this configuration, it is possible to make the production switch image stand out and reduce fatigue during the game.

In addition, when displaying a production switch image before the previous image as shown in the middle and lower diagrams in Figure 23, the brightness of the immediately previous image is lowered, but the brightness is the lowest among the lighting mode images of the production switch image. The brightness of the previous image is set to be lower than the brightness. With this configuration, even when the brightness of the effect switch image is at its lowest, the brightness is higher than the surrounding images, making it possible to make the effect switch image stand out.

The middle and lower diagrams in FIG. 23 will be further explained using FIG. 24. The effect switch image changes over time until the effect switch is operated. As a variation mode, a performance showing the movement of the initial position and the pressed position of the performance switch is expressed using a performance switch image.

The leftmost diagram in FIG. 24 shows that the production switch image is in the initial position, the second diagram from the left shows that the production switch image is in the pressed position, and the third diagram from the left shows that the production switch image is in the pressed position. This figure shows that the effect switch image is in the initial position, and the fourth figure from the left shows that the effect switch image is in the pressed position. In this way, by configuring the effect switch image to repeatedly show the initial position and the depressed position, it is possible to effectively encourage the player to press the effect switch. .

The initial position and pressed position of the production switch image change at a constant cycle, and the period representing the initial position and pressed position of the production switch image is longer than the predetermined cycle representing lighting and extinguishment of the lighting mode image. It is configured as follows. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the effect switch image stand out, and it is possible to avoid reminding the user of repeatedly hitting the effect switch. There are many gaming machines currently on the market that change the effect continuously by repeatedly hitting the effect switch, and if the change mode of the effect switch image changes too quickly, there is a risk that it will be mistaken for a continuous hit effect. , which may reduce the interest in the game. For this reason, by making the period of change between the initial position and the pressed position longer than the period of the lighting mode, it is possible to intuitively express that it is not a repeated press, while making the user aware that the production switch is being pressed. becomes.

Additionally, in a situation where an effect that requires the player to repeatedly press the effect switch is displayed, the cycle of changing between the initial position and the pressed position is made shorter than the cycle of the lighting mode, thereby forcing the player to repeatedly press the effect switch. It becomes possible to express things intuitively. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, but the position of the production switch image does not change, but the switching cycle of the lighting mode image is made shorter than the cycle that ends when the production switch is operated once, thereby creating a production that means repeated hits. It may be an aspect.

Alternatively, the effect switch image may not be changed between the initial position and the pressed position at regular intervals. In this case, since the display area of the liquid crystal can be made smaller, it is possible to display text indicating that the effect switch should be pressed, such as "Press the PUSH button" instead.

If the performance switch is operated while the performance switch image for operating the performance switch is displayed on the liquid crystal, the performance switch image is erased without any effect. In other words, if a production switch is operated while a production switch image is displayed, the production switch image is immediately erased and the production based on the depression of the production switch is immediately executed. . In this case, the display switch image may be erased by the drawing process immediately after receiving the production switch operation, or by the drawing process executed after a predetermined period of time after receiving the production switch operation. The display switch image may be configured to be erased.

With this configuration, it is possible to arouse the player's interest in the result of pressing the effect switch, and it is possible to make the information about whether or not the effect switch has been pressed conspicuously. It becomes possible to eliminate it.

In addition, even if the front panel PS2 is opened while the liquid crystal is displaying a production switch image for operating the production switch, the production switch image continues to be displayed and the production switch is When operated, the effect switch image is erased without any effects, and the effect based on the depression of the effect switch is immediately executed. In this case, as described above, the production switch image may be configured to be erased in the drawing process immediately after receiving the production switch operation, or the production switch image may be executed after a predetermined period of time from immediately after the production switch operation is received. It may be configured such that the effect switch image is erased in the drawing process.

In this way, by executing the effect based on the press of the effect switch regardless of whether the front panel PS2 is opened or closed, the progress of the game is not hindered even if the front panel PS2 is opened unintentionally. becomes possible.

In addition, when the front panel PS2 is open, the lighting mode of the production switch when displaying the production switch image for operating the production switch on the liquid crystal display is the same as when the front panel PS2 is closed. , is configured to be different from the lighting mode of the effect switch when displaying the effect switch image for operating the effect switch on the liquid crystal. For example, when the front panel PS2 is in the closed state, the light may be turned on, but when it is in the open state, it may be turned on or off, or the blinking cycle may be faster in the closed state than in the open state, or the lighting color may be changed depending on whether the front panel PS2 is in the open or closed state. One example is to make it different. Furthermore, in a situation where the front panel PS2 is open, as shown in FIG. 28, an image indicating that the front panel PS2 is open may be displayed at a position overlapping at least a portion of the production switch image ( In addition, in order to improve the visibility of the production switch image and the image showing that the front panel PS2 is open, the front panel PS2 is opened at a position where these images do not overlap with each other. (You may also display an image to indicate this.) Furthermore, in a situation where the front panel PS2 is open, a sound indicating that the front panel PS2 is open (for example, "the door is open") may be output. The effect sound accompanying the display of the switch image or the effect sound accompanying the effect based on the pressing of the effect switch may not be output. Thereby, it is possible to accurately notify that the front panel PS2 is open. On the other hand, even in a situation where the front panel PS2 is outputting a sound indicating that it is open, the production sound that accompanies the display of the production switch image or the production sound that accompanies the production based on the pressing of the production switch is output. Good too. Thereby, it is possible to accurately notify that the front panel PS2 is open without hindering the progress of the game.

In addition, if the front panel PS2 is opened while the liquid crystal displays a production switch image for operating the production switch, the front panel PS2 should be opened instead of the production switch image. An image indicating that the front panel PS2 is open may be displayed, disabling the pressing of the production switch, and then closing the front panel PS2, erasing the image indicating that the front panel PS2 is open, and displaying the production switch image again. . Note that by displaying an image indicating that the front panel PS2 is open over the production switch image, the production switch image is made invisible, and when the front panel PS2 is then closed, the front panel PS2 is opened. The image indicating this may be erased so that the effect switch image can be viewed again. In this case as well, as described above, by changing the lighting mode of the production switch before and after the front panel PS2 is opened, it is possible to accurately notify that the front panel PS2 is open.

In addition, when executing a performance (success performance) that means giving a benefit to the player when the performance switch is operated, the performance switch image is erased without any effect, but the performance switch When performing a performance (failure performance) that means that no privilege is given to the player when is operated, the performance switch image may be deleted along with the effect. In addition, effects that may result in a failed performance include a mode in which the production switch image explodes, a mode in which the brightness of the production switch image is maintained at its darkest state (a mode in which the brightness does not change periodically), etc.

With this configuration, it is possible to indicate to the player that a failed performance was displayed as a result of operating the performance switch, creating a sense of satisfaction for the player and reducing interest in subsequent games. This makes it possible to prevent this from happening.

In addition, when displaying the production switch image when all the reels (all reels) are stopped, when the start switch 12 of the next game is operated, the start switch 12 is not the image that is displayed when the production switch is operated. Display images based on your actions. Further, when displaying an image based on the operation of the start switch 12, the production switch image is erased. At this time, the production switch image is erased without any effect.

With this configuration, it is possible to perform an appropriate performance in response to the player's operation without interfering with the performance performed based on the operation of the start switch 12. It is highly likely that a player who skips the production switch image by operating the start switch 12 knows in advance that the level of expectation is low, or is not interested in the production itself using the production switch, and is not accompanied by an effect. By deleting the information without any delay, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

In addition, when the production switch is operated in a situation where the production switch image is displayed and a successful production is displayed, the time from the reception of the production switch operation until the production switch image is deleted, and the order in which the production switch is pressed When the stop switch 13 corresponding to the correct push order is operated in a situation where the navigation image is displayed and a success effect is displayed, the time from the reception of the operation of the stop switch 13 until the push order navigation image is deleted; The time it takes for the production switch image to be erased is longer when compared.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to change the time until the reaction performance is executed when various switches are operated, and it is possible to provide different entertainment depending on the time difference between the various switches and the reaction performance. becomes. For example, if the push order navigation image where the profit is directly lost if you fail in the push order, it is better to display the next information immediately to increase the player's interest, and for the effect switch, there is a short delay between the operation and the effect. By doing so, it is possible to make the user expect whether a success effect or a failure effect will be displayed.

When the production switch also serves as a switch for displaying a menu screen, the production switch lamp is configured to light up after a certain period of time (for example, T1) has elapsed after all rotation drums have stopped. The lighting mode of the production switch lamp at this time is different from the lighting mode of the production switch lamp when the production is performed by operating the production switch after all the rotation drums have stopped.

With this configuration, it is possible to indicate whether a menu screen will be displayed or whether a success or failure effect will be displayed when the effect switch is operated, depending on the lighting mode of the effect switch lamp. .

In addition, when displaying the production switch image as shown in the middle and lower diagrams in Figure 23 after all rotation drums have stopped, the production switch lamp cannot be The lighting mode is not the lighting mode when displaying the menu screen, but is a lighting mode corresponding to the effect switch image. If the operation of the performance switch is received after T1 has elapsed since the full rotation drum has stopped, the performance switch image will be erased, a success or failure performance will be executed, and the performance switch lamp will remain off. Even when T1 has elapsed since the operation of the effect switch was received, the effect switch lamp remains off, and the menu screen is not displayed even if the effect switch is operated. Furthermore, even when T2 for displaying the demonstration screen has elapsed after the full rotation drum has stopped, the demonstration screen is not displayed, the volume is lowered, and the performance switch lamp remains off. In this case, depending on whether the payment process is executed by accepting the operation of the payment switch, or whether the game is executed until after the end of the next game (after the end of the game where the production switch image is not displayed) The menu screen can be displayed after T1 has elapsed, and the demonstration screen can be displayed after T2 has elapsed after all rotations have stopped.

With this configuration, in a game in which a production switch image is displayed, the player is troubled as to whether the menu screen or success or failure production will be displayed when the production switch is operated. Since this is no longer necessary, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game. Note that the menu screen may be configured so that it cannot be displayed even after the payment processing is executed, and in this case, a so-called resurrection effect is displayed in which a failure effect is displayed in the relevant game, but a success effect is displayed in the next game. It is possible to maintain a sense of expectation until whether or not it is carried out.

Further, when the effect switch lamp is lit in a lighting mode that allows the menu screen to be displayed, the effect switch image is not displayed on the liquid crystal. In other words, whether or not the menu screen is displayed can be confirmed only by the lighting mode of the production switch lamp.

With this configuration, it is possible to notify the state in which the menu screen can be displayed, which is not directly related to the progress of the game, only by the lighting mode of the production switch lamp, so even if the production switch image is displayed on the liquid crystal display. Compared to the above, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player will have a sense of expectation when operating the effect switch, and the menu screen will not be displayed even though the player operates the effect switch with anticipation. By storing it away, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming less interesting.

In addition, on the demo screen where the player can easily recognize that the game is not progressing, the effect switch image is displayed in a different position and in a smaller size than the effect switch image displayed in the push button effect. Good too. In this case, there is a low possibility that the player will confuse it with the push button effect, and furthermore, it becomes possible to effectively display the menu screen display to the player. This means that the most common timing for displaying the menu screen is when starting a game, and at that timing, there is a high possibility that the demo screen is being displayed because no game is being played. It is based on

In addition, as for the display position of the effect switch image, during the push button effect, the effect switch image is displayed in the center of the liquid crystal, and during the demonstration screen, the effect switch image is displayed at the edge of the liquid crystal (for example, as shown in Figure 29, the lower part of the liquid crystal or the lower left of the liquid crystal). It is displayed in an inconspicuous location such as Further, as described above, the effect switch image in the demo screen is displayed in a smaller size than the effect switch image during the push button effect. In other words, it can be said that the effect switch image on the demo screen and the effect image during the push button effect are different in at least one of their display area and size. Furthermore, the display mode of the display switch image during the push button display and the display switch image on the demo screen may be different (for example, the display mode of the switch image during the push button display repeats lighting and extinguishing at a predetermined period). (Displayed in a blinking mode, and the production switch image on the demo screen displayed in a lit mode, etc.) This allows the player to intuitively distinguish between a situation in which the player wants to press the effect switch as part of the effect and a situation in which the effect switch may be pressed.

Note that the production switch image on the demo screen may be in a form that displays a subtitle such as "PUSH to display menu" as shown in FIG. 30.

The timing at which the push button effect is executed is after all rotation drums have stopped, but it may be executed after the start switch 12 is pressed. If the production switch image is displayed after receiving the start switch 12, the production switch image may be erased by the first stop operation (operation of any stop switch 13), or even after all rotation drums have stopped. The display of the production switch image may be maintained. When the display of the performance switch image is maintained after all rotations have stopped, the effective period of the performance switch operation is also maintained, and when the performance switch is operated, a successful or unsuccessful performance is executed. In addition, if the production switch is not operated because the time to move to the demo screen has passed, the payment process has been executed, the bet process has been executed, or the next game has started. The production switch image will also be erased.

Further, whether or not the operation response effect is executed due to the operation of the effect switch is determined by setting a predetermined timer value in a counter based on reception of a predetermined command from the main control means 100, and processing a timer interrupt. etc., the value of the counter is decremented at a predetermined interval, and when the counter value reaches 0, the operation of the production switch is enabled (the operation response production is executed when the production switch is operated). ). At this time, the rendering process for the effect switch image is also executed after a period corresponding to a predetermined timer value has elapsed from the reception of a predetermined command, but the image control board that executes the drawing process and the effect control Due to communication delays with the board, the effect switch may become effective before the effect switch image is displayed. In this way, even if the effect switch is operated before the effect switch image is displayed, the response effect can be executed.

<Explanation of winning effects, settlement effects, and input effects applicable to this embodiment>
Next, the relationship between the winning effect, the settlement effect and the input effect that can be applied to this embodiment will be explained.

The effects applicable to this embodiment described below include a winning effect associated with the payout process of game medals based on winning small roles such as push order winnings, a settlement effect associated with the settlement process, and an input effect associated with the bet operation. By being able to output both at the same time, it prevents erroneous recognition such as that the payment was not made correctly or that the input was not made correctly, and the player is made aware that the gaming machine is functioning normally. The purpose is to

The configurations related to the prize-winning performance, settlement performance, and input performance that can be applied to this embodiment will be described below.

<Main control means>
Although the main processing of the main control means is as described in the present embodiment, details of the processing omitted in the description of the present embodiment will be described below.

<Processing when inserting game medals>
If the game medals are ready to be inserted, and the number of bets is not set at the upper limit, when the game medals are inserted, bet settings (also called bets) for the number of inserted medals are made, and the upper limit is set. If set to , the number of coins inserted will be added to the credit card. Also, if the number of coins to bet is not set to the upper limit and the number of coins that can be bet is stored in the credit, bet settings are made according to the operation of the bet switch (MAX bet switch 18, 1 bet switch 19). . Inserting the game medals here means that the game medals inserted into the medal slot 17 pass through the medal selector 34 normally.
In addition, if game medals are set to bet or stored in credits before starting the game (after setting the required number of bets and before operating the start lever), the settlement switch is operated. Once done, payment processing is possible.
In addition, the main control means (main control board 100) transmits a medal insertion command to the sub-control means (sub-control board 1000, also referred to as effect control means) when game medals are inserted, and when the bet switch is operated. A storage insertion command corresponding to the set number of bets is transmitted to the sub-control means. When the credit is stored (added), the main control means transmits a storage number command indicating the current storage number to the sub-control means. Based on these commands, the sub-control means can perform insertion effects such as outputting game medal insertion sounds.

<Winning process (payout process)>
The winning process (hereinafter also referred to as payout process) is to pay out predetermined game medals according to the winning small role (stopped display symbol combination) when it is determined that a small role has won in the winning determination process. It is processing. Paying out the game medals here means adding to the credits if the credit storage has not reached the upper limit, and paying out the game medals from the hopper 44 if the credit storage has reached the upper limit. The main control means transmits a payout start command to the sub-control means when starting a payout based on winnings (whether it is adding credits or paying out from the hopper 44), and ends the payout based on winnings. When doing so, a payout end command is sent to the sub-control means. Based on the payout start command and the payout end command, the sub-control means is capable of executing winning effects such as outputting game medal payout sounds and executing back lamp effects (also referred to as BL effects). Note that the payout start command includes information on the number of game medals to be paid out, and the payout start command and payout end command are sent even when there is no payout (at the time of a loss or when winning a prize in a re-game). When losing or winning a replay, information on the number of game medals to be paid out is transmitted as 0, and then a payout end command is transmitted.

<Payment processing>
When the settlement switch is operated while no game is being played, a (settlement) process is performed in which game medals corresponding to the number of bets set and the number of stored credits are paid out to the player from the hopper 44. Execute. When the payment processing starts, the main control means sends a payment start command to the sub-control means, and when the payment processing ends, the main control means sends a payment completion command to the sub-control means. The sub-control means is capable of performing payment effects such as outputting a payment sound based on the payment start command and payment end command.

<Sub-control means>
Various performances can be executed depending on the progress of the game, such as execution of performances based on the lottery result of the role (result of internal lottery), execution of push order navigation performance during AT, insertion performance, etc. Execute prize-winning presentation, settlement presentation, etc.

<Introduction>
This is an effect executed when game medals are inserted or a bet switch is operated, and an insert sound is output based on a medal insert command and a storage insert command transmitted from the main control means. In the main control means, as a storage insertion command, one of a storage insertion command (1 coin), a storage insertion command (2 coins), and a storage insertion command (3 coins) is set according to the number of coins set for bet. The stored storage input command is sent to the sub-control means. When receiving the stored insertion command (1 coin), it outputs the insertion sound A once indicating that 1 coin has been bet (for example, outputs the sound of ``da'') to notify the player that 1 coin has been bet. . When the stored insertion command (3 coins) is received, the insertion sound A is output three times to notify the player that 3 coins have been bet. When a medal insertion command is received, if the inserted game medal is set as a bet, the insertion sound A is outputted once, and if it is stored, the insertion sound B is outputted once indicating that one medal has been stored. (for example, by outputting a beeping sound) to notify the player that the bet has been placed or saved.
Furthermore, when receiving the stored input command (3 coins), instead of outputting the input sound A three times, the input sound C indicating that 3 coins have been bet may be output, or when a bet is set. , the same sound (for example, output sound A in all states) may be output in the case of storage. Further, different sounds (turn-on sound D) may be output during normal times (non-AT) and during AT.

<Winning production>
This is a performance that is executed when game medals are paid out, and is executed based on the payout start command and payout end command, and outputs a payout sound that indicates that game medals are being paid out, and a back lamp effect. executed.

<Output of payout sound>
The game medal payout sounds that are output during the execution of the game medal payout process include a payout sound A and a payout sound B that are different from each other. The payout sound A is a payout sound that is output when a push order winning combination is won in normal times (during non-AT), and as a result of operating in the correct push order, the correct symbol combination stops and an advantageous payout is performed. Payout sound B is a payout sound that is output when a push order combination is won during AT, and as a result of operating in the correct push order, the correct symbol combination stops and an advantageous payout is performed. If the operations are not performed in the correct pressing order, the incorrect symbol combination may stop and an unfavorable payout may be performed, but in that case, no payout sound is output. The dispensing sound A starts when the dispensing start command is received, and the output of the first sound (for example, a zu sound) is repeated until the dispensing end command is received, and after receiving the dispensing end command, the output starts for a first specific time ( This is a payout sound that repeats the output of the first sound for a period of, for example, 1 second) and then ends. The payout sound A is a first payout sound period (the period in which the actual payout is performed plus the above-mentioned first specific time) which is longer than the period during which the actual payout is performed (the period during which the payout process is performed). By outputting sound throughout the period, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that a payout is being made. In addition, by outputting the payout sound over a first payout sound period that is longer than the period in which the payout is being performed, the game can be played as if the payout is being made during the period in which the payout sound is being output. As a result, it can be expected that the start time of the next game will be delayed by making the player aware of this, and as a result, it will be easier to execute without being canceled midway through, such as when a performance based on the result of an internal lottery is being performed over a certain period of time. .

The dispensing sound B starts when the dispensing start command is received, and the output of the second sound (for example, a de sound) is repeated until the dispensing end command is received, and after receiving the dispensing end command, the second specific sound ( This is a payout sound that repeats output of the second sound for a period of, for example, 2 seconds) and ends. In other words, the payout sound B is a sound output for a second payout sound period (a period in which the above second specific time is added to the period in which the actual payout is performed) which is longer than the period during which the actual payout is being performed. This second put-out sound period is longer than the first put-out sound period of the put-out sound A. In this way, by outputting the payout sound B over a longer period than the payout sound A, it is possible to make the player recognize that more game medals are being awarded. Furthermore, by outputting the payout sound B, which is different from the payout sound A, during AT, it is possible to make it easier to recognize that the player is in an advantageous state different from normal.
In addition, although the payout sound was output until the first specific time or the second specific time elapsed after receiving the payout end command, once the payout start command was received, the payout sound was output from the payout start to the payout end without using the payout end command as a trigger. The payout sound may be output for a period of time obtained by adding the first specific time and the second specific time to the time required to complete the game (whichever is longer between adding credits and paying out game medals). Further, although the payout sound A during normal operation and the payout sound B during AT are made to be different, the same payout sound may be output.

<Back lamp effect>
The back lamp effect includes a back lamp effect A and a back lamp effect B, which are different from each other. Back lamp effect A is a back lamp effect that is output when the pressing order winning combination is won in normal times (during non-AT), and as a result of operating in the correct pressing order, the correct symbol combination stops and an advantageous payout is made. be. Back lamp performance B is a back lamp performance that is executed when a pressing order winning combination is won during AT, and as a result of operating in the correct pressing order, the correct symbol combination stops and an advantageous payout is performed. If the operations are not performed in the correct pressing order, the incorrect symbol combination may stop, but in that case, the back lamp effect will not be executed. The back lamp effect A starts when the payout start command is received, and the back lamp is repeatedly turned on and off in the first pattern until the payout end command is received, and after the payout end command is received, the back lamp is turned on and off for a first specific time ( For example, the backlight is turned on and off in the first pattern over a period of 1 second) and ends. The back lamp effect A shall be executed over a first back lamp effect period (the period in which the above first specific time is added to the period during which the actual payout is being performed) which is longer than the period during which the actual payout is being performed. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that a payout is being made. In addition, by executing (outputting) the back lamp effect A for a first back lamp effect period that is longer than the period in which the payout is being performed, the payout is not performed during the period when the back lamp effect A is being executed. This can be expected to delay the start of the next game by making the player recognize that the game is being played, and can also delay the start of the next game. It is more likely to be executed without being canceled.

Back lamp effect B starts when the payout start command is received, and the back lamp is repeatedly turned on and off in the second pattern until the payout end command is received, and then the second specific time ( For example, the backlight is turned on and off in the second pattern over a period of 2 seconds) and ends. In other words, the back lamp effect B is turned on for a second back lamp effect period (a period in which the above-mentioned second specific time is added to the period in which the actual payout is being performed) which is longer than the period during which the actual payout is being performed. , the lights are turned off repeatedly, and this second back lamp effect period is longer than the first back lamp effect period. In this way, by executing the back lamp effect for a longer time than the back lamp effect A, the back lamp effect B can make the player recognize as if more game medals have been awarded. Moreover, by performing back lamp effect B, which is different from back lamp effect A, during AT, it is possible to make it easier to recognize that the vehicle is in an advantageous state different from normal.

In addition, although the back lamp effect was executed until the first specific time or second specific time elapsed after receiving the payout end command, once the payout start command was received, the payout was started from the payout start without being triggered by the payout end command. The back lamp performance may be executed for a time that is the time required to complete the game (whichever is longer due to the addition of credits and the payout of game medals) plus the first specific time and the second specific time. Further, although the back lamp effect is different between normal times and during AT, the same back lamp effect may be performed. Moreover, although the back lamp is repeatedly turned on and off in a fixed pattern, a series of turning on and off patterns may be determined and output from the start to the end of the back lamp effect. In addition, both the "first back lamp effect period" of back lamp effect A and the "first payout sound period" of payout sound A are calculated by adding the first specific time to the time when the actual payout is being performed. Although both are the same period, the "first back lamp effect period" and the "first payout sound period" may be different periods from each other. The same applies to the relationship between the "second back lamp effect period" of back lamp effect B and the "second payout sound period" of payout sound B. In short, the "first output sound period" and the "second output sound period" of the output sounds A and B, the "first back lamp effect period" and the "second back lamp effect" of the back lamp effects A and B. "Period" is longer than the period during which actual dispensing is performed, and "First dispensing sound period" < "Second dispensing sound period", "First back lamp effect period" < "First dispensing sound period" If there is a relationship such as ``back lamp effect period 2'', these periods can be set as appropriate.

<Payment performance>
This is a performance that is executed when paying out game medals, and is executed based on the payment start command and payment end command, and outputs a payment sound (payment performance) that indicates that game medals are being paid out and payment. An audio message indicating that the process has ended will be output. The settlement sound starts when the settlement start command is received, and a sound different from the dispensing sound (for example, a do) is output repeatedly until the dispensing end command is received, and after receiving the dispensing end command, the sound starts for a third specific period ( For example, in 5 seconds), a voice indicating that the payment has been completed, such as "Payment has been completed," is output and the process ends. In other words, in the payment performance, a predetermined payment performance period (the period in which the actual payout is performed plus the above-mentioned third specific time) is longer than the period in which the actual payout is performed (the period in which payment processing is performed). The sound is output for a period of time).

Hereinafter, various effects executed according to the progress of the game will be explained with reference to FIGS. 31 to 35. FIG. 31 is a time chart when the MAX bet switch is not operated after the payout process is completed, FIG. 32 is a time chart when the MAX bet switch is operated after the payout process is completed, and FIG. This is a time chart when the payment operation using the payment switch is performed after the payout process is completed, FIG. 34 is a time chart when the game medals are not inserted after the payment process is completed, and FIG. 35 is a time chart when the game medals are not inserted after the payment process is completed. This is a time chart when the input is performed. Note that in FIGS. 31 to 35, ON and OFF are used for convenience of explanation, but the corresponding processing and performance status are described in parentheses. Specifically, for the payout process/settlement process/BL performance/settlement performance, ON indicates a state in which it is being executed, OFF indicates a state in which it is not in execution, and when it changes from OFF to ON, processing etc. is started, and ON When it turns OFF, it means that it is finished. Regarding the payout sound/putting sound, ON indicates a state in which the sound is being output, and OFF indicates a state in which the sound is not output. For the MAX bet lamp/medal insertion lamp, ON indicates a lit state, and OFF indicates a non-lit state. MAX bet switch operation/settlement switch operation indicates that ON is operated, and OFF indicates that it is not operated. For medal insertion, ON indicates that the inserted game medals have passed through the medal selector 34 (the input sensor provided in the medal selector 34 detects the game medals), and OFF indicates that no game medals have been inserted. .

<If you do not insert the MAX bet switch after the payout process is complete>
As shown in FIG. 31, the main control means starts the payout process at time t0, and the sub control means starts the payout sound A (referred to as payout sound in the figure, the same applies hereinafter) based on the received payout start command. Output and back lamp effect A (referred to as BL effect in the figure, the same applies hereinafter) is started. At time t1, the main control means ends the payout process and sends a payout end command to the sub control means. The sub-control means causes the output of the payout sound A and the back lamp effect A to continue for a period T1 (first specific time) as a winning effect based on the payout end command. After the payout process ends at time t1, the main control means performs processes such as updating the RT status (game end check process), and turns on the blocker to make it possible to insert game medals. . The main control means turns on the MAX bet lamp at time t2 based on the fact that game medals can be inserted. The MAX bet lamp continues to be lit because the MAX bet switch was not operated. At the timing of time t5, since the T1 period has passed since the timing of time t1, the sub-control means ends the output of the payout sound A and the back lamp effect A. That is, the period from time t0 to t5 can be said to be the first payout sound period and the first back lamp effect period. As described above, smooth control is possible even when various situations are combined, such as turning on the MAX bet lamp while continuing to output payout sound A and back lamp effect A at the timing after time t1. By continuing to output sound A, the player can be made aware that a payout has been made, and can also be appropriately made aware that bet settings can be made by operating the MAX bet, thereby improving the performance of the gaming machine. be able to.

<If you perform the input operation using the MAX bet switch after the payout process is complete>
As shown in FIG. 32, up to the timing t2, it is the same as the case where the MAX bet switch is not inserted after the end of the payout process, and at the time t3, the MAX bet switch is operated. As the MAX bet switch is operated, the main control means ends lighting of the MAX bet lamp (turns off), and the sub control means ends the back lamp effect A, and from time t3 to time t4. (During the T2 period) As an injection performance, the input sound A (referred to as input sound in the figure, the same applies hereinafter) is output three times. Smooth control is possible even when various situations such as outputting the dispensing sound A and outputting the dispensing sound A are performed at the timing after time t3. It is possible to make the player recognize that the MAX bet switch has been operated and the bet setting has been made, and the performance of the gaming machine can be improved. Furthermore, at the timing of time t3, the output of the payout sound A continues, but by ending the back lamp effect A, the bet setting is made visually while the player is made aware of the fact that a payout has been made through the sound. You can make them aware of what happened. In addition, in FIG. 32, the explanation was given using the insertion operation using the MAX bet switch, but even when the insertion operation using the 1 bet switch or the insertion of medals is performed, the insertion sound is output in the same way.

<If you perform the payment operation using the payment button after the payout process is completed>
As shown in FIG. 33, up to the timing of time t2, the operation is the same as when the input operation is performed using the MAX bet switch after the end of the payout process, and at the timing of time t3, the settlement button is operated instead of operating the MAX bet switch. Ru. At time t3, the main control means starts the settlement process based on the operation of the settlement button, and ends lighting (turns off) the MAX bet lamp. Then, the sub-control means ends the output of the payout sound A and the back lamp effect A at the timing of time t3 without waiting for the elapse of the T1 period. Thereafter, based on the payment start command, output of payment sound is started as payment performance. At time t6, the main control means ends the payment processing and sends a payment completion command to the sub-control means. Upon receiving the payment completion command, the sub-control means outputs a voice indicating that the payment has been completed, instead of outputting the payment sound, for a period T3 (third specific time). When the payment process started, if the payout sound A and the payment sound were output at the same time, it would confuse the player, so it was planned to continue for the T1 period when the payment process started. By terminating the output of the payout sound A and the back lamp effect A, it is possible to accurately make the player recognize that a payment process different from the payout process is being performed.

<If game medals are not inserted after the payment process is completed>
As shown in FIG. 34, the main control means starts the payment processing at time t8, and the sub-control means starts outputting the payment sound as a payment performance based on the received payment start command. Here, the back lamp effect is not executed (output) at the time of payment, so that the payout process and the payment process can be visually different processes. At time t9, the main control means ends the payment processing and sends a payment completion command to the sub-control means. When the sub-control means receives the payment completion command, it outputs a voice indicating that the payment has been completed, instead of outputting the payment sound, for a period T3. After the payment process is completed at time t9, the main control means turns on the blocker to make it possible to insert game medals. At time t10, the main control means turns on the medal insertion ready lamp based on the fact that the game medals can be inserted. After that, no medals were inserted, so the light remained on. At the timing of time T13, since the T3 period has passed since the timing of time t9, the sub-control means ends the output of the voice indicating that the payment has been completed. As described above, although the settlement effect is executed at the timing after time t10, it is possible to insert medals.

<If game medals are inserted after the payment process is completed>
As shown in FIG. 35, up to the timing of time t10, it is the same as the case where no game medals are inserted after the end of the settlement process, and the main control means controls that at the timing of time t11, the game medals are inserted and one bet is placed. Settings are made and a medal insertion command is sent to the sub-control means. The sub-control means outputs the insertion sound A once as an insertion effect based on receiving the medal insertion command, and the output is performed from the timing of time t11 to the timing of time t12. Smooth control is possible even when various situations are combined, such as outputting the input sound A while outputting the voice indicating that the payment has been completed at the timing after time t11. While making the player aware that the game has ended, the player can also be made aware that medals have been inserted and bet settings have been made, and the performance of the gaming machine can be improved. Note that FIGS. 31 to 35 have been explained using an example in which the payout sound is set as payout sound A and the BL effect is set as back lamp effect A, but in these FIGS. 31 to 35, the payout sound is set as payout sound B. , the BL effect may be set as back lamp effect B (in this case, it goes without saying that the T1 period in FIGS. 31 and 38 can be read as the second specific time). Even in this case, the same effects as described above can be achieved.

<Change of aspect>
We have explained a configuration in which the same sound is repeatedly output while the payout process or settlement process is in progress until the end of the payout process. A command indicating that one coin has been paid out and a command that can identify the remaining number of coins to be paid out is transmitted, and the sub-control means receives one coin based on receiving these commands transmitted from the main control means. A payout sound or a settlement sound may be output each time.
Further, although the settlement sound is a different sound from the payout sound, it may be the same sound as the payout sound. By using the same sound, the amount of sound data can be reduced, resulting in a reduction in data capacity. If the same sound is used, the payout process and the payment process can be distinguished depending on the presence or absence of a backlight effect, and the player will be able to properly understand the payment process even if the payment process is performed immediately after the payout process. You can make them aware of what is happening.
Further, the payment sound may be the same sound as the error sound. In this case as well, the amount of sound data can be reduced, resulting in a reduction in data capacity.
Also, during AT, payout sound B is output, but in addition to outputting payout sound B from the start of the payout process, sounds indicating the correct press order such as "get" and "yoshisha" are also output from the start of the payout process. The output may be performed in a shorter time than the second specific time (2 seconds) after the processing is completed. By outputting a sound indicating the correct pressing order, it is possible to recognize that the stop switch has been operated correctly, and by outputting the payout sound for a longer time than the sound indicating the correct pressing order, it is possible to receive game medals. The player can recognize that the payout has been appropriately paid out.
In addition, although it is assumed that the main control means turns on and off the MAX bet lamp, the main control means transmits to the sub control means whether or not the MAX bet switch is in an operable state, so that the sub control means turns on the MAX bet lamp. , the lights may be turned off.

In addition, it has been explained that the input sound is output as the input effect, but in addition to the output of the input sound, an image indicating the input is displayed on the display device 32, and an LED lamp for the effect is used to indicate that the input has been input. You may also make a notification.
In addition, as a prize-winning performance, it is assumed that a payout sound is output and a back lamp performance is performed, but an image indicating that a prize has been won (for example, GET is displayed) is displayed on the display device 32, and an LED lamp for the performance is used. It is also possible to announce that the winner has won a prize. At that time, when executing the entry effect, the display on the display device 32 as the winning effect may be terminated, the notification by the LED lamp may be terminated, or the display on the display device 32 as the effect for the input, the LED lamp The notification may not be performed.
In addition, as a payment effect, a payment sound and a voice indicating that payment has been completed are output, but the display device 32 displays an image indicating that the payment process is being performed (for example, displaying that payment is in progress). Alternatively, an LED lamp for presentation may be used to notify that payment is being made. At that time, when executing the input effect, the display on the display device 32 as the payment effect may be terminated or the notification by the LED lamp may be terminated, or the display on the display device 32 as the effect on the injection, the LED lamp may be terminated. The notification using the lamp may not be performed.
In addition, although the prize-winning effect is performed in the pressed order role, the prize-winning effect may also be performed in other small roles (watermelon role, bell role, cherry role, etc. which can be pressed in any order). In other small winning combinations, by outputting a payout sound different from that of the pressed winning combination or performing a back lamp effect different from that of the pressed winning combination, it is possible to easily recognize that a winning combination is different from the pressed winning combination.
Further, the time and period length in this embodiment are merely examples, and various changes are possible.

<Explanation of errors and prize-winning effects regarding the hopper 44 applicable to this embodiment>
Next, the relationship between errors related to the hopper 44 and winning effects that can be applied to this embodiment will be explained.

In the effects applicable to this embodiment described below, even if a hopper empty error occurs when performing a winning effect accompanying the start of the payout process or an effect after the reels have stopped, the relevant game The purpose of this game is to make the player aware of the results of the game, the results of the performance, etc.

The configuration related to the error regarding the hopper 44 and the winning performance that can be applied to this embodiment will be described below.

<Main control means>
The main processing that the main control means has is as described in this embodiment and the explanation of the winning effect, settlement effect, and input effect applicable to this embodiment, but the details of the processing are omitted in the description of this embodiment. will be explained below.

<Winning process (payout process)>
The payout process is a process of paying out predetermined game medals according to the winning small role (stopped display symbol combination) when it is determined that the small role has won in the winning determination process. Paying out the game medals here means adding to the credits if the credit storage has not reached the upper limit, and paying out the game medals from the hopper 44 if the credit storage has reached the upper limit. In order to pay out game medals from the hopper 44, the main control means (main control board 100) inputs a drive signal to the hopper motor (ON state) to drive the hopper motor, and rotates the rotary disk to pay out the game medals. When the game medals are discharged one by one and the payout sensor detects the game medals for a predetermined time (the time from the start of passing to the end of passing is between 3 ms and 200 ms), it is determined that one game medal has been paid out. Further, the main control means transmits a payout start command to the sub-control means (sub-control board 1000) when starting payout based on winnings (whether it is adding credits or dispensing from the hopper 44). Then, when finishing, a payout end command is sent to the sub-control means. Based on the payout start command, the sub-control means can execute winning presentations such as displaying the number of payouts and cumulative difference number. Note that the payout start command includes information on the number of game medals to be paid out, and the payout start command and payout end command are sent even when there is no payout (at the time of a loss or when winning a prize in a re-game). When losing or winning a replay, information on the number of game medals to be paid out is transmitted as 0, and then a payout end command is transmitted.

<Error regarding hopper 44>
As errors related to the hopper 44, a hopper retention error, a hopper empty error, and an abnormality detection error can be detected. The hopper retention error is an error that occurs when it is determined that the game medals are stuck in the payout port of the hopper 44 when the game medals are being paid out, and the hopper empty error is an error that occurs when it is determined that the game medals in the hopper are empty. The abnormality detection error is an error that occurs when it is determined that there is an abnormal input to the dispensing sensor of the hopper 44.
When detecting an error and notifying the error, the main control means transmits an error notification start command including error type information to the sub-control means, and when the error is cleared, sends an error recovery command. The sub-control means displays error information (error screen) corresponding to the type of error detected on the display device 32 based on the error notification start command, terminates the error screen display based on the error recovery command, and confirms that the error has occurred. Return to previous display.
Further, the main control means transmits an error detection command indicating that an error has been detected at the timing when the abnormality detection error is detected, and the sub control means displays that an abnormality detection has occurred based on the error detection command.

<Hopper retention error>
When paying out game medals from the hopper 44, a drive signal is input to the hopper motor to perform a game medal payout operation that rotates the rotary disk, and if the payout sensor continues to detect the state for a certain period of time (201 ms) or more, the game medals will be released. It is determined that the hopper is clogged and a hopper retention error is set.
<Hopper empty error>
When paying out game medals from the hopper 44, even if a drive signal is input to the hopper motor and a game medal payout operation that rotates the rotary disk is performed, the payout sensor will not detect the game medals for a certain period of time (3.5 seconds). If there are no game medals in the hopper 44, it is determined that the game medals are empty, and a hopper empty error is set.
<Anomaly detection error>
If the payout sensor detects a certain period of time (3 ms) or longer when game medals are not being paid out, it is determined that there is an abnormal input to the payout sensor, and an abnormality detection error is set. The error display is performed when no game is being played (waiting for game medals to be inserted, waiting for reception of the start lever).

<Sub-control means>
Various performances can be executed depending on the progress of the game, such as execution of performances based on the lottery result of the role (result of internal lottery), error notification, and press order navigation performance during AT. execution, winning effects, results screen display, results notification effects, etc.

<Winning production>
This is a performance that is executed when game medals are paid out, and includes an acquisition display performance that indicates that a predetermined number of game medals will be paid out, and an acquisition display performance that indicates that the game medals acquired by the player have accumulated to a predetermined number. Includes cumulative display effect. The acquisition display performance and the cumulative display performance are executed based on the sub-control means receiving the payout start command.

<Acquisition display performance>
The acquisition display performance is a performance that is executed when the pressing order combination is won during AT, and as a result of operating in the correct pressing order, the correct symbol combination stops and an advantageous payout is performed. As for the acquisition display effect, "GET" may be displayed without specifying the game medals to be paid out, or "12 GET" may be displayed to specifically specify that 12 game medals will be paid out. It may be displayed as As a result of winning the push order combination during AT and not operating in the correct push order, the incorrect symbol combinations are stopped and disadvantageous payouts are made (payout of fewer game medals compared to the correct symbol combinations, such as one medal payout). However, in that case, the acquisition display effect will not be executed.
The acquisition display performance starts when the payout start command is received, and is executed for a predetermined acquisition display performance period (1 second) that is shorter than the period during which the actual payout is being performed (the period during which the payout process is being performed). . Therefore, the process is executed even if all the game medals to be actually paid out to the player have not been paid out. This is to prevent the performance from being canceled when the next game starts or being confused with the result of the next game if the acquisition display effect is executed after all the payouts have been made. Further, even if all the game medals have not been paid out, by executing the acquisition display effect, it is possible to make the player aware of the result of the game (that the payout will be obtained) in advance.

<Cumulative display effect>
The cumulative display effect is executed when the cumulative number of game medals (also referred to as the total number of game medals) acquired by the player during AT exceeds the specified number (500, 1000, 1500, 2000) for the first time. It is a performance that Specifically, the cumulative number of acquired coins is counted from the start of AT during one AT, and if it is determined that the cumulative number exceeds 500 coins due to the payout of game medals, the cumulative display effect is executed (started). Ru. Thereafter, even if the cumulative number falls below 500 sheets and exceeds 500 sheets again, the cumulative display effect is not executed. The cumulative display effect is displayed as "500 sheets GET" depending on the specified number.
The cumulative display effect is started when the payout start command is received and it is determined that the cumulative number exceeds the specified number due to the payout, and is shorter than the period during which the actual payout is being performed (the period during which the payout process is being performed). This is executed for a predetermined cumulative display performance period (1 second). Similar to the acquisition display performance, this is executed even if the number of game medals actually paid out to the player does not exceed the specified number. This prevents the timing of executing the cumulative display effect from varying when the actual cumulative display effect exceeds the specified number, causing the effect to be canceled when the next game starts, or being confused with the result of the next game. It's for a reason. Further, even if the specified number is not exceeded, by executing the cumulative display effect, the player can be made aware of the result of the game (exceeding the specified number) in advance.
Note that the acquisition display performance and the cumulative display performance may meet the execution conditions for both performances in one game, but in this embodiment, in a game where the cumulative display performance can be executed, the acquisition display performance is basically executed. Instead, only the cumulative display effect is executed. However, unlike the general rule, the case where the acquisition display effect is executed will be described later.

<Display of result screen>
The result screen displayed in this embodiment is a screen that is displayed when the AT ends, and is a screen that displays the total number of game medals acquired during the AT, the number of games that indicate the AT execution period, etc. When displaying the result screen, a warning display (an addictive prevention display) is also displayed. When the last game of the AT ends (receiving a command to stop all rotations), the display of the result screen is started, and the display of the result screen is continued until the next game is started. Note that while the result screen is being displayed in the final game, only the acquisition display effect can be executed, and even if any predetermined number is exceeded in the final game, the cumulative display effect will not be executed. For example, if you win a push order combination and operate in the correct push order, the correct symbol combination stops, an advantageous payout is made, and the specified number of coins exceeds 500, but if it is not the final game, the cumulative display effect is However, if it is the final game, the result screen is displayed, so the accumulation display effect is not executed and the acquisition display effect is executed. This is because the total number of game medals acquired during the AT is displayed on the result screen, so if the cumulative display performance is also executed, similar information will be displayed overlappingly, which will confuse the player.

<Result announcement performance>
The result announcement performance is a performance to notify the player that an advantageous result has been obtained, and is a performance executed in the final game of a continuous performance. Specifically, to notify players whether or not they have obtained results that are advantageous to them, such as winning a bonus, winning an additional bonus such as the number of remaining AT games, or winning a specialized zone that increases the chance of increasing the number of additional games. As an example, it is announced whether or not an advantageous result has been obtained as a result of a battle performance or the like. If an advantageous result is obtained, an image indicating success or victory is displayed, and if an advantageous result is not obtained, an image indicating failure or defeat is displayed. In the battle production, a screen where friendly characters and enemy characters face each other is displayed when the lever is operated, and after all reels have stopped (by receiving a command to stop all reels), a competition between friendly characters and enemy characters begins. An image indicating success or victory, or an image indicating failure or defeat is displayed after the branching timing after a certain period of time has elapsed. The performance branching timing is 2.7 seconds after the start of the payout process, and the result announcement performance ends when an image indicating success or victory or an image indicating failure or defeat is displayed, and the payout process ends. It is 3 seconds after the start. As a result, the result notification performance ends before a hopper empty error occurs (detects) and an error screen is displayed, and the player can confirm the presence or absence of an advantageous result without depending on the occurrence of an error. In addition, since the all reel stop command and the payout start command are transmitted at substantially the same timing, the start of the payout process described above may be replaced with after all the reels have stopped.

Various effects executed according to the progress of the game will be explained below with reference to FIGS. 36 to 41. FIG. 36 is a time chart when dispensing is performed normally, FIG. 37 is a time chart when dispensing is not performed normally (when a hopper empty error occurs), and FIG. 38 is a time chart when dispensing is not performed normally. This is a time chart for when dispensing is not performed (when a hopper retention error occurs), FIG. 39 is an example of a display screen when dispensing is performed normally, and FIG. 40 is a time chart when dispensing is performed normally. FIG. 41 is an example of a display screen when there is no payout (when a hopper empty error occurs), and FIG. 41 is an example of a display screen when dispensing is not performed normally (when a hopper retention error occurs).
Note that in FIGS. 36 to 38, ON and OFF are used for convenience of explanation, but the corresponding processing and performance status are described in parentheses. Specifically, ON of the payout process indicates that it is being executed, OFF indicates that it is not being executed, and when it changes from OFF to ON, the process starts, and when it changes from ON to OFF, it ends. . ON for payout indicates that one game medal has been paid out, and OFF indicates that no game medal has been paid out. ON of the acquired display performance and cumulative display performance indicates that the performance is being executed (displayed), and OFF indicates that the performance is not executed (not displayed). ON of the result announcement production indicates that it is being executed (the production is progressing), and OFF indicates that it is not being executed (the production has ended and the display has stopped on the screen announcing the results). . ON of error (hopper empty) and error (hopper retention) indicates a state where an error has occurred (an error has been detected and an error has been set), and OFF indicates a state where no error has occurred. ON of the error display indicates that an error code is displayed by the main control means or an error screen is displayed by the sub-control means based on the occurrence of an error, and OFF indicates that the error code or error screen is displayed. Indicates a state in which this is not done.

Figures 39 to 41 show cases where the acquisition display performance is executed, and when the cumulative display performance is executed, the notation "12 pieces GET" displayed in the acquisition display performance in the figure is the cumulative display performance. The displayed message will be "Get 500 pieces."

It is possible to combine with the winning performance, settlement performance, and input performance described above, and the times t0 and t1 in FIGS. 31 to 33 and the times t0 and t1 in FIG. 36 are the same timing. Time t5 in FIGS. 31 and 32 is later than time t1 in FIG. 36 and earlier than time t15.

<If the payout is made normally>
As shown in FIG. 36, the main control means starts the payout process at time t0, and the sub control means starts the acquisition display effect or the cumulative display effect based on the received payout start command. At the timing of time t14 one second later, the sub-control means ends the acquisition display performance or the cumulative display performance. Thereafter, at time t1, the main control means ends the payout process and sends a payout end command to the sub control means. The time required for the payout process is 1.5 seconds when it is executed normally (in this example, 12 game medals are normally paid out). The acquisition display performance starts at the timing when the payout process starts, and ends at the timing before the payout process ends. Thereby, the player can recognize that he or she will acquire game medals or that the cumulative number of acquired game medals will exceed a predetermined number before the payout process is completed. Since the result announcement performance has been executed since the start of the game, it is already being executed at the timing when the payout process is started. At time t15, the result announcement performance becomes a performance branching timing, and the display after this timing differs depending on whether an image indicating success or victory is displayed or an image indicating failure or defeat is displayed. At time t16, the result notification performance that was being executed ends. Time t15 is 2.7 seconds after starting the payout process, and time t16 is 3 seconds after starting the payout process.

<When dispensing is not performed normally (when a hopper empty error occurs)>
As shown in FIG. 37, the main control means starts the payout process at time t0, and the sub control means starts the acquisition display performance or the cumulative display performance based on the received payout start command. After the timing t0, the payout process is executed, but since there are no game medals in the hopper 44, no game medals are paid out, and the rotation of the rotary disk continues. Then, at time t17, the main control means determines that the game medals in the hopper 44 are empty, ends the payout process, and sets a hopper empty error. Based on the occurrence of the hopper empty error, the main control means displays an error code, and the sub control means displays an error screen. At other times t14, t15, and t16, as in FIG. 36, at time t14, the acquisition display performance or cumulative display performance ends, at time t15, the performance branching timing, and at time t16, the acquisition display performance or cumulative display performance ends. The result announcement performance ends. The hopper empty error occurs because the period for executing the acquisition display performance, cumulative display performance, and the period until the end of the result notification performance is set shorter than the period from when the payout process starts until the hopper empty error occurs. However, it becomes possible to check the contents of the acquisition display performance, cumulative display performance, and result notification performance before the error screen is displayed.
The figure shows a case where a hopper empty error occurs without paying out any medals after the start of the payout process. If a hopper empty error occurs after paying out multiple game medals, the hopper empty error occurs. The timing at which the empty error occurs is later than time t17 due to the payout of a plurality of game medals.

<If dispensing is not performed normally (when a hopper retention error occurs)>
As shown in FIG. 38, the main control means starts the payout process at time t0, and the sub control means starts the acquisition display effect or the cumulative display effect based on the received payout start command. After the timing t0, the payout process is executed, but since the discharge port of the hopper 44 is clogged with game medals, the payout of the game medals is not executed. Then, at the timing of time t18, since the payout sensor of the hopper 44 has continuously detected for more than 201 ms since the start of the payout process, the main control means determines that the game medals are jammed, ends the payout process, and sets a hopper retention error. . Similarly, at time t18, the main control means displays an error code based on the occurrence of a hopper retention error, and the sub control means displays the acquisition display performance or cumulative display performance that was being executed. The result notification performance is canceled (the display ends) and an error screen is displayed. Since the acquisition display effect or the cumulative display effect is executed from the start timing of the payout process, it is executed before the payout process starts and the hopper retention error occurs, so the acquisition display effect is executed before the error screen is displayed. It becomes possible to check the contents of the production and cumulative display production.
The figure shows a case where a hopper retention error occurs without paying out any medals after the start of the withdrawal process.If a hopper retention error occurs after multiple game medals have been paid out, the hopper retention error occurs. The timing at which the retention error occurs is later than time t18 due to the payout of a plurality of game medals, and the period during which the acquisition display performance, cumulative display performance, and result notification performance are executed becomes longer.

Acquisition display effects, cumulative display effects, and results notification effects are not displayed by canceling the execution of the effects themselves, but it is possible to perform effects by displaying an error screen over the effects while executing the effects themselves. It may be made invisible. In this case, if the error is canceled during performance execution, the performance being executed becomes visible from the timing of cancellation. However, to cancel the error, it is necessary to operate a reset switch, and since the reset switch is located inside the housing, it is necessary to unlock the locking device and open the front panel PS2. Normally, it takes more than 3 seconds from the start of the dispensing process to the end of the result notification performance before the error can be cleared, so if a hopper retention error occurs and the hopper retention error is cleared in the shortest possible time. It does not return during execution of acquisition display performance, cumulative display performance, or result notification performance, but returns on the screen after all performances are completed.

<Display screen when payout is completed normally>
FIG. 39 shows an example of a display screen when payout is normally performed. FIG. 39 shows a scene in which a battle performance (result notification performance) is being performed in a game in which there are 11 remaining AT games and a total number of game medals acquired is 230. The number of remaining games is displayed at the top left of the screen (since the game was executed with 11 remaining games, 1 is subtracted and displayed as 10G (game)).The top right of the screen shows the total number of game medals earned in AT is 230. Friendly characters (characters indicated by round heads) are displayed on the left side of the center of the screen, and enemy characters (characters indicated by star-shaped heads) are displayed on the right side.

FIG. 5A shows a screen at the timing when all the reels stop during execution of the battle performance (all reels stop command received), and after this timing the performance progresses in order to announce the result. FIG. 3(b) is a screen showing the timing at time t0 in FIG. 36, which is the timing at which the payout process is started. One game medal is paid out, and the total number of game medals is added from 230 to 1, making it 231, and from the right side of the screen, you can specify that 12 game medals will be paid out as an acquisition display effect. The display is moving towards the center. In the center of the screen, a competition between friendly characters and enemy characters has begun. Figure (c) shows the timing when three game medals are paid out, and a large "12 medals GET" display is displayed in the center of the screen as an acquisition display effect so that it can be specified that 12 game medals will be paid out. is being carried out. The competition between friendly characters and enemy characters continues.

Figure (d) shows the timing when 8 game medals have been paid out, and the message "Get 12 medals", which was displayed large in the center of the screen, is moving toward the left side of the screen toward the end of the acquisition display effect. It's moving. FIG. 3(e) shows the timing of time t15 in FIG. 36, when the payout of game medals has ended and the performance branch timing has come. Since the payout of game medals has ended, the total number of game medals is displayed as 242 pieces. In the center of the screen, the competition between friendly characters and enemy characters continues. FIG. 6(f) shows the timing after the effect branching timing, and shows the process of displaying an image indicating success. In the competition between the friendly character and the enemy character, the friendly character is enlarged and displayed, making it possible to recognize the success. FIG. 3(g) shows the timing of time t16 in FIG. 36, which is the timing at which the battle performance ends. The word "success" is displayed at the bottom right of the screen, clearly indicating that the performance was a success. The image displayed in (g) of the same figure ends as an effect, but continues to be displayed until the next game starts. The figure (h) shows the timing after the performance branching timing, and shows the process of displaying an image indicating failure. When a friendly character and an enemy character compete, the enemy character is enlarged and displayed, making it easy to recognize that the game will fail. FIG. 3(i) shows the timing of time t16 in FIG. 36, which is the timing at which the battle performance ends. "Failure" is displayed at the bottom right of the screen, clearly indicating that the performance was a failure. The image displayed in (i) of the same figure ends as an effect, but continues to be displayed until the next game starts.

<Display screen when payout is not performed normally (when hopper empty error occurs)>
FIG. 40 shows an example of a display screen when payout is not performed normally (when a hopper empty error occurs). From (a) to (i) in FIG. 39, the flow of acquisition display performance, cumulative display performance, and result notification performance is the same as in FIG. 39. However, since no game medals have been paid out after the start of the payout process, the total number of game medals at the top right of the screen remains at 230 and has not been updated. FIG. 37(j) shows the timing of time t17 in FIG. 37, and since no game medals were detected for 3.5 seconds after the start of the payout process, a hopper empty error is set in the main control means, and a hopper empty error is set in the sub control means. , this is the timing at which an error screen indicating a hopper empty error is displayed. Before the hopper empty error occurs, the same image is displayed whether an image indicating success or failure is displayed.

<Display screen when dispensing is not performed normally (when a hopper retention error occurs)>
FIG. 41 shows an example of a display screen when dispensing is not performed normally (when a hopper retention error occurs). From (a) to (c) in the same figure, the flow of acquisition display performance, cumulative display performance, and result notification performance is the same as in FIG. 39. However, since no game medals have been paid out after the start of the payout process, the total number of game medals at the top right of the screen remains at 230 and has not been updated. 38(k) is the timing at time t18 in FIG. 38, which is the timing at which a hopper retention error is set in the main control means and a screen indicating the hopper retention error is displayed in the sub-control means. If the payout sensor of the hopper 44 continuously detects for 201 ms or more after the start of the payout process, the main control means determines that game medals are jammed and sets a hopper retention error. When the main control means sets the hopper retention error, it transmits a command indicating the occurrence of the hopper retention error to the sub-control means. When the sub-control means receives a command indicating the occurrence of a hopper retention error, it displays a screen indicating the hopper retention error on the display device 32.

<Change of aspect>
Although the period for performing the acquisition display performance and the cumulative display performance is set to be a shorter period (1 second) than the period required when the payout process is normally executed (1.5 seconds), it may be a longer period. Specifically, the period may be longer than 1.5 seconds and shorter than the period (3.5 seconds) until the hopper empty error is detected. By making the period longer than the period required when the payout process is executed, it is possible to make the player more visually aware of the acquisition display performance and the cumulative display performance.
In addition, we set the time it takes when the payout process is executed normally as 1.5 seconds, but it depends on the number of coins in the payout process and whether the payout process only adds credits or includes payout of gaming medals from the hopper. The required time may be different.
In addition, only one of the acquisition display effect and the cumulative display effect is executed, but if the conditions for executing both effects are met, the accumulation display effect is executed after the acquisition display effect is executed. It's okay. The acquisition display effect ends 1 second after the start of the payout process, and the cumulative display effect is executed for 1 second thereafter, so even if a hopper empty error occurs, the player can recognize the contents of the cumulative display effect. .
In addition, the acquisition display performance is a performance that is executed when the pressing order winning role is won during AT, and as a result of operating in the correct pressing order, the correct symbol combination stops and an advantageous payout (12 pieces payout) is made. However, it may also be executed when another combination is won instead of the push order combination. Specifically, the winning combination (so-called shared bell) where an advantageous payout (12 pieces) is executed regardless of the pressing order is won, and the symbol combination (correct symbol combination) corresponding to the pressing order irrespective of the winning combination is stopped. It can be executed when

The acquisition display performance may include a plurality of types of modes when an advantageous payout (12 coins payout) is executed. Specifically, when the message "GET 12 pieces" is displayed, the color and font may be changed depending on the state. More specifically, the colors and fonts are different depending on whether or not it is easy to win the AT top-up, and the colors and fonts are different during the precursor to the occurrence of a continuous performance or the transition to the special top-up zone. . By differentiating the mode of acquisition display performance, it is possible to inform the player that game medals will be acquired and to make him expect that an advantageous situation may occur after the next game. Furthermore, the color and font used when "GET 12 coins" is displayed may be changed depending on the setting values set in the gaming machine. Information for estimating the setting value set in the gaming machine can be provided every time the acquisition display performance is executed.
Further, the cumulative display effect may be displayed not only for each predetermined number but also only when a specific setting value is set. Specifically, when the cumulative number of game medals exceeds 246 for the first time when a setting value of "2", "4", or "6" is set, "246 medals GET" is displayed. If the number exceeds 246, it may always be displayed, or it may be displayed or it may be displayed when a lottery is performed and a winner is won. By suggesting settings based on the contents displayed in the cumulative display performance, it is possible to not only notify the player of the cumulative number but also provide information for estimating the setting values set in the gaming machine. Only when the setting value "6" is set, "666 medals GET" may be displayed when the cumulative number of game medals exceeds 666 for the first time. Furthermore, a plurality of types of display modes with different colors, fonts, etc. may be provided for each specified number, and the setting value or state of the gaming machine may be suggested by the displayed display mode.

The acquisition display performance and the cumulative display performance can be executed during AT, and even if the cumulative number of game medals exceeds the specified number only while the result screen is displayed, the acquisition display performance will be executed without executing the cumulative display performance. Other situations may also be provided in which the acquisition display performance and the cumulative display performance are not executed. Specifically, in a situation called a so-called pseudo bonus, it is not necessary to perform the acquisition display performance and the cumulative display performance. Further, in a pseudo-bonus situation executed during AT, the acquisition display effect may not be executed, but only the accumulation display effect may be executed. Also, during the preparation period before starting AT, in situations such as the AT start screen, continuous effects executed during AT, and during the precursor to continuous effects, acquisition display effects and cumulative display effects must not be executed. Good too. In the ending state that can be executed before the end of the advantageous section, it is not necessary to perform the acquisition display performance and the cumulative display performance. To appropriately notify players of necessary information by providing a case in which it is executed and a case in which it is not executed depending on the game state managed by a main control means and the state of a performance managed by a sub-control means. I can do it.

The cumulative display effect used to be determined based on the cumulative number of game medals that the player has acquired during AT and the number of game medals paid out in the payout process, but now it is determined using the value of the MY counter. You may. Specifically, the value of the MY counter is determined by sending a command indicating the value of the MY counter from the main control means to the sub-control means after checking the end of the game and when operating the lever. The value of the MY counter after the game completion check shows the value after the payout process, and the value of the MY counter when the lever is operated shows the value subtracted by the number of bets. Information on the number of game medals included in the payout start command is added to the value of the MY counter at the time of lever operation at the timing when the payout start command is received as a result of the game, and it is determined whether the added total value exceeds a specified number. By displaying a value based on the value of the MY counter as the cumulative number during AT, the player can grasp the number of game medals that can be acquired by the end of the advantageous section.
Although the result announcement performance is a battle performance performed in the final game of the continuous performance, it may be performed in one game instead of the continuous performance. In addition, it is not limited to battle effects where friendly characters and enemy characters compete, but it is also possible to associate the outcome of the effect with outcomes advantageous to the player, such as whether or not the first prize is drawn in a lottery, or whether or not it is a win in the Amida lottery. It may also be used as a different performance.

In the result notification performance, the result is displayed after the performance branching timing as time passes from the stop of all the drums, but the result may be displayed by operating the performance button. Specifically, at the performance branching timing (timing of time t15), a switch image (also referred to as an operation promotion image or operation promotion performance) imitating the performance switch is displayed, and the player operates the performance switch to achieve success. Display an image that shows the error or an image that shows the failure. By displaying the operation promotion image at the production branching timing, even if a hopper empty error occurs and the error screen is displayed, the operation promotion image will be displayed before the error screen is displayed. be able to recognize that
Furthermore, after all the reels have stopped (after all the reels have stopped), a PUSH button effect may be executed in order to notify the stage change of the effect or the additional number of remaining AT games. Specifically, after all the reels have stopped and before time t17, before the hopper empty error occurs, an image of a switch imitating a production switch is displayed, and the player operates it. , change the stage of the production, and announce the number of additions. Before a hopper empty error occurs (an error screen is displayed), it can be recognized that a switch image imitating a production switch is displayed (PUSH button production is executed). In addition, before displaying the image of a switch imitating a production switch, an image of a switch imitating a production switch may be displayed, and before an error screen is displayed, the result of the display, It can be recognized that an image of a switch image imitating a switch is displayed.

In addition to the result announcement performance and the PUSH button performance, a performance such as a comment performance triggered by the operation of the stop switch of the last reel or the stopping of all reels may be executed. By executing these effects before time t17 before the hopper empty error occurs (for example, at time t15 or time t1), the content of the effects can be changed before the hopper empty error occurs. can be recognized.
In addition, as a result of the pressing order win and operating in the correct pressing order, the correct symbol combination stops and an advantageous payout (12 pieces payout) is made. It may also be executed when another winning combination is won. Specifically, the winning combination (so-called shared bell) where an advantageous payout (12 pieces) is executed regardless of the pressing order is won, and the symbol combination (correct symbol combination) corresponding to the pressing order irrespective of the winning combination is stopped. It can be executed when
Furthermore, the lengths of time and periods described in the above embodiments are merely examples, and can be changed at any time.

Next, various settings for executing timer interrupt processing will be explained.
In the initial settings regarding the operation of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 5, an interrupt mode is set. Setting the interrupt mode means performing various settings (settings of the main control built-in register) to enable execution of timer interrupt processing.
First, we will explain the main main control built-in registers that enable timer interrupt processing.

<PTC prescaler setting register>
The PTC prescaler setting register is one of the main control built-in registers, and is a register that controls the operation settings of the timer circuit of the main control chip.
By setting a value in the PTC prescaler setting register, it is possible to set a clock to be supplied to an 8-bit counter PTC, which will be described later. Specifically, it is possible to set how many times the system clock (SCK) is divided to be supplied to the 8-bit counter PTC. For example, when the system clock is 16 MHz and "143" is set in the PTC prescaler setting register, 16 MHz/143=approximately 111.8881 KHz becomes the clock source of the 8-bit counter PTC.
Note that the initial value of the PTC prescaler setting register (the value when the power is turned on from off) is "250".

<PTC counter setting register>
The PTC counter setting register is one of the main control built-in registers, and is a register that controls the operation settings of the timer circuit of the main control chip.
By setting a value in the PTC counter setting register, the count value of the 8-bit counter PTC can be set. Specifically, it is possible to set how many times the clock number from the PTC prescaler setting register is input to execute the timer interrupt process. For example, if the system clock is 16 MHz, and the PTC prescaler setting register is set to "143" and the PTC counter setting register is set to "125", the clock is approximately 111.8881 KHz (one cycle is approximately 8.9375 μs). clock) is input 125 times (8-bit counter PTC times out), an interrupt flag is set, and information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register, which will be described later. Ru. When information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register, an interrupt request notification signal can be output from the interrupt wait monitor register to the CPU, and when the interrupt is enabled. A timer interrupt becomes executable (when the IFF1 register, which will be described later, is "1").
In other words, if the system clock is 16 MHz, and the PTC prescaler setting register is set to "143" and the PTC counter setting register is set to "125", 1/16 MHz x 143 x 125 = approximately 1.117 ms (mm). Timer interrupt processing can be executed at a cycle of (seconds).
Further, the value of the 8-bit counter PTC starts to be updated (for example, subtracted by 1) based on the clock from the PTC prescaler setting register after the value is set in the PTC counter setting register.
Note that the initial value of the 8-bit counter PTC (the value when the power is turned on from off) is "0".

<Interrupt wait monitor register>
The interrupt wait monitor register is one of the main control built-in registers.
The interrupt wait monitor register is a 1-byte (8-bit) storage area, and when the 8-bit counter PTC times out and an interrupt request signal output from the timer circuit of the main control chip is received, the interrupt wait monitor register is a 1-byte (8-bit) storage area. A predetermined bit (for example, the first bit) of the monitor register becomes "1". In this way, when the predetermined bit of the interrupt wait monitor register becomes "1", it is called storing information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated in the interrupt wait monitor register. Setting the bit to "0" is referred to as clearing the information stored in the interrupt wait monitor register indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated.

When the interrupt wait monitor register stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, it becomes possible to output an interrupt request notification signal to the CPU. In other words, in a situation where the interrupt wait monitor register stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, an interrupt request notification signal can be output to the CPU, and when the interrupt is enabled (described later). When the IFF1 register is "1"), the timer interrupt becomes executable. Then, when executing timer interrupt processing in response to the interrupt request notification signal (any of before executing timer interrupt processing, at the same time as executing timer interrupt processing, or after executing timer interrupt processing), interrupt wait is performed. Clears the information stored in the monitor register indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated.

On the other hand, even if the interrupt wait monitor register stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, when interrupts are disabled (when the IFF1 register, which will be described later, is "0"), , outputs an interrupt request notification signal to the CPU, but is configured not to execute timer interrupt processing. In this way, if the timer interrupt processing could not be executed because the interrupt was disabled (the IFF1 register, which will be described later, is "0"), the interrupt request signal stored in the interrupt wait monitor register was generated. The information indicating this is retained (not cleared). Furthermore, when the interrupt wait monitor register stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, it continues to output an interrupt request notification signal to the CPU. If the timer interrupt processing could not be executed because the interrupt was disabled (the IFF1 register described later is "0"), the interrupt is enabled (the IFF1 register described later is "1") and the timer interrupt processing is disabled in response to the interrupt request notification signal. When executing timer interrupt processing (either immediately before executing timer interrupt processing, at the same time as executing timer interrupt processing, or immediately after executing timer interrupt processing), the interrupt request signal stored in the interrupt wait monitor register is Clear information indicating that this has occurred.
Note that the initial value of the information stored in the interrupt wait monitor register (the value when the power is turned on from off) is "0" (the interrupt request signal has been generated in the interrupt wait monitor register). (The information indicating this is not stored.)

Next, an explanation will be given of the interrupt register that manages the interrupt disabled state and interrupt enabled state.

<Interrupt register>
The interrupt register is a register included in the main control chip (eg, main control CPU).
Interrupt registers manage interrupt-related states (also called interrupt states): "interrupt disabled state (also called interrupt disabled section, interrupt disabled period)" and "interrupt enabled state (also called interrupt enabled section, interrupt enabled period)." do. Specifically, it has an IFF1 register and an IFF2 register as interrupt registers, and the interrupt disabled state and interrupt enabled state are managed by the value of the IFF1 register. Therefore, the explanation regarding the IFF2 register will be omitted. Furthermore, unless otherwise mentioned, the interrupt register refers to the IFF1 register.

When the IFF1 register is "0", information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register, and when an interrupt request notification signal is output to the CPU, timer interrupt processing is performed. It is doable.
When the IFF1 register is "1", information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register, and even if an interrupt request notification signal is output to the CPU, a timer interrupt is not issued. No processing is performed.
In other words, when the interrupt is disabled, the IFF1 register is "0", and when the interrupt is enabled, the IFF1 register is "1".

The IFF1 register becomes "0" when an instruction that inhibits interrupts (for example, a "DI" instruction) is executed.
The IFF1 register becomes "1" when an instruction that permits interrupts (eg, "EI" instruction) is executed.
The IFF1 register becomes "0" when executing the timer interrupt process (immediately before executing the timer interrupt process, at the same time as executing the timer interrupt process, or immediately after executing the timer interrupt process).
In other words, the interrupt-disabled state in the game progress main processing refers to the state from the execution of an instruction that disables interrupts to the execution of an instruction that enables interrupts, and the interrupt-disabled state that occurs when timer interrupt processing is executed refers to the state that occurs during timer interrupt processing. Refers to the state from execution to execution of the instruction that enables interrupts.
Note that the initial value of the IFF1 register (the value when the power is turned on from off) is "0". Therefore, the state from when the power is turned on until the execution of an instruction to enable interrupts can also be said to be an interrupt-disabled state.
On the other hand, the interrupt enabled state refers to a state that is not an interrupt disabled state.

Now, the explanation returns to the setting of the interrupt mode in the initial settings regarding the operation of the gaming machine shown in FIG. When setting the interrupt mode, a value is stored (set) in the PTC prescaler setting register. For example, "143" is stored in the PTC prescaler setting register. Next, a value is stored (set) in the PTC counter setting register. For example, "125" is stored in the PTC counter setting register.

In this way, when setting the interrupt mode, after storing "125" in the PTC counter setting register, the value of the 8-bit counter PTC changes from "125" to "124" to ... to "2" to "1". "→"125"→"124"→... "125" to "1" are cyclically updated. Note that after setting the interrupt mode in the initial settings for the operation of the gaming machine in Figure 5, the value of the 8-bit counter PTC will continue to be updated even when other programs (processing/instructions) are being executed. It is composed of Further, the timing at which the value of the 8-bit counter PTC changes from "1" to "125" is referred to as the timeout of the value of the 8-bit counter PTC.

After setting the interrupt mode, timer interrupt processing can actually be executed after an instruction to enable interrupts is issued. Here, it is preferable that the instruction to permit the interrupt be issued after the RAM check process determines whether the checksums of all RAMs are normal or not (after the power-off recovery data is normal or recoverable in FIG. 5). For example, it is possible to execute the command to enable interrupts by "starting interrupt processing" in Figure 8, or by "turning on the saved setting value display data on the setting value display LED" in Figure 10. .

In this way, if the configuration is configured to start updating the 8-bit counter before the RAM check process (determining whether the RAM before the power is turned off and the RAM after the power is restored), the 8-bit counter will be updated after the RAM check process. It is possible to time out the 8-bit counter earlier than when updating the bit counter (information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated can be stored in the interrupt wait monitor register), so it is possible to time out the 8-bit counter earlier than when updating the bit counter. Timer interrupt processing can be executed without delay when an instruction to permit an interrupt to be executed is issued.

In this embodiment, "143" is stored in the PTC prescaler setting register when setting the interrupt mode, but the process of storing the value in the PTC prescaler setting register may not be performed. Specifically, it is also possible to set the interrupt cycle using the fact that the initial value of the PTC prescaler setting register is "250" (the initial value is not "0").

For example, when the system clock is configured at 16 MHz, the initial value of the PTC prescaler setting register is "250", so by storing an arbitrary value in the PTC counter setting register, the cycle of timer interrupt processing can be determined appropriately. I can do it. The period of timer interrupt processing according to the value stored in the PTC counter setting register will be illustrated below.
a) If "0" is stored in the PTC counter setting register, the cycle of timer interrupt processing can be set to 4ms (milliseconds).
b) If "128" is stored in the PTC counter setting register, the cycle of timer interrupt processing can be set to 2 ms (milliseconds).
c) If "64" is stored in the PTC counter setting register, the cycle of timer interrupt processing can be set to 1 ms (milliseconds).

In this way, even if the process of storing the value in the PTC prescaler setting register is not performed, updating of the value of the 8-bit counter PTC can be started by executing the process of storing the value in the PTC counter setting register. I can do it. In other words, if it is desired to store a value different from the initial value in the PTC prescaler setting register, it is preferable to store the value in the PTC prescaler setting register before the process of storing the value in the PTC counter setting register. For example, if a value different from the initial value is stored in the PTC prescaler setting register after storing a value in the PTC counter setting register, the frequency will initially be set to the initial value (250) of the PTC prescaler setting register. If the value of the 8-bit counter PTC is updated based on the 8-bit counter PTC, and then a value different from the initial value stored in the PTC prescaler setting register is stored, the value of the 8-bit counter PTC is updated according to the value different from the initial value stored in the PTC prescaler setting register. The value of the 8-bit counter PTC will be updated based on the frequency. In such a case, the updating cycle of the value of the 8-bit counter PTC is no longer constant, leading to failure of the main control chip. Therefore, when executing the process of storing a value in the PTC prescaler setting register, storing the value in the PTC prescaler setting register before the process of storing the value in the PTC counter setting register prevents the failure of the main control chip. can be suppressed.

Next, using FIG. 42, the relationship between the interrupt enabled state, the interrupt disabled state, and the IFF1 register will be explained using a simple program example.
(A) in FIG. 42 represents a program for the game progress main process. The "DI" instruction is an instruction for prohibiting maskable interrupt processing (for example, timer interrupt processing) (referred to as an instruction for disabling interrupts). Further, the "EI" instruction is an instruction for permitting maskable interrupt processing (for example, timer interrupt processing) (referred to as an instruction for permitting interrupts).
Further, "AAAA", "BBBB", and "CCCC" are arbitrary commands (programs).

In FIG. 42A, when the "DI" instruction is executed, the IFF1 register becomes "0" and interrupts are disabled.
While the subsequent instructions "AAAA", "BBBB", and "..." are being executed, the IFF1 register remains at "0".
Thereafter, when the "EI" instruction is executed, the IFF1 register becomes "1" and interrupts are enabled.
In other words, the period from the "DI" instruction to the "EI" instruction is in an interrupt disabled state.

However, the timer interrupt processing becomes executable not immediately after the "EI" instruction is executed, but after the "CCCC" instruction, which is the next instruction ahead of the "EI" instruction, is executed. It is composed of
For example, if the 8-bit counter PTC times out at a predetermined timing during the period from the "DI" instruction to the "EI" instruction, and the interrupt wait monitor register stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated. The configuration is such that timer interrupt processing can be executed after executing the "CCCC" instruction. Furthermore, if the 8-bit counter PTC times out at a predetermined timing during the period from the "DI" instruction to the "EI" instruction, and the interrupt wait monitor register stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated. Even if the interrupt processing is not started immediately, the counter value of the 8-bit counter is continuously updated.
With this configuration, even if the instruction "EI" that allows interrupts is executed, interrupt processing will not be executed until the next instruction ("CCCC" in this example) is executed. It is possible to reliably execute the instructions after the instruction "EI" that permits interrupts. Specifically, a return instruction (an instruction to execute the program at the return address) such as the "RET" instruction may be used as the instruction after the "EI" instruction that enables interrupts, and the instruction that enables interrupts is Even if there is, by not executing timer interrupt processing until the next instruction is executed, the instructions after the instruction "EI" that permits interrupts can be reliably executed.

In addition, an example of providing an instruction to prohibit interrupts and an instruction to enable interrupts in the game progress main processing is as follows.
a) When transmitting a command from the main control means to the sub-control means, after issuing an instruction to disable interrupts, execute processing to write the command to the RAM storage area, etc., and then execute an instruction to enable interrupts. Case a) When turning on the blocker (total medal acceptance state), after issuing a command to disable interrupts, write the information to turn on the blocker into the RAM storage area and turn on the medal entry ready lamp. c) When executing an instruction to enable interrupts after writing information to the RAM storage area, etc. c) When turning off the blocker (medal acceptance refusal state), an instruction to disable interrupts is issued. Later, after executing the process of writing information to turn off the blocker to the RAM storage area and the process of writing information to the RAM storage area to turn off the medal insertion lamp, etc., an instruction to permit an interrupt is executed. Examples include cases.
Note that when providing an instruction to disable interrupts and an instruction to enable interrupts, it is not limited to the above-mentioned a) to c), and an instruction to disable interrupts and an instruction to enable interrupts may be provided as appropriate.

For example, such an interrupt-disabled state in the game progress main process may occur if a timer interrupt process is executed while a process consisting of multiple instructions (instruction A, instruction B, . . . , instruction Z) is being executed. This is provided in order to prevent the data in the RAM from being changed or the execution of processing that involves problems based on the data in the RAM.
Note that the interrupt-disabled state in the game progress main processing is set to an interrupt-disabled state by an instruction to disable interrupts (for example, a DI instruction), and to an interrupt-enabled state by an instruction to permit an interrupt (for example, an EI instruction). In addition to the DI instruction described above, interrupts may be prohibited by other instructions, or not limited to the EI instruction described above, but other instructions may be used to enable interrupts.

FIG. 42(B) shows an interrupt processing program. Similar to FIG. 42(A), the "EI" instruction is an instruction (referred to as an instruction to enable interrupts) for permitting maskable interrupt processing (for example, timer interrupt processing), and "AAAA" and "BBBB" , "CCCC", "..." are arbitrary commands (programs). Note that the "RETI" instruction is an instruction (return instruction) for ending timer interrupt processing, and corresponds to, for example, "RETURN" in FIG. 7.

When executing timer interrupt processing (executing means before execution ("before" includes "immediately"), at the same time as execution, after execution ("after" includes "immediately") ), the IFF1 register becomes "0". This makes it possible to prevent the next timer interrupt process from being executed during the timer interrupt process. Note that the "DI" instruction is not required when starting timer interrupt processing.
Furthermore, when finishing the timer interrupt processing, the "EI" instruction is executed immediately before the interrupt processing, that is, immediately before the "RETI" instruction, in order to change the interrupt disabled state to the interrupt enabled state. This "EI" instruction causes the IFF1 register to become "1". Note that the "EI" command corresponds to "Save interrupt permission flag ON" in FIG.
Also, in the "RETI" instruction after the "EI" instruction, the IFF1 register is set to "1".
In other words, the period from the start of timer interrupt processing to the "EI" instruction is in an interrupt disabled state.

However, the timer interrupt processing becomes executable not immediately after the "EI" instruction is executed, but after the "RETI" instruction, which is the next instruction ahead of the "EI" instruction, is executed. It is composed of
For example, at a predetermined timing from the start of timer interrupt processing to the "EI" instruction, the 8-bit counter PTC times out, and the interrupt wait monitor register stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated. In some cases, the timer interrupt processing is configured to be executable after the "RETI" instruction is executed. Note that at a predetermined timing from the start of timer interrupt processing to the "EI" instruction, the 8-bit counter PTC times out and the interrupt wait monitor register stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated. Even if the interrupt processing is not started immediately, the counter value of the 8-bit counter is continuously updated.
In this way, after the "RETI" instruction, if the interrupt wait monitor register stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, the timer interrupt processing can be executed; If the interrupt wait monitor register does not store information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, the game progress main process can be executed. Therefore, even if the instruction "EI" that enables interrupts is executed, interrupt processing is not executed until the next instruction "RETI" is executed, so that the next timer interrupt is not executed during timer interrupt processing. Processing can be prevented from being executed.

Next, using (1) of FIG. 43, the relationship between the timer interrupt process and the 8-bit counter PTC when there is no interrupt prohibition state in the game progress main process will be explained.
When "m (m is a numerical value)" is stored as a value in the PTC counter setting register, "m" is stored in the 8-bit counter PTC, and then when an update cycle arrives, "m-1", etc. , "2", "1", "m", "m-1", "m-2", . . . , the value of the 8-bit counter PTC is updated one by one. In this way, the value of the 8-bit counter PTC cycles between "m" and "1".

At timing t1, the value of the 8-bit counter PTC changes from "1" to "m". That is, when the 8-bit counter PTC times out, information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register.
Thereafter, timer interrupt processing can be executed based on the fact that the 8-bit counter PTC has timed out (based on the fact that information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register). . This is because the IFF1 register is "1". Note that when executing timer interrupt processing (when executed means before execution ("before" includes "immediately"), at the same time as execution, after execution ("after" includes "immediately") ), the information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, which is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register, is cleared. As described above, while the timer interrupt processing is being executed, the IFF1 register is set to "0" (interrupt disabled state).

At timing t2, the timer interrupt process ends. Specifically, by executing an instruction to enable interrupts in timer interrupt processing, the IFF1 register changes from "0" (interrupt disabled state) to "1" (interrupt enabled state), and the next instruction, the return instruction (RETI instruction) to end the timer interrupt processing.

Further, the value of the 8-bit counter PTC is configured to be updatable when the update cycle of the 8-bit counter PTC arrives even while executing the timer interrupt process. With this configuration, the 8-bit counter PTC is updated regardless of the time required for timer interrupt processing, so timer interrupt processing can be executed at a constant cycle.

Next, using (2) of FIG. 43, the relationship between the timer interrupt process and the 8-bit counter PTC when there is an interrupt disabled state in the game progress main process will be explained.

At timing t1, an instruction to disable interrupts in the game progress main processing is issued, and the IFF1 register changes from "1" (interrupt enabled state) to "0" (interrupt disabled state).

At timing t2, when the 8-bit counter PTC times out, information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register. However, since the game progress main process is in an interrupt disabled state, the timer interrupt process cannot be executed. Therefore, the interrupt wait monitor register continues to store information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated. Furthermore, even if the 8-bit counter PTC times out (does) in an interrupt-disabled state, the 8-bit counter continues to be updated thereafter.

At timing t3, an instruction to enable interrupts is issued in the game progress main process, and the IFF1 register changes from "0" (interrupt disabled state) to "1" (interrupt enabled state).
Furthermore, at the timing of t3, since information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register, the game progress main processing is executed based on the instruction to permit the interrupt of the game progress main processing. After executing one instruction, timer interrupt processing can be executed. Note that when executing timer interrupt processing (when executed means before execution ("before" includes "immediately"), at the same time as execution, after execution ("after" includes "immediately") ), the information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, which is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register, is cleared. As described above, while the timer interrupt processing is being executed, the IFF1 register is set to "0" (interrupt disabled state).

At timing t4, the timer interrupt processing ends. Specifically, by executing an instruction to enable interrupts in timer interrupt processing, the IFF1 register changes from "0" (interrupt disabled state) to "1" (interrupt enabled state), and the next instruction, the return instruction (RETI instruction) to end the timer interrupt processing.

Similarly to FIG. 43(1), the value of the 8-bit counter PTC is configured to be updatable when the update cycle of the 8-bit counter PTC arrives even while executing timer interrupt processing. There is. With this configuration, the 8-bit counter PTC is updated regardless of the time required for timer interrupt processing, so timer interrupt processing can be executed at a constant cycle.

Furthermore, the value of the 8-bit counter PTC is configured to be updatable when the update cycle of the 8-bit counter PTC arrives even if the game progress main process is in an interrupt-prohibited state. With this configuration, even if the game progress main process is in an interrupt disabled state, the 8-bit counter PTC is updated, so the timer interrupt process can be executed at a constant cycle.

Next, using <Example (1) showing execution timing of timer interrupt processing> in FIG. 44, an explanation will be given of the interrupt cycle when the 8-bit counter PTC times out while interrupts are disabled in the game progress main processing. . Note that the normal cycle of timer interrupt processing (the period from when the 8-bit counter PTC times out until the next time-out of the 8-bit counter PTC) is set as "T". Note that measurement related to "T" (updating of the 8-bit counter PTC) is started after the value is stored in the PTC counter setting register.

At timing t1, an instruction to disable interrupts in the game progress main processing is issued, and the IFF1 register changes from "1" (interrupt enabled state) to "0" (interrupt disabled state).

At timing t2, when the 8-bit counter PTC times out, information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register. However, since the game progress main process is in an interrupt disabled state, the timer interrupt process cannot be executed. Therefore, the interrupt wait monitor register continues to store information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated. Furthermore, even if the 8-bit counter PTC times out (does) in an interrupt-disabled state, the 8-bit counter continues to be updated thereafter.

At timing t3, an instruction to enable interrupts is issued in the game progress main process, and the IFF1 register changes from "0" (interrupt disabled state) to "1" (interrupt enabled state).
Furthermore, at the timing of t3, since information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register, the game progress main processing is executed based on the instruction to permit the interrupt of the game progress main processing. After executing one instruction, timer interrupt processing can be executed. Note that when executing timer interrupt processing (when executed means before execution ("before" includes "immediately"), at the same time as execution, after execution ("after" includes "immediately") ), the information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, which is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register, is cleared. As described above, while the timer interrupt processing is being executed, the IFF1 register is set to "0" (interrupt disabled state).

At timing t4, the timer interrupt processing ends. Specifically, by executing an instruction to enable interrupts in timer interrupt processing, the IFF1 register changes from "0" (interrupt disabled state) to "1" (interrupt enabled state), and the next instruction, the return instruction (RETI instruction) to end the timer interrupt processing.

At timing t5, when the 8-bit counter PTC times out, information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register.
Thereafter, timer interrupt processing can be executed based on the fact that the 8-bit counter PTC has timed out (based on the fact that information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register). . This is because the IFF1 register is "1". Note that when executing timer interrupt processing (when executed means before execution ("before" includes "immediately"), at the same time as execution, after execution ("after" includes "immediately") ), the information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, which is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register, is cleared. As described above, while the timer interrupt processing is being executed, the IFF1 register is set to "0" (interrupt disabled state).

At timing t6, the timer interrupt processing ends. Specifically, by executing an instruction to enable interrupts in timer interrupt processing, the IFF1 register changes from "0" (interrupt disabled state) to "1" (interrupt enabled state), and the next instruction, the return instruction (RETI instruction) to end the timer interrupt processing.

At timing t7, when the 8-bit counter PTC times out, information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register.
Thereafter, timer interrupt processing can be executed based on the fact that the 8-bit counter PTC has timed out (based on the fact that information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register). . This is because the IFF1 register is "1". Note that when executing timer interrupt processing (when executed means before execution ("before" includes "immediately"), at the same time as execution, after execution ("after" includes "immediately") ), the information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, which is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register, is cleared. As described above, while the timer interrupt processing is being executed, the IFF1 register is set to "0" (interrupt disabled state).

At timing t8, the timer interrupt process ends. Specifically, by executing an instruction to enable interrupts in timer interrupt processing, the IFF1 register changes from "0" (interrupt disabled state) to "1" (interrupt enabled state), and the next instruction, the return instruction (RETI instruction) to end the timer interrupt processing.

Here, the period from the timing t2 to the timing t5 is T. Similarly, the period from timing t5 to timing t7 is T. For example, when the timing of t2 is set as "nxT ("n" is a natural number)", the timing of t5 can be expressed as "(n+1)xT". Moreover, the timing of t7 can be expressed as "(n+2)×T".
Further, the timing of t3 can be expressed as "a specific timing after 'nxT' and before '(n+1)xT'".

First, attention will be paid to the timer interrupt process executed at timing t3. The timer interrupt process executed at timing t3 was originally supposed to be executed at t2, which is the execution cycle of the timer interrupt process. In other words, if the timing of t2 was not in the interrupt-prohibited state in the game progress main process, the timer interrupt process would have been executed at the timing of t2. That is, since the timing of t2 was in the state in which interrupts were prohibited in the game progress main process, the timer interrupt process was subsequently executed at the timing in t3 when the state became in a state in which interrupts were permitted.

Next, attention will be paid to the timer interrupt processing executed at timing t5. The timer interrupt process executed at timing t5 is executed before "T" has elapsed from timing t3. In other words, the measurement of "T", which is the interrupt period, is not started from the timing of t3. The timer interrupt process executed at the timing t5 is configured such that the timer interrupt process is executed when T has elapsed from the timing t2. In other words, based on the fact that the 8-bit counter PTC, which continues to update the count even if no timer interrupt processing is executed, times out (information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register). is configured to run).
In this way, the timing of t2 is set to ``n x T'', the timing of t3 is set to ``a specific timing after ``n x T'' and before ``(n+1) x T'''', and the timing of t4 is set to ``n x T''. When "(n+1)×T" is assumed, information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated can be stored in the interrupt wait monitor register at timing t5. In other words, the configuration is such that the timer interrupt process can be executed at timing t5.

Similarly, the timer interrupt processing executed at timing t7 is based on the fact that the 8-bit counter PTC has timed out (information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register). is configured to run (based on).
In this way, the timing of t2 is set to ``n x T'', the timing of t3 is set to ``a specific timing after ``n x T'' and before ``(n+1) x T'''', and the timing of t4 is set to ``n x T''. When "(n+1)×T" and the timing of t7 are "(n+2)×T", information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register at the timing of t7. I can do it. In other words, the configuration is such that the timer interrupt process can be executed at timing t7.

As described above, even if the timer interrupt processing cannot be executed at the original timer interrupt processing cycle (n x T) due to the interrupt disabled state in the game progress main processing, the timer interrupt processing after the relevant timer interrupt processing can return to a situation where the timer interrupt process can be executed when the original timer interrupt process cycle arrives (x×T ("x" is a natural number)). As a result, for example, it is possible to reduce the influence on the timer measurement executed within the timer interrupt process (the timing of the timer measurement is long).

Next, timer interrupt processing when the 8-bit counter PTC times out multiple times in a situation where the IFF1 register is 0 will be explained using <Example (2) showing execution timing of timer interrupt processing> in FIG. 44. .

<Example (2) showing the execution timing of timer interrupt processing> describes the case where the game progress main process goes out of control or takes an unexpected amount of time while the game progress main process is in an interrupt-disabled state. It is expressed. Note that even in such a case, if the system clock is normal, the value of the 8-bit counter PTC can be updated at a normal cycle.

At timing t1, an instruction to disable interrupts in the game progress main processing is issued, and the IFF1 register changes from "1" (interrupt enabled state) to "0" (interrupt disabled state).

At timing t2, when the 8-bit counter PTC times out, information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register. However, since the game progress main process is in an interrupt disabled state, the timer interrupt process cannot be executed. Therefore, the interrupt wait monitor register continues to store information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated. Furthermore, even if the 8-bit counter PTC times out (does) in an interrupt-disabled state, the 8-bit counter continues to be updated thereafter.

At timing t3, the 8-bit counter PTC times out again. However, since the information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register, the information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register again. I won't do anything like that. Note that even after that, the 8-bit counter is continuously updated.

At timing t4, an instruction to enable interrupts is issued in the game progress main process, and the IFF1 register changes from "0" (interrupt disabled state) to "1" (interrupt enabled state).
Furthermore, since information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register at timing t4, the game progress main processing is executed based on the instruction to permit interrupts of the game progress main processing. After executing one instruction, timer interrupt processing can be executed. Note that when executing timer interrupt processing (when executed means before execution ("before" includes "immediately"), at the same time as execution, after execution ("after" includes "immediately") ), the information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, which is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register, is cleared. As described above, while the timer interrupt processing is being executed, the IFF1 register is set to "0" (interrupt disabled state).

At timing t5, the timer interrupt processing ends. Specifically, by executing an instruction to enable interrupts in timer interrupt processing, the IFF1 register changes from "0" (interrupt disabled state) to "1" (interrupt enabled state), and the next instruction, the return instruction (RETI instruction) to end the timer interrupt processing.

At timing t6, when the 8-bit counter PTC times out, information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register.
Thereafter, timer interrupt processing can be executed based on the fact that the 8-bit counter PTC has timed out (based on the fact that information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register). . This is because the IFF1 register is "1". Note that when executing timer interrupt processing (when executed means before execution ("before" includes "immediately"), at the same time as execution, after execution ("after" includes "immediately") ), the information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, which is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register, is cleared. As described above, while the timer interrupt processing is being executed, the IFF1 register is set to "0" (interrupt disabled state).

At timing t7, the timer interrupt processing ends. Specifically, by executing an instruction to enable interrupts in timer interrupt processing, the IFF1 register changes from "0" (interrupt disabled state) to "1" (interrupt enabled state), and the next instruction, the return instruction (RETI instruction) to end the timer interrupt processing.

In this way, even if the 8-bit counter PTC times out twice (multiple times) between timing t1 and timing t4, the interrupt wait monitor register indicates that an interrupt request signal has been generated. Information is stored only once. Although FIG. 44 shows an example in which the 8-bit counter PTC times out twice while in the interrupt-disabled state, if the 8-bit counter PTC times out three or four times while in the interrupt-disabled state, the interrupt Information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the wait monitor register only once. After the interrupt disabled state ends, the timer interrupt process is executed only once based on the fact that the interrupt wait monitor register stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated. Note that even if the 8-bit counter PTC times out multiple times while the interrupt is disabled, the number of timeouts is not counted.

As described above, when the 8-bit counter PTC times out "n"("n" is 2 or more)) times while in the interrupt disabled state, the timer interrupt processing is It is configured so that it is not executed consecutively (repeatedly) n times.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the timer interrupt processing from being repeated multiple times in succession after changing from the interrupt enabled state to the interrupt enabled state, and the game progress main processing becoming unable to be executed during that time. .

In addition, in <Example (2) showing the execution timing of the timer interrupt process> in FIG. 44, the game progress main process runs out of control while the game progress main process is in an interrupt disabled state, or the game progress main process takes an unexpected amount of time. Similarly, when the timer interrupt processing is in an interrupt disabled state, the timer interrupt processing goes out of control, or the timer interrupt processing takes an unexpected amount of time, and the timer interrupt processing Even if the 8-bit counter PTC times out "n" ("n" is 2 or more)) times while in the disabled state, the timer interrupt processing will be disabled after changing from the interrupt disabled state to the interrupt enabled state. '' times in succession (repeatedly) (to be executed only once).

<Program design processing time>
A program is something that is made up of multiple instructions. In this case, the designed processing time from the start of a certain program to the end of a certain program is the processing time from the instruction related to the start of a certain program (for example, A instruction) to the instruction related to the end of a certain program (for example, Z instruction). ) can be calculated from the types of instructions.

First, the time required to execute one instruction can be calculated from the number of states required to execute one instruction and the frequency of the system clock. Specifically, the time required to execute one instruction can be calculated by 1/system clock frequency×number of states. Note that the number of states can be read as the number of clocks.
In the following, the time required to execute one instruction using a 16 MHZ system clock will be explained using a specific instruction.
(a) DI
Instruction content: Instruction to disable interrupt processing Number of states: 4 states Time required to execute the instruction: 1/16 MHZ x 4 = 0.25 μS (microseconds)
(b) EI
Instruction content: Instruction to enable interrupt processing Number of states: 4 states Time required to execute the instruction: 1/16 MHZ x 4 = 0.25 μS (microseconds)
(C) DEC (HL)
Instruction content: Subtract 1 from the value stored at the address indicated by the HL register.
Number of states: 11 states Time required to execute an instruction: 1/16MHZ x 11 = 0.6875μS (microseconds)

In this way, even when the same system clock frequency is used, the time required to execute one instruction may vary depending on the type of instruction. Furthermore, the configuration is such that even if the instructions are different, the time required to execute one instruction may be the same. Note that the above command is a part of a plurality of commands, and there are many other commands in addition to the above command.
Note that the frequency of the system clock when executing the game progress main process is the same as the number of system clocks when executing the timer interrupt process. Therefore, for example, the time required to execute the "EI" instruction in the game progress main process is the same as the time required to execute the "EI" instruction in the timer interrupt process.

In other words, the designed processing time of a certain program can be calculated from the total number of states of a plurality of instructions from the start of the certain program to the end of the certain program. Specifically, it can be calculated by calculating 1/system clock frequency x total number of states. In other words, since the frequency of the system clock is the same in a gaming machine, a program with a large total number of states will have a longer design processing time than a program with a smaller total number of states. That will happen.

<Designed processing time of timer interrupt processing>
The designed processing time of timer interrupt processing is the time from when the timer interrupt processing starts to when it ends (for example, until a RETI instruction is executed). However, since the instructions to be executed differ depending on the information stored in the RWM and the progress of the game, even if the timer interrupt processing is executed normally, the processing time for the timer interrupt processing may vary. , there will be some variation. In other words, since the instructions executed in timer interrupt processing are not necessarily the same for all timer interrupt processing, the total number of states when one timer interrupt processing is executed differs. Therefore, when the timer interrupt processing is executed normally, the average time from the start to the end of the timer interrupt processing is defined as the designed processing time of the timer interrupt processing. Note that the designed processing time of timer interrupt processing may also be referred to as time related to timer interrupt processing.

<Designed maximum processing time of timer interrupt processing>
The designed maximum time of the timer interrupt processing is the same as the designed processing time of the timer interrupt processing in that it is the time from the start to the end of the timer interrupt processing. Further, as described above, even if the timer interrupt processing is executed normally, there will be some variation in the processing time of the timer interrupt processing. Therefore, the time required to execute the instruction with the largest total number of states from the start to the end of one timer interrupt process is defined as the maximum processing time in the design of the timer interrupt process. Note that the designed maximum processing time of timer interrupt processing may also be referred to as the maximum time related to timer interrupt processing.

<Designed processing time for interrupt disabled state in game progress main processing>
If there is only one interrupt-disabled state in the game progress main process, the designed processing time for the interrupt-disabled state in the game progress main process is the time from the instruction that disables interrupts (for example, DI instruction) to the time that allows interrupts. This is the time (also referred to as the processing time in the interrupt-disabled state in the game progress main processing) until the command (for example, the EI command) to execute the interrupt-enabled command (excluding the state from when the power is turned on until the execution of the command to permit interrupts). . However, since the instructions to be executed differ depending on the information stored in the RAM and the progress of the game, the total number of states may differ even if the main game progress process is executed normally. There is. Therefore, the processing time in the interrupt-prohibited state in the game progress main process varies to some extent. In other words, since the instructions executed in the interrupt-disabled state in the game progress main process are not necessarily the same, the total number of states when executing the interrupt-disabled state process in the game progress main process is different. Therefore, when the game progress main process is executed normally, the average processing time of the interrupt disabled state in the game progress main process is set as the designed processing time of the interrupt disabled state in the game progress main process. .

In addition, if there are at least two interrupt-disabled states in the game progress main process, calculate the designed processing time for each interrupt-disabled state in the game progress main process, and calculate the designed processing time for each interrupt-disabled state in the game progress main process. The longest processing time is set as the designed processing time for the interrupt disabled state in the game progress main processing. Note that the designed processing time of the interrupt-prohibited state in the game progress main process may also be referred to as the time related to the interrupt-prohibited state in the game progress main process.

<Designed maximum processing time in interrupt disabled state in game progress main processing>
If there is only one interrupt-disabled state in the game progress main process, if the instruction with the largest total number of states is executed from the start of the interrupt-disabled state to the end of the interrupt-disabled state in the game progress main process. The time required for this is the designed maximum processing time in the interrupt disabled state in the game progress main processing.

In addition, if there are at least two interrupt-disabled states in the game progress main process, calculate the maximum processing time for each interrupt-disabled state in the game progress main process, and design the interrupt-disabled state in the game progress main process. The longest maximum processing time above shall be the designed maximum processing time of the interrupt prohibited section in the game progress main processing. Note that the designed maximum processing time of the interrupt prohibited state in the game progress main process may also be referred to as the maximum time related to the interrupt prohibited state in the game progress main process.

<Relationship between the cycle of timer interrupts and the designed processing time of the interrupt disabled state in the game progress main processing>
When the period of timer interrupt processing (the period at which the 8-bit counter PTC times out) is "T", and the designed processing time of the interrupt disabled state in the game progress main processing is "S'", then T>S' is satisfied. It is preferable to configure it as follows.
With this configuration, it is possible to prevent as much as possible the timer interrupt cycle from occurring multiple times while the interrupt disabled state in the game progress main process is being executed. In other words, it is possible to prevent the number of times the 8-bit counter PTC times out from being different from the number of times the timer interrupt process is executed (the number of times the timer interrupt process is executed becomes smaller) due to the influence of the interrupt disabled state in the game progress main process. be able to.

<Relationship between the cycle of timer interrupts and the designed maximum processing time of the interrupt disabled state in the game progress main processing>
When the period of timer interrupt processing (the period at which the 8-bit counter PTC times out) is "T" and the designed processing time of the interrupt disabled state in the game progress main processing is "S", it is possible to set T>S. preferable.
With this configuration, compared to the case where T>S'(S' is the designed processing time in the interrupt disabled state in the game progress main process), interrupts in the game progress main process can be It is possible to prevent the timer interrupt cycle from occurring multiple times while the inhibited state is being executed. In other words, it is possible to prevent the number of times the 8-bit counter PTC times out from being different from the number of times the timer interrupt process is executed (the number of times the timer interrupt process is executed becomes smaller) due to the influence of the interrupt disabled state in the game progress main process. be able to.

<Relationship between timer interrupt cycle and design processing time of timer interrupt processing>
When the cycle of the timer interrupt process (the cycle at which the 8-bit counter PTC times out) is "T" and the designed processing time of the timer interrupt process is "t'", it is preferable that T/2>t'. In other words, it is preferable to configure the designed processing time of the timer interrupt process to be less than half the period of the timer interrupt process.
By configuring in this way, the timer interrupt processing is executed when the timer interrupt processing cycle arrives, and after that, the game progress main processing is executed from T/2 by the time the next timer interrupt processing cycle arrives. Can be run for a long period of time. In other words, it is possible to prevent the period during which the main processing can be executed from becoming too short due to execution of the timer interrupt processing.

<Relationship between timer interrupt cycle and maximum processing time in design of timer interrupt processing>
When the cycle of timer interrupt processing (the cycle at which the 8-bit counter PTC times out) is "T" and the maximum processing time in design of timer interrupt processing is "t", it is preferable that T/2>t. In other words, it is preferable to configure the designed maximum processing time of the timer interrupt process to be less than half the period of the timer interrupt process.
With this configuration, compared to the case where T/2>t'(t' is the designed processing time of timer interrupt processing), when the timer interrupt processing cycle arrives, After executing the timer interrupt process, the game progress main process can be executed for a period longer than T/2 until the next timer interrupt process cycle arrives. In other words, it is possible to prevent the period during which the main processing can be executed from becoming too short due to the execution of the timer interrupt processing.

<Type of interrupt processing>
Next, types of interrupt processing will be explained. Interrupt processing includes maskable interrupt processing (referred to as INT), in which interrupt processing is not executed if an interrupt factor occurs in an interrupt disabled state, and interrupt processing is executed even if an interrupt factor occurs in an interrupt disabled state. It can be roughly divided into non-maskable interrupt processing (referred to as NMI).

<Non-maskable interrupt processing>
When a non-maskable interrupt factor occurs, the CPU is notified that a non-maskable interrupt factor has occurred. Then, the CPU that receives notification that a non-maskable interrupt factor has occurred interrupts all processing, and non-maskable interrupt processing is executed with the highest priority. However, the CALLEX instruction used when executing the program in the second program area from the program in the first program area is executed, and then used when returning from the program in the second program area to the program in the first program area. Until a RETEX instruction is executed, even if a non-maskable interrupt processing factor occurs, the non-maskable interrupt processing will not be executed. In other words, even if a non-maskable interrupt factor occurs while the program in the second program area is being executed by the CALLEX instruction, the non-maskable interrupt processing will not be executed, and the non-maskable interrupt processing will be executed after the RETEX instruction is executed. It is configured so that Note that the CALLEX instruction is a different instruction from the normal CALL instruction (calling instruction), and is used only when executing a program in a second program area from a program in a first program area. It is not used when calling a program in the first program area from a program, or when calling a program in the second program area from a program in the second program area. Therefore, it is also called a special call command. Furthermore, the RETEX instruction is a different instruction from the normal RET instruction (return instruction), which executes the program in the second program area from the program in the first program area using the CALLEX instruction, and then executes the program in the second program area. It is used only when returning from the program to the program in the first program area. Furthermore, unlike the above-mentioned RET and RETI instructions, the RETEX instruction changes the interrupt disabled state to the interrupt enabled state, and even if a non-maskable interrupt factor occurs between the CALLEX instruction and the RETEX instruction, the RETEX instruction Immediately after (the next instruction based on the RETEX instruction), non-maskable interrupt processing is executed. Therefore, the RETEX command is also called a special return command. As an example of non-maskable interrupt processing, the occurrence of a power-off can be used as a non-maskable interrupt, and the power-off processing shown in FIG. 6 can be made into a non-maskable interrupt processing.

<Maskable interrupt processing>
The main control chip used in this embodiment can execute up to six types of maskable interrupt processing. The timer interrupt processing described above is one type of maskable interrupt processing. For example, when the 8-bit counter PTC times out, information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in a predetermined bit of the interrupt wait monitor register. Then, timer interrupt processing can be executed based on the fact that information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored. Note that, as described above, when the interrupt is disabled, timer interrupt processing (maskable interrupt processing) cannot be executed. It also executes a CALLEX instruction that is used when executing a program in the second program area from a program in the first program area, and then used to return from the program in the second program area to the program in the first program area. Until the RETEX instruction is executed, timer interrupt processing (maskable interrupt processing) cannot be executed even if information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in a predetermined bit of the interrupt wait monitor register. Can not. In other words, even if a maskable interrupt factor occurs while the program in the second program area is being executed by the CALLEX instruction, the maskable interrupt processing will not be executed, and the maskable interrupt processing will be executed after the RETEX instruction is executed. It is configured so that In this embodiment, a case will be described using one type of timer interrupt processing as the maskable interrupt processing as an example.

<Interrupt vector address>
The interrupt vector address refers to an address (also referred to as a start address) where the first program (instruction) of maskable interrupt processing is stored. Specifically, when the 8-bit counter PTC times out and timer interrupt processing is executed, first obtain the address indicated by the interrupt vector address of the timer interrupt processing, and then jump to the obtained address. , can execute timer interrupt processing. For example, the interrupt vector addresses for timer interrupt processing are addresses 0004h and 0005h (addresses determined by 2 bytes), and the address where the first instruction of timer interrupt processing is stored (also known as the start address of the timer interrupt processing program) 0050h, which is the address where the first instruction of the timer interrupt processing is stored, is stored at addresses 0004h and 0005h (actually, 50h is stored at address 0004h and 00h is stored at address 0005h). remembered). When executing timer interrupt processing, a jump is first made to address 0050h determined by addresses 0004h and 0005h, and the instruction at address 0050h (the first instruction of timer interrupt processing) can be executed.

The interrupt vector address is determined based on the value of the I register and the value set in the program management area (also referred to as program management area) mounted on the main control board 100. Specifically, the value of the upper byte of the interrupt vector address is determined by the value of the I register, and the value of the lower byte of the interrupt vector address is determined based on the value set in the interrupt initial setting area of the program management area. For example, when the interrupt vector address for timer interrupt processing is 0004h, the upper byte 00h is determined by the value of the I register, and the lower byte 04h is determined by the value set in the interrupt initial setting area of the program management area.

<I register>
The I register is one of the registers that the CPU has, and is also called an "interrupt page address register." The I register is a register that can store 1 byte of data and can set the upper 1 byte of the interrupt vector address. It can be determined freely by executing an instruction to set the value of the I register to a specific value. For example, by executing an instruction (LD I, 10h) to set the value of the I register to 10h, the value of the I register can be set to 10h. When the value of the I register is 10h, the upper address of the interrupt vector address is 10h, so the lower address of the interrupt vector address for timer interrupt processing is 04h according to the value set in the interrupt initial setting area of the program management area. In this case, the interrupt vector address for timer interrupt processing is 1004h. Further, the initial value of the I register is 00h. In other words, when the power is turned off under a situation where the value of the I register is 10h and then the power is turned on, the value of the I register becomes 00h. Note that if the power is turned off under a situation where the value of the I register is 00h and then the power is turned on, the value of the I register remains 00h. In this embodiment, an instruction to set the value of the I register to a value other than 00h is not executed (the program in the first control area and the program in the second control area change the value of the I register to 00h). (will not be changed from). In other words, in this embodiment, the initial value 00h is used as the value of the I register. Therefore, the program capacity can be reduced compared to the case where an instruction for setting the value of the I register to a value other than 00h is executed. Furthermore, since the value of the I register is 00h, the upper address of the interrupt vector address is 00h. That is, as shown in FIG. 71, the interrupt vector address for timer interrupt processing can be determined in the control area of the used area (the first control area described above).

<Each area of main control ROM>
FIG. 71 is a diagram showing each area stored in the main control ROM in this embodiment. First, the area from address 0000h to address 11FEh is a control area. This control area is a control area of the used area (the first control area described above), and various commands are stored in the control area. Furthermore, an interrupt vector address for timer interrupt processing is defined in the control area. However, the interrupt vector address for timer interrupt processing is an address, not a program, as described above. Therefore, when the main control chip is activated normally, the interrupt vector address for timer interrupt processing is not executed as an instruction. Address 11FF is an unused area. 0 (00000000b) is stored in the unused area. The area from address 1200h to address 1DF6h is a data area. This data area is the data area of the used area (the first data area mentioned above), and the data area stores a lottery table and the like used (referenced) by the program (instruction) of the first control area. The area from address 1DF7h to address 1FFFh is an unused area. 0 (00000000b) is stored in the unused area. The area from address 2000h to address 245Dh is a control area (the above-mentioned second control area) outside the used area. Various commands are stored in the control area outside the used area. Note that, unlike the control area, an interrupt vector address for timer interrupt processing is not determined in the control area outside the used area. The data area extends from address 245Eh to address 2526h. This data area is a data area outside the used area (the above-mentioned second data area), and stores tables and the like that are used (referenced) by the program (instruction) of the second control area. Addresses 3FC0h to 3FFFh are program management areas.

<Program management area>
The program management area includes a run-out-of-specified-area prohibition setting area, which is an area for specifying an area in which a program is not determined to run out of control, and an interrupt initial setting area, which is an area for specifying a lower address of a vector address. Note that the program management area may also be referred to as a program management area.

After the power is turned on and before the first program (program at address 0000h) starts (before user mode starts (specifically, during security mode)), each area of the program management area Various settings of the main control chip can be performed based on the values (information) stored in the main control chip. That is, after the setting of the area for designating the off-traveling prohibited area and the setting of the interrupt initial setting area are completed, the first program (the program at address 0000h) is executed. Note that the security mode performs security checks on the control area and data area of the main control ROM, inspection of the program management area, settings based on the program management area, and the like. After that, if it is determined that there is no abnormality in security mode, the system shifts to user mode. In other words, the programs are executed sequentially starting from the program (instruction) at address 0000h in the control area. On the other hand, if it is determined that the security mode is abnormal (for example, if the value set in the program management area is an abnormal value), the system does not shift to the user mode. In other words, the program (instruction) at address 0000h in the control area is stopped without being executed (the main control chip stops controlling).

<Setting area where driving outside the designated area is prohibited>
The out-of-specified area travel prohibition setting areas include a program code end address 1 setting area, a program code start address 2 setting area, and a program code ending address 2 setting area. For example, the program code end address 1 setting area consists of a 2-byte area at addresses 3F03h and 3F04h, the program code start address 2 setting area consists of a 2-byte area at addresses 3F05h and 3F06h, and the program code ending address 2 setting area The area consists of 2-byte areas at addresses 3F07h and 3F08h.

In this embodiment, a control area is provided from address 0000h to address 11FEh, and a control area from address 2000h to address 245Dh is outside the used area. Therefore, the last address of the control area, 11FEh, is set in the program code end address 1 setting area. In the program code start address 2 setting area, 2000h, which is the first address of the control area outside the used area, is also set. Further, 245Dh, which is the last address of the control area outside the used area, is set in the program code end address 2 setting area. Note that 0000h, which is the first address of the control area, is not set. Even if the first address of the control area, 0000h, is not set, the program code start address 1 for the program code end address 1 becomes 0000h. With the above settings, it is possible to prevent a reset from occurring when a program from address 0000h to address 11FEh is executed (instructions are fetched). Furthermore, when executing the program from address 2000h to address 245Dh (fetching instructions), it is possible to prevent reset from occurring. On the other hand, when the CPU attempts to execute a program (fetches an instruction) outside the area set in the out-of-designated-area travel prohibition setting area, a reset can occur. For example, when attempting to execute a program at address 11FFh (unused area) in this embodiment (when an instruction is fetched), a reset occurs. In addition, if a reset occurs, the power remains on, the registers are initialized, and each area of the program management area is Various settings of the main control chip are performed based on the values (information) stored in the main control chip. Note that after executing the security mode, if no abnormality is determined in the security mode, the programs can be executed sequentially from the first program (program (instruction) at address 0000h). In this way, by simply setting the last address for the control area, you can make the control area an area that does not require reset (designated area), and for the control area outside the used area, set the first and last addresses. By doing so, the control area outside the used area can be set as an area (designated area) that does not require resetting. In other words, by simply setting three addresses instead of four addresses, it is possible to set two areas (designated areas) that are not reset. With this configuration, the storage area of the program management area can be reduced.

<Interrupt initial setting area>
The interrupt initial setting area is an area for setting lower addresses of interrupt vector addresses. In other words, this is an area where a part of the interrupt vector address is set. Specifically, the interrupt initial setting area consists of a 1-byte area at address 3FDAh. In order to explain the details of the interrupt initial setting address, a description will be given using FIG. 72.

FIG. 72A is a diagram illustrating the interrupt initial setting area. The interrupt initial setting area consists of a 1-byte storage area from bit D0 to bit D7.
Interrupt priority is set using two bits, D0 bit and D1 bit. Details of the interrupt priority will be described later, but in this embodiment, the D1 bit is set to 0 and the D0 bit is set to 1 (01b is set). By setting 01b as the interrupt priority, the lower 4 bits of the lower address of the interrupt vector address are automatically assigned a value corresponding to 01b (details will be described later). In other words, by simply setting a 2-bit value, the lower 4 bits of the lower address of the interrupt vector address can be set. In this embodiment, the interrupt priority is set to 01b, but any value such as 00b, 10b, 11b, etc. can be set, and based on the 2-bit value, one of the lower addresses of the interrupt vector address The lower 4 bits can be set.
Fixed values are set in the D2 bit and D3 bit. In this embodiment, the D2 bit is set to 0 and the D3 bit is set to 0 (00b is set) as fixed values. In addition, if 00b is not set as a fixed value, or if a value other than 00b is set due to noise etc., the power will be turned on and the security mode before user mode will determine that there is an abnormality, and the user mode will be disabled. is configured not to start. If the predetermined fixed value is not set in this way, there is a high possibility that the ROM is abnormal, so by preventing the user mode from starting (not executing the program start process in an abnormal state) , it is possible to avoid putting disadvantages on game parlors and players.
Four bits from D4 bit to D7 bit are used to set the upper four bits of the lower address of the interrupt vector address. In this embodiment, the upper four bits of the lower address of the interrupt vector address are set to 0000b. Note that in this embodiment, the upper 4 bits of the lower address of the interrupt vector address are set to 0000b (0h), but this is not limited to this, and they can be set to any value such as 1000h (8h) or 1111b (Fh). Can be set.

FIG. 72B is a diagram showing the relationship between interrupt priority and automatic allocation.
As described above, the main control chip used in this embodiment can execute up to six types of maskable interrupt processing. Specifically, it is possible to execute six types of maskable interrupt processing: "PTC0" to "PTC2", "RX0" to "RX1", and "XINT". Among these maskable interrupt processes, if the gaming machine is capable of executing multiple (at least two) maskable interrupt processes, which maskable interrupt process will be prioritized when interrupt factors, etc. occur at the same time. Interrupt priority determines whether or not to interrupt. As for the interrupt priority, "Priority A" is the highest interrupt priority, and the interrupt priorities descend from "Priority A" in order. In other words, "Priority F" is the lowest interrupt priority. Note that "PTC0" to "PTC2" are interrupt factors used for timer interrupt processing, and "PTC2" in particular corresponds to the timer interrupt processing in this embodiment. In addition, the interrupt priorities "00b", "01b", "10b", and "11b" correspond to the values (interrupt priorities) set to the D0 bit and D1 bit described in (A) of FIG. There is.

For example, if 01b is set in the interrupt priority setting area of the interrupt initial setting area, as shown in FIG. 0000b, b) The lower 4 bits of the lower byte of the PTC1 interrupt vector address are automatically allocated to 0010b, c) The lower 4 bits of the lower byte of the PTC2 interrupt vector address are automatically allocated to 0100b, and d) XINT The lower 4 bits of the lower byte of the interrupt vector address of RX0 are automatically allocated to 0110b, e) the lower 4 bits of the lower byte of the interrupt vector address of RX0 are automatically allocated to 1000b, and f) the lower 4 bits of the interrupt vector address of RX1 are automatically allocated. The lower 4 bits of the byte become 1010b due to automatic allocation. That is, when PTC2 is used for timer interrupt processing, the lower 4 bits of the lower byte of the interrupt vector address for timer interrupt processing can be set to 0100b (4h) by automatic allocation by the main control chip. For example, if 10b is set in the interrupt priority setting area of the interrupt initial setting area and PTC2 is used for timer interrupt processing, the lower byte of the interrupt vector address for timer interrupt processing is automatically allocated by the main control chip. The lower 4 bits can be set to 1000b (8h).
As described above, the lower 4 bits of the lower byte of the interrupt vector address for timer interrupt processing are 0000b (0h), 0010b (2h), 0100b (4h), 0110b (6h), 1000b (8h), and 1010b (Ah). can be determined.

As mentioned above, the value of the upper 4 bits of the lower byte of the interrupt vector address can be set to any value from 0000b (0h) to 1111b (Fh), and the value of the lower 4 bits of the lower byte of the interrupt vector address The value can be set to 0000b (0h), 0010b (2h), 0100b (4h), 0110b (6h), 1000b (8h), 1010b (Ah). In other words, the lower address of the interrupt vector address for timer interrupt processing can be set to any value from 00h to FAh according to the value set in the interrupt initial setting area. For example, if the value of the I register is 00h and the lower address of the interrupt vector address for timer interrupt processing is set to 04h by the value set in the interrupt initial setting area, the interrupt vector address for timer interrupt processing is 0004h. (and 0005h). Additionally, if the value of the I register is 00h and the lower address of the interrupt vector address for timer interrupt processing is set to 84h by the value set in the interrupt initial setting area, the interrupt vector address for timer interrupt processing is 0084h. (and 0085h). Although the details are omitted, it should be noted that the interrupt vector addresses for the plurality of maskable interrupt processes described above can be determined depending on the value set in the interrupt initial setting area.

<Relationship between interrupt vector addresses of power-on processing and timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 73 is a diagram showing the relationship between interrupt vector addresses for power-on processing and timer interrupt processing. From address 0000h to address 0003h, a part of the power-on process, which is the first program executed when the power is turned on, is stored. At addresses 0004h and 0005h, interrupt vector addresses for timer interrupt processing are stored. A timer interrupt process is stored from address xxxxh (xxxx is a predetermined value in hexadecimal) to address XXXXh (XXXX is a predetermined value in hexadecimal). The continuation of the power-on process is stored from address yyyyh (yyyy is a predetermined value in hexadecimal) to address YYYYh (YYYY is a predetermined value in hexadecimal). It is assumed that other programs (commands) are stored in the portions indicated by broken lines.

As is clear from FIG. 73, the power-on process starts from address 0000h and is executed up to address 0003h. The continuation of the power-on process is configured to start from address yyyyh. Specifically, from address 0001h to 0003h, a jump instruction (JR yyyyh) is stored in which the continuation program of address 0003h is address yyyyh (this jump instruction is a 3-byte instruction, so it is stored from address 0001h to 0003h). (Use the program area up to address). Note that the power-on process corresponds to the program start process shown in FIG. Furthermore, an interrupt vector address for timer interrupt processing is stored between address 0003h and address yyyyh. In other words, all the commands constituting the power-on process are configured not to be stored in consecutive addresses. With this configuration, the game store clerk can understand that the voltage is rising in an unstable situation. Specifically, when the power is turned on (immediately after the power is turned on), the voltage is unstable, and the program (instruction) may not be executed correctly (if the main control chip has not started up normally). situation). In such a case, if the instructions that make up the power-on process are made up of a series of instructions, for example, if one of the instructions that makes up the power-on process is executed, the next address after a certain instruction is not executed. It may execute the stored instructions and execute the program with abnormal behavior. In other words, there was a fear that an error that neither the player nor the game store clerk expected could occur. However, by storing the interrupt vector address of the timer interrupt process between a part of the power-on process and a part of the power-off process, for example, the program continuing from address 0003h becomes the jump instruction at address yyyyh. (JR yyyyh) is executed normally, the program following address 0003h becomes address yyyyh. If the jump instruction (JR yyyyh) is not executed normally (the instruction at address 0004h is executed) case), it takes longer to execute the program (instruction) after address yyyyh (or the program (instruction) after address yyyyh is not executed). In other words, for example, if there is a program (command) for determining the transition to the setting change mode ("setting key switch ON and door open detection switch ON?" in Figure 5) after address yyyyh, then The case where the jump instruction (JR yyyyh) where the program continues from address 0003h is executed incorrectly is better than the case where the jump instruction (JR yyyyh) where the program moves to address yyyyh is executed normally. , the time it takes to shift to setting change mode will be longer than the designed time (or it will not shift to setting change mode), so after turning on the power, the game store clerk must switch to setting change mode. It is possible to determine whether or not the voltage has risen in an unstable situation based on whether or not the time taken to do so is abnormal.

Note that the addresses shown in FIG. 73 are just examples, and part of the power-on process, which is the first program to be executed when the power is turned on, is stored from addresses 0000h to 0003h. For example, addresses 0000h to 0007h may be part of the power-on process, which is the first program executed when the power is turned on. Similarly, the interrupt vector addresses for timer interrupt processing are stored at addresses 0004h and 0005h, but any value may be smaller than address yyyyh, which is the continuation address of the program for power-on processing. For example, if part of the power-on processing, which is the first program executed when the power is turned on, is set to addresses 0000h to 0007h, and address yyyyh is set to 1000h, the interrupt vector address for timer interrupt processing is set to address 0064h, etc. It may be set as follows. In other words, if a jump instruction is stored at address A as a power-on processing program, and the power-on processing program continues from address B, an interrupt vector address for timer interrupt processing is stored between addresses A and B. It may be configured to be stored (defined). Further, although address xxxxh is set to a smaller value than address yyyyh, address xxxxh may be set to a larger value than address yyyyh. Further, although the vector address for timer interrupt processing is set to a value smaller than address xxxxh, the vector address for timer interrupt processing may be set to a value larger than address xxxxh. In addition, although the broken line part has been described as another program (instruction), even if data other than a program (instruction) (another interrupt vector address or unused data (data in which 00000000b is stored)) is stored. good.

In addition, as an example of the processing after address yyyyh, we have given an example of determining the transition to the setting change mode, but as the processing after address yyyyh, it is necessary to output an external signal (security signal) indicating that the power is turned on. (not shown), the designed time until the external signal is output is longer than when the program (instruction) is normally executed (or the external signal is not output), so the game The store clerk can determine whether or not the voltage has started up in an unstable situation based on whether or not the time taken until the security signal is output is abnormal. Similarly, for processing after address yyyyh, even if the first "instruction to enable interrupts" after the start of power-on processing among multiple "instructions to enable interrupts (also referred to as interrupt enable instructions)" good. With this configuration, the designed time until the timer interrupt processing can be executed becomes longer than when the program (instruction) is normally executed (or the timer interrupt processing is not executed). On the game store staff side, check whether the timing of displaying the number of credits (lighting up of the credit number display) due to timer interrupt processing, the lighting timing of the MAX bet lamp, or the time until the lighting timing of the medal insertion ready lamp was abnormal. , it is possible to determine whether the voltage has risen in an unstable situation. Note that, once again, after setting the interrupt mode, timer interrupt processing can actually be executed after an instruction to permit interrupts is issued. Here, the interrupt mode may be set by processing after address yyyyh, or by processing at an address before jumping to address yyyyh.

<Relationship between interrupt vector addresses and other programs for power-on processing and timer interrupt processing>
<Pattern 1> in FIG. 74 is a diagram showing the relationship between interrupt vector addresses of power-on processing and timer interrupt processing and other programs. Various explanations will be given using this <Pattern 1>. From address 0000h to address 0003h, a part of the power-on process, which is a program to be executed first when the power is turned on, is stored. At addresses 0004h and 0005h, interrupt vector addresses for timer interrupt processing are stored. The first process is stored starting from address 0008h. The second process is stored starting from address 0010h. The third process is stored at address 0018h. The fourth process is stored starting from address 0020h. The fifth process is stored starting from address 0028h. The sixth process is stored starting from address 0030h. The seventh process is stored starting from address 0038h. The eighth process is stored starting from address 0040h. A timer interrupt process is stored from address xxxxh (xxxx is a predetermined value in hexadecimal) to address XXXXh (XXXX is a predetermined value in hexadecimal). The continuation of the power-on process is stored from address yyyyh (yyyy is a predetermined value in hexadecimal) to address YYYYh (YYYY is a predetermined value in hexadecimal). It is assumed that other programs (commands) are stored in the portions indicated by broken lines.

Here, the first process, second process, third process, fourth process, fifth process, sixth process, seventh process, and eighth process are special call instructions (RST refers to a process (program) called by a command). A special call instruction (RST instruction) is different from a normal call instruction (CALL instruction) when calling a program (instruction) at a specific address (0008h, 0010h, 0018h, 0020h, 0028h, 0030h, 0038h, 0040h). This is an instruction used to call a program (instruction) with a smaller program capacity and shorter processing time (smaller number of states) than a normal call instruction (CALL instruction). For example, when calling the first process starting from 0008h, the case where a normal call instruction (CALL instruction) is used and the case where a special call instruction (RST instruction) is used are compared as follows.
a) When calling the program at address 0008h using a normal call instruction (CALL instruction) CALL 0008h (Program capacity used: 3 bytes, number of states: 5)
b) When calling the program at address 0008h using a special call instruction (RST instruction) RST 08h (Program capacity used: 1 byte, number of states: 4)
As described above, rather than calling the program (instruction) at the specific address mentioned above using the normal call instruction (CALL instruction), it is better to call the program (instruction) at the specific address mentioned above using the special instruction (RST instruction). By calling (instruction), the program capacity used can be reduced to 1/2 or less. Further, the processing time required to call the program (instruction) at the above-mentioned specific address can also be shortened. Therefore, the first process, second process, third process, fourth process, fifth process, sixth process, seventh process called (executed) by the special call instruction (RST instruction) At least one of the eighth processes includes an operation for starting a certain game (for example, turning on a start switch) and an operation for starting the next game after a certain game (for example, turning on a start switch). It is preferable that the process is called multiple times until the switch is turned on. In other words, at least one of the first process, second process, third process, fourth process, fifth process, sixth process, seventh process, and eighth process is , is preferably a process that is called frequently. In this way, by configuring a process that is called frequently to be called using a special call instruction (RST instruction), it is possible to use a special call instruction (RST instruction) rather than using a normal call instruction (CALL instruction). ) can reduce the program size.

In addition, the first process, second process, third process, fourth process, fifth process, sixth process, seventh process called (executed) by the special call instruction (RST instruction) Preferably, the processing is composed of a program with a capacity of 8 bytes, or a program within a capacity of 8 bytes. For example, if the first process is a program with a capacity of 8 bytes, the program (instruction) of the first process is stored at addresses 0008h to 000Fh. On the other hand, if the first process is a program with a capacity of 4 bytes, the program (instruction) of the first process is stored from address 0008h to address 000Bh. If the first process is a program with a capacity of 4 bytes, addresses 000Ch to 000Fh may be determined as follows.
Example 1) Address 000Ch to 000Fh is set as an unused area (00000000b is stored).
Example 2) Store other processes (other programs) within 4 bytes from address 000Ch to address 000Fh. Here, the other process is called not by a special call instruction (RST instruction) but by a normal call instruction (CALL instruction).

Note that in the above example, the first process is a program with a capacity of 4 bytes, but the first process is not a program with a capacity of 4 bytes, but a program with a capacity of X bytes (X is a number less than 8). ) program. Furthermore, although the first process at address 0008h is shown as an example, the above-mentioned example is not limited to address 0008h; the second process at address 0010h, the third process at address 0018h, and the third process at address 0020h. The fourth process, the fifth process at address 0028h, the sixth process at address 0030h, and the seventh process at address 0038h are also applicable.

For example, if the first process at address 0008h is a program with a capacity of 15 bytes from address 0008h to 0016h, even if the second process called by a special call instruction (RST instruction) is not provided. good. However, if the process called by the special call instruction (RST instruction) exceeds 8 bytes, the last address (address with the largest value) among the addresses that can be called by the special call instruction (RST instruction) It is preferable to store it at a certain address 0040h (defined as the eighth process of this embodiment). In other words, for the process to store at address 0040h (eighth process in this embodiment), since there are no addresses after address 0040h that can be called by a special call instruction (RST instruction), There is no problem. With this configuration, eight processes (the same number of processes as the maximum number that can be called by a special call instruction (RST instruction)) can be stored as processes that can be called by a special call instruction (RST instruction). can do.

Note that addresses 0008h, 0010h, 0018h, 0020h, 0028h, 0030h, 0038h, and 0040h were used as addresses where processes (programs) called by special call instructions (RST instructions) were stored. The eight addresses are just an example, and the number is not limited to this. However, it is preferable that the upper byte of the address storing the process called by the special call instruction (RST instruction) is 00h. With this configuration, processes that are frequently called can be placed near the start address (0000h), and at the development stage, processes that are frequently called can be designed first, and other processes can be designed later. be able to. In addition, a normal call instruction (CALL instruction) is an instruction that is used (stored) both within the control area and in a control area outside the used area, but a special call instruction (RST instruction) is Preferably, the instruction is used (stored) within the control area but not used (stored) in the control area outside the usage area. With this configuration, when a developer or a third party checks the program, an area with a special call instruction (RST instruction) is considered a control area, and an area without a special call instruction is used. It is possible to understand at a glance that the control area is outside the area.

Further, although two examples of processes (programs) called by a special call instruction (RST instruction) are shown, the present invention is not limited to the following processes, and can be configured with various processes.
Example 1) Command set processing Contents: 1) Disable interrupts. 2) Call and execute the process of writing information to be sent to the sub-control means into the RWM area of the main control means using a normal call command (CALL command). 3) Enable interrupts.
Example of call location: When sending information indicating that the reels have started spinning. When transmitting information indicating that all reels have stopped to the sub-control means. When sending the error type. When sending setting values. When the start lever is operated and the production group number is sent, etc.
Example 2) Interrupt wait processing Contents: 1) Determine whether or not timer interrupt processing has been executed. 2-1) If it is determined that timer interrupt processing is not being executed, return to 1). 2-2) If it is determined that the timer interrupt process has been executed, the process is ended.
Example of call location: When clearing start-up data indicating that a predetermined switch (setting switch, 1 bet switch, etc.) has been operated.

As described above, the power-on process starts from address 0000h and is executed up to address 0003h. The continuation of the power-on process is configured to start from address yyyyh. Specifically, the program following address 0003h is configured to execute a jump instruction (JR yyyyh) at address yyyyh (the jump instruction is a 3-byte instruction, so the program area from address 0001h to address 0003h is ). Note that the power-on process corresponds to the program start process shown in FIG. Furthermore, between addresses 0003h and yyyyh, interrupt vector addresses for processes called by special call instructions (RST instructions) and timer interrupt processes are stored. In other words, all the commands constituting the power-on process are configured not to be stored in consecutive addresses. With this configuration, the game store clerk can understand that the voltage is rising in an unstable situation. Specifically, when the power is turned on (immediately after the power is turned on), the voltage is unstable, and the program (instruction) may not be executed correctly (if the main control chip has not started up normally). situation). In such a case, if the instructions that make up the power-on process are composed of a series of instructions, for example, it is possible to execute the next instruction without executing one of the instructions that make up the power-on process. The program may run with abnormal behavior. In other words, there was a fear that an error that neither the player nor the game store clerk expected could occur. However, by storing the interrupt vector address of the timer interrupt process between a part of the power-on process and a part of the power-off process, for example, the program continuing from address 0003h becomes the jump instruction at address yyyyh. (JR yyyyh) is executed normally, the program following address 0003h becomes address yyyyh. If the jump instruction (JR yyyyh) is not executed normally (the instruction at address 0004h is executed) case), it takes longer to execute the program (instruction) after address yyyyh (or the program (instruction) after address yyyyh is not executed). In other words, for example, if there is a program (command) for determining the transition to the setting change mode ("setting key switch ON and door open detection switch ON?" in Figure 5) after address yyyyh, then The case where the jump instruction (JR yyyyh) where the program continues from address 0003h is executed incorrectly is better than the case where the jump instruction (JR yyyyh) where the program moves to address yyyyh is executed normally. , the time it takes to shift to setting change mode will be longer than the designed time (or it will not shift to setting change mode), so after turning on the power, the game store clerk must switch to setting change mode. It is possible to determine whether or not the voltage has risen in an unstable situation based on whether or not the time taken to do so is abnormal.

Note that the addresses listed in <Pattern 1> in FIG. 74 are examples; from address 0000h to address 0003h, a part of the power-on process, which is the first program to be executed when the power is turned on, is stored. However, for example, as in <Pattern 2> of FIG. 74, addresses 0000h to 0007h may be part of the power-on process, which is the first program executed when the power is turned on. Similarly, although the interrupt vector address for timer interrupt processing is stored at address 0004h, it may be a value smaller than address yyyyh, which is the continuation address of the program for power-on processing. For example, if part of the power-on processing, which is the first program executed when the power is turned on, is set to addresses 0000h to 0007h, and address yyyyh is set to 1000h, the interrupt vector address for timer interrupt processing is set to address 0064h, etc. It may be set as follows. In other words, if a jump instruction is stored at address A as a power-on processing program, and the power-on processing program continues from address B, an interrupt vector address for timer interrupt processing or an interrupt vector address for timer interrupt processing is stored between addresses A and B. , it may be configured to be called by a special call instruction (RST instruction) and store (define) the process. Further, although address xxxxh is set to a smaller value than address yyyyh, address xxxxh may be set to a larger value than address yyyyh. In addition, although the broken line part has been described as another program (instruction), even if data other than a program (instruction) (another interrupt vector address or unused data (data in which 00000000b is stored)) is stored. good. Further, although the vector address for timer interrupt processing is set to a value smaller than address xxxxh, the vector address for timer interrupt processing may be set to a value larger than address xxxxh.

In addition, as an example of the processing after address yyyyh, we have given an example of determining the transition to the setting change mode, but as the processing after address yyyyh, it is necessary to output an external signal (security signal) indicating that the power is turned on. (not shown), the designed time until the external signal is output is longer than when the program (instruction) is normally executed (or the external signal is not output), so the game The store clerk can determine whether or not the voltage has started up in an unstable situation based on whether or not the time taken until the security signal is output is abnormal. Similarly, for processing after address yyyyh, even if the first "instruction to enable interrupts" after the start of power-on processing among multiple "instructions to enable interrupts (also referred to as interrupt enable instructions)" good. With this configuration, the designed time until the timer interrupt processing can be executed becomes longer than when the program (instruction) is normally executed (or the timer interrupt processing is not executed). On the game store staff side, check whether the timing of displaying the number of credits (lighting up of the credit number display) due to timer interrupt processing, the lighting timing of the MAX bet lamp, or the time until the lighting timing of the medal insertion ready lamp was abnormal. , it is possible to determine whether the voltage has risen in an unstable situation. Note that, once again, after setting the interrupt mode, timer interrupt processing can actually be executed after an instruction to permit interrupts is issued. Here, the interrupt mode may be set by processing after address yyyyh, or by processing at an address before jumping to address yyyyh.

<Stage change production>
The present embodiment is configured to be able to perform a stage change performance (also sometimes referred to as a switching performance) that switches the performance stage that can be displayed on the liquid crystal. There are multiple types of production stages, such as a normal stage and a high probability stage that indicates a high probability state where the probability of AT winning is higher than the normal stage, and there is a transition from one production stage to a different production stage. It is configured so that it can sometimes perform stage change effects. This stage change performance allows the production stage to be smoothly switched. Note that there are multiple types of stage change performances, and the selection ratio of the destination stage changes depending on the type of stage change performance (for example, a predetermined stage change performance is (For example, the level of expectation for transitioning to a high-probability stage is higher than that of a stage change production, or the transition to a high-probability stage is always performed when a specific stage change production is executed.) In addition, it is configured to suggest stay modes depending on the type of stage change production (details are omitted, but the AT winning probability and the number of ceiling games until AT winning are different depending on the stay mode) and setting values. You may. In addition, the production corresponding to the production stage (display of a background image (still image or moving image) on the LCD, output of BGM from the speaker, predetermined lamp lighting pattern, predetermined lamp lighting color, etc.) configured to be executed.

FIG. 45 is an example of a stage change effect in this embodiment, and UI images (also referred to as UI display, UI, or game information image) include UI image A (also referred to as first UI image), UI image B ( UI image C (also referred to as a second UI image) and UI image C (also referred to as a third UI image) can be displayed. A UI image is an image that can be displayed on a liquid crystal display in the same (or similar) display mode and in the same display area across multiple performance stages, and information that allows players to understand the game situation is used as a UI image. Is displayed.

Here, UI image A, UI image B, and UI image C will be described in detail.

UI image A is an image showing the name of the production stage. In FIG. 45(1), the text "coastal stage" also has a frame around it, but it may be composed of only the text without a frame.

UI image B is an image showing the current number of credits. As for the display mode of UI image B, for example, when the MAX bet switch is pressed and the MAX bet process is executed when "50" is displayed as the number of credits, "50 → 49 → 48 → 47" is displayed. It is configured to be updated and displayed one by one at a speed that is visible to the player. Note that it may be configured such that only the number of credits after MAX bet processing is displayed, such as "50→47".

UI image C is an image showing the number of payouts in one game. As for the display mode of the UI image C, for example, if "10" is paid out in one game, the player can see (1) "0→1→2→...→9→10". The information is updated and displayed one by one at a speed of 1. Note that it may be configured such that only the number of payouts is displayed, such as "0→10". It should be noted that the configuration may be such that "0" is displayed after the number of payouts is displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds), or the number of payouts continues to be displayed and if a bet operation related to the next game is made (or , when the operation of the start switch 12 related to the next game is accepted) may be configured so that "0" is displayed.

In addition to these, the UI images also include the number of games played in one AT, the number of remaining games, and predetermined points used for games (for example, the number of games played and the number of remaining games are configured so that they can be accumulated depending on the execution of games and winning combinations). , when 1000 points are reached, an AT lottery is executed), the number of games played in a normal game, a character display, and various types of UI images such as an outline for displaying a push order navigation image during AT. You can do it like this.

Further, the liquid crystal is configured to display a background image corresponding to the current production stage, and in FIG. 45(1), a background image corresponding to the coast stage is displayed. Furthermore, since the UI image is configured to have a higher display priority than the background image (displayed on the front), the visibility of the UI image is not lowered by the background image, and the player can You can grasp the game situation at the right time.

In addition, the type of UI image that can be displayed on the LCD can be changed depending on the gaming state (normal section, advantageous section, RT state, AT, non-AT, chance zone, high probability state, bonus, etc.), and the display mode of the UI image can be changed. You may also change the . In short, the UI image that can be displayed on the liquid crystal may be changed as appropriate depending on the gaming state. By doing so, the current gaming state can be easily grasped from the UI image.

The flow of stage change production in this embodiment will be explained.
First, in (1) of FIG. 45, the current performance stage is the coast stage, the start switch 12 is operated (pressed), and a new game is executed. Next, in steps (2) → (3) → (4), the background image and UI image are blacked out (darkened) from outside the LCD display area, covering the entire LCD display area. A black image is displayed, making the background image and UI image invisible (you can make the background image and UI image invisible by displaying a black image in front of the background image and UI image, or (It may be made invisible by displaying a black image). Thereafter, the background image is displayed from inside the display area of the liquid crystal in the order of (5)→(6)→(7), and the background image corresponding to the production stage after the transition (after the stage change) is displayed. Note that in the UI image A, "town stage" is displayed in correspondence with the production stage after the transition. In this way, by configuring the background image and the UI image so that they are not visible during at least part of the period during the stage change performance, it is possible to draw the attention of the player to which performance stage the game has moved to. Further, even if the display mode of the UI image is different before and after the stage change performance, the game can be played without any discomfort. Note that when the performance stage is switched by executing a stage change performance, the name of the performance stage after the transition may be outputted from the speaker. For example, in FIG. 45, a voice is output saying "town stage" which is the production stage after transition.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is sufficient that the background image and the UI image are not visible at least at any timing during the execution period of the stage change performance (the background image and the UI image are always hidden during the stage change performance). ), various methods can be applied as appropriate to make the background image and UI image invisible. Also, by displaying a predetermined image (for example, an image of a predetermined character or a title logo image) during a period in which the background image and UI image are not visible (for example, the period (4) in FIG. 45), It is relatively more advantageous to the player than normal stage change effects (there is a high possibility of winning the AT transition lottery, it is possible that the player is moving to a high probability state where the probability of winning the AT transition lottery is high) It may also be configured to provide a stage change effect with a chance-up pattern (e.g., high performance, etc.). Note that the stage change performance of the chance up pattern and the normal stage change performance may be different types of stage change performance, or may be configured to be similar stage change performances that differ in part of the performance mode. .

Regarding the execution period (time required from start to end) of the stage change performance, in this embodiment, the execution period of the normal stage change performance and the execution period of the stage change performance of the chance up pattern are the same length. It is configured so that With this configuration, the normal stage change performance and the chance-up pattern stage change performance can have the same execution end timing, so that subsequent games can be played without any discomfort. Note that the execution period of the stage change performance of the chance up pattern may be configured to be longer than the execution period of the normal stage change performance. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the stage change effect of the chance up pattern from being overlooked. Note that the execution period of the stage change performance of the chance up pattern may be configured to be shorter than the execution period of the normal stage change performance. With this configuration, when the stage change performance of the chance up pattern is executed, it is possible to give the player an uncomfortable feeling that the end timing of the performance ends relatively quickly, and this discomfort causes the chance up pattern to change. The player can sense that this is a stage change performance.

In addition, it is relatively more advantageous for the player when a predetermined stage change effect is executed in the second effect mode than when it is executed in the first effect mode (advantageous effect stage It is also possible to configure the system so that the player is likely to win an AT lottery, an AT game number add-on lottery, a bonus, etc.). Furthermore, the execution of the predetermined stage change production is started based on the predetermined stop operation (any of the first stop, second stop, or third stop) rather than the case where the predetermined stage change effect is started based on the operation of the start switch 12. The configuration may be such that it is relatively more advantageous for the player if the game is executed. In addition, the production stage and the production mode of the stage change production are made to correspond (on the first production stage, the stage change production is executed in the first production mode, and on the second production stage, the stage change production is performed in the second production mode). etc.), it may be configured so that the case where the correspondence relationships are different is relatively more advantageous to the player than the case where the correspondence relationships are not different.

Furthermore, depending on the gaming situation (game status, performance stage, etc.), the display mode of the UI image (color, shape, size, etc. of the UI image), the display position (display area) of the UI image, whether or not the UI image is displayed, The configuration may be such that the types of UI images can be different. For example, in gaming state A, UI image A and UI image B are displayed, but in gaming state B, only UI image A may be displayed (or no UI image may be displayed). In state A, UI image A and UI image B are displayed, but in gaming state B, UI image C and UI image D (not shown) may be displayed. Furthermore, as the gaming state A and the gaming state B, for example, the AT state may be the gaming state A and the non-AT state (or a state where the frequency of pressing order navigation is relatively low) may be the gaming state B. A certain gaming state may be set as gaming state A, and a gaming state with a normal section may be set as gaming state B, or a state where the standby demo screen is displayed may be set as gaming state A and a state where the standby demo screen is not displayed may be set as gaming state B. good.

Note that although FIG. 45 is configured to display UI image A, UI image B, and UI image C, the number of UI images to be displayed and the type of UI images to be displayed may be changed as appropriate. For example, the aforementioned UI image D may be newly added, or the UI image A may be omitted and the UI images displayed before and after the stage change performance may be the same. Alternatively, the UI image A may not be displayed, but an image indicating the name of the current performance stage may be displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) after the stage change performance is executed.

In addition, in FIG. 45, the configuration is such that all UI images are not visible during at least a part of the period when the stage change performance is executed, but in addition to this, when the stage change performance is executed, at least during a part of the period, The configuration may be such that all or part of any UI image is not visible.

Next, the execution start and end timings of the stage change effect in this embodiment will be explained.
Here, a case will be described in which the operation of the start switch 12 for the N+1st game is received before the minimum playing time has elapsed from the start of the Nth game, and a stage change effect is executed in the N+1st game. .
(1) Based on the operation of the start switch 12 for the Nth game, all the reels start rotating. Note that the measurement of the minimum gaming time starts from the timing when all the reels start rotating.
(2) Thereafter, after the rotation state of all the reels becomes a constant speed rotation state, the operation of the stop switch 13 becomes effective, and the player stops the left stop switch 13a, middle stop switch 13b, and right stop switch 13c. The operation causes all reels to stop. During the Nth game (the period from when all reels start rotating until all reels stop), the UI image remains displayed.
(3) Next, the start switch 12 for the N+1-th game is operated, but since the minimum gaming time has not elapsed since the start of reel rotation for the N-th game, the reels do not start rotating. Furthermore, a stage change effect is executed based on the operation of the start switch 12 for the N+1-th game. In other words, even if the minimum game time has not elapsed, the stage change effect is executed based on the N+1st operation of the start switch 12. Note that the presentation mode of the stage change presentation here is the same as the presentation mode illustrated in FIG. 45.
(4) Thereafter, as the stage change effect progresses, the UI image becomes invisible (for example, the mode shown in FIG. 45(3)). Note that the UI image continues to be displayed from the Nth game until the UI image becomes invisible due to the stage change performance.
(5) Next, the minimum game time has elapsed from the start of reel rotation for the N-th game, and the reel rotation for the N+1-th game begins.
(6) Thereafter, as the stage change effect progresses, the UI image is visibly displayed, and thereafter the UI image continues to be visibly displayed. Note that depending on the time to execute the stage change effect, the UI image may become visible before the minimum time elapses.
(7) After that, the execution of the stage change effect ends.
(8) Thereafter, the operation of the stop switch 13 for the N+1-th game becomes valid.
As described above, in this embodiment, the stage change performance is executed based on the reception of the operation of the start switch 12, and is configured to end when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed.

As described above, in this embodiment, the operation of the start switch 12 for the N+1st game is accepted before the minimum playing time has elapsed from the start of rotation of the reels for the Nth game, and When a stage change effect is executed in , the stage change effect is completed and the UI image is displayed in a visible manner before the operation of the stop switch 13 for the N+1th game becomes effective. has been done. With this configuration, the stage change effect has finished when the operation of the stop switch 13 becomes effective, and the UI image is visible, allowing the player to properly understand the game situation. Therefore, the game can be played without any discomfort.

It should be noted that the operation of the start switch 12 for the N+1st game is accepted before a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) less than the minimum playing time has elapsed from the start of rotation of the reels for the Nth game, and When a stage change effect is executed in a game, the execution of the stage change effect is completed and the UI image is visibly displayed before the operation of the stop switch 13 for the N+1th game becomes effective. On the other hand, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) less than the minimum playing time has elapsed from the start of rotation of the reels for the Nth game, but before the minimum playing time has elapsed, the N+1st game is played. If the operation of the start switch 12 related to the above is accepted and the stage change effect is executed in the N+1st game, the stage change effect will be executed when the operation of the stop switch 13 related to the N+1th game becomes effective. It may be configured so that execution has not finished. Even if the start switch operation for the N+1st game is received just before the minimum playing time has elapsed from the start of the Nth reel rotation, the stage change effect will not be executed before the stop switch 13 operation becomes effective. If the UI image is displayed in a visible manner after the end of the game, the execution period of the stage change effect will be extremely short, and there is a risk that the player will miss the stage change effect. By configuring this, the execution period of the stage change performance can be guaranteed, so that the stage change performance can be appropriately executed so that the player does not miss it.

Furthermore, even if the operation of the start switch 12 for the N+1st game is received after the minimum playing time has elapsed from the start of rotation of the reels for the Nth game, the operation of the stop switch 13 for the N+1st game is It may be configured such that the execution of the stage change effect is completed and the UI image is visibly displayed before the stage change effect becomes effective. With this configuration, the stage change effect has finished when the operation of the stop switch 13 becomes effective, and the UI image is visible, allowing the player to properly understand the game situation. Therefore, the game can be played without any discomfort.

In addition, if the operation of the start switch 12 for the N+1st game is accepted after the minimum playing time has elapsed from the start of rotation of the reels for the Nth game, the stop switch 13 operation for the N+1st game is valid. It may be configured such that the execution of the stage change effect is not completed at the time when the stage change effect is reached. In this way, if the operation of the start switch 12 for the N+1-th game is accepted after the minimum playing time has elapsed, in other words, if the player is not in a hurry to proceed with the game, the start switch 12 for the N+1-th game is received. The player can pay more attention to the stage change performance by configuring the stage change performance to not be finished when the operation of the stop switch 13 becomes effective.

In addition, as the execution timing of the first stage change production, if it is executed based on the operation of the start switch 12 and ends with the passage of time, it is executed based on the operation of the start switch 12, and the predetermined stop operation (first stop , second stop, or third stop), it is executed based on a predetermined stop operation (first stop, second stop, or third stop), and ends as time passes. If so, it may be configured to have. In addition, the first stage change performance is executed based on the operation of the start switch 12 and ends with the passage of time, but the second stage change performance is executed based on the operation of the start switch 12, and a predetermined stop operation is performed. The execution timing may be configured to differ depending on the type of stage change performance, such as ending based on the first stop, second stop, or third stop.

Regarding UI images, while the demo screen is displayed, all UI images may be configured to be displayed in a visible manner, or UI image A may be configured to be invisible (not displayed or displayed more than the demo screen). UI image B (an image showing the number of credits) and UI image C (an image showing the number of payouts) may be displayed so as to be visible. With this configuration, the player can appropriately grasp the game situation regardless of whether or not the demo screen is being displayed.
Additionally, all UI images may be configured to be invisible while the demo screen is being displayed, or all UI images may be visible for a predetermined period while the demo screen is being displayed. Although displayed, all UI images may be configured to be invisible during a specific period different from a predetermined period during display of the demo screen. With this configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the display of the demo screen.

In addition, it is configured to be able to execute a production A in which the background image corresponding to the production stage becomes invisible (a production that ends in one game, or a continuous production that is executed over multiple games), and as a production stage. If the performance A is executed under the situation where the seaside stage is set, the predetermined timing after the end of the Nth game at which the execution of the performance A ends (the timing when the final stop operation is completed) , the timing when the final stop operation is performed and the processing related to the end of the game is completed, the timing when the bet related to the N+1st game is placed, the timing when the operation of the start switch 12 related to the N+1th game is accepted, etc.) The background image corresponding to the coast stage is displayed again without executing the stage change effect, and the background image is displayed again (if the background image is a moving image, the background image is displayed from the beginning and the effect A is executed. A configuration may be considered in which the background image is displayed from the continuation of the previously displayed background image.), an image indicating the name of the production stage may be displayed. Note that the image indicating the name of the performance stage may be displayed as a UI image, or may be configured to be displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) and then terminated without being used as a UI image. Note that when displaying the same background image again, the name of the production stage may be configured not to be outputted in audio from the speaker, or the name of the production stage may be configured to be outputted in audio from the speaker. .

Note that the stage change performance may be configured to be executed after the execution of the performance A is completed, and in this case, the stage change performance may be performed at a predetermined timing after the performance of the performance A (the timing at which the final stop operation is completed, the final stop operation The stage change performance is executed at the timing when the process related to the end of the game is completed, the timing when the bet related to the next game is placed, the timing when the operation of the start switch 12 related to the next game is accepted, etc.) , the stage change performance executed under other circumstances may be configured to have a different display mode. With this configuration, for example, when a player starts a new game and a stage change effect that can be executed after execution of effect A is executed in the first game, effect A will continue until the previous game. The situation of the game can be accurately grasped, such as being able to grasp what is being executed.

Furthermore, even if the image indicating the name of the current performance stage is not used as a UI image but is configured so that it is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) after the execution of a stage change performance and then is hidden, If it is decided that the stage change performance and the above-mentioned performance A will be executed in the game (in this case, performance A will be executed after the stage change performance is completed), the current performance stage The configuration may be such that the image indicating the name of is not displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to appropriately switch the effects.

In addition, a predetermined timing after the end of the last game of the advantageous section (a game that satisfies the end conditions of the advantageous section and becomes a normal section game from the next game) (the timing when the final stop operation is completed, the bet related to the next game) The stage change effect may be executed at the timing when the start switch 12 is operated (pressed) for the next game, etc. With this configuration, it is possible to make it clear that the advantageous section is transitioning to the normal section, and it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the advantageous section continues.

In addition, at a predetermined timing after the end of the last game in the normal section (a game that satisfies the transition conditions to the advantageous section and becomes a game in the advantageous section from the next game) (the timing when the final stop operation is completed, the bet related to the next game) The stage change effect may be executed at the timing when the start switch 12 is operated (pressed) for the next game, etc. With this configuration, it is possible to clearly indicate the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section, and it is possible to prevent the player from ending the game despite being in the advantageous section.

In addition, the production stages include a predetermined production stage that is set only in the normal section and a specific production stage that is set only in the advantageous section, and a situation where the predetermined production stage is set in the normal section. Below, when the transition conditions to the advantageous section are met and the transition is made to the advantageous section (the timing when the final stop operation is completed, the timing when the final stop operation is performed and the processing related to the end of the game is completed, the bet related to the next game is The stage change performance may be executed at the timing when the start switch 12 related to the next game is operated, etc.), and the stage change performance may be configured to move from a predetermined performance stage to a specific performance stage. With this configuration, if the player pays attention to the performance stage, he or she can easily understand whether or not the game has moved to the advantageous section.

In addition, the predetermined performance stage is configured so that it is set even when the power is cut off in a predetermined situation where it is an advantageous section and is in a non-AT state, and the power is restored without changing the settings. It may be configured such that a stage change performance is executed until a predetermined number of games (for example, two) are played, and the predetermined performance stage is shifted to a specific performance stage. In this embodiment, when the settings are changed, the game is configured to always start from the normal section, so the performance stage at the start of the game and the subsequent stages are different depending on whether the settings are changed or not. The flow of the game up to the execution of the stage change performance can be made similar to the previous one, and thereby it is possible to prevent a person playing the game from easily discovering whether or not the settings have been changed. In addition, in this embodiment, by configuring so that the transition condition to the advantageous section is satisfied when an average of a little less than two games are executed in the normal section, the timing at which the stage change effect is executed for the first time after the power is turned on is The configuration is such that the timing is almost the same when the settings are changed and when the settings are not changed.

Furthermore, the type of stage change performance is different (or the performance form of the stage change performance is different) between the stage change performance executed in the normal section game and the stage change performance executed in the advantageous section game. It's okay. With this configuration, it is possible to easily determine whether the stage change performance is a normal section or an advantageous section by visually recognizing the stage change effect.

Further, in a game in which a stage change performance is executed, the configuration may be such that performances other than the stage change performance are not executed. Furthermore, in a game in which a stage change performance is performed, the performance may be configured such that the performance based on the operation of the stop switch 13 is not performed except for the stage change performance (the performance not based on the stop operation may be performed). With this configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the stage change performance.

Furthermore, the stage change performance may be configured to include a stage change performance A that can be executed after the end of a predetermined continuous performance, and a stage change performance B that can be performed other than after the end of the predetermined continuous performance. In this case, whether or not stage change performance A can be executed is determined without being based on the internal lottery result, but whether or not stage change performance B can be executed is determined based on the internal lottery result. The ratio may be different). Note that the stage change performance A and the stage change performance B may be configured to have different performance modes, or may be configured to have the same performance mode.

Next, the volumes of the production stage BGM, stage change production BGM, error notification sound, etc. will be explained.
Note that in this embodiment, the volume level can be adjusted; when the volume level is high, the volume output from the speaker becomes relatively high, and when the volume level is low, the volume output from the speaker is relatively low. It is configured so that Although the following explanation assumes that the volume level is set to the maximum value, the same configuration may be used even if the volume level is set to a value other than the maximum value.
Note that it may be configured to have a sound whose volume output from the speaker depends on the volume level and a sound whose volume output from the speaker does not depend on the volume level. For example, the volume of the error notification sound that notifies the first error (recoverable error) depends on the volume level, but the volume of the error notification sound that notifies the second error (unrecoverable error) depends on the volume level. It may be configured not to do so. Note that the classification between the first error and the second error is not limited to whether the error is a recoverable error or an unrecoverable error, and can be set as appropriate.

First, during "non-AT", the system is configured so that at least a coast stage and a town stage can be set as the performance stages, and the performance stage BGM corresponding to the current performance stage is output from the speakers. There is. For example, in the coast stage, BGM during the coast stage is output from the speakers, and in the town stage, the BGM during the town stage is output from the speakers. The production stage BGM is a sound that is continuously (repeatedly) output during a period when sounds such as predetermined production sounds and predetermined error notification sounds are not output. Note that the production stage BGM may be configured to end output when a predetermined period of time (for example, one minute) has elapsed after the game ends or when a demo screen is displayed.

In addition, the configuration is such that stage change performance A or stage change performance B can be executed on either the coast stage or the town stage, and when the stage change performance is executed, the sound corresponding to the stage change performance is emitted from the speakers. It is configured to be output. Note that the volume of the sound of the stage change performance is configured so as not to depend on the performance stage before the stage change performance is executed. Note that the sound of the stage change performance may be configured to end output when a predetermined time (for example, 1 minute) has elapsed after the end of the game or when a demo screen is displayed.

In addition, during "non-AT", the maximum volume of the sound of the stage change production (stage change production A or stage change production B) is higher than the maximum volume of the production stage BGM (BGM during the coast stage or BGM during the town stage). It is also configured to be large. With this configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the stage change performance. In addition, if the configuration is such that stage change performance B is relatively more advantageous to the player than stage change performance A, the maximum volume of the sound when stage change performance A is executed is higher than the maximum volume of the sound when stage change performance B is executed. The maximum volume of the sound at the time may be configured to be louder, and by configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking that the stage change effect B has been executed.

In addition, during "non-AT", the average volume of the sound of the stage change production (stage change production A or stage change production B) is higher than the average volume of the production stage BGM (BGM during the coast stage or BGM during the town stage). It is also configured to be large. With this configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the stage change performance. In addition, if the configuration is such that stage change performance B is relatively more advantageous to the player than stage change performance A, the maximum volume of the sound when stage change performance A is executed is higher than the maximum volume of the sound when stage change performance B is executed. The maximum volume of the sound at the time may be configured to be louder, and by configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking that the stage change effect B has been executed.

Next, during "AT", the configuration is such that at least a volcano stage can be set as the production stage, and the production stage BGM corresponding to the current production stage is output from the speaker. For example, in the volcano stage, the volcano stage BGM is output from the speaker as the volcano stage BGM. Also, the configuration may be such that the stage change performance is performed even during "AT", and in this case, the maximum volume of the sound of the stage change performance is configured to be higher than the maximum volume of the production stage BGM. You may. With this configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the stage change performance in the same way as in "non-AT".

Of the sounds output during "AT", the loudest sound is the navigation voice output when pressing order navigation is executed (for example, the voice navigating the press order such as "Left!") or the character It may be configured so that the voice is a conversational voice.

Next, regarding the "error notification sound", a predetermined error (for example, an error related to the hopper) occurs (the gaming machine detects the error) and notifies the predetermined error regardless of the performance stage or game state. output when Note that when notifying an error, an image indicating the details of the error is displayed on the liquid crystal at the same (or substantially the same) timing as the output of the error notifying sound.

In this embodiment, the error background music and error voice are configured to be output as sounds during notification of a predetermined error. Note that the error voice is a voice that says something like "Please call a store clerk."

Further, regarding a predetermined error, the maximum volume of the error voice is higher than the maximum volume of the BGM during the error. If the maximum volume of the BGM during an error is higher, there is a risk that the player may not be able to accurately hear whether it is an error notification or a presentation. can be accurately communicated to players.

Further, regarding a predetermined error, the average volume of the error voice is higher than the average volume of the BGM during the error. If the average volume of the BGM during an error is higher, there is a risk that the player may not be able to accurately hear whether it is an error notification or a presentation. can be accurately communicated to players.

Note that although an error related to the hopper is exemplified as a predetermined error, this is just an example, and it may be applied to other errors such as an error related to the selector, or all errors including the first error and the second error. It may be applied to errors, and is configured such that at least one error satisfies the above configuration.

In addition, the maximum volume of the production stage BGM "during AT" is higher than the maximum volume of the production stage BGM "during non-AT", and the average volume of the production stage BGM "during AT" is The volume is higher than the average volume of the production stage BGM during "non-AT". In addition, the maximum volume of the BGM for the production stage "during AT" is higher than the maximum volume of the sound for the stage change production "during non-AT", and the maximum volume of the BGM for the production stage "during AT" is higher than the maximum volume of the sound for the stage change production "during non-AT". The volume is higher than the average volume of the sound of the stage change production "non-AT". With this configuration, the game can be played without spoiling the exhilarating feeling during AT.

In addition, the maximum volume of the production stage BGM during "AT" is higher than the maximum volume of the BGM during error, and the average volume of production stage BGM during "AT" is equal to the average volume of BGM during error. It's louder than the volume. In addition, the maximum volume of the production stage BGM during "AT" is higher than the maximum volume of the error voice, and the average volume of the production stage BGM during "AT" is the average volume of the error voice. It is larger than. With this configuration, if a predetermined error occurs during AT, the BGM during AT will be output at a louder volume than the sound during predetermined error notification after the predetermined error is cleared. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the BGM during AT from being difficult to hear, and it is possible to proceed with the game without losing the exhilarating feeling during AT.

In addition, the maximum volume of the production stage BGM during "Non-AT" is smaller than the maximum volume of the BGM during an error, and the average volume of the production stage BGM during "Non-AT" is the same as that of the BGM during an error. The volume is lower than average. In addition, the maximum volume of the production stage BGM during "Non-AT" is smaller than the maximum volume of the error voice, and the average volume of the production stage BGM during "Non-AT" is the average volume of the error voice. The volume is lower than the volume of In addition, the maximum volume of the sound of the stage change production "Non-AT" is smaller than the maximum volume of the BGM during an error, and the average volume of the sound of the stage change production "Non-AT" is The volume is lower than the average BGM volume during an error. In addition, the maximum volume of the sound of the stage change production "Non-AT" is smaller than the maximum volume of the error voice, and the average volume of the sound of the stage change production "Non-AT" is the error voice. The volume is lower than the average volume of medium voices. With this configuration, if a predetermined error occurs during non-AT, the predetermined error notification sound will be output at a louder volume than before the predetermined error notification. This can make it easier to notice that an error has occurred.

In addition, in this embodiment, by configuring the display priority of images related to the stage change performance to be higher than the display priority of the UI image, the UI image can be visually recognized during at least a part of the period during the stage change performance. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and by configuring the display priority of the image related to the stage change performance to be lower than the display priority of the UI image, the UI image can be configured to be visible even during the stage change performance. It's okay.
Further, it may be configured to perform a full-screen effect that is different from the stage change effect and in which a predetermined display is displayed on the entire surface of the liquid crystal. An example of a full-screen presentation is one in which the image of a predetermined character and the famous lines of the predetermined character are displayed on the entire LCD screen, suggesting that the player has won a so-called rare role such as the role of Cherry or the role of Watermelon. This may be executed when it is suggested that there is a possibility that advantageous benefits to the player, such as a transfer lottery to AT or addition of AT, may be provided. Note that the full-screen effect may be configured to include a plurality of types of full-screen effects. Furthermore, by configuring the display priority of images related to full-screen presentation to be higher than the display priority of UI images, it is also possible to configure the UI image so that it is not visible during at least part of the period during full-screen presentation. Alternatively, the display priority of images related to full-screen presentation may be configured to be lower than the display priority of UI images, so that the UI image can be viewed even during full-screen presentation.
Furthermore, the execution period of the stage change production (the time required from start to finish) may be configured to be longer than the execution period of the full screen production, or the execution period of the stage change production may be longer than the execution period of the full screen production. The period may be configured to be shorter than the execution period of the screen effect.

Furthermore, the relationship in display priority between images related to stage change effects and UI images, and the relationship in display priorities between images related to full-screen effects and UI images may be configured as follows.
(1) Display priority of images related to stage change production>Display priority of UI images and display priority of images related to full screen production>Display priority of UI images (that is, at least one display priority during stage change production) (The UI image is not visible during the entire period and at least part of the period during the full-screen presentation)
(2) Display priority of images related to stage change production>Display priority of UI images, and display priority of images related to full screen production<Display priority of UI images (that is, at least one display priority during stage change production) (The UI image is not visible during this period, but it is visible during the full-screen presentation)
(3) Display priority of images related to stage change production <Display priority of UI images and display priority of images related to full screen production> Display priority of UI images (that is, during stage change production, UI images is visible, but the UI image is not visible during at least part of the full-screen presentation)
(4) Display priority of images related to stage change effects < display priority of UI images, and display priority of images related to full screen effects < display priority of UI images (that is, during stage change effects and (UI images are visible during any screen presentation)
It should be noted that it may be configured so that one of the relationships (1) to (4) always exists regardless of the game situation, the type of stage change effect being executed, or the type of full screen effect. The configuration may be such that one of the relationships (1) to (4) is changed as appropriate depending on the game situation, the type of stage change effect to be executed, and the type of full screen effect.
With this configuration, each performance can be effectively drawn to the attention of the player.

In addition, if it is possible to play a game with a bet of 2 coins and a game with a bet of 3 coins (games with a bet of 2 coins have a lower ball payout rate than games with a bet of 3 coins), a stage change effect will be applied. may be executed in a 3-bet game, but may not be executed in a 2-bet game. With this configuration, since a game with a bet of two coins does not give the player a sense of expectation, it is possible to make the player realize that a game with a bet of three coins is more advantageous.

Also, if you enable games with 2 bets and games with 3 bets (games with 2 bets have a lower ball payout rate than games with 3 bets), the UI image , may be displayed in a 3-bet game, but may not be displayed in a 2-bet game. With this configuration, since a game with a two bet bet gives the player a sense of discomfort, it is possible to make the player realize that a game with a three bet bet is more advantageous.

Also, if you enable games with 2 bets and games with 3 bets (games with 2 bets have a lower ball payout rate than games with 3 bets), the UI image , it may be configured so that it can also be displayed in a 3-bet game and a 2-bet game. With this configuration, the same UI image as when playing with a 2-bet bet is displayed, so the frequency of presentations (when playing with a 2-bet bet) can be adjusted without making players aware of malfunctions in the gaming machine. In a game, a stage change effect is not executed, etc.), which does not give the player a sense of expectation, so it is more advantageous for the player to play with a 3-bet bet, and a game with a 2-bet bet is more advantageous for the player. This will help you recognize that it is not a malfunction.

<NEXT image display mode>
In this embodiment, the results of a predetermined lottery (a lottery to determine whether to transfer to AT, a lottery to determine whether to transfer to a chance zone, an AT additional lottery, an AT additional specialized zone (Win the AT additional lottery) When executing a continuous performance that is executed over multiple games as a performance that notifies you of whether or not to move to a period with a high probability of It is configured to be able to display an image (sometimes referred to as a NEXT image or a continuation image) indicating that the continuation of the performance will be executed. The display mode of the NEXT image will be described below.

FIG. 46 is a diagram showing an example of the flow of continuous effects in which NEXT images are displayed. In FIG. 46, the game progresses from "1" in the upper left to "7" in the lower right. If a result advantageous to the player is to be reported after ``7'', ``8'' is displayed, and if a result disadvantageous to the player is to be notified after ``7'', ``9'' is displayed. Further, "S" in the figure indicates the start switch 12, and "white circles" or "black circles" indicate the stop switch 13.

"1" in FIG. 46 indicates that the start switch 12 is operated (pressed) and the title of the continuous performance "Fight off the shark!" is displayed on the liquid crystal display, and the first game of the continuous performance is displayed. It has been started. Note that at this time, the stop switch 13 is displayed as a "black circle", indicating that the operation of the stop switch 13 is valid. Hereinafter, when the stop switch 13 is displayed as a "white circle", this indicates that the stop switch 13 has already been operated, and therefore the operation of the stop switch is invalid.

In "2" of FIG. 46, a first stop operation is performed on the stop switch 13, and an effect in which a shark swims from right to left is displayed as an effect corresponding to the first stop operation.

At "3" in FIG. 46, a second stop operation is performed on the stop switch 13, and an effect in which a shark swims from left to right is displayed as an effect corresponding to the second stop operation.

At "4" in FIG. 46, a third stop operation is performed on the stop switch 13, and a rippling effect is displayed as an effect corresponding to the third stop operation. Here, since the first game of the continuous performance is completed and the continuation of the continuous performance is executed by operating the start switch 12 related to the next game, the characters "NEXT" are displayed as the NEXT image at the bottom right of the liquid crystal display. .

In addition, in "4" of FIG. 46, the display of "NEXT" is displayed at the lower right of the liquid crystal display after receiving the third stop operation, but as the display mode of "NEXT", the third stop operation is not displayed. After acceptance, the word "NEXT" will be displayed at the bottom left of the LCD, and the word "NEXT" will slide from the bottom left of the LCD to the bottom right of the LCD, and when it moves to the bottom right of the LCD, "NEXT" will be displayed. The display mode may be such that the characters stop. Also, in this configuration, when the character "NEXT" is displayed sliding from the bottom left to the bottom right of the LCD (while the character "NEXT" is moving) is lower in visibility than when it is stopped and displayed at the bottom right of the liquid crystal display (the text is displayed fainter, a different image than the "NEXT" text is displayed, or the text is displayed more clearly than the "NEXT" text). The display may be configured to be displayed in a manner such as displaying an effect image with a high display priority. Generally, the player progresses through the game in the order of start switch 12 → left reel 8a → middle reel 8b → right reel 8c, so the flow until the NEXT image is displayed can be the same as the game progress. It can make the process feel smooth. In addition, the NEXT image is displayed when a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds is an example, but a different time may be set depending on the continuous effect) has elapsed since the effect was executed in response to the reception of the third stop operation. It is configured like this.

At "5" in FIG. 46, the start switch 12 is operated and the second game of the continuous performance is started. Here, a scene in which a character on a boat confronts a shark is displayed.

At "6" in FIG. 46, the first stop operation is performed on the stop switch 13, and an effect in which a shark attacks is displayed as an effect corresponding to the first stop operation.

"7" in FIG. 46 indicates that the second stop operation is performed on the stop switch 13, and the display area of the liquid crystal is divided into two as effects in response to the second stop operation, one in which the character attacks with a spear, and the other in which the shark attacks. The upcoming performance is displayed.

"8" and "9" in FIG. 46 indicate that the third stop operation is performed on the stop switch 13, and images related to the results of the continuous performance (the success or failure of a predetermined lottery) are displayed as a performance corresponding to the third stop operation. has been done. "8" in Figure 46 is a case where you are notified that you have won a predetermined lottery, and the words "Repel!" and a character image are displayed, and "9" in Figure 46 is a notification that you have won a predetermined lottery. This is a case to notify that you have not won, and the words "defeat...?" and an image of a shark are displayed.

In addition, in FIG. 46, the "NEXT" image is displayed at the bottom right of the LCD as shown in "4" in FIG. 46, and the "Repel!" image is displayed at the bottom left of the LCD as shown in "8" in FIG. , "Defeat...?" images, such as "9" in FIG. 46, are configured to be displayed in different display areas of the liquid crystal, such that they are displayed at the upper left of the liquid crystal. With this configuration, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the images have different meanings.

In addition, in multiple different consecutive performances, when notifying that you have won a predetermined lottery for the first consecutive performance and the second consecutive performance, the images are displayed in different formats (different characters, different display positions, etc.) The NEXT images of the first continuous effect and the second continuous effect may be configured to have the same display mode. For example, if you want to notify that you have won a predetermined lottery as a result of the first continuous performance, "Repel" will be displayed at the bottom left of the LCD, and you will be notified that you have won a predetermined lottery as a result of the second consecutive performance. In this case, the display mode is such that "WIN" is displayed in the upper right corner of the liquid crystal display, and the display mode of the NEXT images of the first continuous performance and the second continuous performance is considered to be the same. In the case of such a display mode, the player can easily recognize that the NEXT image indicates the continuation of the continuous performance between different continuous performances.

Further, although FIG. 46 shows an example in which the effect changes each time the player performs a stop operation, the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect may be configured so that the effect progresses as time elapses after the start switch 12 is operated and the game starts. It's okay. For example, even if no stop operation is performed on the stop switch 13 after "1" in FIG. 46, the effect may proceed as time passes, and the effect may proceed until "4" in FIG. 46.

<BGM during continuous performance>
Next, BGM output during the continuous performance will be explained based on the continuous performance described with reference to FIG. 46. The flow of the continuous performance in FIG. 46 is the same as described above, so a description thereof will be omitted.

At the time indicated by "1" in FIG. 46 (when the start switch 12 is operated and the first game of the continuous performance starts), predetermined continuous performance BGM corresponding to the continuous performance is output. In addition, at the time of "1" in FIG. 46, the BGM corresponding to the start of the continuous performance is output, and at the timing of "2" in FIG. 46 (the timing when the first stop operation is performed on the stop switch 1) BGM may be output during the presentation.

Thereafter, the game progresses through the first stop operation, the second stop operation, and the third stop operation (from "2" to "4" in FIG. 46), but the BGM continues to be output during the continuous performance. Here, after the third stop operation is performed, the next game start operation (inserting the first medal, operating the 1 bet switch, operating the MAX bet switch, operating the start switch 12, etc.) is performed. If not, the effect displayed in response to the third stop operation (the effect displayed in the third stop operation is looped in a situation where the effect cannot proceed any further) and the NEXT image remain displayed. The BGM during the continuous performance is also continuously output (if the BGM during the continuous performance is played to the end, it returns to the beginning and is played in a loop). By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from leaving the game in the middle of a continuous performance in which there is a possibility of producing an advantageous result. Furthermore, when a player is away from his/her seat for a restroom break or the like, it is possible to prevent another player from easily taking his or her seat.

In addition, if the demo screen is displayed after a predetermined period of time (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed without any bet operation or settlement operation after the third stop operation has been performed and all rotations have been stopped, the demo screen will be displayed. You can stop the output of the BGM that is being played continuously when the demo screen is displayed and instead output the BGM that is on the demo screen, or you can stop the output of the BGM that is being played continuously when the demo screen is displayed. It may be silent. In addition, if the sub switch 20 is operated at a predetermined timing before a predetermined period of time (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed after the third stop operation is performed and the entire rotating drum is stopped, and the menu screen is displayed, the menu screen When is displayed, you can stop the output of BGM that is being played continuously and output the BGM on the menu screen instead, or you can stop the output of BGM that is being played continuously when the menu screen is displayed. You can also set it to silent.

In addition, even if the demo screen is displayed immediately after the third stop operation is performed and the payment operation is performed after all the drums have stopped, the BGM during the continuous performance will be output when the demo screen is displayed. It may be possible to stop the BGM in the demo screen and output the BGM instead, or it may be possible to stop outputting the BGM in the continuous performance when the demo screen is displayed to make it silent.

Additionally, the demo screen may be configured so that it is not displayed during the continuous performance, in which case the third stop operation is performed and no bet operation or settlement operation is performed after the third stop operation is performed and the payout operation is not performed for a predetermined period of time. After (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed, the volume of the BGM during the continuous presentation may be lowered, or the volume of the BGM during the continuous presentation may be made silent.

Furthermore, the menu screen may not be displayed even if the sub-switch 20 is operated during continuous performance. In this case, the third stop operation is performed and the sub-switch 20 is operated after all the rotation drums have stopped. However, the menu screen will not be displayed, and the BGM that is currently being played will continue to be output. Thereafter, the demo screen may be displayed when a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed since the full rotation drum has stopped, or the demo screen may not be displayed.

Subsequently, at timing "5" in FIG. 46, the start switch 12 is operated to start the second game of the continuous performance, but at this time as well, the BGM continues to be output during the continuous performance.

After that, the game progresses through the first stop operation, the second stop operation (from "6" to "7" in Figure 46) (the output of BGM continues during the continuous performance), and the third stop operation (from "6" to "7" in Figure 46). 46 "8" or "9") is performed, and when an image related to the result of the continuous performance (sometimes referred to as a result image) is displayed as a performance in response to the third stop operation, the BGM during the continuous performance is displayed. The output is stopped, and BGM or SE (sound effects) related to the result of the continuous performance is output. Note that once the BGM or SE related to the result of continuous performance is output, it is not looped, and the output is ended when the playback time has elapsed. In addition, as BGM or SE related to the results of the continuous performance, when a predetermined lottery is won, BGM or SE indicating the win (for example, an SE with a lively, bright, or flashy impression) is output, and When the player does not win, the system is configured to output BGM or SE (for example, an SE with a sad, dark, or plain impression) indicating that the winner is not a winner, and if the same volume level is set, the SE that indicates a winner. The volume of the SE may be higher than the volume of the SE indicating non-winning.

In this way, during continuous presentation, the BGM is continuously output while the NEXT image is being displayed, but the BGM is stopped while images related to the results of the continuous presentation are being displayed. . When the result of a continuous performance is displayed in this way, it is possible to clearly notify that this is the final game of the continuous performance by making the game silent, unlike in the middle of the continuous performance.

<Display mode of images related to the NEXT image and the results of continuous production>
Next, the display mode of the NEXT image of each continuous effect and the image related to the result of the continuous effect will be explained using FIG. 47.

FIG. 47 is a diagram showing the flow of a continuous performance (sometimes referred to as a second continuous performance) that is different from the continuous performance shown in FIG. 46 (sometimes referred to as a first continuous performance). In FIG. 47, the game progresses from "1" in the upper left to "7" in the lower right. If a result advantageous to the player is to be reported after ``7'', ``8'' is displayed, and if a result disadvantageous to the player is to be notified after ``7'', ``9'' is displayed. Further, "S" in the figure indicates the start switch 12, and "white circles" or "black circles" indicate the stop switch 13.

At "1" in FIG. 47, the start switch 12 is operated (pressed), and the title of the continuous effect "Let the flowers bloom!" is displayed on the LCD, and the first game of the continuous effect is displayed. It has been started. Note that at this time, the stop switch 13 is displayed as a "black circle", indicating that the operation of the stop switch 13 is valid. Hereinafter, when the stop switch 13 is displayed as a "white circle", this indicates that the stop switch 13 has already been operated, and therefore the operation of the stop switch is invalid.

In "2" of FIG. 47, the first stop operation on the stop switch 13 has been performed, and an image of the ground with no flowers in bloom is displayed as an effect corresponding to the first stop operation.

At "3" in FIG. 47, a second stop operation is performed on the stop switch 13, and an effect in which flower buds are appearing is displayed as an effect corresponding to the second stop operation.

At "4" in FIG. 47, a third stop operation is performed on the stop switch 13, and an effect in which flowers do not bloom and clouds flow is displayed as an effect corresponding to the third stop operation. Here, since the first game of the continuous performance is completed and the continuation of the continuous performance is executed by operating the start switch 12 related to the next game, the characters "NEXT" are displayed as the NEXT image at the bottom right of the liquid crystal display. .

In addition, in "4" of FIG. 47, the display of "NEXT" is displayed at the lower right of the liquid crystal display after receiving the third stop operation, but as the display mode of "NEXT", the display of "NEXT" is displayed when the third stop operation is accepted. After acceptance, the word "NEXT" will be displayed at the bottom left of the LCD, and the word "NEXT" will slide from the bottom left of the LCD to the bottom right of the LCD, and when it moves to the bottom right of the LCD, "NEXT" will be displayed. The display mode may be such that the characters stop. Also, in this configuration, when the character "NEXT" is displayed sliding from the bottom left to the bottom right of the LCD (while the character "NEXT" is moving) is lower in visibility than when it is stopped and displayed at the bottom right of the liquid crystal display (the text is displayed fainter, a different image than the "NEXT" text is displayed, or the text is displayed more clearly than the "NEXT" text). The display may be configured to be displayed in a manner such as displaying an effect image with a high display priority. Generally, the player progresses through the game in the order of start switch 12 → left reel 8a → middle reel 8b → right reel 8c, so the flow until the NEXT image is displayed can be the same as the game progress. It can make the process feel smooth. In addition, the NEXT image is displayed when a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds is an example, but a different time may be set depending on the continuous effect) has elapsed since the effect was executed in response to the reception of the third stop operation. It is configured like this.

At "5" in FIG. 47, the start switch 12 is operated and the second game of the continuous performance is started. Here, the display shows rain clouds flowing without flowers blooming.

At "6" in FIG. 47, the first stop operation has been performed on the stop switch 13, and an effect in which flowers are not blooming and it is raining is displayed as an effect in response to the first stop operation.

At "7" in FIG. 47, a second stop operation is performed on the stop switch 13, and an effect in which flowers do not bloom and it is raining with thunder is displayed as an effect in response to the second stop operation.

"8" and "9" in FIG. 47 indicate that the third stop operation is performed on the stop switch 13, and images related to the results of the continuous performance (the success or failure of a predetermined lottery) are displayed as a performance corresponding to the third stop operation. has been done. "8" in FIG. 47 is a notification that you have won a predetermined lottery, and the words "Blooming!" and an image of blooming flowers are displayed, and "9" in FIG. 47 is a notification that you have won a predetermined lottery. This is a case of notifying that the person has not won the lottery, and the words "Unfortunate!?" and an image of a flower bud are displayed.

Here, when comparing the first continuous performance and the second continuous performance, the display format of the NEXT image is configured to be the same, but the display format of the image related to the result of the continuous performance (in the first continuous performance, "Repel") !” or “defeat…?”, and in the second continuous performance, “blooming!” or “disappointing!?” images) are configured to be different.

Games that notify the results of continuous performances often execute performances that are important for gaming machines (so-called selling points of gaming machines), so the consecutive performances that notify the results of consecutive performances are Interest can be improved by changing the display mode of images related to the results of the performance.

Also, although not shown, in the game following the game in which the result of the continuous performance was announced, if it is announced that the winner has been won in a predetermined lottery, there will be a mark clearly indicating that the result has been won. 1. After a specific effect (for example, displaying "Bonus Confirmed" or "Congratulations!", lighting a designated lamp on the gaming machine in rainbow colors, etc.) is performed, and it is announced that the designated lottery has not been won. If so, a second specific effect (for example, darkening the liquid crystal display, performing a stage change effect, etc.) indicating that the continuous effect has ended in failure is performed, and the background image of the normal game state is displayed. Here, the first specific presentation is configured to give a brighter impression than the second specific presentation.

Further, in FIGS. 46 and 47, the first continuous performance and the second continuous performance are each executed over two games, and the NEXT image is displayed once each, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the first continuous performance is configured to be executed over a maximum of three games, and the NEXT image is displayed a total of two times: after the third stop operation of the first game and after the third stop operation of the second game. You may. That is, the NEXT image may be displayed at most twice in the first continuous effect, and the NEXT image may be displayed once in the second continuous effect.

When configured in this way, the number of times the NEXT image is displayed is greater in the first continuous effect than in the second continuous effect, and the expectation of winning a predetermined lottery is higher.

Furthermore, in the first continuous performance, the expectation level of winning a predetermined lottery is higher when the NEXT image is displayed twice than when the NEXT image is displayed once.

In this way, the system is configured such that the greater the number of times the NEXT image is displayed, the higher the expectation of winning a predetermined lottery. With this configuration, when the NEXT image is displayed, not only the performance continues, but also the anticipation of continuous performance can be aroused. In addition, in the NEXT image when the NEXT image is displayed multiple times, the first NEXT image and the second NEXT image may be the same NEXT image, or the second NEXT image may be the same as the first NEXT image. It may be larger than the image, and the first NEXT image and the second NEXT image may have different colors for the NEXT character and different surrounding colors.

<Display priority of NEXT image and UI image>
Further, when configured to display the above-mentioned UI image, the UI image displayed at the lower right of the liquid crystal and the NEXT image may be displayed overlappingly. In this case, the display priority of the NEXT image is configured to be higher than the display priority of the UI image. In this way, by emphasizing the display regarding continuous performances that have an impact on the player's profits, it is possible to concentrate the results of the continuous performances on the player.

Further, the display priority of the NEXT image may be configured to be lower than the display priority of the UI image. With this configuration, the player can appropriately understand the game situation even during continuous performance.
Furthermore, the display areas for the NEXT image and the UI image may be different display areas so that the images are not displayed overlappingly. With this configuration, the player can appropriately grasp both the progress of the continuous performance and the game situation.

<Display area of telop and NEXT image during continuous production>
Next, the display area of the telop and NEXT image during continuous presentation will be explained.

In this embodiment, a telop (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a telop display, telop effect, subtitle, subtitle effect, or textual information) refers to a character's dialogue or narration that is displayed in text according to the effect displayed on the liquid crystal display. It refers to the performance.

In the continuous performance shown in FIG. 46 or 47, a telop related to the continuous performance may be displayed during the continuous performance. The captions are displayed in accordance with the progress of the continuous performance, which changes over time. In addition, when the content of the progress of the continuous performance changes according to the operation of the start switch 12 or the stop operation, a telop may also be displayed according to the operation of the start switch 12 or the stop operation.

Further, the telop is displayed in a lower display area within the liquid crystal, and the size of the telop display area varies depending on the number of characters displayed. Further, the telop display area is configured so that a NEXT image display area is located in a straight line in the left and right direction.

Here, the telop display and the NEXT image are configured so that their display areas do not overlap. Specifically, in a game in which a NEXT image is displayed during a continuous performance, a telop is displayed with a relatively shorter number of characters than in a game in a continuous performance in which a NEXT image is not displayed, and is configured so as not to overlap with the NEXT image. On the other hand, although not shown, in a game where the result of a continuous performance is announced, since the NEXT image is not displayed, the telop is configured to be displayed with a relatively longer number of characters than in a game during a continuous performance in which the NEXT image is displayed. It's okay. Furthermore, when the number of characters in the telop is large, the telop may be displayed over multiple lines so that the display area of the next image and the telop do not overlap. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from confusing the NEXT image and the telop.

In FIG. 48, the telop consists of four characters "What?" and does not overlap with the NEXT image, so it is possible to prevent the player from confusing the NEXT image and the telop.

Note that when the NEXT image and the telop are displayed at the same time, the NEXT image may be configured to be displayed with an effect at a predetermined period, while the telop may be configured to be a fixed image without any effect. good. With this configuration, it is possible to further prevent the player from confusing the NEXT image and the telop.

Further, when displaying a telop in a game in which a NEXT image is displayed, the NEXT image may be configured to be displayed at a predetermined timing after the telop is displayed.

Further, the display of the NEXT image and the telop may be configured so that the display does not end with the passage of time. When configured in this way, during continuous production, the game will start from a predetermined timing after the end of the game (timing when the third stop operation is received, timing when all reels have stopped, timing when the payout process is finished, etc.) for a predetermined period of time ( For example, the screen is configured so that it does not shift to the demo screen even after a minute (for example, 1 minute) has elapsed, and the NEXT image and caption continue to be displayed until the next game start operation (bet operation, operation of the start switch 12, etc.) is performed. You may. In addition, even during continuous performance, the system is configured to shift to the demo screen when a predetermined time elapses from a predetermined timing after the game ends, and the NEXT image and subtitles continue to be displayed until the timing of switching to the demo screen. The display of the NEXT image and the telop may be terminated at the timing of transition to . With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from confusing the NEXT image and the telop, and it is possible to make it easier to understand the game situation.

Furthermore, if the number of characters in the telop displayed in a game in which the NEXT image is displayed is large, the telop may be displayed first, and the NEXT image may be displayed after the telop display is finished. With this configuration, the period in which the NEXT image is displayed and the period in which the telop is displayed can be made different, so both the NEXT image and the telop can be displayed clearly without reducing visibility. can be displayed.

Note that the display area of the NEXT image and the display area of the caption may be configured to overlap, but in this case, it is recommended to configure the display priority of the NEXT image to be higher than the display priority of the caption. suitable. With this configuration, the player can appropriately understand that the continuous performance will continue in the next game as well.

<Display mode until the next image is displayed>
Next, the flow up to displaying the NEXT image will be described using FIG. 49.
In Figure 49, when displaying the NEXT image, a trajectory of something that cannot be recognized as a character (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a slide image) moving from the lower left to the lower right of the liquid crystal is displayed, and the slide image is displayed to the right of the liquid crystal. This shows a case where the NEXT image is displayed when moving downward. Note that the slide images may be images such as "1" to "4" in FIG. 49 in which neither characters nor objects can be recognized ("1" to "4" in FIG. 49 are images showing afterimages), Images of specific objects other than characters such as "5" to "8" in FIG. 49 ("5" to "8" in FIG. 49 are images of baseball balls) may also be used.

In "1" or "5" in FIG. 49, in a game where the NEXT image is displayed, after the third stop operation on the stop switch 13 is accepted, after time t1 has elapsed since the third stop operation on the stop switch 13, or when the start switch 12 is After time t1 has elapsed since the operation, a slide image is displayed at the lower left of the liquid crystal display.

In "2" or "6" of FIG. 49, in a game in which the NEXT image is displayed, after the time t2 has elapsed since the third stop operation on the stop switch 13, or after the time t2 has elapsed since the start switch 12 was operated, the liquid crystal display The slide image has moved to near the center of the bottom. Note that t2>t1.

In "3" or "7" of FIG. 49, in a game where the NEXT image is displayed, after time t3 has elapsed since the third stop operation on the stop switch 13, or after time t3 has elapsed since the start switch 12 was operated, the liquid crystal display The slide image has moved to the bottom right of the page. Note that t3>t2.

In "4" or "8" of FIG. 49, in a game in which the NEXT image is displayed, after time t4 has elapsed since the third stop operation on the stop switch 13, or after time t4 has elapsed since the start switch 12 was operated, the slide The display of the image has ended, and the NEXT image is displayed at the bottom right of the liquid crystal display. Note that t4>t3.

By moving the slide image from the lower left to the lower right of the liquid crystal display in this way, it is possible to attract the player's attention, so that the player can recognize the NEXT image after the slide image is displayed.

Further, the display area of the slide image and the display area of the push order navigation image may be configured to at least partially overlap. Further, the display area of the NEXT image and the display area of the push order navigation may be configured to at least partially overlap. However, in this case, the configuration is such that the slide image and the NEXT image are displayed after the third stop operation.

With this configuration, when the third stop operation is performed, the push order navigation image ends displaying, so the push order navigation image and the slide image, or the push order navigation image and the NEXT image are displayed overlappingly. All of the push order navigation images, slide images, and NEXT images can be displayed without reducing visibility.

Note that the slide images and captions are configured so that at least some of the display areas overlap and may be displayed overlappingly at the same time, but depending on the importance of the displayed content, The display priority of slide images may be set higher than the display priority of telops, or conversely, the display priority of telops may be set higher than the display priority of slide images.

In addition, images related to the NEXT image and the results of continuous effects (for example, the images of "Repulse!" and "Defeat...?" in Figure 46, and the images of "Blooming!" and "Unfortunate!?" in Figure 47, etc.) Regarding the timing of ending the display, the display is configured so as not to end depending on the lapse of time after both the NEXT image and the images related to the results of the continuous performance are displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking important information for understanding the progress of the continuous performance.

Note that the NEXT image shows bet operations related to the next game (including bet operations by operating the MAX bet switch 18, bet operations by operating the 1 bet switch 19, and bet operations by inserting medals). The display is configured so that the display does not end even if the game is played, but can end at the timing when the start switch 12 is operated as the start operation for the next game, and the image related to the result of the continuous performance is displayed according to the bet operation related to the next game. It may be configured so that the display can be ended. In this way, by not ending the display of the NEXT image by a bet operation, it is possible to emphasize that the continuous performance will continue in the next game.

Further, the display areas of the NEXT image and images related to the results of continuous effects are configured to be different. For example, as shown in FIG. 46, the NEXT image is displayed in a predetermined display area at the bottom right of the liquid crystal, and images related to the results of continuous effects are displayed in a predetermined display area at the bottom left or top left of the liquid crystal. ing. In this way, by varying the display position depending on the displayed image, it is possible to appropriately guide the player's viewpoint and make him or her focus on the entire liquid crystal.

Further, as described above, the NEXT image and the image related to the result of the continuous performance may be configured to be displayed according to the elapse of time after the start switch 12 is operated as the start operation of the game, The display may be configured to be displayed based on the elapsed time since the third stop operation (sometimes referred to as the final stop operation) is performed.

Here, the operation of the start switch 12 or the third stop operation of the stop switch 13 is longer than the time (t1) from the operation of the start switch 12 or the third stop operation of the stop switch 13 until the NEXT image is displayed. It is designed so that the time (t2) from when the stop operation is performed until the image related to the result of the continuous performance is displayed is longer.

Specifically, (1) the time from the start switch 12 is operated until the image related to the result of the continuous production is displayed is longer than the time from the start switch 12 is operated until the NEXT image is displayed. (2) The image related to the result of the continuous performance is displayed after the third stop operation is performed, rather than the time from the third stop operation until the NEXT image is displayed. (3) The image related to the result of the continuous performance after the third stop operation is performed is designed to be longer than the time from the start switch 12 is operated until the NEXT image is displayed. (4) It is designed so that the time from when the start switch 12 is operated is longer than the time from when the 3rd stop operation is performed until the NEXT image is displayed. It is designed to take longer to display images related to results.

With this configuration, it is possible to create a sense of anticipation until images related to the results of the continuous performance are displayed.

Further, as described above, the NEXT image is first displayed at the lower left of the liquid crystal, then moves to the lower right of the liquid crystal, and when it moves to the lower right of the liquid crystal, it stops there and is displayed. In other words, the NEXT image is configured such that the position where the display starts (the display area where the display starts) and the position where the display ends (the display area where the display ends) are different. On the other hand, images related to the results of continuous presentation are displayed without moving from the time the display starts until the end. In other words, the images related to the results of the continuous performance are configured such that the display start position and the display end position are the same. In this way, by displaying the NEXT image while moving, it is possible to effectively convey to the player that the continuous performance will continue in the next game. In addition, by displaying images related to the results of the continuous performance without moving the display position, it is possible to draw attention to the results of the continuous performance.

<Navi image>
Next, the navigation image in this embodiment will be explained. Note that, although the push order navigation image (sometimes referred to as stop operation information) will be described here, it is not limited to the push order navigation image, and may be applied to the above-mentioned push order navigation image and operation mode navigation image. .

In this embodiment, for example, in a game where the push order bell is won as a result of an internal lottery during AT, an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (such as giving the maximum amount of game media that can be acquired in the game) is provided. Information that suggests information can be displayed on the LCD as a navigation image when pressed. Specifically, it is possible to notify six different pressing orders using the numbers "1", "2", and "3", with "1" indicating the stop switch operated as the first stop operation, "2" indicates the stop button operated as the second stop operation, and "3" indicates the stop button operated as the third stop operation.

In addition, press the first stop operation or the third stop operation with two options (should you operate the stop switch at positions 1 to 10 of the reels, or press the stop switch at positions 11 to 20 of the reels? For example, it is possible to notify whether to operate (for example, either the blue 7 symbol image or the red 7 symbol image together with the push order navigation image), and by multiplying it with the 6 choices of the push order, it is possible to notify 12 different operation modes. It may be configured as follows. In addition, the push order navigation image displayed on the left side of the liquid crystal corresponds to the left reel 8a, and the push order navigation image displayed near the center of the liquid crystal corresponds to the middle reel 8b, and is displayed on the right side of the liquid crystal. The push order navigation image shown corresponds to the right reel 8c. For example, when "123" is displayed as the push order navigation image, it indicates the push order for operating the stop switches corresponding to the left reel 8a, middle reel 8b, and right reel 8c in that order. In this embodiment, a part of the push order navigation image as in "1" is referred to as a "push order navigation image", and the entire push order navigation image as in "123" is referred to as a "push order navigation image". It is sometimes called.

<Aspects of the push order navigation image>
FIG. 50 is a diagram showing an example of the mode of the push order navigation image in this embodiment. In FIG. 50, the push order navigation image related to the first stop operation will be explained as an example, but the second stop operation and the third stop operation are similarly configured.

The push order navigation image is composed of a "navigation number image" and a "navigation background image", and the display modes of the push order navigation image are "normal mode", "emphasis mode", "failure mode", and "success mode". It is configured to have at least four of the following.

The navigation number image is an image of numbers indicating the order of pressing. The navigation background image is a decorative image around the numbers indicating the order of presses, or an image showing an effect around the numbers indicating the order of presses.

First, <1> in FIG. 50 is a push order navigation image in a normal mode, and a push order navigation image corresponding to a stop switch that should not be operated at present is displayed in a normal mode. Note that the configuration is such that the audio corresponding to the push order navigation image displayed in the normal mode is not output. In addition, among the press order navigation images in the normal mode, the press order navigation images corresponding to the stop switch to be operated next and the press order navigation images corresponding to the stop switch to be operated last are displayed separately. Good too. In this case, the push order navigation image corresponding to the stop switch to be operated next is displayed larger than the push order navigation image corresponding to the stop switch to be operated last, and the push order navigation image corresponding to the stop switch to be operated currently is displayed. A possible mode is to display the image smaller than the forward navigation image.

Next, <2> in FIG. 50 is a push order navigation image in an emphasized mode, in which a push order navigation image corresponding to the stop switch to be operated currently is displayed in an emphasized mode. Note that the speaker S is configured to output audio corresponding to the push order navigation image displayed in an emphasized manner. For example, at the timing when the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a should be operated, a voice saying "Left!" will be output. In addition, the push order navigation image in the emphasis mode has at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" larger than the push order navigation image in the normal mode, so that it is easier for the player to perform the operations. The system is configured to visually notify the user of the stop switch that should be used. Furthermore, in addition to the size, by displaying the push order navigation image in the highlighted mode brighter than the push order navigation image in the normal mode, or displaying it in a different color or font from the normal mode, it is possible to The stop switch may be notified visually and easily.

Next, <3> in FIG. 50 is a push order navigation image in a successful mode, and when the stop switch to be operated currently is operated (the stop switch corresponding to the push order navigation image currently displayed in an emphasized mode is (operated), the push order navigation image that was displayed in an emphasized manner is displayed in a successful manner. That is, when the stop switch is operated in the correct operation mode, the press order navigation image displayed in an emphasized mode changes to a success mode. Note that when the stop switch to be operated currently is operated and the push order navigation image is displayed in a successful manner, a sound corresponding to the next push order is output (for example, when the stop switch corresponding to the next middle reel 8b (If the stop switch is to be operated, a voice saying "Inside" is output from the speaker S), and a press order navigation image corresponding to the stop switch to be operated next is displayed in an emphasized manner. Note that the success mode push order navigation image is configured to end displaying after being displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds).

Further, when the stop switch is operated in a correct manner, a sound effect or voice (sometimes referred to as a success sound) indicating that the pressing order is correct may be configured to be output from the speaker S. With this configuration, the player can be made to recognize that the stop switch has been operated in a correct manner not only visually but also aurally.

Further, the push order navigation image in the successful mode is configured such that at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is larger than the push order navigation image in the normal mode. Note that the push order navigation image in the emphasis mode and the push order navigation image in the success mode are configured such that both the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" have approximately the same size.

Next, <4> in FIG. 50 is a push order navigation image in the failure mode. When a stop switch that should not be operated at present is operated (the stop switch corresponding to the push order navigation image displayed in the normal mode is (operated), all currently displayed push order navigation images are displayed in a failed manner. That is, if the stop switch is operated in an incorrect operation mode, all the currently displayed push order navigation images change to a failure mode. In addition, if a stop switch that should not be operated at the moment is operated and the push order navigation image is displayed as a failure, a voice indicating that the push order was incorrect (for example, a voice saying "What are you doing?") will be displayed. The speaker S may be configured to output a sound (sometimes referred to as a failure sound), or may be configured so that a sound indicating that the pressing order is incorrect is not output. Note that the push order navigation image in the failure mode is configured to end the display after being displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.3 seconds). In addition, if a stop switch that should not be operated at the moment is operated, the display of all push order navigation images is immediately ended (in a shorter time than a predetermined time) without displaying the push order navigation images of the failure mode. It may be configured as follows.

In addition, when a stop switch that should not be operated at the moment is operated and all the currently displayed push order navigation images are displayed in a failed state, the size of the push order navigation images will be the same size as before the stop operation. It is configured to remain as it is. In other words, the push order navigation image that was displayed in an emphasized manner before the stop operation is changed to a push order navigation image that is displayed in a failed manner due to the size of the emphasis aspect, and the press order navigation image that was displayed in a normal manner before the stop operation is The image is configured so that the push order navigation image of the failure mode is displayed in the size of the normal mode.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the time from receiving the operation of the stop switch 13 to ending the display of the push order navigation image of the success mode is longer than the time from receiving the operation of the stop switch 13 to ending the display of the push order navigation image of the failure mode. It is configured to take longer than the time it takes to finish displaying the image.

With this configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of superiority through success, and in the event of a failure, it is difficult for surrounding players to notice that the player has failed in the push order, thereby reducing the interest in the game. can be improved.

Furthermore, it may be configured to display the push order navigation images in all modes, including normal mode, emphasis mode, success mode, and failure mode, with effects, or to display effects on the push order navigation images in at least one mode. It may also be configured to be displayed together.

Further, the configuration may be such that the push order navigation images in all modes, such as normal mode, emphasis mode, success mode, and failure mode, are displayed as moving images with movement, or the push order navigation images in all modes are displayed as static images. The configuration may be such that it is displayed as an image, or the push order navigation image in at least one aspect may be displayed as a moving image, and the push order navigation image in other aspects may be displayed as a still image.

In addition, when the start switch 12 is operated to start the game, the display of all push order navigation images starts in the normal manner, and then the stop switch that should be operated first is activated at the timing when the stop switch operation becomes effective. The push order navigation image corresponding to (the first stop operation) may be displayed in an emphasized manner. Furthermore, when the start switch is operated to start a game, the display of the push order navigation image corresponding to the stop switch to be operated first is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the display of other push order navigation images is started in a normal manner. However, from the time the display starts until the stop switch operation becomes effective, all push order navigation images are displayed as static images, and at the timing when the stop switch operation becomes effective, all push order navigation images are displayed as static images. The image may be displayed as a moving image with movement.

With this configuration, it becomes easier for the player to visually recognize that the operation of the stop switch has become effective, and it is possible to prevent mistakes in the order of pressing. In this way, at the timing when the stop switch operation becomes effective, the push order navigation image corresponding to the first stop operation is displayed in an emphasized manner, or the push order navigation image is changed from a still image to a moving image. This is sometimes referred to as a stop-acceptable performance.

Further, in this embodiment, when the start switch 12 is operated as a game start operation and a push order navigation image is displayed, a predetermined sound effect (sometimes referred to as a navigation display sound) is output from the speaker S. It is configured like this.

At this time, the timing for outputting the voice corresponding to the first stop switch to be operated (for example, "It's on the left") from the speaker S may be immediately after the start switch 12 is operated, or it may be immediately after the reels start rotating. It may be the timing or the timing when the operation of the stop switch becomes effective. In other words, the configuration may be such that the output is output from the speaker S at any timing after the start switch 12 is operated until the stop switch becomes valid.

With this configuration, even if the display of the push order navigation image is delayed due to a problem with the LCD display, the stop switch that should be operated first can be recognized audibly, so the progress of the game is not hindered, and the push order navigation image is delayed. It is possible to prevent order errors.

Furthermore, FIG. 51 is an example of a case where the push order navigation image is displayed on the liquid crystal in this embodiment, and by displaying "123" on the liquid crystal, the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a → the middle reel 8b corresponds. This shows that the correct pressing order is to operate the stop switches in the order of the stop switch that was pressed → the stop switch that corresponds to the right reel 8c. In FIG. 51, since the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a should be placed first, "1" is displayed in the push order navigation image in the emphasized mode, and "2" and "3" are displayed in the push order navigation image in the normal mode. Displayed as an image.

<Configuration related to display of push order navigation image and power off>
Next, regarding the display of the press order navigation image when the power was cut off while the press order navigation image was being displayed and the power was restored without changing the settings, we will explain that the winner of the prize-A1 condition device during AT and the correct answer. An example will be explained in which a push order navigation image of "123" corresponding to the push order "left middle right" is displayed on the liquid crystal display. Regarding the display of the push order navigation image and the configuration related to power off, which will be explained below, the timing of power off and the appearance of the push order navigation image are different ("213" corresponds to "middle left" in the correct push order). (press order navigation image, etc.) can also be applied in combination as appropriate. Further, it can be applied in combination with <configuration regarding display of push order navigation image and predetermined error>, which will be described later.

(1) When the power is turned off before the first stop operation First, when the start switch 12 is operated, a push order navigation image of "123" is displayed on the liquid crystal. Here, the push order navigation image for "1" corresponds to the stop switch that should be operated first (first stop operation), so it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation image for "2" and "3" is displayed in an emphasized manner. The image is displayed in a normal manner. Furthermore, since the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a should be operated as the first stop operation, the speaker S outputs a voice saying "Left!". Note that a voice such as "It's on the left" that corresponds to the stop switch that is currently being operated is sometimes simply referred to as a navigation voice.

Thereafter, in a situation where the first stop operation has not yet been performed, the power is turned off and all liquid crystal display ends (state where the power is not turned on). After that, the timing after the power is restored from power failure, such as the timing when the drive voltage is supplied to the sub control board and drawing processing can be executed, and the timing when the drive voltage is supplied to the main control board and a command regarding the push order is sent to the sub control board. (Hereinafter, this may be referred to as a predetermined navigation timing), the push order navigation image of "123" is displayed on the liquid crystal display again. Note that the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation images for "2" and "3" are displayed in a normal manner. Also, at this time, the navigation voice is not output again. Further, at this time, the navigation display sound may be configured not to be outputted again, or may be configured so that it is outputted.

In this way, when the power is turned off after the push order navigation image is displayed and before the first stop operation, and then the power is restored after the power is turned off, the push order navigation image is restored but the navigation sound is not restored. In this way, by not outputting the navigation sound when the power is restored from a power failure, the processing of the sub-control board when the power is restored is reduced, and the push order navigation image can be displayed quickly.

Note that the navigation voice may be configured to be outputted again when the power is restored from a power failure. With this configuration, the game can be played without any discomfort before the power is turned off and after the power is restored.

In addition, if it is configured to execute the above-mentioned operation acceptance effect at the timing when the stop switch operation becomes effective, the configuration is such that the push order navigation image is displayed together with the stop acceptance effect even when the power is restored. You may. With this configuration, the game can be played without any discomfort before the power is turned off and after the power is restored.

Further, when the power is restored from a power failure, the push order navigation image may be displayed without the stop reception possible effect. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the processing of the sub-control board at the time of power-off recovery, and to quickly display the push order navigation image.

In addition, when the push order navigation image is displayed again after power recovery, the push order navigation image corresponding to the first stop operation displays both the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image", and the other push order navigation images The navigation image may be configured to display only the "navigation number image". With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the processing of the sub-control board at the time of power-off recovery, and to quickly display the push order navigation image.

In addition, when the push order navigation image is displayed again after power recovery, the configuration is configured to display both the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" for all push order navigation images that are displayed when the power is restored. It's okay. With this configuration, the game can be played without any discomfort before the power is turned off and after the power is restored.

(2) When the first stop operation is performed in the correct manner, and then the power is cut off before the second stop operation. First, when the start switch 12 is operated, the push order navigation image of "123" is displayed on the LCD. be done. Here, the push order navigation image for "1" corresponds to the stop switch that should be operated first (first stop operation), so it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation image for "2" and "3" is displayed in an emphasized manner. The image is displayed in a normal manner. Additionally, a navigation voice saying "Left" is output in response to the first stop operation. At this time, the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in an emphasized manner, so the "navi number image" and " At least one of the navigation background images is displayed in a larger size.

After that, when the first stop operation is performed in the correct manner (that is, the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a is operated), the press order navigation image for "1" is displayed in a successful manner, and the press order for "2" is displayed in a successful manner. The navigation image is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation image of "3" is displayed in a normal manner. Further, the navigation voice "Inside" corresponding to the second stop operation is output from the speaker S. In addition, at this time, the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in an emphasized mode, so the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in a normal mode. , at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" will be displayed in a large size.

Thereafter, in a situation where the second stop operation has not yet been performed, the power is turned off and all liquid crystal display ends (state where the power is not turned on). After that, at a predetermined navigation timing after the power is restored, the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in a successful manner, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in a successful manner. The image is displayed in a normal manner. In other words, the same image display is performed after the stop is accepted when the order of pressing the first stop on the stop switch is the correct pressing order.

Furthermore, at this time, at least one of the navigation display sound, the success sound, and the navigation sound corresponding to the second stop operation may be configured to be output again, or it may be configured such that none of them are output.

Also, at this time, as before the power was turned off, the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in an emphasized mode, so that "3" displayed in the normal mode is displayed. At least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" will be displayed larger than the push order navigation image. In addition, at this time, even if the push order navigation image in the success mode of "1" has ended displaying after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the display started before the power was turned off. , is configured to be displayed again when the power is restored from a power failure. Note that the push order navigation image for the success mode "1" is configured so that when it is displayed again after the power is restored from a power failure, the display is terminated after a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since it was displayed again. Alternatively, the display may be terminated immediately even before a predetermined time has elapsed after being displayed again.

In this way, if the first stop operation is performed in the correct manner and then a power outage occurs before the second stop operation, the push order navigation image of "1" will be displayed at the predetermined navigation timing after the power is restored from the power outage. is displayed in a successful manner, the push order navigation image of "2" is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation image of "3" is displayed in a normal manner. With this configuration, even if there is a power-off recovery during AT, the operation mode of the stop switch before the power-off can be accurately displayed, and it is possible to prevent the player from making a mistake in the order in which the stop switch is pressed. Furthermore, since the push order navigation image of the successful mode is displayed again, the player can also be made aware that the operating mode of the stop switch before the power was turned off was the correct mode.

In addition, if the first stop operation is performed in the correct manner and then a power outage occurs before the second stop operation, the push order navigation image of "1" will be displayed at the predetermined navigation timing after the power is restored. Instead, the push order navigation image for "2" may be displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation image for "3" may be displayed in a normal manner.

With this configuration, it is possible to make the player concentrate on the stop operation that should be performed at the moment.

(3) When the first stop operation is performed in an incorrect manner and the power is turned off before the second stop operation First, when the start switch 12 is operated, the push order navigation image of "123" is displayed on the LCD. Ru. Here, the push order navigation image for "1" corresponds to the stop switch that should be operated first (first stop operation), so it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation image for "2" and "3" is displayed in an emphasized manner. The image is displayed in a normal manner. Additionally, a navigation voice saying "Left" is output in response to the first stop operation. At this time, the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in an emphasized manner, so the "navigation number image" and " At least one of the navigation background images is displayed in a larger size.

After that, if the first stop operation is performed in an incorrect manner (for example, the stop switch corresponding to the middle reel 8b is operated), all the push order navigation images are displayed in a failure manner, and after being displayed in a failure manner, When a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) has elapsed, the display of all push order navigation images is ended. Further, a voice saying "What are you doing?" is output from the speaker S, indicating that the pressing order is incorrect.

Thereafter, in a situation where the second stop operation has not yet been performed, the power is turned off and all liquid crystal display ends (state where the power is not turned on). Thereafter, the push order navigation image is not displayed even if the drawing process after the power-off recovery is executable. Further, at this time, a failure sound indicating that the pressing order was incorrect is not output.

In this way, if the stop operation was performed in an incorrect manner before the power was turned off, the push order navigation image will not be displayed again after the power is turned off, so as not to lower the player's expectations. You can return to playing (as long as you don't get too excited).

In addition, as described above, if the stop switch is operated in the correct manner as the first stop operation, and then a power outage occurs before the second stop operation, the first stop will occur at the predetermined navigation timing after the power is restored. The push order navigation image corresponding to the operation is displayed in a successful manner, the push order navigation image corresponding to the second stop operation is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the press order navigation image corresponding to the third stop operation is displayed in a normal manner. It is configured so that On the other hand, if the stop switch is operated in an incorrect manner as the first stop operation, and then the power is cut off before the second stop operation, the predetermined navigation timing after the power is restored (if navigation is not actually performed) (also referred to as navigation timing), the push order navigation image is configured not to be displayed.

With this configuration, the display after the power is turned off can be appropriately displayed depending on the gaming situation before the power is turned off, and the player can smoothly understand the gaming situation. In particular, if the stop switch has been operated in an incorrect manner before the power is turned off, the player can return to the game without lowering his or her expectations (without inadvertently increasing his or her expectations).

In addition, if the first stop operation is performed in an incorrect manner, and then a power outage occurs before the second stop operation, all push order navigation images will be changed to the failed manner at a predetermined navigation timing after the power is restored. It may be configured so that it is displayed again. At this time as well, the failure sound and navigation voice indicating that the button was pressed in the wrong order are not output after the power is restored. Further, the push order navigation image in the failure mode may be configured so that when it is displayed again after the power is restored, the display is terminated after a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since it was displayed again. , the display may be immediately terminated even before a predetermined period of time has elapsed since it was displayed again.

With this configuration, if the stop switch is operated in the correct manner as the first stop operation, and then a power outage occurs before the second stop operation, the first stop will be performed at the predetermined navigation timing after the power is restored from the power outage. The push order navigation image corresponding to the operation is displayed in a successful manner, the push order navigation image corresponding to the second stop operation is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the press order navigation image corresponding to the third stop operation is displayed in a normal manner. On the other hand, if the stop switch is operated in an incorrect manner as the first stop operation, and then the power is cut off before the second stop operation, all press order navigation will be reset at the predetermined navigation timing after the power is restored. The image will be displayed in a failed manner.

With this configuration, the player can smoothly understand the game situation. In particular, if the stop switch was operated in an incorrect manner before the power was turned off, even if it takes several minutes to recover from the power outage, the push order navigation image of the failure mode will be displayed after the power is turned off and the stop switch is operated in an incorrect manner. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from mistakenly thinking that the gaming machine is malfunctioning due to no payout or a small payout such as one coin even though the AT is in progress.

(4) If the second stop operation is performed in the correct manner and then the power is turned off before the third stop operation First, when the start switch 12 is operated, the push order navigation image of "123" is displayed on the LCD. . Here, the push order navigation image for "1" corresponds to the stop switch that should be operated first (first stop operation), so it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation image for "2" and "3" is displayed in an emphasized manner. The image is displayed in a normal manner. Additionally, a navigation voice saying "Left" is output in response to the first stop operation. At this time, the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in an emphasized manner, so the "navigation number image" and " At least one of the navigation background images is displayed in a larger size.

After that, when the first stop operation is performed in the correct manner (that is, the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a is operated), the press order navigation image for "1" is displayed in a successful manner, and the press order for "2" is displayed in a successful manner. The navigation image is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation image of "3" is displayed in a normal manner. Further, the navigation voice "Inside" corresponding to the second stop operation is output from the speaker S. In addition, at this time, the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in an emphasized mode, so the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in a normal mode. , at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" will be displayed in a large size.

After that, when the second stop operation is performed in the correct manner (that is, the stop switch corresponding to the middle reel 8b is operated), the press order navigation image for "2" is displayed in a successful manner, and the press order for "3" is displayed in a successful manner. The navigation image is displayed in an emphasized manner. Further, the navigation voice "It's on the right" corresponding to the third stop is output from the speaker S. At this time, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an emphasized mode, so the "navigation number image" and "navigation background image" of both are approximately the same. It will be displayed in size.

Thereafter, in a situation where the third stop operation has not yet been performed, the power is turned off and all liquid crystal display ends (state where the power is not turned on). After that, at a predetermined navigation timing after the power is restored, the push order navigation image for "1" is not displayed, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in a successful manner, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed. Displayed in an emphasized manner. Note that at this time, at least one of the navigation display sound, the success sound, and the navigation sound corresponding to the third stop operation may be configured to be output again, or it may be configured that none of them are output. Also, at this time, as before the power was turned off, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an emphasized mode, so the "navigation number image" and " The navigation background image will be displayed at approximately the same size. In addition, at this time, even if the push order navigation image of the success mode "2" has finished displaying after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has passed since the display started before the power was turned off. , is configured to be displayed again when the power is restored from a power failure. Note that the push order navigation image for the success mode "2" is configured so that when it is displayed again after the power is restored from a power failure, the display is terminated after a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since it was displayed again. Alternatively, the display may be terminated immediately even before a predetermined time has elapsed after being displayed again.

In this way, if the first stop operation and the second stop operation are performed in the correct manner, and then a power outage occurs before the third stop operation, "1" will be displayed at the predetermined navigation timing after the power outage recovery. The push order navigation image of "2" is not displayed, the push order navigation image of "2" is displayed in a successful manner, and the push order navigation image of "3" is displayed in an emphasized manner.

With this configuration, even if there is a power-off recovery during AT, the operation mode of the stop switch before the power-off can be accurately displayed, and it is possible to prevent the player from making a mistake in the order in which the stop switch is pressed. In particular, since the push order navigation image corresponding to the first stop operation is not reproduced, it is possible to concentrate on the third stop.

In addition, if the first stop operation and the second stop operation are performed in the correct manner, and then a power outage occurs before the third stop operation, press "1" at the predetermined navigation timing after the power is restored. The order navigation image may be displayed in a successful manner, the push order navigation image of "2" may be displayed in a success manner, and the push order navigation image of "3" may be displayed in an emphasized manner. Note that at this time, at least one of the navigation display sound, the success sound, and the navigation sound corresponding to the third stop operation may be configured to be output again, or it may be configured that none of them are output. Also, at this time, the push order navigation images for "1" and "2" are displayed in a successful manner, and the push order navigation images for "3" are displayed in an emphasized manner, so the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" are all displayed at approximately the same size. In addition, at this time, the push order navigation images for success modes "1" and "2" will stop displaying after a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has passed since the display started before the power was turned off. It is configured so that it will be displayed again when the power is restored even if the In addition, when the press order navigation images for success modes "1" and "2" are displayed again after the power is restored from a power failure, the display ends after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since they were displayed again. The display may be configured to end immediately after being displayed again, or even before a predetermined period of time has elapsed after being displayed again. In other words, before the power is turned off, the display mode of the push order navigation image changes every time the stop operation is performed, so the display of the push order navigation images for success modes "1" and "2" ends at different timings, but after the power is turned off, the display mode of the push order navigation image changes at different times. The push order navigation images of success modes ``1'' and ``2'' end their display at the same timing.

With this configuration, even if there is a power failure recovery during AT, the operation mode of the stop switch before the power failure can be accurately displayed, and it is possible to prevent the player from making a mistake in the order in which the stop switch is pressed. In particular, by displaying the push order navigation images corresponding to the first stop and the second stop in a successful manner, it is possible to make it clear that only the third stop remains and that the operations were performed in the correct push order.

In addition, if the first stop operation and the second stop operation are performed in the correct manner, and then a power outage occurs before the third stop operation, press "1" at the predetermined navigation timing after the power is restored. The order navigation image may not be displayed, the push order navigation image for "2" may not be displayed, and the push order navigation image for "3" may be displayed in an emphasized manner. Note that at this time, at least one of the navigation display sound, the success sound, and the navigation sound corresponding to the third stop operation may be configured to be output again, or it may be configured that none of them are output.

With this configuration, it is possible to make the player concentrate on the stop operation that should be performed at the moment.

(5) When the first stop operation is performed in a correct manner, the second stop operation is performed in an incorrect manner, and then the power is turned off before the third stop operation. First, when the start switch 12 is operated, the "123" The push order navigation image is displayed on the LCD. Here, the push order navigation image for "1" corresponds to the stop switch that should be operated first (first stop operation), so it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation image for "2" and "3" is displayed in an emphasized manner. The image is displayed in a normal manner. Additionally, a navigation voice saying "Left" is output in response to the first stop operation. At this time, the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in an emphasized manner, so the "navigation number image" and " At least one of the navigation background images is displayed in a larger size.

After that, when the first stop operation is performed in the correct manner (that is, the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a is operated), the press order navigation image for "1" is displayed in a successful manner, and the press order for "2" is displayed in a successful manner. The navigation image is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation image of "3" is displayed in a normal manner. Further, the navigation voice "Inside" corresponding to the second stop operation is output from the speaker S. In addition, at this time, the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in an emphasized mode, so the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in a normal mode. , at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" will be displayed in a large size.

After that, if the second stop operation is performed in an incorrect manner (for example, the stop switch corresponding to the right reel 8c is operated), the push order navigation images of "2" and "3" are displayed in an unsuccessful manner, and the failure occurs. When a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the display in this mode, the display of the push order navigation images for "2" and "3" is ended. Further, a voice saying "What are you doing?" is output from the speaker S, indicating that the pressing order is incorrect.

Thereafter, in a situation where the third stop operation has not yet been performed, the power is turned off and all liquid crystal display ends (state where the power is not turned on). Thereafter, even at a predetermined navigation timing after the power is restored, the push order navigation image is not displayed. Note that at this time, a failure sound indicating that the pressing order was incorrect is not output.

In this way, if the stop operation was performed in an incorrect manner before the power was turned off, the push order navigation image will not be displayed again when the power is restored, without lowering the player's expectations. This allows the player to return to the game (while keeping the player's feelings at bay).

In addition, if the first stop operation is performed in a correct manner, then the second stop operation is performed in an incorrect manner, and then a power outage occurs before the third stop operation, the predetermined navigation after the power outage recovery At this timing, the push order navigation image of "1" may be displayed in a successful manner, and the push order navigation images of "2" and "3" may be displayed in a failed manner. Also, at this time, a failure sound indicating that the pressing order was incorrect is not output after the power is restored. Note that the push order navigation image of the failure mode may be configured so that when it is displayed again after the power is turned off and restored, the display is terminated after a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since it was displayed again. , the display may be immediately terminated even before a predetermined period of time has elapsed since it was displayed again.

With this configuration, the player can smoothly understand the game situation. In particular, by displaying again the push order navigation image corresponding to the stop operation in the correct answer mode, the player can understand which stop operation he or she made a mistake.

In addition, if the first stop operation is performed in a correct manner, then the second stop operation is performed in an incorrect manner, and then a power outage occurs before the third stop operation, the predetermined navigation after the power outage recovery It may be configured such that all push order navigation images are displayed in a failed manner at certain timings. Also, at this time, a failure sound indicating that the pressing order was incorrect is not output after the power is restored. Note that the push order navigation image of the failure mode may be configured so that when it is displayed again after the power is turned off and restored, the display is terminated after a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since it was displayed again. , the display may be immediately terminated even before a predetermined period of time has elapsed since it was displayed again. With this configuration, even if it takes several minutes to recover from a power outage, the push order navigation image of the failure mode will be displayed after the power outage recovers, even if the AT is in progress. It is possible to prevent a player from misunderstanding that the game machine is malfunctioning due to no payout or a small payout such as one coin.

(6) If the second stop operation is performed in the correct manner, then the power is turned off before the third stop operation, the third stop is performed after the power is restored, and then the power is turned off again. First, the start switch 12 is operated. Then, the push order navigation image of "123" is displayed on the LCD. Here, the push order navigation image for "1" corresponds to the stop switch that should be operated first (first stop operation), so it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation image for "2" and "3" is displayed in an emphasized manner. The image is displayed in a normal manner. Additionally, a navigation voice saying "Left" is output in response to the first stop operation. At this time, the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in an emphasized manner, so the "navi number image" and " At least one of the navigation background images is displayed in a larger size.

After that, when the first stop operation is performed in the correct manner (that is, the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a is operated), the press order navigation image for "1" is displayed in a successful manner, and the press order for "2" is displayed in a successful manner. The navigation image is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation image of "3" is displayed in a normal manner. Further, the navigation voice "Inside" corresponding to the second stop operation is output from the speaker S. In addition, at this time, the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in an emphasized mode, so the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in a normal mode. , at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" will be displayed in a large size.

After that, when the second stop operation is performed in the correct manner (that is, the stop switch corresponding to the middle reel 8b is operated), the press order navigation image for "2" is displayed in a successful manner, and the press order for "3" is displayed in a successful manner. The navigation image is displayed in an emphasized manner. Further, the navigation voice "It's on the right" corresponding to the third stop is output from the speaker S. At this time, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an emphasized mode, so the "navigation number image" and "navigation background image" of both are approximately the same. It will be displayed in size.

Thereafter, in a situation where the third stop operation has not yet been performed, the power is turned off and all liquid crystal display ends (state where the power is not turned on). After that, at a predetermined navigation timing after the power is restored, the push order navigation image for "1" is not displayed or is displayed in a successful mode, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in a successful mode. The push order navigation image is displayed in an emphasized manner. Note that at this time, at least one of the navigation display sound, the success sound, and the navigation sound corresponding to the third stop operation may be configured to be output again, or it may be configured that none of them are output. In addition, the push order navigation image for the success mode of "2" (if the configuration is configured so that the push order navigation for the success mode of "1" is also displayed, the push order navigation image for the success modes of "1" and "2") may be configured to end displaying when a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed after being redisplayed, or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after being redisplayed. The display may be configured to end immediately even before the display.

After that, the display of the push order navigation image for the success mode of "2" is finished (if the configuration is such that the push order navigation for the success mode of "1" is also displayed, the push order navigation image for the success mode of "1" is displayed. ), and in a situation where the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an emphasized manner, if the third stop operation is performed in a correct manner, the push order navigation image for "3" will be displayed in a successful manner. Is displayed. Further, at this time, a predetermined image (sometimes referred to as a GET image) indicating that all stop operations have been performed in the correct manner is displayed.

Thereafter, in a situation where the stop operation has been performed up to the third stop, power is cut off again and all liquid crystal display ends. Thereafter, even after the power is turned off and restored, the push order navigation image and the GET image are not displayed. Note that, at this time, none of the navigation display sound, the success sound, and the navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation is output.

With this configuration, the player can smoothly understand the game situation. In particular, since no new stopping operation is required after the third stop, by not reproducing the push order navigation image, it is possible to effectively make the user understand that there is no need to perform a new stopping operation.

In addition, if the power is turned off again after the third stop operation is performed in the correct manner, at the predetermined navigation timing after the power is restored, the push order navigation images for "1" to "3" will all be in the success state. It may be configured so that it is displayed again. Note that at this time, at least one of the navigation display sound, the success sound, and the navigation sound corresponding to the third stop operation may be configured to be outputted again, or it may be configured that none of them are outputted.

With this configuration, it can be made clear that all the stop operations have been performed in the correct manner.

If the second power outage occurs before the payout process is executed, the "1" push order navigation image will not be displayed, or will be displayed in a successful state, and the "2" push order navigation image will not be displayed at the predetermined navigation timing after the power outage is restored. The order navigation image is displayed in a success mode, and the push order navigation image of "3" is displayed in an emphasized mode.If the second power outage is after the execution of the payout process, the predetermined state after the power outage is restored. For example, the push order navigation image is not displayed at the navigation timing, the display contents after the power outage is restored may be configured to differ depending on whether the situation before the power outage is before or after the execution of the payout process.

<Explanation regarding rare role navigation images>
In addition, in this embodiment, in a game where a so-called rare role, such as a cherry role or a watermelon role, is won, a navigation image (sometimes referred to as a rare role navigation image) indicating that there is a possibility that a rare role has been won is displayed as "! !!” is displayed. Note that the display mode of the navigation background image of the rare role navigation image and the navigation background image of the push order navigation image is the same or substantially the same. That is, the push order navigation image and the rare role navigation image are configured to be similar images, although the "number" and "!" are different. Furthermore, the rare role navigation image may be configured to be displayed only when winning one of the rare roles, or may be configured to display certain benefits (for example, first AT win, AT addition, transition to the chance zone). etc.), it is configured so that the result of the internal lottery can be displayed even in games where the result is a loss or a replay is required, as an effect that suggests the possibility that a predetermined benefit will be awarded. You may.

In addition, the rare role navigation image has no advantage or disadvantage depending on the order of pressing, so it is always displayed in the same size in one game (the size does not differ between the normal mode and the emphasized mode like the pressing order navigation image). It is configured.

In addition, in the game where the rare role navigation image is displayed, any timing until the third stop operation is performed (timing when the start switch 12 is operated, timing when the first stop operation is performed, timing when the second stop operation is performed) (the timing when the third stop operation is performed, the timing when the third stop operation is performed, etc.), the power is turned off, and all liquid crystal display ends (state where the power is not turned on). Thereafter, the rare combination navigation image is configured to be displayed again at a predetermined navigation timing after the power is restored. Incidentally, even if the power is cut off at any timing, the rare combination navigation image that is displayed again when the power is restored is displayed in the display mode after the start switch 12 is operated, such as "!!!".

With this configuration, the player can smoothly understand the game situation. In particular, it is possible to maintain the expectation that the player may have won a rare role. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent a rare role from being missed.

In addition, in the game where the rare role navigation image is displayed, any timing until the third stop operation is performed (timing when the start switch 12 is operated, timing when the first stop operation is performed, timing when the second stop operation is performed) If the power is cut off at the timing when the third stop operation is performed, the timing when the third stop operation is performed, etc., the rare combination navigation image may not be displayed again after the power is restored.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from confusing the push order navigation image and the rare role navigation image.

The rare role navigation images may be configured to end displaying one by one in response to the stop operation, or all rare role navigation images may be displayed at the timing when the first stop operation is performed. may be configured. In addition, in the case where the display of rare role navigation images is terminated one by one for each stop operation, regardless of which stop switch 13 is operated, the rare role navigation image on the left side and the rare role navigation image in the middle are displayed. , the display may be terminated in response to the stop operation in the order of the rare role navigation images on the right side, or the display of the rare role navigation images at the position corresponding to the stop switch 13 where the stop operation was performed may be terminated in response to the stop operation. The display may be terminated in response to this.

<Configuration regarding push order navigation image display and errors>
Next, regarding the display of the push order navigation image after a predetermined error (medal retention error, medal backflow error, hopper empty error, etc.) occurs while displaying the push order navigation image, and the predetermined error is subsequently cleared. , If you win the prize-A1 condition device during AT, the push order navigation image of "123" corresponding to the correct push order of "left middle right" is displayed on the LCD, and a hopper empty error occurs as a predetermined error. This will be explained using an example. Note that the configurations related to the display of the push order navigation image and the predetermined error described below can be applied in combination as appropriate even when the timing of occurrence of the predetermined error or the aspect of the push order navigation image is different. Further, it can be applied in combination with the above-described <configuration regarding display of push order navigation image and power off> as appropriate.

(1) When the first stop operation is performed in a correct manner, and then a predetermined error occurs before the second stop operation. First, as shown in FIG. 52, when the start switch 12 is operated, "123" is pressed. The navigation image will be displayed on the LCD. Here, the push order navigation image for "1" corresponds to the stop switch that should be operated first (first stop operation), so it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation image for "2" and "3" is displayed in an emphasized manner. The image is displayed in a normal manner. Additionally, a navigation voice saying "Left" is output in response to the first stop operation. At this time, the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in an emphasized manner, so the "navigation number image" and " At least one of the navigation background images is displayed in a larger size.

After that, when the first stop operation is performed in the correct manner (that is, the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a is operated), the press order navigation image for "1" is displayed in a successful manner, and the press order for "2" is displayed in a successful manner. The navigation image is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation image of "3" is displayed in a normal manner. Further, the navigation voice "Inside" corresponding to the second stop operation is output from the speaker S. In addition, at this time, the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in an emphasized mode, so the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in a normal mode. , at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" will be displayed in a large size.

After that, in a situation where the second stop operation has not been performed yet, a hopper empty error occurs, and the display of the push order navigation image becomes invisible (you can make it invisible by ending the display, (The image related to the error may be made invisible by displaying it on the front of the liquid crystal display), and the image related to the hopper empty error is displayed.

After that, at a predetermined navigation timing after the hopper empty error is cleared, the display of the image related to the hopper empty error ends, the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in a success mode, and the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in a successful manner. The images are displayed in a highlighted manner, and the "3" push order navigation image is displayed in a normal manner. Note that at this time, at least one of the navigation display sound, the success sound, and the navigation voice corresponding to the second stop operation may be configured to be outputted again, or it may be configured that none of them are outputted. Also, at this time, as before the occurrence of the hopper empty error, the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in an emphasized mode, so it is displayed in a normal mode. At least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" will be displayed larger than the push order navigation image of "3". In addition, at this time, the push order navigation image for the success mode "1" ends displaying after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the display started before the hopper empty error occurred. The screen is configured so that it will be displayed again when the power is restored even if the power is turned off.

After that, the push order navigation image for the success mode of "1" may be configured to end displaying after a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed after being displayed again, or may be configured to end displaying after being displayed again. The display may be configured to end immediately even before the predetermined time has elapsed.

In this way, if the first stop operation is performed in a correct manner and a predetermined error occurs before the second stop operation, then at a predetermined navigation timing after the predetermined error is cleared, "1 The push order navigation image of "" is displayed in a successful manner, the push order navigation image of "2" is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation image of "3" is displayed in a normal manner. With this configuration, even if a predetermined error occurs during AT, the operation mode of the stop switch before the predetermined error occurs can be accurately displayed, and it is possible to prevent the player from making a mistake in the order in which the stop switch was pressed. . Furthermore, since the push order navigation image of the success mode is displayed again, the player can also be made aware that the operation mode of the stop switch before the occurrence of the predetermined error was the correct mode.

In addition, if the first stop operation is performed in the correct manner and a hopper empty error occurs before the second stop operation, the hopper empty error will be detected at a predetermined navigation timing after the hopper empty error is canceled. The image display ends, and the "1" push order navigation image is not displayed, the "2" push order navigation image is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the "3" push order navigation image is displayed in a normal manner. It may be configured as follows.

With this configuration, the player can concentrate on the stopping operation that should be performed at the moment.

In addition, the display mode of the "navigation number image" and "navigation background image" of the push order navigation image shown in FIG. 52, and the "navigation number image" and "navigation background image" of the push order navigation image shown in FIGS. 50 and 51 The design (pictures, number fonts, colors, etc.) is different from the . In this way, the design of the push order navigation image may be configured to be able to be changed as appropriate depending on the gaming situation. For example, when the expectation level regarding AT addition is normal, the push order navigation image is displayed with the design shown in FIGS. 50 and 51, and when it is in a high probability state, the push order navigation image is displayed with the design shown in FIG. It may be configured to display. In addition, it is possible to select a performance mode related to the performance tendency during AT, and when a predetermined performance mode is set, a push order navigation image is displayed with the design shown in FIGS. 50 and 51, and a specific performance When the mode is set, the push order navigation may be displayed in the design shown in FIG. 52.

With this configuration, the player can visually grasp the current gaming situation by the design of the push order navigation image.

(2) If the second stop operation is performed in the correct manner, and then a predetermined error occurs before the third stop operation. First, when the start switch 12 is operated, the push order navigation image of "123" is displayed on the LCD. Is displayed. Here, the push order navigation image for "1" corresponds to the stop switch that should be operated first (first stop operation), so it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation image for "2" and "3" is displayed in an emphasized manner. The image is displayed in a normal manner. Additionally, a navigation voice saying "Left" is output in response to the first stop operation. At this time, the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in an emphasized manner, so the "navi number image" and " At least one of the navigation background images is displayed in a larger size.

After that, when the first stop operation is performed in the correct manner (that is, the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a is operated), the press order navigation image for "1" is displayed in a successful manner, and the press order for "2" is displayed in a successful manner. The navigation image is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation image of "3" is displayed in a normal manner. Further, the navigation voice "Inside" corresponding to the second stop operation is output from the speaker S. In addition, at this time, the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in an emphasized mode, so the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in a normal mode. , at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" will be displayed in a large size.

After that, when the second stop operation is performed in the correct manner (that is, the stop switch corresponding to the middle reel 8b is operated), the press order navigation image for "2" is displayed in a successful manner, and the press order for "3" is displayed in a successful manner. The navigation image is displayed in an emphasized manner. Further, the navigation voice "It's on the right" corresponding to the third stop is output from the speaker S. In addition, at this time, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an emphasized mode, so the "navigation number image" and "navigation background image" of both are approximately the same. It will be displayed in size.

After that, in a situation where the third stop operation has not been performed yet, a hopper empty error occurs, and the display of the push order navigation image becomes invisible (you can make it invisible by ending the display, (The image related to the error may be made invisible by displaying it on the front of the liquid crystal display), and the image related to the hopper empty error is displayed. After that, at a predetermined navigation timing after the hopper empty error is cleared, the display of images related to the hopper empty error will end, the push order navigation image for "1" will not be displayed, and the push order navigation image for "2" will not be displayed. It is displayed in a successful manner, and the push order navigation image of "3" is displayed in an emphasized manner. Note that at this time, at least one of the navigation display sound, the success sound, and the navigation sound corresponding to the third stop operation may be configured to be outputted again, or it may be configured that none of them are outputted. At this time, as before the occurrence of the hopper empty error, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in a successful manner, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an emphasized manner. ” and “navigation background image” will be displayed in approximately the same size. In addition, at this time, even if the push order navigation image of the success mode "2" has ended displaying after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the display started before the power was turned off. , is configured to be displayed again when the power is restored from a power failure.

After that, the push order navigation image of the success mode "2" may be configured to end displaying after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed after being displayed again, or after being displayed again. The display may be configured to end immediately even before the predetermined time has elapsed.

In this way, if the first stop operation and the second stop operation are performed in a correct manner, and then a predetermined error occurs before the third stop operation, the predetermined navigation after the predetermined error is cleared. At the timing, the push order navigation image of "1" is not displayed, the push order navigation image of "2" is displayed in a successful manner, and the push order navigation image of "3" is displayed in an emphasized manner. There is. With this configuration, even if a predetermined error occurs during AT, the operation mode of the stop switch before the predetermined error occurs can be accurately displayed, and it is possible to prevent the player from making a mistake in the order in which the stop switch was pressed. . In particular, since the push order navigation image corresponding to the first stop operation is not reproduced, it is possible to concentrate on the third stop.

In addition, if the first stop operation and the second stop operation are performed in the correct manner, and then a hopper empty error occurs before the third stop operation, at the predetermined navigation timing after the hopper empty error is canceled. , the display of the image related to the hopper empty error is finished, the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in a success mode, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in a success mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in a success mode. may be configured to be displayed in an emphasized manner.

Note that at this time, at least one of the navigation display sound, the success sound, and the navigation sound corresponding to the third stop operation may be configured to be output again, or it may be configured that none of them are output.

Also, at this time, the push order navigation images for "1" and "2" are displayed in a successful manner, and the push order navigation images for "3" are displayed in an emphasized manner, so the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" are all displayed at approximately the same size. Also, at this time, the push order navigation images for success modes "1" and "2" are displayed after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the display started before the hopper empty error occurred. Even if you have finished the hopper empty error, it will be displayed again when the hopper empty error is cleared. Note that the push order navigation images for success modes "1" and "2" may be configured to end displaying after a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed after being displayed again, or may be configured to end displaying them again. The display may be configured to end immediately even before a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the display was started. In other words, before the hopper empty error occurs, the display mode of the push order navigation image changes every time the stop operation is performed, so the display of the push order navigation images for success states "1" and "2" ends at different timings, but when the hopper empty error occurs, After the error is cleared, the display of the push order navigation images of success modes "1" and "2" will end at the same timing.

With this configuration, even if a predetermined error occurs during AT, the operating mode of the stop switch before the predetermined error occurs can be accurately displayed, and it is possible to prevent the player from making a mistake in the order in which the stop switch is pressed. In particular, by displaying the push order navigation images corresponding to the first stop and the second stop in a successful manner, it can be made clear that only the third stop remains and that the operations were performed in the correct push order.

In addition, if the first stop operation and the second stop operation are performed in the correct manner, and then a hopper empty error occurs before the third stop operation, at the predetermined navigation timing after the hopper empty error is canceled. , the display of the image related to the hopper empty error is finished, the push order navigation image for "1" is not displayed, the push order navigation image for "2" is not displayed, and the push order navigation image for "3" is in the normal mode. It may be configured to be displayed. At this time, at least one of the navigation display sound, the success sound, and the navigation sound corresponding to the third stop operation may be outputted again, or it may be configured that none of them is outputted.
With this configuration, the player can concentrate on the stopping operation that should be performed at the moment.

(3) When a predetermined error occurs after the third stop operation is performed in the correct manner. First, when the start switch 12 is operated, a push order navigation image of "123" is displayed on the liquid crystal display. Here, the push order navigation image for "1" corresponds to the stop switch that should be operated first (first stop operation), so it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation image for "2" and "3" is displayed in an emphasized manner. The image is displayed in a normal manner. Additionally, a navigation voice saying "Left" is output in response to the first stop operation. At this time, the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in an emphasized manner, so the "navigation number image" and " At least one of the navigation background images is displayed in a larger size.

After that, when the first stop operation is performed in the correct manner (that is, the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a is operated), the press order navigation image for "1" is displayed in a successful manner, and the press order for "2" is displayed in a successful manner. The navigation image is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation image of "3" is displayed in a normal manner. Further, the navigation voice "Inside" corresponding to the second stop operation is output from the speaker S. In addition, at this time, the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in an emphasized mode, so the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in a normal mode. , at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" will be displayed in a large size.

After that, when the second stop operation is performed in the correct manner (that is, the stop switch corresponding to the middle reel 8b is operated), the press order navigation image for "2" is displayed in a successful manner, and the press order for "3" is displayed in a successful manner. The navigation image is displayed in an emphasized manner. Further, the navigation voice "It's on the right" corresponding to the third stop is output from the speaker S. At this time, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an emphasized mode, so the "navigation number image" and "navigation background image" of both are approximately the same. It will be displayed in size.

Thereafter, when the third stop operation is performed (that is, the stop switch corresponding to the right reel 8c which is the final stop operation is operated), the push order navigation image of "3" is displayed in a successful manner. Further, at this time, all stop operations have been performed in the correct manner, so the configuration is such that a GET image is displayed.

After that, a hopper empty error occurs and an image related to the hopper empty error is displayed. After that, at a predetermined navigation timing after the hopper empty error is cleared, the display of the image related to the hopper empty error will end, and the press order navigation image of "1", "2", and "3" will be displayed again in a successful manner. be done. Note that at this time, at least one of the navigation display sound, the success sound, and the navigation sound corresponding to the third stop operation may be configured to be output again, or it may be configured that none of them are output. In addition, at this time, the push order navigation images for the success states of "1", "2", and "3" are displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds) before the hopper empty error occurs. Even if the display has ended due to the hopper empty error, it is configured to be displayed again after the hopper empty error is cleared. Note that the GET image may be configured to be displayed again at this time, or may be configured not to be displayed.

After that, the push order navigation images for success modes "1", "2", and "3" may be configured so that they are displayed again and then stopped after a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed. Alternatively, the display may be immediately terminated even before a predetermined period of time has elapsed since it was displayed again.

With this configuration, the player can smoothly understand the game situation. In particular, by reproducing all the push order navigation images in a successful manner after a predetermined error is cleared, it can be made clear that all the stop operations were performed in a correct manner.

In addition, if the hopper empty error occurs after the third stop operation (final stop operation) is performed in the correct manner, an image related to the hopper empty error will be displayed at a predetermined navigation timing after the hopper empty error is cleared. It may be configured such that the display of ``1'' and ``2'' is not displayed, and the press order navigation image of ``3'' is displayed in a successful manner. Note that at this time, at least one of the navigation display sound, the success sound, and the navigation sound corresponding to the third stop operation may be configured to be output again, or it may be configured that none of them are output. In addition, at this time, the push order navigation image for the success mode "3" has finished displaying after a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has passed since the display started before the hopper empty error occurred. Even if the hopper empty error is cleared, the display may be configured to be displayed again, and the display may be terminated after a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the hopper empty error is cleared, or the display may be configured to be displayed again. The display may be immediately terminated even before a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the display was started.
With this configuration, it can be made clear that the third stop operation was performed as the stop operation immediately before the predetermined error occurred, and that the third stop operation was performed in a correct manner. .

In addition, if the hopper empty error occurs after the third stop operation (final stop operation) is performed in the correct manner, an image related to the hopper empty error will be displayed at a predetermined navigation timing after the hopper empty error is cleared. It may be configured such that the display of ``1'' to ``3'' is ended and none of the push order navigation images of ``1'' to ``3'' are displayed. Note that at this time, at least one of the navigation display sound, the success sound, and the navigation sound corresponding to the third stop operation may be configured to be output again, or it may be configured that none of them are output.
With this configuration, the player can recognize that he has already completed the final stop operation.

In addition, if the predetermined error occurs before the payout process is executed, the push order navigation image of "1" to "3" is configured to be displayed in a success mode at a predetermined navigation timing after the predetermined error is cleared. , if the predetermined error occurs after the payout process is executed, none of the push order navigation images from "1" to "3" will be displayed at the predetermined navigation timing after the predetermined error is cleared. The display content after a predetermined error is cleared may be configured to be different depending on whether the situation before the error occurs is before or after the execution of the payout process.

(4) If the first stop operation is performed in an incorrect manner, and then a predetermined error occurs before the second stop operation. First, when the start switch 12 is operated, the push order navigation image of "123" is displayed on the LCD. will be displayed. Here, the push order navigation image for "1" corresponds to the stop switch that should be operated first (first stop operation), so it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation image for "2" and "3" is displayed in an emphasized manner. The image is displayed in a normal manner. Additionally, a navigation voice saying "Left" is output in response to the first stop operation. At this time, the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in an emphasized manner, so the "navi number image" and " At least one of the navigation background images is displayed in a larger size.

After that, if the first stop operation is performed in an incorrect manner (for example, the stop switch corresponding to the middle reel 8b is operated), all the push order navigation images are displayed in a failure manner, and after being displayed in a failure manner, When a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) has elapsed, the display of all push order navigation images is ended. Further, a voice saying "What are you doing?" is output from the speaker S, indicating that the pressing order is incorrect.

After that, in a situation where the second stop operation has not been performed yet, a hopper empty error occurs, and an image related to the hopper empty error is displayed. Thereafter, at a predetermined navigation timing after the hopper empty error is canceled, the display of images related to the hopper empty error is ended, and all push order navigation images are displayed in a failure mode. Note that at this time, a failure sound indicating that the pressing order was incorrect is not output. Note that the push order navigation image of the failure mode may be configured so that when it is displayed again after the power is turned off and restored, the display is terminated after a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since it was displayed again. , the display may be immediately terminated even before a predetermined period of time has elapsed since it was displayed again.

In this way, if the stop operation is performed in an incorrect manner before the hopper empty error occurs, the push order navigation image is displayed again in the failed manner after the hopper empty error is cleared, thereby informing the player of the gaming situation. Can be easily understood. In particular, even if it takes several minutes from the occurrence of the hopper empty error to the release of the hopper empty error, the push order navigation image of the failure mode will be displayed after the hopper empty error is cleared, so even if AT is in progress, It is possible to prevent a player from mistakenly thinking that the game machine is malfunctioning due to no payout or a small payout such as one coin.

Further, the display of the image related to the hopper empty error may be terminated at a predetermined navigation timing after the hopper empty error is canceled, and all push order navigation images may be configured not to be displayed. In this way, by not displaying the push order navigation image in the failure mode again after the hopper empty error is cleared, the player can return to the game without lowering his or her expectations.

(5) When the first stop operation is performed in a correct manner, the second stop operation is performed in an incorrect manner, and then a predetermined error occurs before the third stop operation. First, when the start switch 12 is operated, 123" is displayed on the LCD screen. Here, the push order navigation image for "1" corresponds to the stop switch that should be operated first (first stop operation), so it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation image for "2" and "3" is displayed in an emphasized manner. The image is displayed in a normal manner. Additionally, a navigation voice saying "Left" is output in response to the first stop operation. At this time, the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in an emphasized manner, so the "navi number image" and " At least one of the navigation background images is displayed in a larger size.

After that, when the first stop operation is performed in the correct manner (that is, the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a is operated), the press order navigation image for "1" is displayed in a successful manner, and the press order for "2" is displayed in a successful manner. The navigation image is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation image of "3" is displayed in a normal manner. Further, the navigation voice "Inside" corresponding to the second stop operation is output from the speaker S. In addition, at this time, the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in an emphasized mode, so the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in a normal mode. , at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" will be displayed in a large size.

After that, if the second stop operation is performed in an incorrect manner (for example, the stop switch corresponding to the right reel 8c is operated), the push order navigation image of "2" and "3" is displayed in an unsuccessful manner, and the failure occurs. When a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since they were displayed in this manner, the display of all push order navigation images ends. In addition, a voice saying "What are you doing?" is output from the speaker S, indicating that the pressing order is incorrect.

After that, in a situation where the third stop operation has not been performed yet, a hopper empty error occurs, and an image related to the hopper empty error is displayed. Thereafter, at a predetermined navigation timing after the hopper empty error is canceled, the display of images related to the hopper empty error is ended, and all push order navigation images are displayed in a failure mode. Note that at this time, a failure sound indicating that the pressing order was incorrect is not output. Note that the push order navigation image of the failure mode may be configured so that when it is displayed again after the power is turned off and restored, the display is terminated after a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since it was displayed again. , the display may be immediately terminated even before a predetermined period of time has elapsed since it was displayed again.

In this way, if the stop operation is performed in an incorrect manner before the hopper empty error occurs, the push order navigation image is displayed again in the failed manner after the hopper empty error is cleared, thereby informing the player of the gaming situation. Can be easily understood. In particular, even if it takes several minutes from the occurrence of the hopper empty error to the release of the hopper empty error, the push order navigation image of the failure mode will be displayed after the hopper empty error is cleared, so even if AT is in progress, It is possible to prevent a player from mistakenly thinking that the game machine is malfunctioning due to no payout or a small payout such as one coin.

Also, at a predetermined navigation timing after the hopper empty error is canceled, the display of the image related to the hopper empty error is finished, the press order navigation image for "1" is displayed in a successful mode, and the presses for "2" and "3" are displayed. The forward navigation image may be configured to be displayed in a failed manner. With this configuration, the player can smoothly understand the game situation. In particular, it is possible to clarify in which stop operation the button was pressed in the wrong order.

Furthermore, the display of the image related to the hopper empty error may be terminated at a predetermined navigation timing after the hopper empty error is canceled, and the navigation images for the push order of "2" and "3" may be displayed in a failed manner. good. With this configuration, the player can smoothly understand the game situation. In particular, it is possible to clarify which stop operation caused a mistake in the pressing order.

Further, the display of the image related to the hopper empty error may be terminated at a predetermined navigation timing after the hopper empty error is canceled, and all push order navigation images may be configured not to be displayed. In this way, by not displaying the push order navigation image in the failure mode again after the hopper empty error is cleared, the player can return to the game without lowering his or her expectations.

(6) When the first stop operation or the second stop operation is operated in an incorrect manner and a predetermined error occurs after the third stop operation First, when the start switch 12 is operated, the push order navigation of "123" The image is displayed on the LCD. Here, the push order navigation image for "1" corresponds to the stop switch that should be operated first (first stop operation), so it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation image for "2" and "3" is displayed in an emphasized manner. The image is displayed in a normal manner. Additionally, a navigation voice saying "Left" is output in response to the first stop operation. At this time, the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in an emphasized manner, so the "navi number image" and " At least one of the navigation background images is displayed in a larger size.

After that, if the first stop operation or the second stop operation is performed in an incorrect manner, the push order navigation image that was displayed at the time of failure in the push order will be displayed in the failure manner, and after being displayed in the failure manner, a predetermined When the time (for example, 0.3 seconds) has elapsed, the display of the push order navigation image is ended. Further, a voice saying "What are you doing?" is output from the speaker S, indicating that the pressing order is incorrect.

Thereafter, a hopper empty error occurs after the third stop operation is performed, and an image related to the hopper empty error is displayed. Thereafter, at a predetermined navigation timing after the hopper empty error is canceled, the display of images related to the hopper empty error is ended, and all push order navigation images are displayed in a failure mode. Note that at this time, a failure sound indicating that the pressing order was incorrect is not output. Note that the push order navigation image of the failure mode may be configured so that when it is displayed again after the power is turned off and restored, the display is terminated after a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since it was displayed again. , the display may be immediately terminated even before a predetermined period of time has elapsed since it was displayed again.

In this way, if the stop operation is performed in an incorrect manner before the hopper empty error occurs, the push order navigation image is displayed again in the failed manner after the hopper empty error is cleared, thereby informing the player of the gaming situation. Can be easily understood. In particular, even if it takes several minutes from the occurrence of the hopper empty error to the release of the hopper empty error, the push order navigation image of the failure mode will be displayed after the hopper empty error is cleared, so even if AT is in progress, It is possible to prevent a player from mistakenly thinking that the game machine is malfunctioning due to no payout or a small payout such as one coin.

Further, the display of the image related to the hopper empty error may be terminated at a predetermined navigation timing after the hopper empty error is canceled, and all push order navigation images may be configured not to be displayed. In this way, by not displaying the push order navigation image of the failure mode again after the hopper empty error is canceled, the player can return to the game without lowering his or her expectations.

<Configuration regarding display of push order navigation image and reel stop warning image>
In addition, in games where the push order bell is won as a result of an internal lottery and the push order navigation image is displayed, if the reels start rotating (or the first stop operation or the second stop operation), no stop operation is performed for a predetermined period of time. (3 minutes) have elapsed, the reel stop warning image (also referred to as a stop promotion image) is displayed, and after that, in a situation where the reel stop warning image and the push order navigation image are displayed at the same time, the power is turned off. occurs, and then at a predetermined navigation timing after the power is turned off and restored, the push order navigation image is displayed again, but the reel stop warning image may be configured not to be displayed again. With this configuration, even if an unexpected situation such as a power outage occurs during a game, the player can concentrate on the push order navigation image, thereby making it possible to prevent mistakes in the push order. In addition, regarding the display mode of the push order navigation image at this time, the above-mentioned <Configuration regarding display of push order navigation image and power-off> can be applied as appropriate.

<Explanation of error related to hopper 44 applicable to this embodiment and winning lamp display>
Next, the relationship between errors related to the hopper 44 and winning effects that can be applied to this embodiment will be explained.

In the productions applicable to this embodiment described below, it is possible to win a prize by executing a winning lamp production based on winning a small role such as a push order winning combination, or a winning lamp production based on a replay winning such as a replay winning combination. The purpose is to make players appropriately aware of the following.
Further, even if a hopper empty error occurs after winning a prize, the purpose is to make the player aware of the result of the game before the error occurs.

The configuration related to the error regarding the hopper 44 and the winning lamp performance that can be applied to this embodiment will be described below.

<Winning LED lamp>
This is a part (not shown) of the performance lamp (LED lamp) provided on the front panel PS2, and is a lamp that lights up or flashes when a prize is won. It is also a lamp that lights up or flashes when an error occurs such as a door open error or a hopper empty error.

<Main control means>
The main processing that the main control means has is described in this embodiment, the explanation of the winning effect applicable to this embodiment, the settlement effect and the input effect, the error and winning effect regarding the hopper 44 applicable to this embodiment, etc. However, details of the processing omitted in the description of this embodiment will be described below.

<Oshijunyaku>
This is a winning role in the winning lottery (internal lottery), and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning winning combination is stopped and displayed on the active line, and when it is determined to be a winning prize by the winning determination process, the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed is This is a role that pays out medals based on this. As symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed in the push order combination, there are a correct symbol combination that is stopped and displayed when the button is operated in the correct push order, and an incorrect symbol combination that is stopped and displayed when the push order is not operated in the correct push order. The correct symbol combination is a symbol combination in which a bell symbol mainly composed of yellow, such as bell-bell-bell, is stopped and displayed on the active line, and 12 pieces are paid out. For incorrect symbol combinations, a symbol combination consisting of, for example, blank-replay-watermelon is stopped and displayed on the active line, and one piece is paid out.

<Cherry role>
This is a winning combination in the winning lottery (internal lottery), and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning cherry winning combination is stopped and displayed on the active line, and when it is determined to be a winning prize by the winning determination process, based on the symbol combination that was stopped and displayed. This is the role that pays out medals. The symbol combination corresponding to the cherry combination is a symbol combination in which a cherry symbol mainly composed of red, such as cherry-cherry-cherry, is stopped and displayed on the active line, and one symbol is paid out.

<Replay role>
This is a role that can be won in the winning role lottery (internal lottery), and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning replay role is displayed on the active line, and when it is determined to be a winning prize by the winning determination process, based on the symbol combination that was stopped and displayed. This is a hand that grants replay. The symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination is a symbol combination in which replay symbols mainly composed of blue, such as Replay-Replay-Replay, are stopped and displayed on the active line.

<Winning process (payout process)>
The winning process is a process of paying out predetermined game medals according to the winning small winning combination (stopped display symbol combination) when it is determined by the winning determination process that the small winning combination has won. Paying out the game medals here means adding to the credits if the credit storage has not reached the upper limit, and paying out the game medals from the hopper 44 if the credit storage has reached the upper limit. The main control means transmits a payout start command to the sub-control means when starting a payout based on winnings (whether it is adding credits or paying out from the hopper 44), and ends the payout based on winnings. When doing so, a payout end command is sent to the sub-control means. Based on the payout start command and the payout end command, the sub-control means can execute winning presentations such as outputting game medal payout sounds, back lamp presentation (also referred to as BL presentation), and execution of winning lamp presentation. Note that the payout start command includes information on the number of game medals to be paid out, and the payout start command and payout end command are sent even when there is no payout (at the time of a loss or when winning a prize in a re-game). When losing or winning a replay combination, information on the number of game medals to be paid out is set to 0 and then a payout end command is sent. Even when a replay winning combination is won, the sub-control means can execute winning presentations such as output of the winning sound of the replay winning combination and back lamp presentation based on the payout start command and payout end command.

<Automatic loading process>
The automatic bet process (automatic bet process) is a process that is executed when it is determined in the winning determination process that the replay combination has won. In the automatic insertion process, a bet is automatically set for the same number of bets as the number of bets for the game in which the replay combination has won, without inserting game medals. When the automatic insertion process is executed, the main control means (main control board 100) transmits an automatic insertion command corresponding to the number of bets set (inserted) to the sub-control means. Note that in this embodiment, the sub-control means does not perform the insertion effect (output of the insertion sound) based on the automatic insertion command, but performs insertion effects such as output of the insertion sound in the same way as when receiving the medal insertion command or the storage insertion command. You may also perform a performance.

In addition, even after the automatic insertion process, game medals are set to bet or stored in credits before starting a game (after setting the required number of bets and operating the start lever). As in the case before), when the payment switch is operated, payment processing becomes possible. However, in the settlement process after the automatic insertion process, the set bet number is not paid out, but the game medals corresponding to the stored number of credits are paid out to the player from the hopper 44 (settlement process).

<Sub-control means>
Various performances can be executed depending on the progress of the game, and explanations of winning performances, settlement performances, and input performances applicable to this embodiment, errors and winning performances regarding the hopper 44 applicable to this embodiment, etc. Execute the effects described in . In this embodiment, in addition, a winning lamp effect is executed.

<Winning production>
This is a production executed when game medals are paid out, or a production executed when a symbol corresponding to a replay combination wins (displays), and is executed based on a payout start command, a payout end command, etc. Ru. When the game medals are paid out, a payout sound indicating that the game medals are being paid out, a back lamp effect, and a winning lamp effect are executed. When the symbol corresponding to the replay winning combination wins, a winning sound is output, a back lamp effect, and a winning lamp effect are executed to indicate that the replay win has been won. It should be noted that if the push-order combination is won in the combination lottery (internal lottery) and an incorrect symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the active line, it is also possible to prevent the winning effect from being executed.

<Output of payout sound>
The game medal payout sounds outputted during execution of the game medal payout process include a payout sound A and a payout sound C, which are different from each other. Payout sound A is normally used (during non-AT) when the pressing order is won, and as a result of operating in the correct pressing order, the correct symbol combination stops and an advantageous payout (payout of 12 game medals) is made. This is the payout sound that is output. Payout sound C is the payout sound that is output when the cherry winning combination is won during normal times (non-AT), the symbol combination corresponding to the cherry winning combination stops, and the payout (payout of one game medal) is performed. be.

The dispensing sound A starts when the dispensing start command is received, and the output of the first sound (for example, a zu sound) is repeated until the dispensing end command is received, and after receiving the dispensing end command, the output starts for a first specific time ( This is a payout sound that repeats the output of the first sound for a period of, for example, 1 second) and ends. The payout sound A is the first payout sound period (during the period in which the actual payout is performed) which is longer than the period during which the actual payout is performed (the period during which the payout process is performed, for example, approximately 1.2 seconds). By outputting the sound over a period (one specific time period), it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that a payout is being made. In addition, by outputting the payout sound over a predetermined payout sound period that is longer than the period in which the payout is being made, the player can be assured that the payout is being made during the period in which the payout sound is being output. As a result, the start time of the next game can be expected to be delayed, and as a result, when a performance based on the result of an internal lottery is being performed over a certain period of time, it is more likely to be executed without being canceled midway.

The dispensing sound C starts when the dispensing start command is received, and the output of the third sound (e.g. the sound C) is repeated until the dispensing end command is received. When the dispensing end command is received, the output of the third sound (for example, the sound C) starts at a fourth specific time ( This is a payout sound that repeats the output of a predetermined sound for a period of 1.5 seconds (for example, 1.5 seconds) and then ends. In other words, the payout sound C is a third payout sound period (the period during which the actual payout is performed plus the above-mentioned fourth specific time) which is longer than the period during which the actual payout is performed (for example, about 0.2 seconds). This third payout sound period is shorter than the first payout sound period of payout sound A because the number of game medals to be paid out is smaller. In this way, the payout sound C has a shorter period than the payout sound A, but by outputting the payout sound over a longer period than the period in which the payout is being made, the player can receive a small number of coins. It is possible to avoid overhearing, and it is possible to recognize that game medals have been awarded.
The output of the payout sound is not canceled (terminated) by bet setting (receiving the medal insertion command and storage insertion command), but is canceled (terminated) by the game start operation (reception of the start switch reception command).

Note that the output of the dispensing sound was started after receiving the dispensing start command, and the dispensing sound was output until a predetermined time elapsed after receiving the dispensing end command, but when the dispensing start command was received, the dispensing end command was output. The payout sound is played for a predetermined time, which is the time taken from the start of payout to the end of payout (whichever is longer compared to the addition of credits and the payout of game medals), plus the first specific time and fourth specific time, without using a trigger. It may also be possible to output the following.
Further, although the payout sound A and the payout sound C are different from each other, the same payout sound may be outputted.

<Output of winning sound>
There is a winning sound A as a winning sound that is output when a replay combination is won. The winning sound A is a winning sound that starts when the payout start command is received and outputs the fourth sound (for example, a sound) until a fifth specific time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed. By outputting the winning sound for a certain period of time, it is possible for the player not to miss hearing the winning sound, and it is possible to recognize that the replay combination has won.
The output of the winning sound is not canceled (ended) by the payout end command or the bet setting (receiving the automatic insertion command), but is canceled (end) by the game start operation (receiving the start switch reception command). Note that the output time of the winning sound A may be configured to end before the automatic insertion is performed, or may be configured to end before the game start operation becomes possible.

<Back lamp effect>
The back lamp effects include a back lamp effect A, a back lamp effect C, and a back lamp effect D, which are different from each other. Back lamp effect A is output (executed) when the pressing order winning combination is won during normal times (non-AT), and as a result of operating in the correct pressing order, the correct symbol combination stops and 12 pieces are paid out. This is a back lamp effect. Back lamp effect C is a back lamp effect that is output (executed) when the cherry role is won in normal times (non-AT), the symbol combination corresponding to the cherry role stops, and one piece is paid out. . Back lamp performance D is a back lamp performance that is output (executed) when a replay combination is won during normal times (non-AT) and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination stops.

The back lamp effect A starts when the payout start command is received, and the back lamp is repeatedly turned on and off in the first pattern until the payout end command is received, and after the payout end command is received, the back lamp is turned on and off for a first specific time ( For example, the backlight is turned on and off in the first pattern over a period of 1 second) and ends. Back lamp effect A is a first back lamp effect period (the above-mentioned first specific time is added to the period during which actual payout is performed) which is longer than the period during which actual payout is performed (for example, about 1.2 seconds). By executing the payout over a period of 30 minutes, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that a payout is being made. In addition, by executing (outputting) the back lamp effect A for a first back lamp effect period that is longer than the period in which the payout is being performed, the payout is not performed during the period when the back lamp effect A is being executed. This can be expected to delay the start of the next game by making the player recognize that the game is being played, and can also delay the start of the next game. It is more likely to be executed without being canceled. It should be noted that the back lamp performance A is canceled (terminated) by bet setting (receiving the medal insertion command and the storage insertion command).

The back lamp effect C starts when the payout start command is received, and the back lamp is repeatedly turned on and off in the third pattern until the payout end command is received, and after the payout end command is received, the back lamp is turned on and off for a first specific time ( For example, the backlight is turned on and off in the third pattern over a period of 1 second) and ends. Back lamp effect C is a third back lamp effect period (the above-mentioned first specific time is added to the period during which actual payout is performed) which is longer than the period during which actual payout is performed (for example, about 0.2 seconds). By executing the payout over a period of 30 minutes, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that a payout is being made. In addition, by executing (outputting) the back lamp effect C for a third back lamp effect period that is longer than the period in which the payout is being performed, the payout is not performed during the period when the back lamp effect C is being executed. This can be expected to delay the start of the next game by making the player recognize that the game is being played, and can also delay the start of the next game. It is more likely to be executed without being canceled. Note that, like the back lamp effect A, the back lamp effect C is canceled (ended) when the bet is set (receiving the medal insertion command and the storage insertion command).

The back lamp performance D starts when the payout start command is received, and ends after the back lamp is repeatedly turned on and off in a fourth pattern over a first specific time (for example, 1 second). By executing the back lamp performance D over the fourth back lamp performance period (the same period as the first specific time), it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the replay combination has won. In addition, by executing (outputting) back lamp effect D during the fourth back lamp effect period, it will appear as if processing based on the replay role is being performed during the period in which back lamp effect D is being executed. It can be expected to make players aware of this and delay the start of the next game.Furthermore, it can be executed without being canceled midway through, such as when a performance depending on the result of an internal lottery is being performed over a certain period of time. become more susceptible to Note that the back lamp effect D is not canceled (terminated) by bet setting (automatic insertion command), but is canceled (terminated) by game start operation (reception of start switch reception command).

<Winning lamp performance>
The winning lamp effects include a winning lamp effect A, a winning lamp effect C, and a winning lamp effect D, which are different from each other. Winning lamp effect A is output (executed) when the pressing order winning combination is won during normal times (non-AT), and as a result of operating in the correct pressing order, the correct symbol combination stops and 12 pieces are paid out. This is the winning lamp performance. Winning lamp performance C is a winning lamp performance that is output (executed) when the cherry winning combination is won during normal times (non-AT), the symbol combination corresponding to the cherry winning combination stops, and one piece is paid out. . Winning lamp performance D is a winning lamp performance that is output (executed) when a replay combination is won during normal times (non-AT) and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination stops.

Winning lamp effect A starts when the payout start command is received, and the winning LED lamp turns on and off in yellow repeatedly until the payout end command is received (fifth pattern). The winning LED lamp is repeatedly turned on and off in the fifth pattern for one specific period of time (for example, one second), and ends. Winning lamp effect A is a first winning lamp effect period (the above-mentioned first specific time is added to the period during which actual payout is being performed) which is longer than the period during which actual payout is being performed (for example, about 1.5 seconds). By executing the game over a period of 30 minutes, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that a payout is being made. In addition, by executing (outputting) winning lamp effect A for a first winning lamp effect period that is longer than the period in which payouts are being made, payouts will not be made during the period in which winning lamp effect A is being executed. This can be expected to delay the start of the next game by making the player recognize that the game is being played. It is more likely to be executed without being canceled. It should be noted that the winning lamp effect A is not canceled (terminated) by bet setting (receiving the medal insertion command and storage insertion command), but is canceled (terminated) by the game start operation (reception of the start switch reception command).

Winning lamp effect C starts when the payout start command is received, and the winning LED lamp repeatedly turns on and off in red until the payout end command is received (sixth pattern). The winning LED lamp is repeatedly turned on and off in the sixth pattern for a specific period of time (for example, 2.3 seconds), and ends. Winning lamp performance C is a third winning lamp performance period (the above-mentioned sixth specific time is added to the period during which actual payout is being performed) which is longer than the period during which actual payout is being performed (for example, about 0.2 seconds). By executing the game over the same length as the first winning lamp presentation period, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that a payout is being made. In addition, by executing (outputting) the winning lamp effect C for a third winning lamp effect period that is longer than the period in which payouts are being made, payouts will not be made during the period when the winning lamp effect C is being executed. This can be expected to delay the start of the next game by making the player recognize that the game is being played, and can also delay the start of the next game. It is more likely to be executed without being canceled. It should be noted that the winning lamp performance C is not canceled (terminated) by bet setting (receiving a medal insertion command or storage insertion command), but is canceled (terminated) by a game start operation (reception of a start switch reception command).

Winning lamp effect D starts when the payout start command is received, and ends by repeatedly lighting and extinguishing the winning LED lamp in blue for a seventh specific time (for example, 2.5 seconds) (seventh pattern). . Winning lamp performance D is executed over the fourth winning lamp performance period (same period as the seventh specific time and the same length as the first winning lamp performance period), so that the player receives a replay role. This can make it easier to recognize that you have won a prize. In addition, by executing (outputting) the winning lamp effect D during the fourth winning lamp effect period, it will be as if processing based on the replay role is being performed during the period in which the winning lamp effect D is being executed. It can be expected to make players aware of this and delay the start of the next game, and furthermore, it can be executed without being canceled midway through, such as when a performance based on the result of an internal lottery is being performed over a certain period of time. It becomes easier. Note that the winning lamp performance D is not canceled (terminated) by bet setting (automatic insertion command), but is canceled (terminated) by game start operation (reception of start switch reception command).

Winning lamp performances A, C, and D are configured so that the lighting and blinking patterns and the lengths of the execution periods are the same, although the winning LED lamps have different colors when lit. By making only the colors different, it becomes easier to recognize that the winning lamp performance is a performance caused by a winning role. In addition, by making the length of the execution period the same as the length of winning lamp effect A, when winning a cherry role or replay role, the next winning lamp effect will be executed earlier than when the correct symbol combination of the pressing order role is stopped and displayed. The game can now be started, but since the winning lamp effect is being executed, it can be expected that the start of the next game will be delayed until the winning lamp effect is completed.

In addition, in the winning lamp effects A and C, the winning lamp effect was executed until the first specific time or the sixth specific time elapsed after receiving the payout end command, but once the payout start command was received, the payout end command was used as a trigger. The winning lamp effect is executed for a predetermined time that is the time taken from the start of payout to the end of payout (whichever is longer compared to the addition of credits and the payout of game medals) plus the first specific time and the sixth specific time. You may also do so.
In addition, the "first winning lamp presentation period", "third winning lamp presentation period", and "fourth winning lamp presentation period" of winning lamp presentations A, C, and D are set to the "first winning lamp presentation period" of payout sound A. "sound period" are the same period, but "first winning lamp presentation period", "third winning lamp presentation period", and "fourth winning lamp presentation period" are referred to as "first payout sound period". It may be a different period. It is preferable that the "first winning lamp presentation period", "third winning lamp presentation period", and "fourth winning lamp presentation period" be the same period, and the maximum payout period that can be paid out in one game. The length may be longer than the time required just to pay out the number of medals.

<Error notification>
For error notification, when an error such as an error related to the hopper 44 or a door opening error occurs, the main control means displays an error code on the acquisition number display 27, and the sub control means displays a liquid crystal (display device), The speaker S and the winning LED lamp notify that an error has occurred. The winning LED lamp lights up in red during the period when it is notifying that an error has occurred. The winning LED lamp lights up in red when the cherry winning combination is won, but it continues to light up in red when an error is notified, making the pattern different from when the cherry winning combination is won, and notifying the occurrence of an error. It is possible to determine whether the prize is being played or notifying a prize winner.

<Payment performance>
This is a performance executed when the game medals are paid out, and a payment sound (payment performance) indicating that the game medals have been paid out and a sound indicating that the payment has been completed are output. In the settlement performance, since the performance using the winning LED lamp and the back lamp is not executed, even if a payout is made, it can be easily recognized that the performance is different from the performance based on the winning of the small winning combination or the replay winning combination.

Various performances executed according to the progress of the game will be explained below with reference to FIGS. 53 to 62. FIG. 53 is a time chart when the MAX bet switch is not operated after the end of the payout process based on the winning of the pressed combination, and FIG. 54 is a time chart of the MAX bet switch after the end of the payout process based on the winning of the pressed combination. FIG. 55 is a time chart when the input operation using the MAX bet switch is not performed after the end of the payout process based on the winning of the cherry winning combination, and FIG. 57 is a time chart when the insertion operation is performed using the MAX bet switch after the end of the payout process based on the winning of the replay combination, and FIG. FIG. 58 is a time chart when game medals are inserted after the automatic insertion process based on the winning of the replay combination is completed, and FIG. FIG. 60 is a time chart when the settlement operation is performed using the settlement switch after the automatic insertion process based on the winning of the replay winning combination. FIG. This is a time chart for the case where the payout is not performed normally after winning a prize (when a hopper empty error occurs), and FIG. This is a time chart.

Note that in FIGS. 53 to 62, ON and OFF are used for convenience of explanation, but the corresponding processing and performance status are described in parentheses. Specifically, for the payout process/settlement process/winning lamp effect (winning LED lamp)/BL effect/settlement effect/error notification (winning LED lamp), ON indicates that they are being executed, and OFF indicates that they are not being executed. When it changes from OFF to ON, it means that the process starts, and when it changes from ON to OFF, it ends. ON for payout indicates that one game medal has been paid out, and OFF indicates that no game medal has been paid out. Regarding the payout sound/putting sound/winning sound, ON indicates a state in which they are being output, and OFF indicates a state in which they are not output. For the MAX bet lamp/medal insertion lamp, ON indicates a lit state, and OFF indicates a non-lit state. MAX bet switch operation/settlement switch operation indicates that ON is operated, and OFF indicates that it is not operated. For medal insertion, ON indicates that the inserted game medals have passed through the medal selector 34 normally (the input sensor provided in the medal selector 34 detects the game medals), and OFF indicates that no game medals have been inserted. shows. ON of error (hopper empty) and error (hopper retention) indicates a state where an error has occurred (an error has been detected and an error has been set), and OFF indicates a state where no error has occurred. ON of the error display indicates that an error code is displayed by the main control means or an error screen is displayed by the sub-control means based on the occurrence of an error, and OFF indicates that the error code or error screen is displayed. Indicates a state in which this is not done.

It can be combined with the acquisition display performance, cumulative display performance, result notification performance, PUSH performance, and comment performance described earlier, and the times t0 to t5, t17, and t18 in FIGS. 31 to 41 and the times in FIGS. 53 to 62 t0 to t5, t17, and t18 are the same timing.

<If the input operation using the MAX bet switch is not performed after the payout process based on the winning combination of the push order is completed>
FIG. 53 shows a case in which a winning combination is achieved by operating in the correct pressing order and the correct symbol combination is stopped and displayed. At time t0, the main control means starts the payout process, and the sub-control means outputs the payout sound A (referred to as payout sound in the figure, the same applies hereinafter) based on the received payout start command, and outputs the winning LED lamp. The winning lamp effect A (referred to as the winning lamp effect in the figure, the same applies hereinafter) and the back lamp effect A on the back lamp (referred to as the BL effect in the figure, the same applies hereinafter) are started. The time required for the payout process is 1.5 seconds when it is executed normally (in this example, 12 game medals are normally paid out). At time t1, the main control means ends the payout process and sends a payout end command to the sub control means. The sub-control means continues the output of the payout sound A, the winning lamp effect A, and the back lamp effect A for a period T1 (first specific time) as a winning effect based on the payout end command.

After the payout process ends at time t1, the main control means performs processes such as updating the RT status (game end check process), and turns on the blocker to make it possible to insert game medals. . The main control means turns on the MAX bet lamp at time t2 based on the fact that game medals can be inserted. The MAX bet lamp continues to be lit because the MAX bet switch was not operated. At the timing of time t5, since the T1 period has passed since the timing of time t1, the sub-control means ends the output of the payout sound A, the winning lamp effect A, and the back lamp effect A. That is, the period from time t0 to t5 can be said to be a first payout sound period, a first back lamp effect period, and a first winning lamp effect period. As described above, smooth control is possible even when various situations are combined, such as turning on the MAX bet lamp while continuing to output payout sound A, winning lamp effect A, and back lamp effect A at the timing after time t1. It is possible, and it is appropriate that the player is made aware that a payout has been made by continuing the output of payout sound A, winning lamp effect A, and back lamp effect A, and also that bet setting can be made by MAX bet operation. The performance of the gaming machine can be improved.

<If the input operation using the MAX bet switch is performed after the payout process based on the winning combination of the push order is completed>
FIG. 54 shows a case in which a winning combination is achieved by operating in the correct pressing order and the correct symbol combination is stopped and displayed. Until the timing of time t2, it is the same as the case where the MAX bet switch is not operated to make a bet after the payout process based on the winning of the winning combination, and at the time t3, the MAX bet switch is made to make a bet. As the MAX bet switch is operated, the main control means ends lighting of the MAX bet lamp (turns off), and the sub control means ends the back lamp effect A, and from time t3 to time t4. (During the T2 period) As an injection effect, the input sound A (referred to as input sound in the figure, the same applies hereinafter) is output three times. At the timing after time t3, smooth control is possible even when various situations such as the output of the payout sound A, the winning lamp effect A, and the output of the input sound A are combined, and as a result, the payout is performed. While making the player aware that the MAX bet switch has been operated and the bet setting has been made, it is possible to improve the performance of the gaming machine. Further, at the timing of time t3, the output of the payout sound A and the winning lamp effect A continue, but by ending the back lamp effect A, it is possible to visually recognize that the bet setting has been made. In addition, in FIG. 43, the explanation was given using the insertion operation using the MAX bet switch, but even if the insertion operation using the 1 bet switch or the insertion of medals is performed, the back lamp effect A is similarly terminated and the insertion sound A is output.

<If the input operation using the MAX bet switch is not performed after the payout process based on the winning of the cherry winning combination is completed>
FIG. 55 shows a case where the symbol combination corresponding to the cherry combination is stopped and displayed on the activated line and a prize is won. At time t0, the main control means starts the payout process, and the sub-control means outputs the payout sound C (referred to as payout sound in the figure, the same applies hereinafter) based on the received payout start command, and outputs the winning LED lamp. The winning lamp effect C (referred to as the winning lamp effect in the figure, the same applies hereinafter) and the back lamp effect C on the back lamp (referred to as the BL effect in the figure, the same applies hereinafter) are started. The time required for the payout process is 0.2 seconds when it is executed normally (in this example, one game medal is normally paid out). At time t19, the main control means ends the payout process and sends a payout end command to the sub control means. The sub-control means outputs the payout sound C as a winning effect based on the payout end command for a T4 period (fourth specific time) until the timing of time t24, and executes the winning lamp effect C until the timing of time t5. During the T6 period (sixth specific time), the back lamp effect C is continued for the T1 period (first specific time) until the timing of time t23.

After the payout process is completed at time t19, the main control means performs processes such as updating the RT status (game end check process), and turns on the blocker to make it possible to insert game medals. . The main control means turns on the MAX bet lamp at time t20 based on the fact that game medals can be inserted. The MAX bet lamp continues to be lit because the MAX bet switch was not operated. (In this diagram, it is assumed that enough credit has been accumulated to enable bet setting by operating the MAX bet switch, and if it is not possible to set a bet by operating the MAX bet switch, then at time t20. At the timing, game medals can be inserted, but the MAX bet lamp does not light up.)

At the timing of time t23, since the T1 period has passed since the timing of time t19, the sub control means ends the back lamp effect A. That is, the period from time t0 to t23 can be said to be the third back lamp effect period. At the timing of time t24, since the T4 period has passed since the timing of time t19, the sub control means ends the output of the payout sound C. That is, the period from time t0 to t24 can be said to be the third payout sound period. At the timing of time t5, since the T6 period has passed since the timing of time t19, the sub-control means ends the winning lamp performance C. That is, the period from time t0 to t5 can be said to be the third winning lamp presentation period. As described above, at the timing after time t19, smooth control is possible even when various situations are combined, such as turning on the MAX bet lamp while continuing to output payout sound C, winning lamp effect C, and back lamp effect C. It is possible, and it is appropriate that the player is made aware that a payout has been made by continuing the output of the payout sound C, the winning lamp effect C, and the back lamp effect C, and that the bet can be set by MAX bet operation. The performance of the gaming machine can be improved.

<When inserting with the MAX bet switch after the payout process based on the winning of the cherry winning combination is completed>
FIG. 56 shows a case where the symbol combination corresponding to the cherry winning combination is stopped and displayed on the active line and a prize is won. Until the timing of time t20, it is the same as the case where the MAX bet switch is not operated after the payout process based on the winning of the cherry winning combination, and at the time t21, the MAX bet switch is operated. As the MAX bet switch is operated, the main control means ends lighting of the MAX bet lamp (turns off), and the sub control means ends the back lamp effect C, and from time t21 to time t22. (During the T2 period) Since three bets are made by the insertion operation using the MAX bet switch as an insertion effect, the insertion sound A (referred to as insertion sound in the figure, the same applies hereinafter) is output three times. At the timing after time t21, smooth control is possible even when various situations such as the output of the payout sound C, the winning lamp effect C, and the output of the input sound A are combined, and as a result, the payout is performed. While making the player aware that the MAX bet switch has been operated and the bet setting has been made, it is possible to improve the performance of the gaming machine. Further, at the timing of time t21, the output of the payout sound C and the winning lamp effect C continue, but by ending the back lamp effect C, it is possible to visually recognize that the bet setting has been made.

In addition, in FIG. 56, it is assumed that credits are accumulated to the extent that it is possible to set a bet by operating the MAX bet switch, and if it is not possible to set a bet by operating the MAX bet switch, the timing at time t20 is assumed. In this case, game medals can be inserted, but the MAX bet lamp does not light up. Furthermore, although the explanation has been made with reference to the insertion operation using the MAX bet switch, even if the insertion operation using the 1 bet switch and the insertion of medals are performed, the back lamp effect C is similarly terminated and the insertion sound A is output.

<If game medals are not inserted after the automatic insertion process based on winning replay combinations>
As shown in FIG. 57, at time t0, the main control means transmits a payout start command in which information on the number of game medals to be paid out is 0 to the sub-control means, and the sub-control means based on the received payout start command. output of winning sound A (referred to as winning sound in the figure, the same applies hereinafter), winning lamp effect D with the winning LED lamp (referred to as winning lamp effect in the figure, the same applies hereinafter), and back lamp effect D with the back lamp. (referred to as BL production in the figure, the same applies hereinafter). The sub-control means outputs the winning sound A as a winning effect for a T5 period (fifth specific time), outputs the winning lamp effect D for a T7 period (seventh specific time), and outputs the back lamp effect D for a T1 period based on the payout start command. (first specific time). At time t25, the main control means starts the automatic throwing process and sends an automatic throwing command to the sub-control means. At time t26, after the automatic insertion process is completed, the main control means turns on the blocker to enable game medals to be inserted.

At time t26, the main control means turns on the medal insertion ready lamp based on the fact that the game medals can be inserted. After that, no medals were inserted, so the light remained on. At the timing of time T29, since the T1 period has passed since the timing of time 09, the sub-control means ends the back lamp effect D. That is, the period from time t0 to t29 can be said to be the fourth back lamp effect period. At the timing of time t5, since the T7 period has elapsed from the timing of time t0, the sub-control means ends the winning lamp performance D. That is, the period from time t0 to t5 can be said to be the fourth winning lamp presentation period. As described above, smooth control is possible after time t26 even when various situations are combined, such as continuing the winning lamp effect D and the back lamp effect D and lighting the medal insertion ready lamp. By continuing the lamp effect D and the back lamp effect D, the player can be made aware that a payout has been made, and can also be made to appropriately recognize that it is possible to insert medals, thereby improving the performance of the gaming machine. can be achieved. In this figure, it is assumed that the accumulated credits have not reached the upper limit after the automatic insertion process, and if the game medals cannot be inserted, the medal insertion ready lamp will not light up at time t26 (the blocker is not turned on). Do not turn it on.

<When gaming medals are inserted after the automatic insertion process based on winning replay combinations>
As shown in FIG. 58, until the timing of time t26, it is the same as the case where the game medals are not inserted after the automatic insertion process based on the winning of the replay combination, and at the timing of time t27, the game medals are not inserted. As a result, the main control means stores one game medal in credit, and sends a storage number command to the sub control means. The sub-control means terminates the back lamp effect D based on receiving the storage number command, outputs the input sound B (referred to as input sound in the figure, hereinafter the same) once as an input effect, and sets the time. It is output from timing t27 to timing t28. At the timing after time t27, smooth control is possible even when various situations are combined, such as outputting the winning sound B while performing the winning lamp effect D, and thereby informing the player that the replay combination has won. At the same time, it is also possible to recognize that a certain number of coins have been inserted and one coin has been stored, and the performance of the gaming machine can be improved. Further, at the timing of time t27, the winning lamp effect D continues, but by ending the back lamp effect D, it is possible to visually recognize that the credit has been saved.
In addition, this diagram assumes that the accumulated credits have not reached the upper limit after the automatic injection process (the number of accumulated credits is 48 or less), and even if one game medal is inserted, the state in which game medals can be inserted is not. continuing.

<If you perform the payment operation using the payment switch after the payout process based on the winning combination of the push order>
As shown in FIG. 59, up to the timing of time t2, it is the same as the case where the MAX bet switch is operated after the payout process based on the winning of the pressed combination, and at the timing of time t3, the MAX bet switch is not operated. Instead, the payment switch is operated.
At time t3, the main control means starts the settlement process based on the operation of the settlement button, and ends lighting (turns off) the MAX bet lamp. Then, the sub-control means ends the output of the payout sound A, the winning lamp effect A, and the back lamp effect A at the timing of time t3 without waiting for the elapse of the T1 period. Thereafter, based on the payment start command, output of payment sound is started as payment performance. Note that although a settlement sound is output as a settlement effect, no effects such as a back lamp or a winning LED lamp are performed. When the payment process is started, the output of the payout sound A and the output of the payment sound are output at the same time, so that the player is not confused. By terminating the output of sound A, the winning lamp effect A, and the back lamp effect A, and not performing any effects using the back lamp or winning LED lamp, it is possible to accurately identify that a payment process that is different from the payout process is being performed. It is possible to make the player recognize it.

<If you perform the payment operation using the payment switch after the automatic insertion process based on winning the replay combination>
As shown in FIG. 60, up to time t26, it is the same as when game medals are inserted after the automatic insertion process based on the winning replay combination is completed, and at time t30, the settlement switch is operated.
At time t30, the main control means starts the payment processing based on the operation of the payment button, and ends the lighting of the medal insertion ready lamp (turns off). Then, the sub-control means ends the winning lamp effect D at the timing of time t30 without waiting for the T7 period and the back lamp effect D without waiting for the T1 period to elapse. Thereafter, based on the payment start command, output of payment sound is started as payment performance. Note that although the settlement sound is output, there is no effect using back lights or winning LED lamps. Due to the start of the payment process, winning lamp effect D and back lamp effect D that were scheduled to continue during the T7 period and T1 period will be terminated, and by not performing any effects using back lamps and winning LED lamps, The player can be made aware that payment processing is being performed. Note that this figure assumes that the number of credits stored has not reached the upper limit after the automatic input process and that 19 or more credits are stored.

<If the payout is not performed normally after winning the cherry prize (when a hopper empty error occurs)>
As shown in FIG. 61, the main control means starts the payout process at time t0, and the sub control means outputs the payout sound C, the winning lamp effect C, and the back lamp effect C based on the received payout start command. Start. After the timing t0, the payout process is executed, but since there are no game medals in the hopper 44, no game medals are paid out, and the rotation of the rotary disk continues. Then, at time t17, the main control means determines that the game medals in the hopper 44 are empty, ends the payout process, and sets a hopper empty error. Based on the occurrence of the hopper empty error, the main control means displays an error code, and the sub control means cancels the output of the payout sound C, the winning lamp effect C, and the back lamp effect C that were being executed. (After ending the display), an error screen is displayed and an error notification is executed using a winning LED lamp. Incidentally, until the timing of time t17, the output of the payout sound C, the winning lamp effect C, and the back lamp effect C are continuously executed. Until time t17, the winning LED lamp lights up in red as a winning lamp effect and repeats blinking, but at time t17, the winning LED lamp lights up in red as an error notification, so although it is the same red color, the lighting pattern is different. It is possible to recognize that the winning lamp display has been switched to error notification. The figure shows a case where a hopper empty error occurs without paying out any medals after the start of the payout process. If a hopper empty error occurs after paying out multiple game medals, the hopper empty error occurs. The timing at which the empty error occurs is later than time t17 due to the payout of a plurality of game medals.

<If the payout is not performed normally after winning the cherry prize (when a hopper retention error occurs)>
As shown in FIG. 62, the main control means starts the payout process at time t0, and the sub control means outputs the payout sound C, the winning lamp effect C, and the back lamp effect C based on the received payout start command. Start. After time t0, the payout process is executed, but since the discharge port of the hopper 44 is clogged with game medals, the payout of the game medals is not executed. Then, at the timing of time t18, since the payout sensor of the hopper 44 has detected continuously for 201ms or more since the start of the payout process, the main control means determines that the game medals are jammed, ends the payout process, and sets a hopper retention error. . Similarly, at time t18, the main control means displays an error code based on the occurrence of a hopper retention error, and the sub control means outputs the payout sound C, the winning lamp effect C, and the back. The lamp effect C is canceled (the display is ended) and an error screen is displayed.

The output of the payout sound C, the winning lamp effect C, and the back lamp effect C are executed from the start timing of the payout process, so the error screen is displayed because they are executed before the payout process starts and the hopper retention error occurs. It becomes possible to check the winning effects such as the output of the payout sound C, the winning lamp effect C, and the back lamp effect C before the winning effect is played. In addition, this figure shows a case where a hopper retention error occurs without paying out any medals after the start of the payout process. If the hopper retention error occurs after the hopper retention error occurs, the timing at which the hopper retention error occurs is a timing later than time t18 by the amount that one set of game medals is paid out, and the output of the payout sound C, the winning lamp effect C, and the back The period during which lamp effect C is executed becomes longer.

<Change of aspect>
The time to normally pay out 12 game medals was set to 1.5 seconds, and the time to normally pay out 1 game medal to 0.2 seconds, but the number of coins to be paid out and the payout process only added credits. The payout time may be changed depending on whether the game medals are paid out from the hopper 44 or whether it includes the payout of game medals from the hopper 44. In this case, the time required to pay out one game medal from the hopper 44 may be configured to be longer than the time required to add one game medal to the credit. Alternatively, it may be configured such that the time it takes to add one game medal to the credit is longer than the time it takes to pay out one game medal from the hopper 44.

In the winning lamp display, the color corresponds to the type of winning role (if you win the push order role and the correct symbol combination wins, it will light up in yellow, and if you win the cherry role, it will light up in red, and the replay will be displayed. When a winning combination is won, the light is emitted in blue), but the color of the light may be a common color (for example, white) regardless of the type of winning combination. By using a common color, it is possible to easily notify that a winning combination has been won regardless of the symbol combinations (rolls) that appear on the reels. In addition, the winning lamp performance can be executed regardless of the color of the symbol corresponding to the winning combination that is stopped on the active line, and misidentification can be prevented.
In addition, the common color regardless of the type of role may be white, which is the same for all roles, or it may be divided into several groups depending on the type of role (white for Bell and Replay roles, purple for Cherry and Watermelon roles). ) may be done.

Although the winning lamp effect is executed for a time determined by the winning combination after receiving the payout end command, it may be performed for a time determined depending on the winning combination after receiving the payout start command. For example, when the correct symbol combination, the symbol combination corresponding to the cherry combination, and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination are stopped, it may be 2.5 seconds.
Although the execution period of the winning lamp effect is set to be the same as the output period of the payout sound, it may be set to a different period. Further, although the execution period of the winning lamp effect is the same as the output period of the back lamp effect, it may be a different period. The execution period of the winning lamp performance can be set to be longer than the time related to the payout process (1.5 seconds) and shorter than the time required to set the hopper empty error (3.5 seconds).

Although the prize-winning lamp effect A is executed normally (during non-AT), it may also be executed during AT. Alternatively, the colors may be the same, but the lighting/extinguishing patterns and execution times may be different. Further, it may not be executed during AT. By not performing it during AT, a winning lamp performance can be performed each time for the correct symbol combination of the pressed combination, which has an increased winning frequency, so as not to cause trouble to the player.
Similarly, other winnings (cherry winning, replay winning) may be executed during AT, or may be configured not to be executed during AT.

It was assumed that the winning lamp performance does not end with the insertion operation using the MAX bet switch (receiving the storage insertion command) and the insertion of game medals (receiving the storage number command), but the insertion operation using the MAX bet switch (reception of the storage insertion command), The process may be terminated by inserting game medals (receiving the stored number command). After winning the replay combination, the automatic bet process may not end the winning lamp performance, but may be configured to end when game medals are inserted thereafter.
Although it is assumed that the back lamp performance ends with the insertion operation using the MAX bet switch (receiving the storage insertion command) and the insertion of game medals (reception of the storage number command), it may be configured so that it does not end.

Although the payment performance is not performed using the winning LED lamp, it is also possible to perform the performance using the winning LED lamp. The mode may be the same as the error notification performed when an error occurs, or the mode may be different from the error notification and the winning lamp performance executed when winning a winning combination. As for a different aspect, it is desirable that any one of the color of the winning LED lamp emitted, the pattern of lighting and blinking, and the time is different, so that it is possible to recognize that the winning LED lamp is different from the error notification and the winning lamp effect.

Although the error notification was performed using the winning LED lamp when an error occurred, it is also possible to notify the error in the same manner as in the case of a hopper empty error by using the winning LED lamp when the power is turned on or when there is a door opening error. . When the power is turned on, it continues for a certain period of time after the power is turned on, and in the case of a door open error, it continues until the door is closed or until a certain period of time has passed after the door is closed. In these situations, it is possible to proceed with the game, and there is a possibility that the execution of the error notification and the execution of the winning lamp effect overlap. If they overlap, error notification may be prioritized over winning lamp performance. Giving priority to error notification can also be configured such that while error notification is being executed, winning lamp effects are not executed even if a chance to execute them is met. Furthermore, if error notification is to be performed while the winning lamp effect is being executed, the error notification may be executed after the winning lamp effect is completed.

Further, giving priority to error notification may mean lighting the winning LED lamp corresponding to the error notification while error notification is being executed. Specifically, when the opportunity to execute the winning lamp effect is met, the winning lamp effect is executed, and when it is the period for executing the error notification, the winning LED lamp only emits light corresponding to the error notification, and the error notification is executed. The winning LED lamp may be configured to emit light corresponding to the winning lamp effect if the period for executing the winning lamp effect continues when the period for executing the notification ends.

The winning lamp effect is executed when the correct symbol combination stops in a game where the push order winning combination stops, when the symbol combination corresponding to the cherry combination stops, and when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination stops. An advantageous payout (payout of 12 pieces) regardless of the push order is won when the push order does not matter role (so-called shared bell) is won and the symbol combination (correct symbol combination) corresponding to the push order no matter role stops. It may be configured as follows. It may be configured to be executed when winning another winning combination such as a watermelon winning combination or a chance winning winning.
Furthermore, the lengths of time and periods described in the above embodiments are merely examples, and can be changed at any time.

<Correct operation challenge effect installed in the gaming machine in this embodiment>
The gaming machine in this embodiment is equipped with an effect that notifies only that the correct press order has been won when the press order winning combination has been won, without notifying the correct press order. It is called. Furthermore, when the eye-pull combination is won, a performance is provided that notifies the correct eye-press position but only that the eye-push combination has been won, and such a performance is referred to as a eye-press challenge performance. In addition, when the press order + eye-pull role is won, it is equipped with an effect that notifies the correct press order + eye-pull position, but only informs that the press order + eye-pull role has been won. It is called a sequential + eye-catching challenge performance. Such push order challenge performance, eye press challenge performance, and press order + eye press challenge performance are collectively referred to as correct operation challenge performance. The correct operation (correct press order or target press position) refers to an operation in which a higher bell among the press order bells stops.

In addition, when the press order + eye press combination is won, even if the correct answer press order is announced but the correct answer press position is not notified, or the correct answer press position is notified but the correct answer press order is not notified. Such an aspect is often referred to as a push order + eye push challenge effect, or simply a push order challenge effect or an eye push challenge effect. In any case, these aspects are also referred to as the correct operation challenge performance.

In addition, the correct answer operation challenge presentation includes a mode in which only the first stop is not announced when a 6-choice push order combination is won (in other words, a mode in which the player guesses the correct press order for the 3-choice first stop), and This includes a mode in which one stop is notified and a second stop is not notified (in other words, a mode in which the user guesses the correct pressing order of two options for the second stop).

The correct answer operation challenge presentation includes a mode in which, when a three-choice eye-pressing combination is won, it is reported that one eye-pressing position is different (in other words, a mode in which the player is made to guess the remaining two-choice eye-pressing positions).

When the combination of symbols of high bells stops due to the player's operation after executing the correct answer operation challenge performance (if the correct answer operation challenge performance is successful), a privilege according to the game state is given. For example, during normal times, it is an AT lottery or a CZ lottery, and when AT is in progress, it is a lottery for extending the number of AT games (so-called additional lottery).

The correct operation challenge performance may be performed in a predetermined gaming state managed by the main control means, or may be performed by lottery when a winning combination is selected for the correct operation challenge performance.

An example of the reel arrangement for realizing the correct operation challenge effect will be explained based on FIG. 63.

As shown in FIG. 63, the number of symbols on each reel is 20, and the large symbols that are easy to see include "yellow seven," "red seven," "bar," and "white seven." In addition, "Yellow Seven," "Red Seven," "Bar," and "White Seven" each have different colors, with yellow, red, black, and white standing out, making them more appealing than other designs. Since they are large in size and have different colors, they are easy for players to recognize even when the reels are spinning. Note that for advanced users, there is no problem in selecting "Cherry," "Watermelon," "Replay," "Bell A," "Bell B," and "Blank."

An example of a condition device for realizing the correct operation challenge effect will be explained based on FIG. 64.

As shown in FIG. 64, the bonus condition devices include a type 1 BB condition device, an RB-B condition device, and an RB-A condition device. In addition, as a winning or replaying condition device, there is a replay-A condition device, a winning-A1 to A6 condition device, a winning-B1 to B4 condition device, a winning-C1 to C12 condition device, and a winning-D1 to D8 condition device. ing. Note that the condition device shown in FIG. 64 is only a part, and it goes without saying that other condition devices may be provided.

Furthermore, in a plurality of specifications to be described later, some condition devices are unnecessary, and it is not necessary to have all the condition devices shown in FIG. 64. For example, the win-A1 to A6 condition devices and the win-B1 to B4 condition devices are necessary, but the win-C1 to C12 condition devices and the win-D1 to D8 condition device may be unnecessary. In the specifications described below, the explanation is limited to the necessarily necessary conditional devices, and there may or may not be any conditional devices that are not explained.

65 and 66 are diagrams showing symbol combinations for each winning symbol or replay symbol. The left reel column in the diagram shows the symbols corresponding to the left reel in the winning symbols, the middle reel column shows the symbols corresponding to the middle reel in the winning symbols, and the right reel column corresponds to the right reel in the winning symbols. It shows the pattern.

67 to 69 are diagrams showing combinations of winning symbols or replay symbols for each condition device and control for each stop operation. For example, in the winning-C1 condition device in Fig. 67, winning symbols 01-04 and 09-104 are combined, the left reel is the first stop, the left reel red seven symbol is pressed, and the middle reel is the first stop. If it is the second stop and the right reel third stop, any winning symbol from 01 to 04 can be stopped, and if the left reel is the first stop and the left reel white seven symbol is pressed, the middle If the reel is the second stop, and if the right reel is the third stop, any winning symbol from 25 to 40 can be stopped; the left reel is the first stop, the right reel is the second stop, and the middle reel is the second stop. If it is the third stop, any of the winning symbols from 09 to 40 can be stopped, and if it is the first stop on the middle reel, the second stop on the left reel, and the third stop on the right reel, the winning symbols 41 to 72 can be stopped. Any winning symbol can be stopped, and if it is the first stop on the middle reel, the second stop on the right reel, or the third stop on the left reel, any winning symbol from 41 to 72 can be stopped. , if the right reel is the first stop, the left reel is the second stop, and the middle reel is the third stop, any winning symbol from 73 to 104 can be stopped, and the right reel is the first stop, and the middle reel is the third stop. If the reel is at the second stop and the left reel is at the third stop, this indicates that any of the winning symbols 73 to 104 can be stopped.

Also, if the left reel is the first stop and the left reel red seven symbol is pressed, the middle reel is the second stop, and the right reel is the third stop, any winning symbol from 01 to 04 can be stopped. As mentioned above, strictly speaking, it is only necessary to accept the stop within the range that allows you to draw the Bell A symbol, and even if you stop the bar symbol instead of the red seven symbol, any of the winning symbols 01 to 04 can be stopped. It has become.

Also, if the left reel is the first stop and the left reel white seven symbol is pressed, the middle reel is the second stop, and the right reel is the third stop, any winning symbol from 25 to 40 can be stopped. As mentioned above, strictly speaking, it is only necessary to accept the stop within the range that can draw the Bell B symbol, and even if you stop the yellow 7 symbol instead of the white 7 symbol, any winning symbol from 25 to 40 can be stopped. It becomes.

Furthermore, since FIGS. 67 to 69 do not show all the winning symbols but only the necessary winning symbols, there are cases where the same winning symbol combination is obtained even if the condition devices are different. For example, the same winning symbol combination is described for winning-A1 and winning-A2 in FIG. 67, but the stop control is different. Originally, in order to make the stop control of Winning-A1 and Winning-A2 different, it would be necessary to use different winning symbol combinations, such as adding a single-payout winning symbol of PB = 1 to Winning-A2, but the explanation is complicated. It is omitted because it becomes . In other words, if there is a description that different stop controls are performed for the same winning symbol combination, the winning symbol combinations that are not described are added to become different winning symbol combinations.

In addition, for prizes C1 to C12 and prizes D1 to D8 shown in FIGS. 67 to 69, the first stop symbol has two choices: red seven and white seven, but this is not limited to this. The stop symbol may be replaced with a yellow seven or bar.

Alternatively, the first stop may have no pressing symbol and the third stop symbol may be pressed. In this case, for example, if it is a condition device with 12 choices such as Winning -C1 to C12, the first stop is the 3 choices in the push order, the second stop is the 2 choices in the push order, and the third stop is the 2 choices in the push order. There are 12 correct choices. Further, the second stop and the third stop may have a mode in which there is no eye-pressing symbol and the symbol at the second stop is pressed. In this case, for example, if it is a condition device with 12 choices such as Winning -C1 to C12, the first stop is the 3 choices of the push order, the second stop is the 4 choices of the push order and the symbol, and the third stop is the 1 choice. There are 12 correct choices.

In addition, "123" in the "Remarks 1" column of Figures 67 to 69 indicates the left reel first stop, middle reel second stop, and right reel third stop, and "132" This indicates that the left reel is the first stop, the right reel is the second stop, and the middle reel is the third stop. "213" means the middle reel is the first stop, the left reel is the second stop, and the right reel is the third stop. "231" indicates the middle reel first stop, right reel second stop, left reel third stop, and "312" means the right reel first stop, the left reel second stop. "321" indicates that the right reel is the first stop, the middle reel is the second stop, and the left reel is the third stop.

Note 1 of re-game-A in FIG. 69 shows the stop control in the eye press at the time of winning re-game-A. "Middle reel upper row red seven bit successfully pressed" means that the middle reel is stopped for the first time, and the stop operation is performed at the timing when the red seven symbol is drawn to the upper row of the middle reel and the number of symbols becomes less than 1. , "Middle reel upper row red seven bit press failure" means that the middle reel is first stopped, and the stop operation is performed at the timing when the red seven symbol is drawn to the upper row of the middle reel and the number of symbols becomes 1 or more, or is not the first stop, and "successful pressing of the white seven within the middle reel frame" means that the middle reel is stopped first, and the white seven symbol is drawn into the upper row of the middle reel, and the number of symbols is 2. This means that the stop operation is performed at a timing that is less than This means that the stop operation is performed at the timing when the number is 2 or more, or the middle reel is not the first stop. "Successful pressing of the 5th frame of the left reel red seven" means that the left reel is the first stop. , and the stop operation is performed at the timing when the red seven symbol is drawn into the upper row of the left reel and the number of symbols becomes less than 5. "Failure to press the 5th red seven symbol on the left reel" means that the left reel is This means that the stop operation is performed at a timing when the red seven symbol cannot be drawn into the upper row of the left reel after the first stop, or when the left reel is not the first stop.

The above-mentioned explanation using the reel arrangement and condition device combination related to the correct answer operation challenge performance is based on the assumption that the effective line is one line in the middle row, but it is not limited to this. The effective line may be any one line such as the lower right downward line, the lower left reel line, the middle reel middle line, the right reel lower line, etc. Further, even if the effective line is not one line but a plurality of lines, it can be designed as appropriate.

The winning-B1 to B4 condition devices in FIG. 67 are condition devices in which there is no correct answer to the left reel first stop. Furthermore, winnings -D1 to D8 in FIG. 69 are also conditional devices in which there is no correct answer to the left reel first stop. Such a conditional device is sometimes referred to as a biased bell.

A biased bell means that there is not a first stop correct answer for all reels, there is no first stop correct answer for a predetermined reel, and there is a first stop correct answer only for the remaining reels. In other words, when three reels are provided, there are only two reels in which the first stop operation is the correct pressing order, so there are four types of correct pressing orders. For example, if there is no correct answer to stop the left reel first, there are only four types of correct pressing order: middle left and right, middle right left, right left middle, and right middle left. Similarly, if there is no correct answer for the first stop of the middle reel, there are only four correct pressing orders: left middle right, left middle right, right left middle, and right middle left. Similarly, if there is no correct answer to stop the right reel first, there are only four types of correct pressing order: left-center-right, left-right-center, middle-left, and center-right-left. Note that a case where there is no first stop correct answer on the middle reel or a case where there is no first stop correct answer on the right reel is also referred to as a biased bell. Hereinafter, the biased bell will be explained using an example in which the first stop correct answer is not allocated to the left reel.

In addition, the correct pressing order for biased bells means the pressing order that allows you to obtain a high bell, and the incorrect pressing order for biased bells means that the pressing order for the biased bells is a pressing order that allows you to obtain a cheap bell, or a small role. This means that it is in the order of pressing. In particular, regarding the incorrect pressing order, when the reel that normally performs the AT lottery is stopped for the first time and a low bell is acquired, or even when a small win is displayed, the high bell is not acquired, so the pressing order It is called an incorrect answer.

When equipped with a biased bell, the expected value regarding the payout of game medals will be higher if you operate in a stop operation order other than the first left stop, but if you operate in a stop operation order other than the first left stop, the AT lottery will be By treating the player more favorably than at the first stop, or by not performing the AT lottery, the overall expected value of the ball payout is made more advantageous when operating at the first stop on the left. Although the description has been made regarding the AT lottery, the present invention is not limited to this, and any or all of the lottery related to the ball output, such as the AT additional lottery and the CZ transition lottery, may be preferentially treated with the first left stop.

At this time, when a biased bell is won, it is unknown in what order the player will perform the stop operation, so the AT lottery is executed after all the drums have stopped. For example, when performing an AT lottery based on the symbol combination after all the reels are stopped, the symbol combination of 1 symbol when the left reel is first stopped, and when the middle or right reel is first stopped. By configuring the symbol combinations of the one-card combination that can be stopped in different ways, the AT lottery can be executed based on the symbol combination of the one-card combination that is displayed only when the left reel is first stopped.

To explain based on winning-A3 in Figure 67, when the winning symbols 09 to 40, which can be stopped when the left reel first stops, the AT lottery is executed, but when the right reel first stops, it stops. When possible winning symbols 105 to 120 stop, and possible winning symbols 41 to 72 stop when the middle reel first stops, right reel second stop, and left reel third stop, the AT lottery is drawn. Even if the press order is incorrect, if the press order is incorrect when the left reel first stops, or when the press order is incorrect at any other press order, the button will stop. By making the winning symbols different, it is possible to judge whether or not to execute the AT lottery by simply determining the winning symbols after all the spinning drums have stopped, thereby reducing the program capacity.

Further, for example, when the AT lottery is executed after all the reels are stopped, the AT lottery can be executed based on the press order information that the left reel is stopped first. In this case, the symbol combination for a 1-card combination when the left reel is first stopped is configured to be different from the symbol combination for a 1-card combination that can be stopped when the middle or right reel is first stopped. or may be configured to be the same. Further, the AT lottery may be executed based on the push order information that the left reel stopped in the left-center-right push order, or the push order information that the left reel stopped in the left-center push order, or that the left reel stopped first. The AT lottery may be performed based on the push order information.

In an advantageous section, when a biased bell is won, no instruction information is displayed on the instruction monitor.

With this configuration, the ball payout rate is originally the highest by first stopping the left reel, but since the probability of winning a biased bell is relatively higher than the probability of winning a replay, If the instruction monitor instructs the player to stop first on the left every time the bell is won, it will frequently create a feeling of anticipation in the player as to whether or not a bonus will be awarded, and the AT winning probability will be biased. The player may notice that he has not won a rare hand that is higher than Bell (a rare hand has a lower probability of winning than a biased Bell), or the player may be able to calculate the instructed winning ratio by displaying an instruction on the instruction monitor. It is possible to prevent the number of payouts when a bell is won from being stored unbalanced in the storage area of the number of payouts.

In addition, if a biased bell is won and you answer incorrectly in the pressing order, you may be able to obtain the 1-card hand when you answered incorrectly in the pressing order, or the spilled number (number of payouts of 0) of the pressing order bell may be displayed. Conceivable. The payout number for such incorrect answers is ``1'', which occurs when the first left stop operation is performed when the bell is won, but if this one piece is included in the instructed combination ratio, the wave of balls that are paid out will be limited. (The difference between when the ball output rate is low and when the ball output rate is high becomes smaller). Therefore, by not adding the number of payouts (1) generated by the left first stop operation when winning a biased bell to the instructed winning ratio, the degree of freedom in designing the ball payout is improved.

Further, when a biased bell is won in a situation where the correct answer operation challenge performance is not executed, a mode can be considered in which the performance group number is transmitted to the sub-control means, but the instruction information is not displayed on the instruction monitor. Note that the production group number can be sent during the advantageous section but not during the normal section, or transmitted during both the advantageous section and the normal section. It may be.

In this case, for example, when a biased bell is won, "50" is transmitted as the effect group number from the main control means to the sub control means. Thereafter, when the sub-control means receives "50" as the performance group number from the main control means, it executes the same performance mode as when determining failure or a mode in which no performance is executed without executing the correct operation challenge performance. Also, at this time, the instruction information is not displayed on the instruction monitor, so it is difficult for the player to know whether or not the biased bell has been won. recognizable).

In addition, if you want to send the production group number when the biased bell is won, you will know that you can get a small role if the sub control means stops the middle or right reel first, so if the biased bell is won and the production group There is a concern that the sub-control means may be tampered with so as to notify the first stop of the middle or right reel when the number "50" is received. In order to reduce the effect of such unauthorized modification, the expected value regarding the difference in the number of coins during a biased bell win or when the right reel is stopped for the first time is set to less than 3 coins (when 3 coins are played). For example, if a biased bell is won in a 3-card game, and 11 coins are paid out with a probability of 1/4 among middle left, middle right left, right left middle, and right middle left (the difference in the number of medals is 8), In this case, the expected value of the difference in the number of sheets is 2 sheets, which is less than 3 sheets, for all of the pressing order of middle left and right, middle right left, right left middle, and right middle left. With such a configuration, even if the correct answer operation challenge performance is not executed when the biased bell is won and the performance group number is received, there will be no correct answer at the first left stop due to unauthorized modification of the sub-control means. Even if the difference is notified, the expected value regarding the difference number of sheets is less than 3 sheets, so the difference number does not increase. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the ball payout rate due to unauthorized modification of the sub-control means.

In addition, if a biased bell is won in a 3-card game, and 11 coins are paid out with a probability of 1/2 among middle left, middle right left, right left middle, and right middle left (the difference in number of medals is 8), In this case, the expected value for the difference number of sheets is 4 sheets for each pressing order of middle left, middle right left, right left middle, right middle left, and the number of sheets to be multiplied is 3 or more, so in such a case, the instruction monitor By displaying in advance on the monitor the instruction that the correct answer is the first stop of the middle reel or the first stop of the right reel, it is possible to eliminate the possibility of unauthorized modification of the sub-control means. In other words, there is no need to illicitly modify the sub-control means, and since the main control means notifies the pressing order, it is a regular game specification (the information is included in the indicated combination ratio).

Further, when a biased bell is won in a situation where the correct operation challenge performance is not executed, a mode may be considered in which the performance group number is not transmitted to the sub-control means and the instruction information is not displayed on the instruction monitor.

In this case, for example, when a biased bell is won, the effect group number is not transmitted from the main control means to the sub control means. Thereafter, when the sub-control means receives a command to stop all rotations from the main control means, it executes the same performance mode as when determining failure without executing the correct operation challenge performance, or a mode in which the performance is not executed. Also, at this time, the instruction information is not displayed on the instruction monitor, so it is difficult for the player to know whether or not the biased bell has been won. recognizable).

<For specifications that support both 6-choice push order bell and 4-choice push order bell (biased bell)>
As a specification of a gaming machine equipped with a correct answer operation challenge effect, a specification that allows both a 6-choice press order bell and a 4-choice press order bell (biased bell) will be explained.

As shown in Figure 67, winnings-A1 to A6 and winnings-B1 to B4 are unbiased 6-choice press order bells for winnings-A1 to A6, and winnings-B1 to B4 are biased 4-choice press order bells. It becomes.

<<If you execute the correct answer operation challenge effect at the 6-choice press order bell, but do not execute the correct answer operation challenge effect at the 4-choice press order bell＞＞
It is conceivable that the target of the correct answer operation challenge presentation be the unbiased 6-choice press order bell of winnings -A1 to A6.

If the object of the correct answer operation challenge performance is the unbiased 6-choice press bell of winnings -A1 to A6, the instruction monitor will be displayed in the situation where the correct answer operation challenge performance is executed when any of the prizes -A1 to A6 is won. The instruction monitor display is not performed in a situation where the correct answer operation challenge performance is not performed when any of winnings A1 to A6 is won.

By configuring in this way, for example, when winning prize-A1 is won, the correct answer operation challenge effect is executed, and even if any of winning prizes 01 to 08 is stopped, the instructed winning combination ratio can be calculated. Since it is possible to avoid storing the number of payouts in the storage area for the number of payouts, the degree of freedom in designing the number of balls to be put out is improved. Further, by not displaying an instruction monitor when executing the correct operation challenge performance, it is possible to make the player intuitively recognize that he or she may perform a stop operation at will.

In addition, in this mode, the instruction monitor display is not displayed in the situation where the correct answer operation challenge performance is executed when one of the prizes -A1 to A6 is won while the AT is in progress, and the instruction monitor is not displayed when the correct answer operation challenge performance is executed when one of the prizes -A1 to A6 is won while the AT is in progress. In the situation where the correct answer operation challenge effect is executed when any one of A6 is won, the instruction monitor is not displayed, and the correct answer operation challenge effect is executed when any of A1 to A6 is won while non-AT is in progress. In a situation where the player does not play, the instruction monitor display is not displayed, and in a situation where the push order notification effect (press order navigation) is executed when any of winning prizes A1 to A6 is won during AT, the instruction monitor display is performed. It's okay.

By configuring in this way, for example, when winning prize-A1 is won, the correct answer operation challenge effect is executed, and even if any of winning prizes 01 to 08 is stopped, the instructed winning combination ratio can be calculated. Since it is possible to avoid storing the number of payouts in the storage area for the number of payouts, the degree of freedom in designing the number of balls to be put out is improved. Further, by not displaying an instruction monitor when executing the correct operation challenge performance, it is possible to make the player intuitively recognize that he or she may perform a stop operation at will. In addition, since the instruction monitor is displayed only when notifying the push order during AT, the lack of display of the instruction monitor makes it possible for the player to more intuitively recognize that it is okay to perform stop operations at will. can.

Further, when comparing the winning probability of the 6-choice pressing order bell and the winning probability of the 4-choice pressing order bell, the winning probability of the 4-choice pressing order bell is configured to be higher.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent an increase in payouts due to the left reel first stop operation during non-AT.

Further, when comparing the winning probability of the 6-choice pressing order bell and the winning probability of the 4-choice pressing order bell, the winning probability of the 6-choice pressing order bell may be higher.

By configuring in this way, the probability of winning the target role of the correct operation challenge performance increases, and it becomes easier to execute the correct operation challenge performance at any timing.

Further, the number of payouts of high-order bells for the 6-choice pressing order bell and the payout number of high-order bells for the 4-choice pressing order bell are configured to be the same.

With this configuration, even if the high eye bell stops in a situation where the correct answer operation challenge effect is not occurring and the press order notification effect is not occurring, the number of payouts is the same, so the 6 selection press order bell is It is possible to make it difficult to tell whether you have won the 4-choice button or the 4-choice order bell.

Also, when comparing the number of payouts of the high bell of the 6 selection push order bell and the number of payouts of the high order bell of the 4 selection push order bell, the number of payouts of the high bell of the 4 selection push order bell is greater. It may be configured as follows.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent an increase in payouts due to the left reel first stop operation during non-AT. Further, it is possible to reduce the stress of the user who fails in the correct operation challenge presentation, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, as a correct answer operation challenge performance when the 6-choice press order bell is won, a 6-choice challenge where you have to guess one press order from 6 types of press orders, and one notification of the first stop incorrect press order are announced. A 4-choice challenge where you are asked to guess one press order from 4 types of presses (by setting the first stop correct press order to two choices) and not announcing the second stop if the correct answer is correct, and a first stop correct press order. Notify the press order and not notify the second stop, or notify one incorrect press order of the first stop (with two options for the first stop correct press order) and notify the second stop if the answer is correct. This includes a two-choice challenge in which the player is asked to guess one push order from two types of push orders. No matter which mode of the correct answer operation challenge presentation, the instruction monitor display is not performed.

<<If you execute the correct answer operation challenge effect at the 4-choice press order bell, but do not execute the correct answer operation challenge effect at the 6-choice press order bell＞＞
It is conceivable that the target of the correct answer operation challenge performance is the 4-choice press order bell with a bias of winnings -B1 to B4.

If the target of the correct answer operation challenge performance is a 4-choice press order bell with a bias of prizes -B1 to B4, the instruction monitor will be displayed in the situation where the correct answer operation challenge performance is executed when any of prizes -B1 to B4 is won. , and the instruction monitor display is not performed in a situation where the correct answer operation challenge performance is not executed when any one of prizes B1 to B4 is won.

If you execute the correct answer operation challenge effect with a biased bell, even though the first stop of the left reel will always fail the correct answer operation challenge effect, if you stop the left reel for the first time, it will fail normally (when the correct answer operation challenge effect is not executed). The AT lottery similar to the AT lottery conducted in state 2) is not executed. In other words, when the correct answer operation challenge performance is executed with a biased bell and the left reel first stops, the AT lottery is executed with a lower probability than the AT lottery that is normally executed, or the AT lottery is executed. It appears that this is not the case.

By configuring in this way, for example, when the prize-B1 is won, an instruction monitor display corresponding to the correct operation challenge performance is executed to notify that the high bell does not stop at the first stop of the left reel, It is possible to increase the possibility that the player will be able to perform the correct operation.

In addition, in this mode, in a situation where a correct answer operation challenge performance is executed when one of the prizes -B1 to B4 is won during AT, an instruction monitor is displayed, and when one of the prizes -B1 to B4 is won during non-AT, the instructions are displayed on the monitor. In a situation where a correct answer operation challenge performance is executed when any one of the winning numbers is won, an instruction monitor display is performed, and in a situation where an AT is in progress and a press order notification performance is executed when any of winning prizes -B1 to B4 is won. It may also be possible to display an instruction monitor.

By configuring in this way, for example, when the prize-B1 is won, an instruction monitor display corresponding to the correct operation challenge performance is executed to notify that the high bell does not stop at the first stop of the left reel, It is possible to increase the possibility that the player will be able to perform the correct operation. In addition, in order to display instructions on the monitor when executing the correct answer operation challenge effect or the press order notification effect, we have made it clear when the left reel can be stopped first and when it is not allowed to make the first stop. can do.

Further, when comparing the winning probability of the 6-choice pressing order bell and the winning probability of the 4-choice pressing order bell, the winning probability of the 4-choice pressing order bell is configured to be higher.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent an increase in payouts due to the left reel first stop operation during non-AT. In addition, the probability of winning the target role of the correct operation challenge performance increases, and it becomes easier to execute the correct operation challenge performance at any timing.

Further, the number of payouts of high-order bells for the 6-choice pressing order bell and the payout number of high-order bells for the 4-choice pressing order bell are configured to be the same.

With this configuration, even if the high eye bell stops in a situation where the correct answer operation challenge effect is not occurring and the press order notification effect is not occurring, the number of payouts is the same, so the 6 selection press order bell is It is possible to make it difficult to tell whether you have won the 4-choice button or the 4-choice order bell.

Also, when comparing the number of payouts of the high bell of the 6 selection push order bell and the number of payouts of the high order bell of the 4 selection push order bell, the number of payouts of the high bell of the 4 selection push order bell is greater. It may be configured as follows.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent an increase in payouts due to the left reel first stop operation during non-AT.

In addition, as a correct answer operation challenge performance when the 4-choice press order bell is won, there will be a 4-choice challenge where you have to guess one press order from 4 types of press orders, and two announcements of the first stop incorrect press order. (by setting the first stop correct press order to one option) and not announcing the second stop, or by notifying the first stop correct press order and not informing the second stop, one of the two press orders is selected. It has a two-choice challenge where you have to guess the order of the presses. The instruction monitor display is performed in any of these modes of the correct operation challenge effect.

<<When executing the correct answer operation challenge effect with the 4-choice press order bell and the correct answer operation challenge effect with the 6-choice press order bell＞＞
It is conceivable that the objects of the correct answer operation challenge performance are the unbiased 6-choice press order bell of winnings -A1 to A6, and the biased 4-choice press order bell of winnings -B1 to B4.

If the object of the correct answer operation challenge performance is the unbiased 6-choice press bell of winnings -A1 to A6, the instruction monitor will be displayed in the situation where the correct answer operation challenge performance is executed when any of the prizes -A1 to A6 is won. The instruction monitor display is not performed in a situation where the correct answer operation challenge performance is not performed when any of winnings A1 to A6 is won. In addition, if the target of the correct answer operation challenge performance is a 4-choice press order bell with a bias of winnings -B1 to B4, in a situation where the correct answer operation challenge performance is executed when any of prizes -B1 to B4 is won, the instruction will be A monitor display is performed, and an instruction monitor display is not performed in a situation where a correct answer operation challenge performance is not executed when any of prizes B1 to B4 is won.

With this configuration, the display on the instruction monitor allows the player to recognize whether it is a 6-choice correct operation challenge performance or a 4-choice correct operation challenge performance, and erroneous operation of the stop switch can be prevented.

Further, when comparing the winning probability of the 6-choice pressing order bell and the winning probability of the 4-choice pressing order bell, the winning probability of the 4-choice pressing order bell is configured to be higher.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent an increase in payouts due to the left reel first stop operation during non-AT. Furthermore, the probability of winning the four-choice correct operation challenge performance target role increases, making it easier to execute the correct operation challenge performance at any timing.

Further, when comparing the winning probability of the 6-choice pressing order bell and the winning probability of the 4-choice pressing order bell, the winning probability of the 6-choice pressing order bell may be higher.

With this configuration, the probability of winning the six-choice correct-answer operation challenge performance target role increases, and it becomes easier to execute the correct-answer operation challenge performance at any timing.

Further, the number of payouts of high-order bells for the 6-choice pressing order bell and the payout number of high-order bells for the 4-choice pressing order bell are configured to be the same.

With this configuration, even if the high eye bell stops in a situation where the correct answer operation challenge effect is not occurring and the press order notification effect is not occurring, the number of payouts is the same, so the 6 selection press order bell is It is possible to make it difficult to tell whether you have won the 4-choice button or the 4-choice order bell.

Also, when comparing the number of payouts of the high bell of the 6 selection push order bell and the number of payouts of the high order bell of the 4 selection push order bell, the number of payouts of the high bell of the 4 selection push order bell is greater. It may be configured as follows.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent an increase in payouts due to the left reel first stop operation during non-AT.

In addition, as a correct answer operation challenge performance when the 6-choice press order bell is won, a 6-choice challenge where you have to guess one press order from 6 types of press orders, and one notification of the first stop incorrect press order are announced. A 4-choice challenge where you are asked to guess one press order from 4 types of presses (by setting the first stop correct press order to two choices) and not announcing the second stop if the correct answer is correct, and a first stop correct press order. Notify the press order and not notify the second stop, or notify one incorrect press order of the first stop (with two options for the first stop correct press order) and notify the second stop if the answer is correct. This includes a two-choice challenge in which the player is asked to guess one push order from two types of push orders. No matter which mode of the correct answer operation challenge presentation, the instruction monitor display is not performed.

In addition, as a correct answer operation challenge performance when the 4-choice press order bell is won, there will be a 4-choice challenge where you have to guess one press order from 4 types of press orders, and two announcements of the first stop incorrect press order. (by setting the first stop correct press order to one option) and not announcing the second stop, or by notifying the first stop correct press order and not informing the second stop, one of the two press orders is selected. It has a two-choice challenge where you have to guess the order of the presses. The instruction monitor display is performed in any of these modes of the correct operation challenge performance.

<Processing related to the instruction function according to the number of failures in the correct operation challenge production>
When a correct answer operation challenge performance is executed, processing related to the instruction function (for example, AT lottery, AT additional lottery, etc.) is executed according to the number of times the operation is performed in the incorrect answer press order (the low bell is stopped).

For example, when executing a 6-choice correct answer operation challenge performance during AT when winning any of prizes A1 to A6, if the first correct answer operation challenge performance fails (operations were performed in the wrong order). will carry out an additional lottery of 50 games with a probability of 2.5%, and if the second correct answer operation challenge performance fails (operations were performed in the wrong order), there will be a 5.0% probability of an additional lottery of 50 games. If the lottery is executed and the third correct answer operation challenge performance fails (the operation was performed in the wrong order), an additional lottery of 50 games will be executed with a 7.5% probability, and the fourth correct answer operation challenge performance will be performed. If you fail at the 5th correct operation challenge performance (operations were made in the wrong order of presses), there is a 10% chance that an additional lottery of 50 games will be executed, and if you fail at the 5th correct operation challenge performance (you were operated in the incorrect order of presses) will execute an additional lottery of 50 games with a 50% probability, and if the 6th correct answer operation challenge performance fails (the operation was performed in the wrong order), an additional lottery of 50 games will be executed with a 100% probability. This can be mentioned.

According to such a configuration, even if the player operates in the incorrect answer pressing order when executing the correct answer operation challenge effect, the probability of winning the additional lottery increases according to the number of incorrect answers (number of failures). Therefore, even if the player operates in an incorrect pressing order, it is possible to make it difficult for the player's desire to play to decrease.

Further, as shown in FIG. 67, when any one of winnings -A1 to A6 is won, winning symbols 09 to 40 and winnings 105 to 120 are provided as winning symbols when the pressing order is incorrect. Winning symbols 09 to 40 are winning symbols that can be used to perform an AT lottery when not at AT, and winnings from 105 to 120 are winning symbols that do not perform an AT lottery when not at AT (or perform an AT lottery with a lower probability than winnings from 09 to 40). ) is a winning design.

There is a possibility that prizes 09 to 40 and prizes 105 to 120 will be stopped when the incorrect answer is pressed in the correct answer operation challenge presentation, but if you fail in the correct answer operation challenge presentation, an additional amount will be added according to the number of failures. The same lottery is executed for prizes 09-40 and prizes 105-120.

Further, a predetermined storage area for storing the number of failures in the correct operation challenge performance is initialized in an initialization process when the advantageous section ends. For this reason, for example, even if the advantageous section ends when the correct answer operation challenge performance fails five times and the correct answer operation challenge performance fails again in a new advantageous section, the correct answer operation challenge performance will continue in the new advantageous section. The additional lottery is executed assuming that the number of failures is the first.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming addicted to the game, such as having the player play the game across advantageous sections.

In addition, when the number of failures is stored in a predetermined storage area for storing the number of failures of the correct answer operation challenge performance, the predetermined storage area is initialized at the time of winning an additional lottery according to the number of failures.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent excessive profits from being given based on the number of failures and to prevent players from becoming absorbed in the game.

Further, if the number of failures is stored in a predetermined storage area for storing the number of failures in the correct operation challenge performance, the predetermined storage area is initialized at the time when the correct operation challenge performance is successful.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent excessive profits from being given based on the number of failures and to prevent players from becoming absorbed in the game.

Further, in a case where the number of failures is stored in a predetermined storage area that stores the number of failures in the correct operation challenge performance, the predetermined storage area may not be initialized even if the correct operation challenge performance is successful. In this case, the configuration is such that the predetermined storage area is initialized at the time of winning the additional lottery corresponding to the number of failures.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent excessive profits from being given based on the number of failures and to prevent players from becoming absorbed in the game.

Further, although the execution mode of the correct operation challenge performance has been described as a mode in which the push order is matched, it may be a mode in which the push order is matched, or a mode in which the push order and the push symbols are matched.

<Processing related to the instruction function according to the number of successful correct answer operation challenge effects>
When a correct answer operation challenge performance is executed, processing related to the instruction function (for example, AT lottery, AT additional lottery, etc.) is executed according to the number of times operations are performed in the correct answer press order (high-order bell is stopped).

For example, if you decide to execute 5 games as a trigger for ending a predetermined gaming state, if you win any of A1 to A6 and execute the 6-choice correct answer operation challenge effect, the player will stay for 5 games. If the correct answer operation challenge performance in a predetermined game state is successfully performed (operations are performed in the correct order of presses) once, an additional 10 games will be given, and a correct answer operation challenge in a predetermined game state that stays for 5 games will be given. If the number of times the performance was successful (operations were performed in the correct order of presses) was 2, an additional 20 games will be given, and if the number of times the performance was successful (operations were performed in the correct order of presses) was 20 games, an additional 20 games would be given. If the number of times (operated) is 3 times, an additional 30 games will be given. In this case, an additional 50 games will be given, and if the number of successful correct answer operation challenge effects (operated in the correct order of presses) in a predetermined gaming state that lasts for 5 games is 5 times, an additional 100 games will be given. If the number of successful correct answer operation challenge presentations (operations performed in the correct order of presses) in a predetermined game state that lasts for 5 games is 0, an additional 20 games may be given.

According to such a configuration, when the correct answer operation challenge effect is executed, the player's expectation can be raised step by step according to the number of correct answer presses, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In addition, if the number of successful correct answer operation challenge presentations in a predetermined game state that stays for 5 games (operations are performed in the correct order of presses) is 0, there may be a mode in which there is no additional charge, If the number of successful correct answer operation challenge presentations in the predetermined game state in which the player stays (operations are performed in the correct pressing order) is 0, even if the predetermined game state is extended until a correct answer is given to the correct answer operation challenge presentation. Alternatively, the execution of the correct operation challenge effect five times may be the trigger for ending the predetermined game state.

Further, a predetermined storage area for storing the number of successful correct operation challenge presentations is initialized in an initialization process when the advantageous section ends. Therefore, for example, when the number of successful correct answer operation challenge presentations is four, the advantageous section ends, and in a new advantageous section, the predetermined storage area for storing the number of successful correct answer operation challenge presentations is zero.

According to such a configuration, even if an attempt is made to illegally extend the life of the correct operation challenge performance using a gaming method that is not executed in a normal game, it is initialized at the end of the advantageous section, so damage caused by fraudulent ball dispensing operations can be reduced.

Further, although the execution mode of the correct operation challenge performance has been described as a mode in which the push order is matched, it may be a mode in which the push order is matched, or a mode in which the push order and the push symbols are matched.

<Processing when 4 selections or 2 selections are selected in the correct answer operation challenge performance when the 6 selection press order bell is won>
A mode of increasing the probability that a correct operation can be performed by notifying a part of the operation mode when performing a correct operation challenge performance will be explained.

As described above, some operation modes may be notified when performing the correct operation challenge effect. For example, when the 6-choice press order bell is won, the 1st stop incorrect press order is announced (the 1st stop correct press order is set to 2 choices), and if the answer is correct, the 2nd stop is not announced. A 4-choice challenge where you have to guess one press order from 4 types of press orders, a 6-choice press order bell that will notify you of the first stop correct press order but not the second stop, or If the correct answer is correct, it will notify you of the second stop and guess one of the two press orders. 2-choice challenge, or when the 4-choice push order bell is won, the first stop incorrect push order is announced twice (the first stop correct push order is set to 1 option), and the second stop is not announced, or There is a two-choice challenge in which the correct press order for the first stop is announced but the second stop is not announced, allowing the user to guess one press order from two types of press orders.

The following will specifically explain the case where A1 wins. When executing the correct answer operation challenge effect when winning - A1 is won, when the first stop correct answer is announced and the two-choice challenge is executed, the area where the push order is displayed on the LCD displays “1?? " is displayed. The "1" on the left corresponds to the left reel, the "?" inside corresponds to the middle reel, and the "?" on the right corresponds to the right reel.

Here, when the player first stops the left reel, "-??" is displayed in the area of the liquid crystal display that displays the push order. In addition, the bell A symbol or the bell B symbol stops on the active line in the middle of the left reel. A "-" on the left side of the liquid crystal indicates that a correct operation has been performed, and other modes such as a mode in which nothing is displayed or a mode in which "○" is displayed can be designed as appropriate. If "-??" is displayed on the LCD, it is unclear whether the correct operation for the second stop is the middle reel or the right reel, providing the player with the fun of guessing the two choices. can.

Then, when the player stops the middle reel for the second time, "-??" is displayed in the area of the liquid crystal display that displays the push order. In addition, the bell A symbol or the bell B symbol stops on the active line in the middle row of the middle reel. Even after the second stop, the liquid crystal display does not change, but as another mode, the liquid crystal display may change, such as displaying "--?". If "-??" is displayed on the LCD, it is unclear whether the correct answer at the second stop is correct or incorrect, which can keep the player looking forward to the end. In this embodiment, a correct answer is confirmed when two bells A or B stop on the active line, so a player who checks the main reel can understand whether or not he or she has answered correctly based on the stopped symbols. It is now possible to do so. Furthermore, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to make it impossible to know whether or not the answer is correct even on the main reel until the third stop.

When the player brings the right reel to a third stop, a congratulatory message such as "Congratulations" or an additional number such as "+100" is displayed on the liquid crystal display. Also, the Bell A symbol or the Bell B symbol will stop on the active line in the middle of the right reel, and either "Bell A, or Bell B - Bell A, or Bell B - Bell A, or Bell B" will be displayed. The symbol combination stops. In addition, the processing related to the instruction function such as the bonus lottery is executed according to the symbol combination when all the drums are stopped or the press order information, so it is not possible to send a congratulatory message such as "Congratulations" or the number of bonuses such as "+100". The display timing is after the process related to the instruction function when all rotating drums are stopped is executed.

Also, if the player first stops the middle reel or right reel when winning A1, the "1??" display on the LCD will be completely hidden or a failure effect will be executed. It is conceivable that the information may be hidden after that. In addition, the symbol combinations displayed when all rotation drums are stopped at this time are any of the following symbol combinations: "Replay - Red Seven, Yellow Seven, Bar, or White Seven - Red Seven, Yellow Seven, Bar, or White Seven." stops. In this case, the middle reel or right reel will stop at the first stop because either the symbol "Red Seven, Yellow Seven, Bar, or White Seven" will stop on the middle reel or the right reel. At this point, the pressing order is determined to be incorrect, and the process related to the instruction function to be executed when all rotations are stopped is not executed, or a lower profit is given compared to when the pressing order is correct.

Also, if the player stops the left reel first and the right reel second when winning - A1, the symbol combination displayed when all the reels are stopped is "Bell A" or "Bell A". Any of the symbol combinations "B - Red Seven, Yellow Seven, Bar, or White Seven - Red Seven, Yellow Seven, Bar, or White Seven" will stop. In this case, at the time of the second stop, either the symbol "Red Seven, Yellow Seven, Bar, or White Seven" will stop on the right reel, so when the right reel stops for the second time, the pressing order will be incorrect. This is a mode in which the process related to the instruction function to be executed when all rotation drums are stopped is not executed, or a mode in which a lower profit is given compared to when the pressing order is correct. For prizes 09 to 40, if the correct answer operation challenge effect is not executed, the process related to the instruction function is executed, but if it stops when the correct answer operation challenge effect is executed, the process related to the instruction function is not executed or the correct answer operation is executed. A profit with an expected value lower than the expected value of the profit that could be obtained if the operation challenge performance is not executed is given.

<Correct answer operation challenge performance will be executed depending on the eye pressing skill at the time of replay winning>
The condition device for executing the correct operation challenge effect may be a replay or a common bell in addition to the push order bell, and the case where the correct operation challenge effect is executed in the replay will be explained below. Note that the instruction monitor display when executing the correct operation challenge performance in replaying is hidden.

An example will be described in which a correct answer operation challenge effect is executed when re-game-A shown in FIG. 69 is won.

When executing the correct operation challenge performance when re-game-A is won, the combination of symbols to be stopped is configured to be different depending on the position of the player's stop operation.

For example, if you tap the red seven on the upper row of the middle reel when it first stops, the red seven symbol will stop on the upper row of the middle reel (the cherry symbol will stop on the middle reel, which is the active line). Then, when the left reel and the right reel are stopped in an arbitrary stop order and at any stop timing, replay 01 is stopped, and if replay 01 is stopped when all reels are stopped, processing related to the instruction function is executed. . At this time, if you cannot press the red seven on the top row when the middle reel first stops, replay 04 will stop, and if replay 04 has stopped when all reels stop, the instruction function No processing is executed, or processing related to an instruction function with a lower profit than when re-gaming 01 was stopped is executed.

Also, if you press the white seven within the frame at the first stop of the middle reel, the white seven symbol will stop at the top of the middle reel (the blank symbol will stop at the middle of the middle reel, which is the active line). Then, when the left reel and the right reel are stopped in an arbitrary stop order and at an arbitrary stop timing, replay 02 is stopped, and if replay 02 is stopped when all reels are stopped, processing related to the instruction function is executed. . At this time, if you cannot hit the white seven within the frame when the middle reel first stops, replay 04 will stop, and if replay 04 has stopped when all reels are stopped, the instruction function will Such processing is not executed, or processing related to an instruction function with a lower profit than when re-gaming 02 was stopped is executed. Note that the process related to the instruction function executed when regame 02 is stopped is a process related to the instruction function that has a lower profit than the process related to the instruction function executed when regame 01 is stopped. This is because it is less difficult to press the white 7 symbol in the frame of the middle reel than to press the red 7 symbol in the upper row of the middle reel (more symbols are drawn in).

Also, if you press the red seven within the 5 frames when the left reel first stops, the red seven symbol will stop in the middle of the left reel (the red seven symbol will stop in the middle of the left reel, which is the active line). Then, when the middle reel and right reel are stopped in any stop order and at any stop timing, re-game 03 is stopped, and if re-game 03 is stopped when all reels are stopped, processing related to the instruction function is executed. . At this time, if the red seven cannot be hit within 5 frames when the left reel first stops, replay 04 will stop, and if replay 04 has stopped when all reels stop, the instruction function The process related to the instruction function is not executed, or the process related to the instruction function that has a lower profit than when the replay 03 was stopped is executed. Note that the process related to the instruction function executed when the re-game 03 is stopped is a process related to the instruction function that has a lower profit than the process related to the instruction function executed when the re-game 02 is stopped. This is because it is less difficult to press the red 7 symbol within 5 frames of the left reel (more symbols are drawn in) than to press the white 7 symbol within the frame of the middle reel. .

In this way, by changing the symbol combinations that can be stopped depending on the stop position when re-game-A is won, the symbol combinations that can be stopped will be stopped according to the stop position, and the symbol combinations that can be stopped will be stopped according to the stop position when the replay-A is won. It becomes possible to execute processing related to the instruction function. As an example of the processing related to the instruction function according to the symbol combination, the number of AT games increases by 20 when replay 01 is stopped, the number of AT games increases by 10 when replay 02 is stopped, the number of AT games increases by 5 when replay 03 is stopped, An example is that the number of AT games does not increase when replay 04 is stopped.

In addition, as mentioned above, even when winning a common bell in which the number of payouts does not change depending on the order of pressing regardless of replaying, the processing related to the instruction function according to the position of the press is similar to that when winning replay-A, using a different mode. It's okay.

<In the case of specifications that support both 12 selection pressing order + special pressing bell and 8 selection pressing order + special pressing bell (biased bell)>
As a specification of a gaming machine equipped with a correct operation challenge effect, specifications that make both a 12-choice push order + eye-pull role and an 8-choice push order + eye-pull role will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 67 and 69, winnings-C1 to C12 and winnings-D1 to D8 are the unbiased 12-choice press order + press bell, and the winnings-D1 to D8 are unbiased. There are 8 selections to press in order + a bell to press.

<<If you execute the correct answer operation challenge effect with the 12 selection press order + eye press bell, but do not execute the correct answer operation challenge effect with the 8 selection press order + eye press bell>>
It is conceivable that the target of the correct answer operation challenge effect is the unbiased 12-choice pressing order of prizes - C1 to C12 + the eye-pressing bell.

If the target of the correct answer operation challenge performance is the unbiased 12-choice pressing order of winnings -C1 to C12 + the eye-pressing bell, the instruction monitor will be displayed in the situation where the correct answer operation challenge performance is executed when prizes -C1 to C12 are won. The instruction monitor display is not performed in a situation where the correct answer operation challenge performance when winning prizes -C1 to C12 is not performed.

By configuring in this way, for example, when winning prize-C1 is won, the correct answer operation challenge effect is executed, and even if any of winning prizes 01 to 04 is stopped, the instructed winning combination ratio can be calculated. Since it is possible to avoid storing the number of payouts in the storage area for the number of payouts, the degree of freedom in designing the number of balls to be put out is improved. Further, by not displaying an instruction monitor when executing the correct operation challenge performance, it is possible to make the player intuitively recognize that he or she may perform a stop operation at will.

In addition, in this mode, the instruction monitor display is not displayed in the situation where the correct answer operation challenge performance is executed when one of the prizes -C1 to C12 is won while the AT is in progress, and the instruction monitor is not displayed when the correct answer operation challenge performance is executed when one of the prizes -C1 to C12 is won while the AT is in progress. In the situation where the correct answer operation challenge effect is executed when any one of C12 is won, the instruction monitor is not displayed, but the correct answer operation challenge effect is executed when any of the winners from C1 to C12 is won while non-AT is in progress. In the situation where the button is not displayed, the instruction monitor will not be displayed, and in the situation where the AT is in progress and the press order + eye press notification effect (press order + eye press navigation) is executed when any of winning prizes -C1 to C12 is won, the instruction monitor is displayed. It may also be a display mode.

By configuring in this way, for example, when winning prize-C1 is won, the correct answer operation challenge effect is executed, and even if any of winning prizes 01 to 04 is stopped, the instructed winning combination ratio can be calculated. Since the number of payouts is not stored in the storage area for the number of payouts, the degree of freedom in designing balls to be put out is improved. Further, by not displaying an instruction monitor when executing the correct operation challenge performance, it is possible to make the player intuitively recognize that he or she may perform a stop operation at will. In addition, since the instruction monitor is displayed only when notifying the press order + eye press during AT, the lack of an instruction monitor display allows the player to more intuitively recognize that they can stop the operation at will. can be done.

Also, when comparing the probability of winning in the order of pressing 12 selections + pressing the bell and the probability of winning in the order of pressing 8 selections + pressing the bell, the configuration is such that the probability of winning in the order of pressing 8 selections + pressing the bell is higher. do.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent an increase in payouts due to the left reel first stop operation during non-AT.

Also, when comparing the winning probability of 12-choice pressing order + eye-pressing bell and the winning probability of 8-choice pressing order + eye-pressing bell, the winning probability is higher for 12-choice pressing order + eye-pressing bell. You may.

By configuring in this way, the probability of winning the target role of the correct operation challenge performance increases, and it becomes easier to execute the correct operation challenge performance at any timing.

Further, the number of payouts of high bells in the order of pressing 12 selections+pushing bells is the same as the number of payouts of high bells in the order of pressing 8 selections+pushing bells.

With this configuration, even if the high bell stops in a situation where the correct answer operation challenge effect does not occur and the press order notification effect does not occur, the number of payouts is the same, so the 12 selection press order + It is possible to make it difficult to tell whether you have won the eye-pull bell or the 8-choice-press order + eye-pull bell.

In addition, when comparing the number of high bells paid out in the order of pressing 12 selections + the number of bells to be pressed and the number of payouts of the high number of bells in the order of pressing 8 selections + the number of bells pressed, It may be configured such that the number of bells to be paid out is greater.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent an increase in payouts due to the left reel first stop operation during non-AT. Further, it is possible to reduce the stress of the user who fails in the correct operation challenge presentation, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, as a correct answer operation challenge effect when 12 selection press order + eye press bell is won, 12 types of presses A 12-choice challenge in which you have to guess one push order + one push from among the first stop and one push, and one incorrect push order of the first stop is announced, but the push symbol is not announced (first stop correct push order + 8-choice challenge where you have to guess one press order from 8 kinds of press orders + eye presses by not informing the second stop correct answer push order (with 4 choices for the first stop correct answer push order and eyes) By not informing the push pattern and notifying the second stop correct answer press order, or by not informing the first stop correct answer push order but notifying the eye press symbol but not informing the second stop correct answer press order, 6 types of press orders + A 6-choice challenge in which you have to guess one press order from among the first stops, and a first stop incorrect press order that announces the first stop correct press order but not the first stop and does not notify the second stop correct press order. , but do not notify the eye-pressing pattern (first stop correct pressing order + eye pressing as 4 choices), notify second stop correct pressing order, or first stop incorrect pressing order as one. By notifying the eye-pressing pattern (setting the first stop correct answer press order to 2 choices) and not informing the second stop correct answer press order, let the player guess one press order from 4 types of press orders + eye presses 4 The choice challenge and the 3-choice challenge, in which the correct push order of the first stop is not announced, but the target symbol is notified, and the correct push order of the second stop is also notified, so that the player guesses one push order out of three types of push orders. , The first stop correct pressing order is reported, but the eye-pressing symbols are not notified, the second stop correct pressing order is notified, the first stop correct pressing order and the eye-pressing symbols are notified, but the second stop correct pressing order is not notified. , or by notifying the first stop incorrect push order and one eye press symbol and informing the second stop correct push order, the player can have two kinds of press orders + one press order from among the eye presses + hit the eye press. A two-choice challenge. No matter which mode of the correct answer operation challenge presentation, the instruction monitor display is not performed.

<<If you execute the correct answer operation challenge effect with the 8 selection press order + eye press bell, but do not execute the correct answer operation challenge effect with the 12 selection press order + eye press bell>>
It is conceivable that the target of the correct answer operation challenge effect is the 8-choice press order bell with a bias of winnings -D1 to D8.

If the target of the correct answer operation challenge performance is the 8-choice press order bell with a bias of prizes -D1 to D8, the instruction monitor display will be displayed in the situation where the correct answer operation challenge performance is executed when any of the prizes -D1 to D8 is won. , and the instruction monitor display is not performed in a situation where the correct answer operation challenge performance is not executed when any one of prizes D1 to D8 is won.

When executing the correct answer operation challenge effect with a biased bell, when the left reel first stops, the AT lottery that is normally performed will not be executed, and the AT lottery will be executed with a lower probability than the AT lottery that is normally executed. , or do not perform AT lottery.

With this configuration, for example, when a prize-D1 is won, an instruction monitor display corresponding to the correct operation challenge performance is executed to notify that the high bell does not stop at the first stop of the left reel, It is possible to increase the possibility that the player will be able to perform the correct operation.

In addition, in this mode, in a situation where a correct answer operation challenge effect is executed when one of the prizes -D1 to D8 is won while AT is in progress, an instruction monitor is displayed, and if one of the prizes -D1 to D8 is won while not in AT, the instruction monitor is displayed. In the situation where the correct answer operation challenge performance is executed when any of the above is won, an instruction monitor is displayed, and when the AT is in progress and any of the prizes - D1 to D8 are won, the press order + eye press notification display is executed. In such a situation, instructions may be displayed on the monitor.

With this configuration, for example, when a prize-D1 is won, an instruction monitor display corresponding to the correct operation challenge performance is executed to notify that the high bell does not stop at the first stop of the left reel, It is possible to increase the possibility that the player will be able to perform the correct operation. In addition, in order to display instructions on the monitor when executing the correct answer operation challenge effect or the press order notification effect, we have made it clear when the left reel can be stopped first and when it is not allowed to make the first stop. can do.

Also, when comparing the probability of winning in the order of pressing 12 selections + pressing the bell and the probability of winning in the order of pressing 8 selections + pressing the bell, the configuration is such that the probability of winning in the order of pressing 8 selections + pressing the bell is higher. do.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent an increase in payouts due to the left reel first stop operation during non-AT. In addition, the probability of winning the target role of the correct operation challenge performance increases, and it becomes easier to execute the correct operation challenge performance at any timing.

Further, the number of payouts of high bells in the order of pressing 12 selections+pushing bells is the same as the number of payouts of high bells in the order of pressing 8 selections+pushing bells.

With this configuration, even if the high bell stops in a situation where the correct answer operation challenge effect does not occur and the press order notification effect does not occur, the number of payouts is the same, so the 12 selection press order + It is possible to make it difficult to tell whether you have won the eye-pull bell or the 8-choice-press order + eye-pull bell.

In addition, when comparing the number of high bells paid out in the order of pressing 12 selections + the number of bells to be pressed and the number of payouts of the high number of bells in the order of pressing 8 selections + the number of bells pressed, It may be configured such that the number of bells to be paid out is greater.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent an increase in payouts due to the left reel first stop operation during non-AT.

In addition, as a correct answer operation challenge effect when the 8 selection press order + eye press bell is won, the first stop correct answer press order and the eye press symbol are not announced, and the second stop correct answer press order is also not announced. An 8-choice challenge where you have to guess one press order + one press from among the order + eye press, and a first stop correct answer that does not notify the first stop correct press order and the second stop correct press order without informing the eye press symbol. The push order is reported but the eye-press symbol is not notified and the second stop correct answer press order is not notified, or the first stop correct answer press order is not notified but the eye-press symbol is notified but the second stop correct answer press order is not notified. A 4-choice challenge in which you have to guess one press order from 4 types of press orders + eye presses, and a 4-choice challenge where you are notified of the correct press order of the first stop, but not the eye press symbols, and the correct press order of the second stop. , the first stop correct answer pressing order and the eye-pressing symbol are reported, but the second stop correct answer pressing order is not notified, or the first stop correct answer pressing order is not notified, the eye-pressing symbol is notified, and the second stop correct answer pressing order is notified. This feature includes two types of push orders + a two-choice challenge in which the player is asked to guess one push order from among the push orders. The instruction monitor display is performed in any of these modes of the correct operation challenge effect.

<<When executing the correct answer operation challenge effect using the 8 selection press order + eye press bell, and the correct answer operation challenge effect using the 12 selection press order + eye press bell>>
It is conceivable that the target of the correct answer operation challenge presentation is the unbiased 12-choice pressing order of winnings -C1 to C12 + eye-pressing bell, and the biased 8-choice pressing order of winnings-D1-D8 + eye-pressing bell. .

If the target of the correct answer operation challenge performance is the unbiased 12-choice press order of winnings -C1 to C12 + the eye-pressing bell, in the situation where the correct answer operation challenge performance is executed when any of the prizes -C1 to C12 is won. The instruction monitor display is not performed and the instruction monitor display is not performed in a situation where the correct answer operation challenge performance is not executed when any one of winnings -C1 to C12 is won. In addition, if the target of the correct answer operation challenge performance is the biased 8-choice pressing order of winnings -D1 to D8 + eye-pressing bell, the correct answer operation challenge performance will be executed when any of the winnings -D1 to D8 is won. The instruction monitor display is performed in certain situations, and the instruction monitor display is not performed in a situation where the correct operation challenge performance is not executed when any one of winnings -D1 to D8 is won.

With this configuration, the display on the instruction monitor allows the player to recognize whether it is a 12-choice correct operation challenge performance or an 8-choice correct operation challenge performance, and erroneous operation of the stop switch can be prevented.

Also, when comparing the probability of winning in the order of pressing 12 selections + pressing the bell and the probability of winning in the order of pressing 8 selections + pressing the bell, the configuration is such that the probability of winning in the order of pressing 8 selections + pressing the bell is higher. do.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent an increase in payouts due to the left reel first stop operation during non-AT. Furthermore, the probability of winning the 8-choice correct operation challenge performance target role increases, making it easier to execute the correct operation challenge performance at any timing.

Also, when comparing the winning probability of 12-choice pressing order + eye-pressing bell and the winning probability of 8-choice pressing order + eye-pressing bell, the winning probability is higher for 12-choice pressing order + eye-pressing bell. You may.

By configuring in this way, the winning probability of the 12-choice correct-answer operation challenge performance target role increases, and it becomes easier to execute the correct-answer operation challenge performance at any timing.

Further, the number of payouts of high bells in the order of pressing 12 selections+pushing bells is the same as the number of payouts of high bells in the order of pressing 8 selections+pushing bells.

With this configuration, even if the high bell stops in a situation where the correct answer operation challenge effect does not occur and the press order notification effect does not occur, the number of payouts is the same, so the 12 selection press order + It is possible to make it difficult to tell whether you have won the eye-pull bell or the 8-choice-press order + eye-pull bell.

In addition, when comparing the number of high bells paid out in the order of pressing 12 selections + the number of bells to be pressed and the number of payouts of the high number of bells in the order of pressing 8 selections + the number of bells pressed, It may be configured such that the number of bells to be paid out is greater.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent an increase in payouts due to the left reel first stop operation during non-AT.

In addition, as a correct answer operation challenge effect when 12 selection press order + eye press bell is won, 12 types of presses A 12-choice challenge in which you have to guess one push order + one push from among the first stop and one push, and one incorrect push order of the first stop is announced, but the push symbol is not announced (first stop correct push order + 8-choice challenge where you have to guess one press order from 8 kinds of press orders + eye presses by not informing the second stop correct answer push order (with 4 choices for the first stop correct answer push order and eyes) By not informing the push pattern and notifying the second stop correct answer press order, or by not informing the first stop correct answer push order but notifying the eye press symbol but not informing the second stop correct answer press order, 6 types of press orders + A 6-choice challenge in which you have to guess one press order from among the first stops, and a first stop incorrect press order that announces the first stop correct press order but not the first stop and does not notify the second stop correct press order. , but do not notify the eye-pressing pattern (first stop correct pressing order + eye pressing as 4 choices), notify second stop correct pressing order, or first stop incorrect pressing order as one. By notifying the eye-pressing pattern (setting the first stop correct answer press order to 2 choices) and not informing the second stop correct answer press order, let the player guess one press order from 4 types of press orders + eye presses 4 The choice challenge and the 3-choice challenge, in which the correct push order of the first stop is not announced, but the target symbol is notified, and the correct push order of the second stop is also notified, so that the player guesses one push order out of three types of push orders. , The first stop correct pressing order is reported, but the eye-pressing symbols are not notified, the second stop correct pressing order is notified, the first stop correct pressing order and the eye-pressing symbols are notified, but the second stop correct pressing order is not notified. , or by notifying the first stop incorrect push order and one eye press symbol and informing the second stop correct push order, the player can have two kinds of press orders + one press order from among the eye presses + hit the eye press. A two-choice challenge. No matter which mode of the correct answer operation challenge presentation, the instruction monitor display is not performed.

In addition, as a correct answer operation challenge effect when the 8 selection press order + eye press bell is won, the first stop correct answer press order and the eye press symbol are not announced, and the second stop correct answer press order is also not announced. An 8-choice challenge where you have to guess one push order + one eye push from among the first stop + eye push, and a first stop correct answer that does not inform you of the first stop correct push order and the second stop correct push order without informing you of the second stop correct push order. The push order will be announced but the eye-press symbol will not be notified and the second stop correct answer press order will not be announced, or the first stop correct answer press order will be notified but the eye-press symbol will be notified but the second stop correct answer press order will not be announced. A 4-choice challenge in which you have to guess one press order from 4 types of press orders + eye presses, and a 4-choice challenge where you are notified of the correct press order of the first stop, but not the eye press symbols, and the correct press order of the second stop. , the first stop correct answer pressing order and the eye-pressing pattern are reported, but the second stop correct answer pressing order is not notified, or the first stop correct answer pressing order is not notified, the eye-pressing symbol is notified, and the second stop correct answer pressing order is notified. This feature includes two types of push orders + a two-choice challenge in which the player is asked to guess one push order from among the push orders. The instruction monitor display is performed in any of these modes of the correct operation challenge performance.

<Guaranteed lottery if the challenge fails>
As a result of the player performing a correct answer operation challenge effect (eye press challenge effect) in the 12 selection press order + eye press bell, 8 selection press order + eye press bell, or re-game-A winning, the player performs a stop operation. We will explain a mode in which a certain amount of profit is given even if the target challenge is failed.

If the player fails in the stop operation after executing the eye-pull challenge performance, a guarantee lottery is executed by referring to the symbol combination when all the drums are stopped.

For example, when winning - C1 is won, if you make the first stop aiming at the red seven symbol on the left reel, any of the winning symbol combinations 01 to 04 will stop when the reel stops, and the white seven symbol on the left reel will stop. When the first stop is aimed at a symbol, any of the winning symbol combinations 25 to 40 will stop when the drum is completely stopped. Then, if any of the winning symbol combinations from 01 to 04 has stopped in the processing when all the drums are stopped, an AT additional lottery will be executed, and if any of the winning symbol combinations from winning numbers 25 to 40 have stopped. A possible mode is to perform a guarantee lottery.

In this case, when you make the first stop aiming at the red seven symbol on the left reel, there is a 100% probability that the number of AT games will be increased by 50 games, and when you make the first stop aiming at the white seven symbol on the left reel, the number of AT games will be increased by 50%. There is a mode in which the number of AT games is increased by 50 games with a probability, and when the first stop is aimed at the red seven symbol on the left reel, the number of AT games is increased by 50 games with a 100% probability, and the white seven symbol on the left reel. When you make the first stop aiming for , there is a 100% probability that the number of AT games will be increased by 10 games, and when you make the first stop aiming for the red seven symbol on the left reel, there is a 100% probability that the number of AT games will be increased. When you aim for the white seven symbol on the left reel and make the first stop, there is a 10% probability that the number of AT games will be increased by 10 games, or when you aim for the red seven symbol on the left reel and make the first stop. When it stops, there is a 100% probability that the number of AT games will be increased by 50 games, and when you aim for the white seven symbol on the left reel and make the first stop, there will be a 10% probability that the number of AT games will be increased by 100 games. Conceivable.

In other words, the expected value of the profit given to the player is lower when the eye push challenge fails than when the eye push challenge is successful.

With this configuration, even a player who is not confident in his/her eyes can actively take on the eye-striking challenge, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

<Left push recommended lamp>
When winning the biased bell mentioned above, if the left reel is stopped first, the AT lottery will be executed with a higher probability than if the other reels are stopped first, so it is usually more likely for the player to stop the left reel first. Although the frequency of acquiring bells will decrease, it is a relatively advantageous operating mode because you can receive an AT lottery. Furthermore, even if a biased bell is won during normal times (non-AT times), the instruction monitor is not displayed (does not display instruction information).

However, there is a possibility that a player without prior knowledge may stop the middle reel or right reel first without knowing that the left reel is the first stop of the game. In a game where the game stops for a moment, the left push recommendation lamp is configured to light up.

The left push recommendation lamp consists of one red LED and is provided at a position visible to the player (for example, on the middle panel, operation panel 11, lower panel 5, etc.). However, the left push recommended lamp may be configured with a green LED or a full color LED.

The left push recommendation lamp has a smaller lighting area than the instruction monitor, and the instruction monitor is easier for the player to visually recognize than the left push recommendation lamp.

The left push recommended lamp may be a lamp managed by the main control means or a lamp managed by the sub control means, and if the configuration allows each control means to determine whether it is a non-AT or an AT, the lamp can be turned on, This is because the lights can be switched off and on.

The left push recommended lamp remains lit when the vehicle is not in AT mode, remains lit when the vehicle is not in AT mode after the power is turned on, and remains lit until AT mode is started.

In addition, in non-AT situations, the profit does not change even if the middle reel or right reel is stopped first or the left reel is stopped first (for example, when a winning is lost or a conditional device that does not matter the order of presses) The left-press recommendation lamp remains lit even if the player wins and the AT lottery is not performed or the AT lottery is performed regardless of the order in which they are pressed.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from detecting a winning combination based on the lighting status of the lamp. Furthermore, it is possible to reduce the player's line of sight movement due to repeated lighting and extinguishing of the lamp, thereby suppressing gaming fatigue.

The gaming machine of this embodiment displays a demo screen after a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds has passed) from a certain timing (demonstration time measurement timing of the sub-control means) after all the drums have stopped. Even when the screen is displayed, the left-push recommendation lamp remains lit (it is lit when the left-push recommendation lamp is on, and is off when it is off).

With this configuration, even a player who starts a game while the demo screen is being displayed can be made aware that the left reel will first stop.

The game machine of this embodiment is designed to display the menu screen when the sub-switch 20 is pressed at a certain timing (timing when the menu screen can be displayed) after all rotations have stopped. The left push recommendation lamp remains lit even when the left push recommendation lamp is on (it is lit when the left push recommendation lamp is on, and it is off when it is off).

With this configuration, even a player who starts a game while the menu screen is being displayed can be made aware that the left reel will first stop.

Further, when starting AT from a non-AT, the left push recommendation lamp is turned off. The time to start this AT may be triggered after all the drums have stopped when the AT state has been set (after the end of the game immediately before starting AT), or the start switch of the next game where the AT state has been set when all the drums have stopped. The operation (AT start game) may be used as a trigger.

Further, when changing from AT to non-AT (when AT ends), the left push recommendation lamp lights up. The transition from AT to non-AT may be triggered by the end of all rotations in the final AT game, by the operation of the start switch of the next game after the final AT game, or by the end of the advantageous section. You can use time as an opportunity. In addition, the resurrection suggestion is made to avoid cases where it is confirmed that AT will not continue due to the left push recommendation lamp lighting up (such as when the left push recommendation lamp lights up even though the revival suggestion is made during the defeat effect). In this case, the left-press recommendation lamp will light up after it is confirmed that it will not be revived.

Furthermore, when the setting confirmation mode is entered while the left push recommendation lamp is on, the left push recommendation lamp may be turned off or may remain lit. If the left-press recommended lamp goes out, it should be turned on again when the setting confirmation mode ends.

This is because, with this configuration, the settings are made by the administrator during the setting confirmation mode, so there is no need to notify the player. In addition, by turning off the left push recommended lamp during the setting confirmation mode, it is also possible for the administrator to confirm that the control of the left push recommended lamp is normal (the lamp can be switched on and off). be. In this case, if you switch to the setting confirmation mode while the left push recommendation lamp is off, the left push recommendation lamp may remain off, or it may be switched to on (the left push recommendation lamp is off). (If the left-press recommended lamp lights up when the camera enters setting confirmation mode, the left-press recommended lamp turns off when setting confirmation mode ends).

If the power is turned off while the left-press recommended lamp is on, and when the power is turned on again, the setting key is turned on and the setting change mode is entered, the left-press recommended lamp may be turned off or left on. good. If the left-press recommended lamp goes out, it should be turned on again when the setting change mode ends.

This is because with this configuration, the settings are made by the administrator during the setting change mode, so there is no need to notify the player. In addition, by turning off the left push recommended lamp during the setting change mode, it is also possible for the administrator to confirm that the control of the left push recommended lamp is normal (the lamp can be switched on and off). be. In this case, if you enter the setting change mode while the left push recommendation lamp is off, the left push recommendation lamp may remain off or it may be switched on (if the left push recommendation lamp is off) (If the left-press recommended lamp lights up when entering setting change mode, the left-press recommended lamp turns off when setting change mode ends).

Further, the left push recommended lamp may remain lit even during AT. In this case, even if the first left stop correct answer bell is won, the middle first stop correct answer bell is won, or the right first stop correct answer bell is won, the left push recommendation lamp will remain lit. . This is lit to indicate that the gaming machine as a whole recommends pressing the button to the left, and is a configuration that can be used when individual conditional devices are not supported. Note that during AT, instructions are displayed on the monitor, so even if the left push recommendation lamp is lit, the player can grasp the order of presses.

In this case, since the lighting control of the left push recommendation lamp according to the state is not performed, it is possible to reduce the program capacity and eliminate the complexity of the program.

The power was cut off when the left push recommended lamp was on, and when the power was turned on again, the left push recommended lamp was lit, but the power was cut off when the left push recommended lamp was turned off, and when the left press recommended lamp was turned on again, the left press recommended lamp was turned on. It is no longer lit.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from perceiving that he or she has to press the left button due to the configuration in which the light turns on even for a moment.

<BGM related mode>
This embodiment includes a normal mode (sometimes referred to as a first mode) and a distribution mode (sometimes referred to as a second mode) as modes related to BGM.
In normal mode, regardless of whether it is BGM that incurs a music usage fee or copyright-free (not protected by copyright) BGM that does not incur a music usage fee, it can be set in advance for each production stage, continuous performance, and chance performance. The speaker S is configured to be able to output BGM from the speaker S.
In the distribution mode, only copyright-free BGM is output from the speaker S without BGM that incurs music usage fees, and can be used as production stage BGM, BGM during continuous production, and chance production. If BGM that generates a music usage fee is set in advance as BGM etc., copyright-free BGM is output from the speaker S instead of the BGM that generates a music usage fee. Note that the output from the speaker S is sometimes simply referred to as BGM being reproduced.

In this way, even if it is the same production stage, the same continuous production, or the same chance production, the BGM output from the speaker S will differ depending on whether the normal mode is set or the distribution mode is set. It is configured such that there are different cases.

In the past, in order to avoid copyright infringement when uploading videos taken while playing games to SNS or video distribution sites, the part where the background music that uses the music is played was edited out. It was necessary to take measures such as muting the sound or adding other BGM.

In this embodiment, if set to distribution mode, copyright-free BGM is played instead of BGM that incurs music usage fees, so set to distribution mode and take pictures of the game while playing. Then, even if you upload the video you shot to SNS or a video distribution site, it will not be a copyright infringement on the music recorded on the gaming machine. By setting the distribution mode in this way, it is possible to significantly reduce the effort required to avoid copyright infringement.

Even if the distribution mode is set, certain situations (for example, during so-called bonuses or endings, situations that are important for producing the world view of the original anime or drama, etc.) In a situation where the BGM is strongly connected to BGM and changing the BGM would reduce the quality of the video), the BGM output from the speaker S may be configured not to be changed to copyright-free BGM. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the interest of the performance from being extremely lowered.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, copyright-free BGM is played when the distribution mode is set, but the present invention is not limited to this, and BGM that incurs song usage fees is played silently (volume level 0). It may be configured to do so. With this configuration, BGM that incurs music usage fees will be played silently regardless of the set volume level, while SE such as winning sound, payout sound, stop sound, etc. and copyright-free BGM will be played silently. It is preferable to configure the speaker S to output the sound at a volume corresponding to the set volume level. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the copyright infringement of the music from occurring, while also preventing the interest of the performance from being extremely reduced.

<Explanation regarding the period during which the BGM mode can be switched> In the present embodiment, at a predetermined timing after the end of the game (for example, after the end of the game (after all the spinning drums have stopped, after the winning determination process has ended, after the payout process has ended) The configuration is such that the mode regarding BGM can be switched during the period from the timing when 2 seconds have elapsed since the end of the game) until the next game start operation (bet operation or start switch operation) is performed. In other words, the configuration is such that the mode regarding BGM cannot be switched during a game from the start of a game until the end of the game.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from stopping the progress of the game or being unable to concentrate on the performance due to the player accidentally switching the mode related to BGM during the game. It should be noted that the configuration may be such that the mode related to BGM can be switched even during the game.

Additionally, as long as the BGM mode can be switched during the period, the BGM mode can be switched regardless of whether the game screen is displayed or the demo screen is displayed; however, the present invention is not limited to this. , it may be configured such that the mode related to BGM cannot be switched while the demo screen is being displayed. In addition, the configuration is such that the mode related to BGM cannot be switched after a predetermined game ends (for example, after a game during a continuous performance or after a game in which a predetermined chance performance has been executed) or while the menu screen is displayed. You may.

Further, it may be configured such that the mode regarding BGM can be switched regardless of whether it is a normal section or an advantageous section. With this configuration, the player can switch the mode regarding BGM without waiting for the transition to the advantageous section.

Further, the configuration may be such that the mode regarding BGM can be switched only in an advantageous section. With this configuration, it is possible to determine whether the section is a normal section or an advantageous section, depending on whether or not the mode regarding BGM can be switched.

<Explanation on how to switch modes related to BGM>
If you want to set to the distribution mode, touch the liquid crystal (in this embodiment, it is a so-called touch panel that combines a display device and an input device) a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times) in a situation where the BGM-related mode can be switched. The device is configured to switch from normal mode to distribution mode by doing so.
Furthermore, if you want to end the distribution mode, the device is configured to switch from the distribution mode to the normal mode by pressing and holding the liquid crystal for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) in a situation where the BGM-related mode can be switched.

In this way, by making the operation complicated when setting to distribution mode, it is possible to prevent players from accidentally setting it to distribution mode, and by making the operation simple when returning to normal mode. The effort of the player can be reduced.

In addition, in this embodiment, the mode related to BGM is configured to be switched by a touch operation on the liquid crystal display, but the mode is not limited to this, and a mode related to BGM is provided as an item that can be set on the menu screen, so that the mode related to BGM can be switched between normal mode and distribution mode. may be configured to be switchable. With this configuration, game-related setting items that can be set arbitrarily by the player can be consolidated on the menu screen, and even players playing the game for the first time can easily switch modes related to BGM by opening the menu screen. can be recognized.

Further, instead of a touch operation on the liquid crystal, the mode related to BGM may be changed by operating a predetermined switch (for example, a production switch, a middle stop switch 13b, etc.). Specifically, if you want to set it to the distribution mode, in a situation where the BGM-related mode can be switched, touch the predetermined switch a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times) to switch from the normal mode to the distribution mode, If you want to end the distribution mode, you may switch from the distribution mode to the normal mode by pressing and holding the liquid crystal for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) in a situation where the BGM-related mode can be switched.

Further, in this embodiment, the mode related to BGM is configured so that the player can set it arbitrarily, but the configuration is not limited to this, and it may be configured so that only the staff of the game parlor can set it. Specifically, in the administrator menu that can be set while checking or changing settings (detailed explanation will be omitted, this mode generally allows you to set power saving mode, check error history, etc.). It may also be configured so that only the following items can be set. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally setting the delivery mode due to mischief.

Next, with reference to FIG. 70, the display on the liquid crystal when the normal mode is set and when the distribution mode is set will be described.

FIG. 70(a) is a diagram showing an example of a game screen when the normal mode is set. As shown in the figure, when the normal mode is set, the liquid crystal display is configured not to display the currently set BGM-related mode.

FIG. 70(b) is a diagram showing an example of a game screen when the distribution mode is set. As shown in the figure, when the distribution mode is set, "Distribution mode" is displayed on the left edge of the LCD to indicate the BGM-related mode currently set, and it is visually confirmed that the distribution mode is set. It is configured to be possible. In addition, when two seconds have passed since the end of the first game (after all the spins have stopped, after the winning determination process has finished, after the payout process has finished, etc.) and it is possible to switch to the normal mode, the "Distribution Mode" A situation in which the explanation for mode switching is displayed below the display, saying ``Mode switching is possible by long-pressing the LCD,'' but the next game start operation (bet operation or start switch operation) is performed and it is not possible to switch to normal mode. When this happens, the display of the mode switching explanatory text is terminated. In this way, when the game is ended while in the distribution mode, the next player can know that the game is in the distribution mode and how to return to the normal mode.

Note that (1) the display indicating the currently set BGM mode and the explanatory text for mode switching may continue to be displayed even while the demo screen is being displayed; While the demo screen is being displayed, it may be configured so that neither the currently set BGM mode nor the explanatory text for mode switching is displayed. It may be configured such that the mode related to the currently selected BGM is displayed, but the explanatory text for mode switching is not displayed.

In this way, the "distribution mode" is always displayed (it may be configured so that it is not displayed during CZ, continuous production, or on the demo screen), but the explanation for mode switching is as shown in (Figure 70(b)). The message "Mode switching possible by long-pressing the LCD" is configured to be displayed only when the delivery mode is set and the delivery mode can be switched to the normal mode.

In this way, by notifying on the LCD display only when the distribution mode is set, it is possible to reduce the number of displays that are not directly related to the performance related to the progress of the game, and it is possible to reduce the number of displays that are not directly related to the performance related to the progress of the game. This allows the audience to enjoy the performance to the fullest. In addition, when set to distribution mode, "Distribution mode" is displayed on the LCD, so if you want to listen to BGM that incurs music usage fees, you can know at a glance that you can return to normal mode. In addition, it is possible to prevent a player from mistakenly believing that a particular song is not recorded on the gaming machine.

Note that even when the normal mode is set, "normal mode" may be displayed on the left end of the liquid crystal as a display indicating the currently set BGM-related mode. In this case, in a situation where the BGM-related mode can be switched even when the normal mode is set, it is preferable to display an explanatory text for mode switching. With this configuration, the player can appropriately understand the mode related to BGM.

<About distribution mode and song selection function during AT>
This embodiment is equipped with a music selection function that allows the player to arbitrarily select the BGM output from the speaker S during AT. For example, in a situation where BGM1 is output from speaker S as the default BGM predetermined for each production stage or game state, if BGM2 is selected by the song selection function, the BGM output from speaker S will change from BGM1 to BGM2. will be changed to

Music selection is made at a predetermined timing after the end of the game during AT (for example, the timing when 2 seconds have elapsed from the end of the game (after all the spinning drums have stopped, after the winning determination process has ended, after the payout process has ended, etc.)) The name of the BGM currently being played is displayed on the liquid crystal display at the predetermined timing, and each time the sub-cross key switch 21 is operated, the selected BGM is switched in order and selected. The BGM song name is displayed on the liquid crystal display, and when the sub switch 20 is operated, the BGM corresponding to the currently displayed (selected) song name is played back. For example, assume that the song list is configured in the order of "BGM1 (Copyright Free") → "BGM2 (Music Usage Fees Included)" → "BGM3 (Copyright Free"), and the BGM currently being played is BGM1. In this case, "BGM1" is displayed in a predetermined display area of the LCD (for example, the upper right or lower right edge of the LCD) at a predetermined timing after the game ends, and "BGM1" is displayed each time the sub-cross key switch 21 is operated. The display is configured to switch in the order of ``BGM2'' → ``BGM3'' → ``BGM1'' → ``BGM2'', and so on.

It should be noted that the music selection function may be configured such that it cannot be used after a game in a predetermined situation, such as a game in continuous production or a game in which a predetermined chance production has been executed. In this case, even if the predetermined timing after the end of the game (for example, the timing when 2 seconds have passed since the end of the game (after all the spinning drums have stopped, after the winning determination process has ended, after the payout process has ended, etc.)) The music name of the BGM currently being played is not displayed, and the BGM is not changed even if the sub-cross key switch 21 is operated. With this configuration, the player can be made to appropriately understand that the player cannot select a song.

Further, the music selection function is a function that can be used when the normal mode is set, and the music selection function is configured so that it cannot be used when the distribution mode is set. Specifically, when AT is in progress and the distribution mode is set, copyright-free BGM is played as the default BGM, and at a predetermined timing after the end of the game (for example, when the end of the game (complete play) Even after 2 seconds have elapsed since the stop, after the winning determination process has finished, after the payout process has finished, etc.), the name of the BGM song currently being played is not displayed, and the sub-cross key switch 21 is It is configured so that the BGM cannot be changed even if it is operated. With this configuration, the player can be made to appropriately understand that the player cannot select a song.

Note that even when AT is in progress and the distribution mode is set, the music selection function may be configured to be available for copyright-free BGM. In this case, it is preferable to configure the structure so that even if the sub-cross key switch 21 is operated, only the copyright-free BGM song names are displayed, and the BGM song names that incur song usage fees are not displayed (they cannot be selected). . For example, assume that the song list is configured in the order of "BGM1 (Copyright Free") → "BGM2 (Music Usage Fees Included)" → "BGM3 (Copyright Free"), and the BGM currently being played is BGM1. In this case, at a predetermined timing after the end of the game (e.g., 2 seconds after the end of the game (after all the spinning drums have stopped, after the winning determination process has ended, after the payout process has ended, etc.)) "BGM1" will be displayed on the LCD. '' is displayed, and when the sub-cross key switch 21 is operated, ``BGM3'' is selected and ``BGM3'' is displayed on the LCD screen.In short, BGM, which incurs music usage fees, is skipped and the music is copyright-free. The system is configured so that BGM is selected and displayed on the LCD screen.With this configuration, BGM that generates music usage fees can be selected, but it is not played, and the player may mistakenly think that the gaming machine is malfunctioning. It is possible to prevent it from being put away.

In addition, in this embodiment, in a continuous performance or an intermediate game other than the final game of CZ, a performance that notifies in advance that a benefit will be given in the final game (a continuous performance or a performance in which the success of CS is determined in the intermediate game) ), the BGM being played is changed to dedicated BGM (sometimes referred to as confirmed BGM), and a production in which a predetermined lamp among the LED lamps for production lights up in rainbow colors (sometimes referred to as confirmed production A). ) is configured to be executable.

In this embodiment, BGM that generates a music usage fee is used as the confirmed BGM, so when executing confirmed effect A when set to distribution mode, the BGM being played is changed to the confirmed BGM. It is configured to continue playing the BGM that is being played without switching. Note that even when the distribution mode is set, as in the normal mode, a predetermined lamp among the performance LED lamps is configured to emit light in rainbow colors as part of the final performance A. On the other hand, when the confirmed performance A is executed when the normal mode is set, the BGM being played is switched to the confirmed BGM.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to appropriately notify that a bonus will be given in the continuous performance or the final game of CZ, while preventing copyright infringement on the music.

Please note that when using copyright-free BGM as the confirmed BGM, there is no problem in switching to the confirmed BGM as the confirmed performance A, just as in normal mode, even when set to distribution mode. I'll keep it.

In this embodiment, the configuration of a slot machine (reel type gaming machine) is illustrated as an example of the gaming machine, but the present invention can be applied to various gaming machines such as a pachinko gaming machine, a ball gaming machine, a parrot, or a casino machine.

The technical contents of the embodiments described above to explain the present invention can be combined as appropriate.

PS1: Slot machine PS2: Front panel PS3: Cabinet S: Speaker 100: Main control board 1000: Sub-control board 4: Display window 5: Lower panel 6: Reel unit 7: Reel base 8a: Left reel 8b: Middle reel 8c: Right reel 11: Operation panel 12: Start switch 13: Stop switch 13a: Left stop switch 13b: Middle stop switch 13c: Right stop switch 17: Medal slot 18: MAX bet switch 19: 1 bet switch 20: Sub switch 21: Sub-cross key switch 22: Eject switch 24: Operation instruction lamp 24a: Left operation instruction lamp 24b: Middle operation instruction lamp 24c: Right operation instruction lamp 25: Number of bets display lamp 25a: 1 bet lamp 25b: 2 bet lamp 25c: 3 Bet lamp 26: Credit number display 26a: Segment display 26b: Segment display 27: Obtained number display 27a: Segment display 27b: Segment display 28: Tray 29: Cigarette ashtray 30: Seal storage section 32: Display Device 34: Medal selector 37: Setting key switch 38: Setting switch 39: Power supply device 40: Power switch 44: Hopper 45: Medal payout port 46: Auxiliary tank 47: External output terminal board

Claims (1)

Enables main processing and timer interrupt processing,
The main process has an interrupt prohibition period from the instruction to disable interrupts to the instruction to enable interrupts.
The main process has multiple interrupt prohibition periods as interrupt prohibition periods,
Among multiple interrupt prohibition periods, when the designed processing time of the interrupt prohibition period, which is the longest in design, is S, and the period of timer interrupt processing is T, Satisfy T>S,
It is characterized by satisfying T÷2>U, where U is the designed processing time of timer interrupt processing from the start of timer interrupt processing to the end of timer interrupt processing, and T is the cycle time of timer interrupt processing. Game machine.

Images